JP6550345B2 - Game console - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed type game machine, and a medalless slot machine.

  The conventional game console is provided with a plurality of structures in the game area (e.g., Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine has room for improvement in the structure provided in the game area.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by a structure provided in a game area.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a shooting means capable of firing a game ball, a game area where the game ball can roll, a game board provided with the game area, a display means, and a buttocks. A game console comprising a rendering means and a decorative body , wherein the gaming ball fired from the launching means is configured to enter the gaming area from an entering portion, and the rendering means comprises: It is a means provided in the game board, The said presentation means is a means provided with a board, The said board is fixed to the surface of the said game board, The said board is the 1st The game ball can not enter the internal space surrounded by the side wall of the first structure, and the firing means has a first firing strength. Before the game ball entering from the entry section comes into contact with the buttocks if it is strong The decoration body is configured to be in contact with the side wall, the decoration body is a separate body from the first structure body, and at least a part of the decoration body (hereinafter, referred to as "first portion") is. And at least a part of the decorative body is configured to be viewed from the player through at least a part of the first structure. The display means is capable of executing a jackpot notice display, and at least a portion of the jackpot notice display may be displayed behind the first structure, and the game ball having entered from the entry portion The game console is characterized in that it is configured to be able to contact the side wall after contacting another structure.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the structure provided in the game area.

It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a Pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at a game board from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. (B) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. (C) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) A flowchart showing a flow of first sub control unit main processing. (B) A flowchart showing a flow of first secondary control unit command reception interrupt processing. (C) A flowchart showing a flow of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process. (D) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of 1st sub control part image control processing. (A) A flowchart showing a flow of second sub control unit main processing. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of 2nd sub control part command reception interruption processing. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing. It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the game board with which the production member concerning this embodiment was attached from the front (player) side. It is a perspective view of the back side of the effect member which concerns on this embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in a time series in the example of a display of the 1st effect body which permeate | transmits a part of effect member which concerns on this embodiment, and which can be visually recognized by a player. (A) It is an example of the prefetch notice execution lottery table at the time of the pending | holding increase which concerns on this embodiment. (B) It is an example of the big hit notice execution lottery table at the time of the fluctuation | variation start which concerns on this embodiment. (A) It is the front view which looked at the 1st structure concerning this embodiment from the player side. (B) It is the front view which looked at the 2nd structure concerning this embodiment from the player side. It is a fragmentary perspective view which extracts and shows a part of effect member concerning this embodiment. It is front schematic which shows the mode of repulsion when a game ball collides with a part of effect member which concerns on this embodiment. (A) It is a front view of a 1st structure. (B) It is the sectional view on the AA line of the figure (a). (C) It is another example corresponded to the sectional view on the AA line of the figure (a). It is a figure showing other examples of production by a production body concerning this embodiment in time series. It is a figure showing other examples of production by a production body concerning this embodiment in time series. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which concerns on the other Example of this embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which concerns on the other Example of this embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which concerns on the other Example of this embodiment. It is a figure shown in a time series about the 1st effect body other examples (effect example) which penetrate a part of effect members of this embodiment, and can be visually recognized to a player. It is a figure shown in a time series about the 1st effect body other examples (effect example) which penetrate a part of effect members of this embodiment, and can be visually recognized to a player. It is a figure shown in a time series about the 1st effect body other examples (effect example) which penetrate a part of effect members of this embodiment, and can be visually recognized to a player. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which concerns on the other Example of this embodiment. It is a sectional side view of the resin structure concerning the other example of this embodiment. It is a sectional side view of the resin structure concerning the other example of this embodiment. It is a sectional side view of the resin structure concerning the other example of this embodiment. It is a front view of the resin structure of this embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board according to another embodiment of the effect member and the first effect body. It is a figure shown about an example of an effect of the 1st effect body which penetrates a part of effect members and can be recognized visually for a player. It is explanatory drawing of the example of another presentation. FIG. 18 is a side sectional view of the structure A (top resin A), and is a side sectional view of the structure A (top resin A) according to another embodiment of the present invention, a view corresponding to FIG. It is a drawing corresponded to (c). It is a sectional side view of the structure A (top resin A) which concerns on another form, Comprising: It is drawing equivalent to FIG.18 (c). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd embodiment of the present invention, and (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of the special figure 2 An example is shown, (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result storage part for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention was equipped is there. It is a figure which shows the table for the pass / fail determination for common drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and an example of symbol distribution and hit operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for pass / fail determination for special figures in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a figure explaining the power Chu Long open presentation performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric Chu-long opening effect, (b) shows an example of the electric Chu-long opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second secondary control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second secondary control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of the lottery table of the prefetch notice used by the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and the lottery table of a notice of the time of variation disclosure (after a big hit judgment). It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure explaining the movable body 1002 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 14 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 15 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 21 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 22 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 24 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production pattern of the game production in the pachinko machine 100 of a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-2 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-2 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-3 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-4 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-5 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-6 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-7 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-2 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-3 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-4 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-5 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-6 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-7 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-2 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-2 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-3 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-4 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-2 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-3 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 31 is a schematic front view of a slot machine 2000 as a game console according to a modification of the present invention, as viewed from the front. FIG. 17 shows a game console according to a modification of the present invention, wherein (a) shows a casino machine 3000 and (b) shows a portable telephone 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 5000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home television comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention A game machine 6000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 7000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine pachinko machine 100 such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape to form an inner side thereof. It is a door member which made the opening part. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit And 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.
At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls, and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. Between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204, a launch ball passage 252 is provided for guiding the gaming ball shot by the launch device 110 to the playing area 124. In the outlet portion of the firing ball passage 252, specifically, at the tip of the inner rail 204, a return ball preventing piece for preventing the game balls in the game area 124 from returning to the firing ball passage 252 (return ball preventing Means) 254 is provided. The details of the return ball prevention piece 254 will be described later.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A variable winning hole 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is hit and stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning hole 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and the ball can not be inserted while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display device wins the special view display game with a large hit symbol. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball which has not won a prize to any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are allowed to pass by the launch rod 148 and hit from the entry part 730 into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper portion (the entry portion 730) of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening). 234) or the starting opening (first special view starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any winning opening or starting opening or passing through the general drawing starting opening 228 Only reach out port 240.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) is provided to pivot the forearm 224b to a position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  Also, the rendering device 206 is provided in a region surrounded by the outer rails 202 and the inner rails 204, and is provided with a base plate 736 fixed to the surface of the game board 200 and a first structure 711 provided on the base plate 736. And a second structure 712, a hook portion 734 protruding toward the player at the upper part of the rendering device 206, and a first rendering body (for example, (a part of the decorative symbol display device 208) or the like An effect means 732 (to be described in detail later) is included.

  The first structure 711 and the second structure 712 are provided between the entry portion 730 and the ridge portion 734. Here, the entry portion 730 is the upper area of the game area 124, and can be a path of game balls until the game ball having passed the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 enters the game area 124 (plurality Region containing the trajectory of The first structure 711 is provided closer to the entry portion 730 than the second structure 712.

  The first structure 711 and the second structure 712 are structures that may be fired from the launcher 110 and may be in contact with the game ball coming in from the entry portion 730 before contacting other structures. . The first structure body 711 and the second structure body 712 are structures formed by resin molding, and both may be generically referred to as a “resin structure 710”.

  In other words, the game ball launched from the launch device 110 passes through the entry portion 730 and contacts the first structure 711 and the second structure 712 in addition to the hit direction changing member 236 and the game nail 238 and the like. In some cases, the game ball falls down the game area 124 while changing the direction of movement.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (two random number generation circuits are incorporated in this circuit) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. ), And predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower bowl fullness A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a tongue sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 and a display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the common view display device 210 Drive control circuit 326 and display control of various status display units 328 (for example, the common view holding lamp 216, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the high certainty lamp 222, etc.) The drive circuit 330 is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as the blade member 232a of the second special view start port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. doing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special drawing start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318, It is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Also, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special drawing start opening 232 has a ball, the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the second special drawing start opening 232 is the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to second special drawing start port 232, which is built in random number generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is stored in the ROM 406 is connected.

  In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 Drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of shielding device 246, chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of chance button 136, shielding device sensor 430 and chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 which outputs a detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read to generate a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 VDP 434 (displaying an image on the symbol display device 208) Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of symbol>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (c). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. The same figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), ten kinds of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing J" are shown as a stop symbol form in symbol fluctuation stop display. In the figure (a), the white part in the figure shows the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part shows the location of the segment to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, both transition to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and "special figure B" which is a 15R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a 1st small hitting design, "special figure H" is a 2nd small hitting design, and all are special figure low probability common figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same thing as a 2R hourless short jackpot. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "special image A" is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern". And when notifying 15R jackpot of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R jackpot corresponding to 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". When informing 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") where the same odd decorative pattern is lined up three times To stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" sudden normal, or the first small hit for "special figure G" or "special figure H" In the case of notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of notifying 2R jackpot called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R jackpot called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in the same figure (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  The same figure (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step SA01, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step SA03, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step SA05, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step SA03, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. Go to SA07. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step SA07, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step SA13).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step SA13 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step SA13.

  In step SA11, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. At step SA11, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step SA13, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command representing that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step SA15, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step SB07 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  At step SB01, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step SB03, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not detected) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) (this processing does not detect an abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  At step SB05, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step SB05, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal present) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps SB07 and SB09, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step SA15 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  At step SB11, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  At step SB13, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step SB15, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step SB17, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step SB03. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding number of holding storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random value generation circuit 318 Acquires the value from the register, acquires the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) as the special figure 1 winning random number value, and acquires the value from the special figure 1 random number value generation random number counter, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. When there is a winning on the second special view start opening 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value counter of the random number generation circuit 318 corresponding to the first special view start opening 230 Acquires a value from the value storage register, acquires the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) as a special figure 2 win random number value and acquires a value from a special figure 2 random number value generation random number counter Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + value of R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  In step SB19, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step SB21, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 5 (c) and the distracted symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the ordinary drawing state update processing in the case where the ordinary drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step SB23 without doing anything.

  In step SB23, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB25). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Also, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first lost flag, a second lost flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 5A, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Probability fluctuation flag is off, 普If the ratio fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, if the first small hitting flag is on, the special figure G, if the second small hitting flag is on, the special figure H, the first off flag is on In such a case, the special segment I and the second outlier flag are on so that the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off so that the respective special symbol I is configured, In the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 is a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), 15R jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure) D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) I), and the second out-of-place design (special figure J) the fixed display of any one of the design is done. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The term "time-saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the jackpot game, a number of games in the second special view starting slot 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, which is to solve this.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step SB27 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step SB27). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step SB25 and step SB27 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB29), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step SB31). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step SB33, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step SB33, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  At step SB35, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step SB05 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step SB19) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step SB39, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41.

  At step SB41, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step SB01 is set in each original register, and setting of interrupt permission is performed, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to

  On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power interruption upon power recovery is saved as return data to a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process described above.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step SC01 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, at step SC01, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05.

  In step SC05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  At step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  At step SC09, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step SC07, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step SC11, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step SC09 to effect data according to pressing of the chance button. In step SC13, when there is a command to VDP 434 among the effect data read out in step SC09, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step SC15, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step SC09, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step SC17, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step SC19, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step SC21, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step SC09, the setting to output this control command is performed, and the process returns to step SC03.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. At step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step SE01 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step SC03 in the first secondary control unit main processing, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step SE03 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step SC19, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step SC13 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  At step SF01, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step SF03, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF05, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step SF05, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step SF01, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step SF07, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step SF09, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF11, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step SF11, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step SG01 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, at step SG01, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step SG03, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SG05.

  In step SG05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step SG07, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  At step SG09, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step SG07, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command is performed from the ROM 506, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step SG11, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step SG13, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step SG03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. At step SH01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step SI01 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step SG03 in the second sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step SG03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step SI03 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, update processing or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

<Demonstration means>
Next, the rendering means 732 of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS.

  FIG. 10 is an external perspective view of a part of the game board 200 to which the effect member (center case) 740 is attached as viewed from the front (player) side. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the back side of the effect member 740. It is.

  The rendering means 732 includes a rendering member 740 and a first rendering body 724 (not shown here). The effect member (center case) 740 is a resin integrally molded member (see FIG. 11), and is fixed to the front side of the game board 200 as shown in FIG.

  The effect member (center case) 740 is mounted in an area surrounded by the outer rails 202 and the inner rails 204 disposed on the game board 200.

  The effect member 740 includes a base plate 736 substantially parallel to the surface of the game board 200, a first structure 711, a second structure 712, and a brim 734. The base plate 736 is a portion fixed to the game board 200, and the hook portion 734 stands (projects) in the direction of the player so as to cover a part of the top of the game area 124 from one end of the base plate 736.

  The first structure body 711 is provided so as to be located between the entry portion 730 where the game ball launched from the launch device 110 (see FIG. 1) enters the game area 124 and the hook portion 734.

  In a general game machine, a plurality of “temples” are provided in the upper part (uppermost part) of the game board 200. Also, in general, a player often shoots a game ball by aiming at the interval between these "temples" (so-called "blow-in area"). In this embodiment, instead of the “head nails”, the player at the top of the game area 124 fires the first structure 711 which is a molded body of a transparent or translucent resin (for example, polycarbonate). It is provided in the area (blur area 701) or the vicinity to watch when performing the fine adjustment of the intensity. Specifically, as an example of the arrangement of the first structure 711, when the launch strength of the launch device 110 is the first launch strength, the game ball entering from the entry section 730 contacts another structure It is the position which contacts before. As described above, the first structure 711 can also be referred to as a resin structure instead of the conventional “head nail”, and in the present embodiment, the first structure 711 may be referred to as “top resin A”. .

  As will be described in detail later, the first structure 711 is a substantially columnar structure composed of four side walls and one side wall, and the gaming ball is in the internal space surrounded by the four side walls. Is configured to prevent entry.

  In addition, a second structure 712 is integrally provided on the base plate 736. A second structure 712 is also provided between the entry portion 730 and the collar portion 734 in or near the penetration region 701. Specifically, as an example of the arrangement of the second structure 712, when the launch intensity of the launch device 110 is the second launch intensity, the game ball entering from the entry section 730 contacts another structure It is the position which contacts before. The second structure 712 can also be referred to as a resin structure that replaces the conventional “head nail”, and this may be referred to as “top resin B”.

  The second structural body 712 is a substantially columnar structure composed of four side wall portions and one lateral wall portion, and is configured such that the game ball can not enter the internal space surrounded by the four side wall portions. It is done.

  FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200. As shown in FIG. In the figure, the left side is the front (player) side, and the right side is the back side. In the drawing, the effect movable body 224 provided on the game board 200 (the effect member 740) is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 10, at the end of the inner rail 204 of the game board 200, a return ball preventing piece 254 is provided to prevent the game balls in the game area 124 from returning to the launch ball passage 252. The return ball preventing piece 254 is composed of a support member 254a fixed near the tip of the inner rail 202 and a swinging member 254b swingably supported by the support member 254a.

  The swinging member 254b is configured to maintain a standing state (standby state) by gravity unless a force is applied from the outside, and in this standby state, the tip of the swinging member 254b and the outer rail 202 are maintained. The gap between them is equal to or less than the diameter of the gaming ball. The game ball hit by the launcher 110 and passing through the launch ball passage 252 collides with the swinging member 254 b and swings the swinging member 254 b away from the outer rail 202 to enter the game area 124. Therefore, the area between the outer rail 202 and the return ball prevention piece 254 is an entry portion 252 a for causing the game ball to enter the game area 124.

  Here, in the present invention, "the game ball launched from the launching means is configured to enter the game area from the entry portion" means "the game sphere launched by the launching device (launching means) 110 is , And is configured to pass through the entry portion 252a between the outer rail 202 and the return ball prevention piece 254 to enter the game area 124 ".

  In addition, the game ball which tries to enter (returns) from the game area 124 to the launch ball passage 252 (the entry portion 252a) is fired by the swinging member 254b which returns to the standby state (stand up state) by its own weight. Entry to 252 is blocked. In this example, the game ball rolling on the game area 124 collided with the inner rail 204 by separating the support member 254a from the inner rail 204 and arranging the support member 254a separately from the inner rail 204. Also in this case, the rocking member 254b is configured not to rock by the impact or vibration.

  In the game board 200, a plurality of openings adapted to the shapes of the respective component units are provided in the base base 200A formed of a colorless and transparent resin in order to incorporate a rendering device and a winning device. The board base 200A corresponds to the effect member (center case) 740, the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common view start port 228, the variable winning port 234, the general winning port 226, etc. Assembled in the opening (see FIG. 10).

  An illumination unit 744 and a decorative symbol display device 208 are disposed on the back side (rear) of the base base 200A.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the left upper base plate 736 portion of the effect member 740 is a front surface of the game board 200 (base base 200A) by a fixing member such as a screw, more specifically an opening of the base base 200A. (Router) 746 fixed to the upper left. As a result, a portion of the upper left of the base base 200A is illuminated (backward) behind the base plate 736 (more specifically, the first structure 711, the second structure 712 and the base plate 736). A portion of the upper left of the unit 744 and a portion of the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 are disposed to overlap. The arrangement of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the illumination unit 744 may be reversed (the decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed in front of the illumination unit 744).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first effect body 724 (in this example, the illumination unit 744) is disposed behind a part of the effect member 740 (the base plate 736, the first structure body 711, the second structure body 712). And / or a rendering means 732 in which a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed. Then, part of the effect member 740 (the base plate 736, the first structure 711, the second structure 712) is transparent or translucent, and the substrate base 200A is transparent. The first directing body 724 (in this example, the illumination unit (including the illumination panel) which is transmitted through the plate 736, the first structure 711, the second structure 712) and the base base 200A and is behind (rearward) A part of the unit 744 and / or the decorative symbol display device 208) is visible to the player. Hereinafter, this example will be specifically described.

<The example of production of the 1st production body (display example)>
FIG. 13 is a view showing an example (display example) of an effect (a display example) of a first effect body 724 which is visible to the player through a part of the effect member 740 (here, the first structure 711 as an example). FIG. 18 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 showing, in chronological order, effect displays during one game, as an example. The game board 200 shown in this figure is the same as the configuration of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 12, and at least a part of the effect member 740 (the base plate 736, the first structure 711, the second structure 712). Part of the effects performed by the first effects 724 (the decorative symbol display device 208 and the illumination unit 744) disposed behind (rear) are visible through the part. Note that (a) to (j) in FIG. 1 show effect display during one game in chronological order as an example, but the display examples may be displayed during different games.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) is a state in which the effect of the telop display is performed in the display area of the upper direction, during the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol in the symbol display area 208a-208c of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. The telop display is, for example, a tutorial display (for example, display of “illumination is a chance”), and at this timing, a part of the tutorial display (telop display) (eight characters from the beginning) “illumination is a cha "" Is displayed, and the vicinity of the first character ("I") is visible to the player through the first structure 711. In the hold display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold is displayed. The hold icon PI1 is, for example, a normal hold icon displayed as a black circle.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6B, while the display of variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold increases, and the hold icon PI2 is displayed in addition to the hold icon PI1. In the display area above the decorative symbol display device 208 and the hold icon PI2, the effect of the pre-reading advance notice on the propriety of the hold is being executed.

  The advance notice is an effect for notifying that there is a possibility that the result of the acceptance determination performed in the special drawing related lottery process (steps SB29 and SB31) shown in FIG. 7 may be a big hit. More specifically, in the present embodiment, even a big hit, a big hit (for example, 15 R system big hit: special figure A, special figure B) and relatively large big hit (for example, 15 R series big hit) For example, the 2R system big hit: special figure C-special figure F) is prepared, for example, it is the production for predicating that it is likely to become an advantageous big hit, for example. In the 2R system, the big hit with a definite change (special figure C, special figure E) may be an advantageous big hit. Further, the prefetch notice is, for example, a notice performed based on the start information (prestarted start information) acquired earlier than the start information acquired in the special drawing related lottery process (steps SB29 and SB31). That is, the pre-reading advance notice is performed based on the pre-decision result based on the pre-reading starting information.

  Also, the pre-reading advance notice here includes a false pre-reading advance notice that falsely gives notice as if the pre-judgment result is not an advantageous jackpot as if it becomes an advantageous jackpot. That is, the advance notice indicates that the result of the pass / fail judgment may be an advantageous jackpot, the advance notice for the player, or that the result of the pass / fail judgment is an advantageous jackpot. It can be said that it is a notice to be expected.

  In this example, a predetermined character string (here, a character string “this next chance!”) Is displayed as the advance notice, and the increased reserved icon PI2 displays, for example, the character “heat” in a white circle. Then, at this timing, the vicinity of the first character (“ko”) of the advance notice is transmitted through the first structure 711 and can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the display of the decorative pattern (in this example, the pattern of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3") is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Show the situation. At this timing, a part of the background image of the out-of-design symbol is visible to the player through the first structure 711.

  The figure (d) has shown the state by which the pending | hold corresponding to pending | holding icon PI1 was digested, and the variation display of the decorative symbol was started again in the symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. At this timing, part of the background image of the variation display of the decorative symbol is visible to the player through the first structure 711.

  In the timing shown in (e) of the figure, the exfoliated symbols of the decorative symbol (in this example, the symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3") are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 Show the situation. At this timing, a part of the background image of the out-of-character pattern passes through the first structure 711 and is visible to the player.

  The figure (f) has shown the state by which the pending | hold corresponding to pending | holding icon PI2 was digested and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol was started again in the symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. At this timing, part of the background image of the variation display of the decorative symbol is visible to the player through the first structure 711.

  The timing shown to the same figure (g) has shown the state by which the decorative symbol (in this example, the symbol of "decoration 3") was stopped and displayed only in the symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this timing, in the display area above the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect of a big hit advance notice is carried out informing that the special figure fluctuation game currently being executed has won a big hit. The jackpot notice is, for example, the display of the image of the face of the character (殿) and the display of the characters “Atari?” By the balloon. At this timing, the vicinity of the first character ("A") of the character string of the balloon, which is a part of the big hit notice, is visible to the player through the first structure 711.

  The timing shown in the figure (h) shows a state in which a big hit notice is being executed. The jackpot notice in this case is a notice by the reach effect in which the decorative symbol (in this example, the symbol of "decoration 3") is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this timing, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect is displayed around the character string of "big hit" ("reach") as the character string "reach" and the character string as a big hit notice. . This effect is light emission (illumination light) by the illumination unit 744 (the first effect body 724). At this timing, a part of the illumination light which is a part of the big hit notice is visible to the player through the first structure 711.

  The timing shown to the figure (i) has shown the state in which reach production (big hit advance notice) is performed continuously. At this timing, in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first effect body 724), an effect by another effect body (the second effect body 726) is being executed as a big hit advance notice. The second effect body 726 is, for example, the effect movable body 224. The effect movable body 224 moves upward from below (standby position, initial position) to cover a part in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the tip (portion of the fist) of the effect movable body 224 has a first structure An effect of moving behind (backward) the body 711 is executed. That is, at this timing, a part (the part of the fist) of the effect movable body 224 (the second effect body 726) and a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first effect body 724) are the first structures 711 It is transparent and visible to the player. In the following description, the first effect body 724 and the second effect body 726 may be collectively referred to as a effect body 728.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7J, the big hit symbols of the decorative symbol (in this example, the symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3") are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Show the situation. At this timing, part of the background image of the jackpot symbol passes through the first structure 711 and can be viewed by the player. The big hit notice may be a fake big hit notice.

  FIG. 14 shows an example of a lottery table for executing the effect display shown in FIG. 13. FIG. 14 (a) is a prefetch notice execution lottery table at the time of increase in holding, and FIG. It is a big hit notice execution lottery table. The previewed advance notice execution lottery table of FIG. 7A and the big hit notice execution lottery table of FIG. 7B are the special drawing 2 related lottery processing (step SB29) of the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. [1] It is referred to in the related lottery process (step SB31).

  In the figure (a), "illumination" in the prefetching notice mode is a prefetch notice by illumination light emission such as the effect of the big hit notice shown in FIG. 13 (h), and "heat + telop" in the prefetching notice mode. 13B is a prefetch notice with the hold icon of “heat” and the telop display (character string of “this next chance!”), And “heat” of the prefetch notice mode is shown in FIG. 13B. It is a pre-reading notice by the holding icon (only) of the indication of "heat" shown.

  Also, in the same figure (b), the big hit notice mode "Chara + Illuminated light" is the big hit notice by the illumination as shown in the character shown in FIG. 13 (g) and the effect shown in FIG. 13 (h). The “illumination” of the big hit notice mode is a big hit notice by illumination light emission (only) such as the effect of the big hit notice shown in FIG. 13 (h), and the “character” of the big hit notice mode is FIG. It is a big hit notice by a character (only) as shown in (g). Also, the "tutorial" is a jackpot notice with a character string such as the tutorial display of the prefetch notice shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b).

  In the above display example, at least a part of the effect body 728 is disposed behind (rearward) the first structure body 711 and passes through the first structure body 711 to produce the effect body 728 (decorative symbol display device 208 An example has been described in which at least a part of the effect display by the illumination unit 744 and the effect by the effect movable body 224 can be visually recognized by the player. However, at least a portion of the effect body 728 may be visible to the player through the second structure 712 (and / or a part of the base plate 736). That is, at least a part of the effect body 728 is located behind the second structure 712 (or the base plate 736, the same applies hereinafter), and at least a part of the second structure 712 is transparent. From this, at least a part of the effect body 728 (effect display by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the illumination unit 744 or effect by the effect movable body 224) may be configured to be visible from the player. In the description of the present embodiment, all or part of the configuration described for the first structure 711 may be applied to the second structure 712 in the same manner.

  According to the present embodiment, the first structure 711 and the second structure 712 (the top resin A, the top resin B), which are transparent or translucent resin moldings, are provided instead of the conventional top nail. Thus, it is possible to make the player visible to the first effect 724 (second effect 726) disposed behind (rear) the first structure 711 and the second structure 712. In the case of a ceiling nail (in the case of striking a game board 200), a reinforcing plate with a diameter of about 10 mm is required around it, so a presentation object for displaying effects etc. is placed behind the ceiling nail or reinforcing plate Even in this case, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize (impossible to visually recognize). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the first effect body 724 (the second effect body 726) behind it can be seen through the first structure body 711 and the second structure body 712. In some cases, the player's interest can be enhanced.

<Resin structure>
FIG. 15 is a view for explaining the shapes of the first structural body 711 and the second structural body 712, and is a front view seen from the player side. The figure (a) is the first structure 711, and the figure (b) is the second structure 712.

  As shown to the figure (a), the 1st structure 711 is a substantially columnar structure comprised by four side wall part 711a, 711b, 711c, 711d, and one side wall part 711e. The four side wall portions 711a, 711b, 711c, and 711d are walls standing (projecting) from the base plate 736 in the direction of the player, and these are all continuous in the circumferential direction. The protruding heights of the four side wall portions 711a, 711b, 711c, and 711d are higher than the diameter of the gaming ball. The lateral wall portion 711e is a wall provided substantially in parallel with the base plate 736 and continuous to all of the four side wall portions 711a, 711b, 711c, and 711d.

  That is, the first structure body 711 is configured such that the game ball can not enter the internal space surrounded by the four side wall portions 711a, 711b, 711c, and 711d. For example, the volume of the internal space is It is smaller than the volume of the game ball.

  In addition, a part of the outer wall 711 OW (the wall forming the outer shape of the first structure 711) of the four side wall portions 711 a, 711 b, 711 c, 711 d is a flat side wall portion 711 FW having a flat surface, and the other wall 711 OW A part is a curved side wall 711RW that is curved so that the surface is convex outward (opposite to the internal space). In the following description, the outermost portion of the curved side wall 711RW of the outer wall 711OW is referred to as "the top 711T".

  The first structure body 711 is configured to include a plurality (four in this case) planar side wall portions 711FW and a plurality (four here) curved side wall portions 711RW in the circumferential shape of the outer wall 711OW One curved side wall portion 711RW is disposed between the two planar side wall portions 711FW aligned in the circumferential direction so as to connect them. That is, the four planar side wall portions 711FW and the four curved side wall portions 711RW are alternately and continuously arranged.

  The inner wall 711 IW (the inner space side wall) of the first structural body 711 is also configured to include a plurality of planar side wall portions 711 FW and a plurality of curved side wall portions 711 RW. A projection (for example, a rib-like projection projecting substantially perpendicularly from the inner wall 711IW to the inner space) which protrudes to the inner space side at a predetermined angle (an angle larger than 0 degree and less than 180 degrees) from the inner wall 711IW Is not provided, and the shape of the entire circumference of the inner wall 711 IW of the first structure 711 is configured to substantially conform to the shape of the entire circumference of the outer wall 711 OW.

  More specifically, in the circumferential shape of the inner wall 711IW, the first structural body 711 is a position where the plurality of flat side wall portions 711FW and the plurality of curved side wall portions 711RW are continuous and face (correspond to) the top 711T of the outer wall 711OW. The recess 711X1 or a corner (inner corner) 711X2 having an angle of less than 180 degrees is formed. And since the inner wall 711 IW is not provided with the protrusion part which protrudes in the interior space side, the total number of recessed part 711 X1 or inner corner | angular part 711 X2 becomes a number below the total number of top part 711 T of outer wall 711 OW. In this example, the inner wall 711IW has one inner corner 711X2 and two recesses 711X1, the total number of these is "3", and the total number of top portions 711T of the outer wall 711OW is "4".

  In each of the four side wall portions 711a to 711d, the thickness (second thickness) of a portion (second portion) having the largest thickness among the portions where the outer wall 711OW is the planar side wall portion FW is the second thickness. The thickness is thinner than at least one of the two top portions 711T located at the end of each of the side wall portions 711a to 711d including the portion of the top portion 711T (the first portion).

  Here, “at least one of the two top portions 711T is the top portion 711T” is a first portion, when there is a relatively large difference in the thickness of the two top portions 711T (for example, both ends of the side wall portion 711d Of the two tops 711T (the top 711T with a thickness t1d0) of the two tops 711T) is the first portion, and the tops 711T of both ends of one side wall are Any thickness may be greater than the thickest portion of the side wall portion (in this case, the top portions 711T at both ends are the first portion). Moreover, the "thickness" in the site | part with the wall part in this embodiment means the shortest distance between the inner wall 711 IW and the outer wall 711 OW in the said site | part.

  Specifically, the side wall 711a has a portion with a thickness t1a1 and a thickness t1a2 at a portion where the outer wall 711OW is a flat side wall FW, one end of the flat side wall FW is the top 711T with a thickness t1b0, and the other end Is the top 711T of the thickness t1a0.

  The second portion with the largest thickness of the side wall portion 711a is a portion with a thickness t1a1, which is thinner than the thickness t1b0 and the thickness t1a0 at the top portions 711T (first portions) at both ends of the side wall portion 711a.

  The side wall portion 711b has portions of thickness t1b1 and thickness t1b2 at a portion where the outer wall 711OW is the flat side wall portion FW, one end thereof is the top portion 711T (shared with the side wall portion 711a) of thickness t1b0, and the other end is It is the top 711T of thickness t1 c0.

  The second portion with the largest thickness of the side wall portion 711b is a portion with a thickness t1a1, and the top portion 711T (first portion) with the larger thickness of the top portions 711T at both ends of the side wall portion 711b has a thickness t1b0 In the portion, the thickness t1b1 of the second portion is thinner than the thickness t1b0 at the top portion 711T (first portion) continuous with the side wall portion 711b.

  The side wall portion 711c has a portion with a thickness t1c1, a thickness t1c2 and a thickness t1c3 at a portion where the outer wall 711OW is a flat side wall portion FW, and one end thereof is a top portion 711T (shared with the side wall portion 711b) with a thickness t1c0, The other end is the top 711T of thickness t1 d0.

  The second portion with the largest thickness of the side wall portion 711c is a portion with a thickness t1a3 and the top portion 711T (first portion) with the larger thickness of the top portions 711T at both ends of the side wall portion 711c has a thickness t1d0 In the portion, the thickness t1c3 of the second portion is thinner than the thickness t1d0 at the top portion 711T (first portion) continuous with the side wall portion 711c.

  The side wall 711d has a portion with a thickness t1d1 and a thickness t1d2 at a portion where the outer wall 711OW is a flat side wall portion FW, one end thereof is a top portion 711T (shared with the side wall portion 711c) with a thickness t1d0, and the other end is It is a top portion 711T (shared with the side wall portion 711a) of a thickness t1a0.

  The second portion with the largest thickness of the side wall portion 711d is a portion with a thickness t1d2, which is thinner than the thickness t1d0 and the thickness t1a0 at the top portions 711T (first portion) at both ends of the side wall portion 711c (a thickness t1a0 Top portion 711 T is shared with the side wall portion 711 a).

  There is a possibility that the top 711T of the first structure 711 is more likely to collide with the game ball launched than the other portion (sidewall) first. Therefore, by making the thickness of (at least one of) the top portions 711T at both ends of each side wall portion 711a to 711d thicker than the side wall portion (planar side wall portion 711FW) continuous with the top portion 711T, the thickness of the first structure 711 The strength can be increased.

  The first structural body 711 is the thickest portion (third portion) of the first side wall portion (a portion where the outer wall 711 OW is the planar side wall portion FW) among the plurality of side wall portions 711 a to 711 d. Part))) and the thickness of the thickest part (second part (fourth part)) in the second side wall part (the part where the outer wall 711 OW is the planar side wall part FW) The (fourth thickness) is a thickness different from that.

  Specifically, the thickness t1a1 of the side wall 711a is the largest at the third portion, and the thickness t1c3 of the side wall 711c opposite to the side wall 711a is the largest at the fourth portion. The third thickness t1a1 at the third portion of the side wall portion 711a is thicker than the fourth thickness t1c3 at the fourth portion of the side wall portion 711c (the thicknesses of both are different).

  The side wall portion 711b has the largest thickness t1b1 at the third portion, and the side wall portion 711d opposite to the side wall portion 711b has the largest thickness t1d2 at the fourth portion. The third thickness t1b1 at the third portion of the side wall portion 711b is thinner than the fourth thickness t1d2 at the fourth portion of the side wall portion 711d (the thicknesses of both are different).

  The first structure body 711 is a surface (a surface existing on the launch path) where the side wall portions 711a and 711d face the entry portion 730 of the game ball, and the game is fired as compared with the other side wall portions 711b and 711c. It is a side wall portion where the ball is likely to collide first. Therefore, the side wall portions 711a and 711d have the respective thickest portions (the second portion (third portion)) at the opposing positions (the game balls are unlikely to collide first) of the other side wall portions 711b and 711c. It is thicker than the thickest portion (second portion (fourth portion)), which can increase the strength of the first structure 711.

  The first structural body 711 has a thickness (fifth thickness) at the fifth portion and a thickness at the sixth portion of one side wall portion (a portion where the outer wall 711 OW is the planar side wall portion FW). The (sixth thickness) is a thickness different from that.

  Specifically, side wall portion 711a has a fifth portion (second portion which is the thickest portion) and a sixth portion (thinnest portion) of thickness t1a2 of thickness t1a1 (fifth thickness). The fifth thickness t1a1 at the fifth portion is thicker than the sixth thickness t1a2 at the sixth portion (the thicknesses of both are different).

  The side wall portion 711b has a fifth portion (second portion which is the thickest portion) of the thickness t1b1 (fifth thickness) and a sixth portion (thinnest portion) of the thickness t1b2. The fifth thickness t1b1 at the portion of is thicker than the sixth thickness t1b2 at the sixth portion (the thicknesses of both are different).

  The side wall portion 711c has a fifth portion (second portion which is the thickest portion) of the thickness t1c3 (fifth thickness) and a sixth portion (thinnest portion) of the thickness t1c2. The fifth thickness t1 c3 at the portion of is thicker than the sixth thickness t1 c2 at the sixth portion (the thicknesses of both are different).

  The side wall portion 711 d has a fifth portion (second portion which is the thickest portion) and a sixth portion (thinnest portion) of the thickness t1 d1 having a thickness t1 d2 (fifth thickness). The fifth thickness t1d2 at the portion of is thicker than the sixth thickness t1d1 at the sixth portion (the thicknesses of both are different).

  As described above, by making the thickness different in one side wall portion, it is possible to make the degree of repulsion different depending on the collision position of the game ball even in the same side wall portion. That is, in the region where the thickness of the side wall portion is thin, the repulsion of the gaming ball is relatively small, and in the region where the thickness is thick, the repulsion of the gaming ball is relatively large. In particular, in the side wall portion 711a where the launched gaming ball is likely to collide first, the fifth portion (portion of thickness t1a1) is more of the gaming ball than the sixth portion (portion of thickness t1a2) Repulsion is greater. Further, in the side wall portion 711d where there is a high possibility that the game ball launched similarly collides first, the fifth portion (portion with a thickness t1d2) is more than the sixth portion (portion with a thickness t1d1) Repulsion of the game ball becomes large. Even if it is the same side wall portion, by changing the degree of repulsion of the game ball depending on the portion where the game ball collides, the state of the flow of the game ball can be made random and the interest of the player can be enhanced. There is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the second structural body 712 is a substantially columnar structural body configured by four side wall portions 712a, 712b, 712c, and 712d and one lateral wall portion 712e. The four side wall portions 712a, 712b, 712c, and 712d are walls standing (projecting) from the base plate 736 in the direction of the player, and these are all continuous in the circumferential direction. The protruding height of the four side wall portions 712a, 712b, 712c, 712d is higher than the diameter of the gaming ball. Further, the lateral wall portion 712e is a wall which is provided substantially in parallel with the base plate 736 and is continuous to all of the four side wall portions 712a, 712b, 712c, and 712d.

  That is, the second structure 712 is configured such that the game ball can not enter the internal space surrounded by the four side wall portions 712a, 712b, 712c, 712d, and, for example, the volume of the internal space is It is smaller than the volume of the game ball.

  In addition, a part of the outer wall 712OW (the wall forming the outer shape of the second structure 712) of the four side wall portions 712a, 712b, 712c, and 712d is a flat side wall portion 712FW having a flat surface, and the other outer wall 712OW A part is a curved side wall 712RW curved so that the surface is convex outward (opposite to the internal space). In the following description, the outermost portion of the curved side wall 712RW of the outer wall 712OW is referred to as "the top 712T".

  The second structure 712 is configured to include a plurality of (four in this case) planar sidewall portions 712FW and a plurality (four here) curved sidewall portions 712RW in the circumferential shape of the outer wall 712OW. One curved side wall 712RW is disposed between the two planar side walls 712FW arranged in the circumferential direction so as to connect them. That is, the four planar side wall portions 712FW and the four curved side wall portions 712RW are alternately and continuously arranged.

  The inner wall 712IW (the wall on the inner space side) of the second structural body 712 is also configured to include a plurality of planar side wall portions 712FW and a plurality of curved side wall portions 712RW. A protrusion (for example, a rib-like protrusion protruding substantially perpendicularly from the inner wall 712IW to the inner space) which protrudes from the inner wall 712IW toward the inner space at a predetermined angle (an angle larger than 0 ° and less than 180 °). Is not provided, and the shape of the entire periphery of the inner wall 712IW of the second structure 712 is configured to substantially follow the shape of the entire periphery of the outer wall 712OW.

  More specifically, in the circumferential shape of the inner wall 712IW, the second structural body 712 has an angle at a position where the flat side wall 712FW and the curved side wall 712RW are continuous and faces (corresponds to) the top 712T of the outer wall 712OW. A corner (inner corner) 712X2 of less than 180 degrees is formed (or, although not shown, a recess 712X1 may be formed). And since the inner wall 712IW is not provided with the projection part which protrudes in the interior space side, the total number of inner corner | angular part 712X2 (or recessed part 712X2) becomes a number below the total number of the top part 712T of the outer wall 712OW. Specifically, in this example, the inner wall 712IW has four inner corners 712X2 and the total number thereof is "4", and the total number of top portions 712T of the outer wall 712OW is "4".

  In each of the four side wall portions 712a to 712d, the thickness (second thickness) of the portion (second portion) having the largest thickness among the portions where the outer wall 712OW is the planar side wall portion FW is the second The thickness is thinner than at least one of the two tops 712T located at the end of each of the side walls 712a to 712d including the part of the top 712T (first part).

  Here, “at least one of the two tops 712T is the top 712T” is the first region, but if there is a relatively large difference in the thickness of the two tops 712T, the two tops 712T Among them, one of the thicker top portions 712T is used as the first portion, and the thicknesses of the top portions 712T at both ends of one side wall portion may be thicker than the thickest portion of the side wall portion In the case, the tops 712 T at both ends become the first part). In addition, the “thickness” of a portion of the wall portion in the present embodiment refers to the shortest distance between the inner wall 712IW and the outer wall 712OW at the portion.

  Specifically, the side wall portion 712a has a portion with a thickness t2a1 (≒ thickness t2a2) at a portion where the outer wall 712OW is a planar side wall portion FW, one end thereof is a top portion 712T of a thickness t2a0, and the other end is a thickness t2b0 At the top 711T.

  The second portion with the largest thickness of the side wall portion 712a is a portion with a thickness t2a1, which is thinner than the thickness t2a0 and the thickness t2a0 at the top portions 712T (first portions) of both ends of the side wall portion 712a.

  The side wall portion 712b has a portion with a thickness t2b1 (≒ thickness t2b2) at a portion where the outer wall 712OW is a flat side wall portion FW, and one end thereof is a top portion 712T (shared with the side wall portion 712a) with a thickness t2b0 The end is the top 711T of thickness t2c0.

  The second portion with the largest thickness of the side wall portion 712b is a portion with a thickness t2b1, which is thinner than the thickness t2b0 and the thickness t2c0 at the top portions 712T (first portion) of both ends of the side wall portion 712b.

  The side wall portion 712c has a portion having a thickness t2c1 (≒ thickness t2c2) at a portion where the outer wall 712OW is a flat side wall portion FW, and one end thereof is a top portion 712T (shared with the side wall portion 712b) having a thickness t2c0 The end is the top 711T of thickness t2d0.

  The second portion with the largest thickness of the side wall portion 712c is a portion with a thickness t2c1, which is thinner than the thicknesses t2c0 and t2d0 at the top portions 712T (first portions) at both ends of the side wall portion 712c.

  The side wall portion 712d has a portion having a thickness t2d1 (≒ thickness t2d2) at a portion where the outer wall 712OW is a flat side wall portion FW, and one end thereof is a top portion 712T (shared with the side wall portion 712c) having a thickness t2d0 The end is a top portion 711T (shared with the side wall portion 712a) of a thickness t2a0.

  The second portion with the largest thickness of the side wall portion 712d is a portion with a thickness t2d1, which is thinner than the thickness t2d0 and the thickness t2a0 at the top portions 712T (first portions) of both ends of the side wall portion 712d.

  The top portion 712T of the second structure 712 may be more likely to be hit first by the launched gaming ball than at other portions (sidewalls). Therefore, by making the thickness of (at least one of) the apexes 712T at both ends of each of the side walls 712a to 712d thicker than the side wall (planar side wall 712FW) continuous with the apex 712T, the second structure 712 The strength can be increased.

  In the above example, the side wall portion 712a has the same thickness t2a1 and t2a2, the side wall portion 712b has the same thickness t2b1 and t2b2, and the side wall portion 712c has the same thickness t2c1 Although the case where t2c2 is equivalent thickness and the side wall part 712d has thickness t2d1 and thickness t2d2 equivalent is demonstrated to an example, these thicknesses may differ.

  That is, the side wall portion 712a has a thickness t2a1> a thickness t2a2, the side wall portion 712b has a thickness t2b1> a thickness t2b2, the side wall portion 712c has a thickness t2c1> a thickness t2c2, and the side wall portion 712d has a thickness t2d1> a thickness It may be t2d2.

  Also in the second structural body 712, similarly to the first structural body 71, in the first side wall portion (the outer wall 712OW of which is the planar side wall portion FW) among the plurality of side wall portions 712a to 712d. The thickness (third thickness) of the thickest portion (second portion (third portion)) and the thickest portion (second portion) of the second sidewall (a portion where the outer wall 712 OW is the planar sidewall FW) The thickness (fourth thickness) of the part (fourth part) of (4) may be different from the thickness (fourth thickness).

  Specifically, in the third portion, the thickness t2c1 of the side wall portion 712c is the largest, and in the fourth portion, the thickness t2a1 of the side wall portion 712a opposite to the side wall portion 712c is the largest, The third thickness t2c1 at the third portion of the second portion may be different from the fourth thickness t2a1 at the fourth portion of the side wall portion 712a. Further, for example, the thickness t2b1 of the side wall portion 712b is the largest at the third portion, and the thickness t2d1 is the largest at the fourth portion of the side wall portion 712d opposite to the side wall portion 712b. The third thickness t2b1 of the third portion may be different from the fourth thickness t2d1 of the fourth portion of the side wall portion 712d.

  Also in the second structural body 712, as in the first structural body 71, the thickness (the fifth portion) of one planar side wall (a portion where the outer wall 712 OW is the planar side wall FW) (the fifth The fifth thickness) and the sixth thickness may be configured to have different thicknesses.

  Specifically, for example, the side wall portion 712a has a fifth portion (second portion which is the thickest portion) and a sixth portion (thinnest portion) of the thickness t2a2 with a thickness t2a1 (fifth thickness). The fifth thickness t2a1 at the fifth portion may be thicker than the sixth thickness t2a2 at the sixth portion (the thicknesses of both may be different).

  The side wall portion 712 b has a fifth portion (second portion which is the thickest portion) of the thickness t 2 b 1 (fifth thickness) and a sixth portion (thinnest portion) of the thickness t 2 b 2. The fifth thickness t2b1 at the part of may be thicker than the sixth thickness t2b2 at the sixth part (the thicknesses of both may be different).

  The side wall portion 712c has a fifth portion (second portion which is the thickest portion) of thickness t2c1 (fifth thickness) and a sixth portion (thinnest portion) of thickness t2c2 (thickness t2c3). The fifth thickness t2c1 at the fifth portion may be thicker (the thicknesses of both are different) than the sixth thickness t2c2 (thickness t2c3) at the sixth portion.

  The side wall portion 712 d has a fifth portion (second portion which is the thickest portion) of the thickness t 2 d 2 (fifth thickness) and a sixth portion (thinnest portion) of the thickness t 2 d 1. The fifth thickness t2d2 at the part of may be thicker than the sixth thickness t2d1 at the sixth part (the thicknesses of both may be different).

  Here, in the first structural body 711, “the thickness of the side wall portion is equal (≒)” means that all the curved surfaces of the inner wall 711 IW that the difference in thickness to be compared surrounds the internal space of the first structural body 711 Among the curved surfaces of the side wall portion RW, the case where the curved surface has the smallest curvature radius is equal to or less than the curvature radius, and when there is a difference exceeding the minimum curvature radius, "the thickness of the side wall portion is different" I assume.

  Further, in the second structural body 712, "the thickness of the side wall portion is equal (≒)" means that all the curved side walls of the inner wall 712IW that the difference in thickness to be compared surrounds the internal space of the second structural body 712. Among the curved surfaces of the part RW, the curved surface with the smallest radius of curvature is equal to or less than the radius of curvature, and when there is a difference exceeding the minimum radius of curvature, “the thickness of the side wall portion is different” I assume.

  FIG. 16 is a view extracting and showing a part of the effect member 740 (a part near the first structure 711 and the second structure 712), and a partial perspective view seen from the upper left direction of the game board 200 It is.

  The first structure body 711 and the second structure body 712 are provided between the entry portion 730 of the gaming ball launched from the launch device 110 and the heel portion 734. The side wall portion 711 c of the first structure 711 and the brim portion 734 in the immediate vicinity (lower side) of the side wall portion 711 c are separated by, for example, twice or more the diameter of the gaming ball. Further, the side wall portions 712a and 712d of the second structural body 712 and the nearest hook portion 734 are separated, for example, by the same or more than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  The first structure 711 is in contact with the game ball entering from the entry section 730 as shown by the broken line A when the firing strength of the launcher 110 is the first launch strength before contacting the other structures. Provided at the In the second structure 712, when the launch strength of the launch device 110 is the second launch strength, before the game ball entering from the entry section 730 as shown by the broken line B contacts another structure. It is provided in the position which contacts. The first structural body 711 and the second structural body 712 are spaced apart at a predetermined distance, and a so-called bumped area 701 is formed between them. The hook portion 734 extends below the first structure 711 and the second structure 712 and is provided to stand (project) from one end of the base plate 736 in the direction of the player. In addition, a part (the wall 734A) of the hook portion 734 extends in the traveling direction of the gaming ball passing through the insertion area 701. That is, the wall 734A is a position at which the gaming ball entering from the entry section 730 as shown by the broken line C contacts the other structure when the launch intensity of the launch device 110 is the third launch intensity. Provided in The wall 734A is also a part of the effect member 740, and is a transparent or translucent resin molding.

  The thickness tCAP of the wall 734A is thinner than any of the thicknesses t1a0, t1b0, t1c0 and t1d0 at the top 711T (first portion) of the first structure 711 and the thickness at the top 712T of the second structure 712 It is thinner than any of t2a0, t2b0, t2c0 and t2d0.

  Further, the thickness tCAP of the wall portion 734A is thinner than the thickest portion (second portion) of each side wall portion 711a to 711d of the first structure body 711, and the thinnest portion (sixth portion) of each side wall portion 711a to 711d Site) thinner.

  The thickness tCAP of the wall portion 734A is thinner than the thickest portion (second portion) of each of the side wall portions 711a to 711d of the first structural body 711, and the thinnest portion (sixth The thickness may be thicker than the thickest portion (second portion) of each of the side wall portions 711a to 711d.

  Further, the thickness tCAP of the wall portion 734A is thinner than the thickest portion (second portion) of each side wall portion 712a to 712d of the second structural body 712, and the thinnest portion (sixth) of each side wall portion 712a to 712d. Site) thinner.

  The thickness tCAP of the wall portion 734A is thinner than the thickest portion (second portion) of each side wall portion 712a to 712d of the second structural body 712, and the thinnest portion (sixth) of each side wall portion 712a to 712d. The thickness may be thicker than the thickest portion (second portion) of each side wall portion 712a to 712d.

  Further, as shown in the figure, in the effect member 740, both the positioning holes 722 for fixing the effect member 740 to the game board 200 and the fixing members (screws, screws) 721 are out of the firing path of the game ball. Provided at the same position. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from contacting the fixed member 721 or (positioning hole 722) and advancing in an unexpected direction.

  FIG. 17 is a schematic view showing a state of repulsion when the game ball collides with a part of the effect member 740, and shows the first structure 711, the second structure 712 and the hook portion 734 shown in FIG. It is a front view of a part (wall part 734A). In addition, a circle with a dashed double-dotted line indicates the gaming ball immediately before the first collision with the first structure 711, the second structure 712, and the wall 734A, and a solid circle indicates the first structure 711, The game ball which collided with the second structure 712 and the wall part 734A first and repelled is shown.

  As shown in the figure, in the first structural body 711 and the second structural body 712, the side wall portion 711a of the first structural body 711 and the side wall portion 712b of the second structural body 712 are substantially reverse C-shaped It is arranged to be (or parallel). In this case, in the first structural body 711, the side walls 711a and 711d and the top 711T between them are the game that has entered from the entry section 730, particularly when the launch intensity of the launch device 110 is the first launch intensity. It is a site where the ball is likely to touch before contacting other structures. In the second structure 712, the side walls 712b and 712c and the top 712T between them are the game balls that have entered from the entry 730, particularly when the launch strength of the launcher 110 is the second launch strength. Are likely to come in contact with other structures before contacting them. Also, in the heel portion 734, before the game ball coming in from the entry portion 730 contacts another structure, particularly when the launch intensity of the launch device 110 is the third launch intensity, the wall portion 734A. It is a site that is likely to contact.

  Then, in the first structure body 71, the gaming ball that has collided with the thickest portion (portion with thickness t1d2) of the side wall portion 711d is more than the gaming ball that collides with the thinnest portion (portion with thickness t1d1) with the sidewall portion 711d. The degree of rebound increases. In addition, the game ball colliding with the thickest portion (portion with thickness t1a1) of the side wall portion 711a has a higher degree of repulsion than the gaming ball colliding with the thinnest portion (portion with thickness t1d2) of the side wall portion 711a. In addition, as shown in the figure, the gaming ball which has collided with the thickest part (the part of thickness t1a1) of the side wall part 711a is the thinnest part (thickness t1d1) of the other side wall part 711d which is thinner than the collided part. The degree of repulsion is greater than that of the game ball that collided with

  Further, in the second structure 712, the thickness of each of the four apexes 712T is larger than the thickest part of the side wall portions 712a to 712d, and the gaming ball that collides with the apex portions 712T is the side wall portions 712a to 712d. The degree of repulsion is greater than that of the clashed game ball.

  Further, in this example, the thickness tCAP of the wall 734A is set to be thinner than the thinnest part of the first structural body 711 and the second structural body 712, and the gaming ball that has collided with the wall 734A is When there is a gaming ball which has been launched with an equal firing strength and collides with either of the first structure body 711 and the second structure body 712, the degree of repulsion becomes smaller than that of the gaming ball.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram for further explaining the lateral wall portion 711 e of the first structural body 711, and FIG. 18A is a front view of the first structural body 711, and FIG. It is a sectional side view of the AA line of (a), and the figure (c) shows the other form of the 1st structure 711, The side sectional view equivalent to the AA line of the figure (a) It is. Although only the positional relationship between the side wall portions 711a and 711c of the first structural body 711 and the lateral wall portion 711e is illustrated here, the same applies to the positional relationship between the side wall portions 711b and 711d and the lateral wall portion 711e. Further, FIG. 6 is a view for explaining the connection position of the lateral wall 711 e and the side walls 711 a, 711 c, and for convenience, the thicknesses of the side walls 711 a, 711 c are equally described. The configuration of the lateral wall portion 712e of the second structural body 712 is also the same, and can be described by replacing the reference numeral 711 in the description of FIG. 18 below with the reference numeral 712.

  As shown by hatching in FIG. 6A, the lateral wall 711e is provided in connection with all the side walls 711a to 711d.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the first structure 711 is positioned between the glass or resin transparent plate member 118 provided at the opening of the front frame door 106 and the base plate 736. Do. The lateral wall 711e of the first structure 711 is provided in parallel with the base plate 736, and is connected (continuous) to the end of the side wall 711a to 711d in the direction of the player. The distance L from the outer wall 711 OW of the side wall 711 e to the transparent plate member 118 or the distance L from the tip of the side walls 711 a to 711 d to the transparent plate member 118 is approximately 0. It is about 5 mm. In other words, the gaming ball can roll between the transparent plate member 118 and the base plate 736, but it is possible to rotate between the transparent plate member 118 and the tip (lateral wall 711e) of the side wall portions 711a to 711d in the player direction. It is impossible.

  The thickness te of the lateral wall portion 711 e is equal to or less than the thickness of the thinnest portion of the side wall portions 711 a to 711 d and is equal to the thickness of the base plate 734 (for example, tCAP).

  Also, as shown in the figure, the side wall portions 711a and 711c do not stand upright vertically from the base plate 736, but the tip end portion enters the inner space side than the connection portion with the base plate 736 (vertical (Approximately 0.5 degrees to 5 degrees) and stand upright (that is, it is an inclined surface). Further, although not shown, the side wall portions 711b and 711d do not stand vertically from the base plate 736, respectively, and the tip end portion enters the inner space side than the connection portion with the base plate 736 (from the vertical It stands upright (that is, it becomes an inclined surface) by 0.5 degree-about 5 degrees. The slope of the side wall portions 711a to 711d may be a slope due to a draft for releasing from the mold.

  When the inclined side wall portions 711a to 711d of the resin are viewed from the vertical direction (player direction) of the base plate 736, it may be difficult to visually recognize the back of the side wall portions 711a to 711d by the lens effect. However, in the present embodiment, since the side wall portions 711a to 711d do not have the protruding portions protruding into the inner space, it is possible to minimize the region in which the visibility becomes difficult.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the strength of the first structural body 711 can be enhanced by providing the lateral wall portions 711 e connected to all the side wall portions 711 a to 711 d. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to provide the side wall portions 711a to 711d with a protrusion (rib) or the like for reinforcement, the inside space of the first structure body 711 can be widely secured. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the effect body 728 disposed behind the first structure 711.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the tips of the side wall portions 711a to 711d (planar side wall portions 711FW) may protrude more toward the player than the lateral wall portion 711e. For example, by providing the lateral wall 711e below the tip of each side wall 711a to 711d as shown in FIG. 7B, the gaming ball can be provided near the center in the height direction in which each side wall 711a to 711d stands. Can collide with the side wall portions 711a to 711d, the connection portion between the side wall portion 711e and the side wall portions 711a to 711d approaches the center of the game ball, and the end of the side wall portion 711e can receive the collision force of the game ball It will be. Therefore, the strength of the first structure 711 at the time of the collision of the game balls can be enhanced as compared with the structure of FIG. Further, since the lateral wall portion 711 e is a transparent (or translucent) member, the strength of the first structure body 711 can be increased without reducing the visibility of the first rendering body 724 behind it.

  Thus, the lateral wall 711 e can be regarded as a ceiling wall or a connection wall, and both the lateral wall 711 e in the figures (a) and (b) are a flat side wall 711 FW and a curved side wall 711 RW at its end (peripheral). It comprises. In addition, the flat side wall 711FW of the lateral wall 711e may be a curved side wall 711RW which is convex upward or downward.

  The angle (curvature) between the base plate 736 and the side wall portion 711a (also 711b to 711d) rising from there is equal to the angle (curvature) between the base plate 736 and the ridge portion 734 standing from there.

<Another embodiment of the effect body>
FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are diagrams showing another example of the effect by the effect body 728, and in a time series with respect to the effect means 732 (the first structure body 711, the second structure body 712 and the effect body 728). It is an enlarged front view which shows. The effect by the effect body 728 may be performed behind (rearward) the second structure 712 and transmitted through the second structure 712 so that the effect is visible to the player.

  FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (d) show, for example, the state in which the jackpot notice is being executed by the first effect body 724 (the decorative symbol display device 208) shown in FIG. 13 (g) in time series. .

  The jackpot notice is, for example, the display of the image of the face of the character (殿) and the display of a character string of “Atari?” By the balloon. In this example, the text "Atari?" Is displayed moving from right to left. And in the timing shown to the figure (a), the character string can be visually recognized on the outer side of the effect member 740, and the character string which is a part of big hit notice by movement display at the timing shown to the figure (b). The vicinity of the first character ("A") becomes visible through the ridge portion 734 (the wall portion 734A), and at the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the vicinity of the first character ("A") of the character string In the timing shown in (d) of the figure, the vicinity of the first character (“ta”) of the character string is visible through the second structure 712. .

  FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d) show, for example, the state in which the jackpot notice by the second effect body 726 (the effect movable body 224) shown in FIG. 13 (i) is being performed in time series.

  In the big hit notice, the effect movable body 224 moves upward from the lower side (standby position, initial position) to cover a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. And at the timing shown to the figure (a), the tip (portion of a fist) of the effect movable body 224 moves to the outside of the effect member 740, and at the timing shown to the figure (b) The part of the fist moves behind the buttocks 734 (wall 734A) and becomes visible through the buttocks 734 (wall 734A), and at the timing shown in FIG. The tip (part of the fist) moves behind the second structure 712 and becomes visible through the second structure 712, and at the timing shown in FIG. The fist portion moves behind the first structure 711 and the second structure 712, and is visible through the first structure 711 and the second structure 712.

  In addition, the rendering by the rendering body 728 (the first rendering body 724 and / or the second rendering body 726) is performed only behind the second structure 712 and passes through only the second structure 712 for visual recognition. It may be enabled or performed behind any of the first structure 711 and the second structure 712 and visible through the first structure 711 and the second structure 712 It may be

  In FIGS. 19 and 20, any or all of the effects shown in FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (f), (h) and (j) are performed behind the second structure 712 and the second The effect may be visible through the structure 712.

<Another embodiment of the effect body>
21 to 23 illustrate another embodiment of the effect body 728 (for example, the first effect body 724) which can be seen by the player through part of the effect member 740 (the resin structure 710). FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200. In FIGS. 21 to 23, the left side is the front (player) side, and the right side is the back side. In FIGS. 21 to 23, illustration of the effect movable body 224 provided on the game board 200 (effect member 740) is omitted. The same components as in FIG. 12 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. In the following example, although it is described as a rendering body 728 (first rendering body 724) provided behind the resin structure 710, the following configuration is a rendering body provided only behind the first structure 711. 728 (first director 724), director 728 (first director 724) provided only behind the second structure 712, or both the first structure 711 and the second structure 712 The present invention is applicable to any of the rendering bodies 728 (first rendering bodies 724) provided behind the lens.

  As shown in FIG. 21, a light emitting means (illumination means) 748 may be provided, for example, above the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emitting means 748 is an LED substrate on which one or more LEDs (LEDs 748L) are arranged. Thereby, a portion of the upper left of the game board 200 and a portion of the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 are provided behind (rear) the base plate 736 portion (more specifically, the resin structure 710 and the base plate 736). Are placed overlapping. The light emitting means 748 may be disposed above the illumination unit 744 (in front of the decorative symbol display device 208) or may be disposed rearward of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, a ball passage unit 750 may be provided, for example, above the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the ball passage unit 750 is long in the left-right direction, and a ball inlet 752 is provided on one end side in the longitudinal direction, and a ball outlet 754 is provided on the other side. Thus, a part of the upper left of the game board 200 and a part of the ball passage unit 750 overlap on the back (rear) of the base plate 736 portion (more specifically, the resin structure 710 and the base plate 736). Be placed.

  A variable winning opening 234 having a door member 234a which can be opened and closed is attached to the effect member 740 as shown in FIG. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals. As shown in the figure, when the ball is entered into the variable winning opening 234 while the door member 234a is open, a predetermined ball detection sensor provided near the ball inlet 752 of the ball passage unit 750 detects the ball and the money is dispensed The device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls into the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The ball entering the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 through the ball outlet 754 and discharged to the gaming island side.

  The ball passage unit 750 may be disposed above the illumination unit 744 (in front of the decorative symbol display device 208) or may be disposed rearward of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, a lens body 756 is provided on the upper side of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, and a light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 is provided on the rear side (back side) of the lens body 756. Good. The light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 illuminates the resin structure 710 through the lens body 756. The lens body 756 has a lens cut for decoration on at least one of the one side on the LED substrate 748 side and the one side on the resin structure 710 side and the side surface.

  21 to 23 show a configuration in which the illumination unit 744 and a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 are not disposed behind the resin structure 710 as an example, but in FIGS. 21 to 23, the resin structure 710 is shown. At least a portion of the illumination unit 744 and / or the decorative symbol display device 208 may be disposed behind the device.

<Another display example of the first effect body>
FIGS. 24 to 26 show another embodiment (example of effect) of the first effect body 724 that can be seen by the player through part of the effect member 740 (for example, the resin structure 710). FIG. 2 is a front view schematic view of a board 200; The game board 200 shown in the figure is the same as the configuration of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 23, and at least a part of the effect member 740 (the base plate 736, the first structure 711, the second structure 712). Part of the light is transmitted, and effects (light emission from the light emitting means 748 through the lens body 756) by the first effect members 724 arranged behind them become visible. In addition, although FIG. 24 (a)-(i) shall show production | presentation in a certain period as a time series as an example, it is good also as what is displayed during a period when each production example differs. Moreover, although FIG. 25 (a)-(d) and FIG. 26 (a)-(f) also show the presentation in a certain period in time series, each presentation example is displayed during a different period It is good also as things.

  The timing shown in FIG. 24 (a) is a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the timing shown in FIG. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the device 208, a state in which the exfoliated symbols (in this example, the symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3") are stopped is displayed.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure is when there is a satisfaction of the start condition of customer waiting effect (demonstration waiting for demonstration effect) after the stop table of the out pattern shown in (b) in the same figure (for example, the stop table of the out pattern) It shows a state in which the customer waiting effect is started when a new symbol change start condition is not established until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from time. Here, the customer waiting effect (the customer waiting demonstration effect) is an effect such as a customer waiting animation display, a customer waiting BGM output, or the like. In addition to the customer waiting effect, the LED of the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 is turned on, and the effect of illuminating the resin structure 710 from the rear side through the lens body 756 is executed.

  In this timing, for example, although the player continues to fire the game ball from the state of the stop display of the out pattern shown in FIG. 6B, the start opening (for example, the first special view start opening 230, the second A so-called slump in which the ball does not win is generated in the special drawing start port 232 etc.), and a predetermined time has passed, so that the customer waiting effect is started. In such a case, the LED that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the back side is blinked or lit one or more times or the like so that the player can finely adjust the landing position of the gaming ball in the blinding area 701. It is preferable to execute an effect that helps the player to make minor changes (adjustments) in the firing intensity.

  The timing shown to the figure (d) is the continuation of customer waiting production, and shows the state which turned off the LED which illuminates the resin structure 710 from the back side, and the timing shown to the figure (e) is customer waiting production. It is continuing and showing the state which re-illuminated the LED which illuminates the resin structure 710 from the back side.

  In the timing shown in (f) of the figure, for example, the gaming ball is won in the first special figure starting port 230 etc., and the special figure variation game is suspended with 1 (the reserve icon PI1 is displayed) is there. At this timing, when the game ball wins in the starting opening, the customer waiting effect ends, and the LED that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the rear side is also turned off. By doing this, the emission intensity is finely adjusted while gazing at the vicinity of the resin structure 710 (while aiming at the vicinity of the resin structure 710) during the period shown in FIGS. Can be made to notice the winning of the game ball to the starting opening.

  The timing shown to the figure (g) has shown the state in which the pending | hold corresponding to pending | holding icon PI1 was digested, and the variation display of the decorative symbol was started again in the symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. .

  The timing shown in the same figure (h) is a state in which the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is continued in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and resin is also in the normal variation game before reach occurrence. An LED is illuminated to illuminate the structure 710 from the rear side.

  The timing shown to the figure (i) is the state which is performing the reach effect by which the decorative symbol (in this example, the symbol of "decoration 3") is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208a, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. Further, at this timing, the effect movable body 224 (second effect body 726) moves upward from the lower side (standby position, initial position) to cover a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and of the effect movable body 224. An effect in which the tip (part of the fist) moves behind (rearward) the resin structure 710 is also executed.

  As described above, the jackpot may be notified by moving (jumping) the effect movable body 224 to the back of the resin structure 710 while the resin structure 710 is illuminated with the LED from the rear side.

  The effect movable body 224 (the second effect body 726) may move (appear) between the resin structure 710 and the LED (LED substrate 748) that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the rear, or the resin structure 710. It may move (appear) between the lens and the lens body 756 behind it. In addition, when the effect movable body 224 (the second effect body 726) moves to the rear (rear) of the resin structure 710, the light emission of the LED that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the rear is interrupted, and the effect movable body 224 is The vicinity of the resin structure 710 may be darker after the movement than before the resin structure 710 is moved.

  According to such a configuration, since the effect movable body 224 is in the field of view (or in the focus) of the player during the fine adjustment of the emission intensity while paying attention to the vicinity of the blind area 701, the player Can have a great impact on the situation and increase the sense of expectation for the big hit

  In the timing shown in (i) of the figure, the exfoliation symbols of the decorative symbol (in this example, the symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3") are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 Show the situation. At this timing, the LED that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the rear side is turned off. As a result, it is suggested that the player who was making the fine adjustment of the firing intensity while paying attention to the vicinity of the resin structure 710, indicates that the change is finished, and the game ball is further awarded to the starting opening because the suspension is digested. In some cases, it may be possible to inform of the need to

  FIG. 25 shows another example of effect, and the timing shown in FIG. 25A is in a state where variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this timing, the suspension of the special view 1 is 3, and suspension icons PI1_1, PI1_2, PI1_3 indicating that are displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the timing shown in (b) of the figure, a predetermined condition is established during the fluctuation game, and the player is notified (for example, "Aim for Power Chu! Right-handed!" In the display area above the decorative symbol display device 208. And the like) is shown. The notification here is, for example, an open notification or an open notification such as a right-handed notification, a second special view starting port (electric chew) 232, or a variable winning prize port (, attacker 234). Further, at this timing, the LED that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the back side is blinked to suggest that a certain event (change in gaming state) has occurred or that the event has occurred in the player (notice / notice). . If the player who has made fine adjustments to the firing intensity while paying attention to the vicinity of the resin structure 710, by the suggestion (notification / notice) focusing on the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-handed notification in the display area, Alternatively, notification (indication, notice, etc.) that the second special drawing start port 232 or the variable winning opening 234 is open (opened) is given. As a result, the player may be able to easily notice a change in the gaming state.

  In the timing shown in (c) of the figure, the game ball is won in the second special figure starting port 232 by aiming at the second special figure starting port 232 according to the notification shown in (b) in the figure, The state in which the change game suspension is increased (the state in which the suspension icons PI2_1 and PI2_2 corresponding to the suspension are displayed) is shown.

  The timing shown to the same figure (d) has shown the state by which the dislodging design (In this example, the design of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3") was stopped-displayed in the symbol display area 208a-208c. . At this timing, for example, the closing condition of the second special view start opening 232 is satisfied, and the second special view start opening 232 is closed, whereby the LED that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the rear side is extinguished.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in order to move the gaming ball to a desired location in the blind area 701, the player gazes at the vicinity of the blind area 701 (around resin structure 710), It may be possible to make it easy to notice that it is in an advantageous state (it has become) or that the gaming state has changed, and it may be possible to call attention.

  FIG. 26 shows another example of effect, and the timing shown in FIG. 26 (a) displays a big hit symbol (here, "decor 3") and a round of big hit game in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (here Then, "the final R" is displayed to notify that it is in the final round of the big hit game.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure shows the state during the interval period after the end of the big hit game (the period from the end of the last round of the big hit game to the start of symbol variation (5 seconds to 10 seconds)) . In this example, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display notifying that the big hit game has ended (here, the characters “big hit end !!” is displayed), and the hold icon PI1 is displayed, It is reported that the number of pending variable game of special figure 1) is one. Further, at this timing, an LED that illuminates the resin structure 110 from the rear side is lit.

  The timing shown to the figure (c) has shown the state in which the interval period after the big hit game is continuing is continuing. In this example, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display notifying that the big hit game has ended (here, the characters "big hit end!" Is displayed), and the hold icons PI1 to PI3 are displayed. , It has been informed that the number of pending change game (of special figure 1) is three. In addition, at this timing, the LED that illuminates the resin structure 110 from the rear side is continuously lit.

  In this way, as an aid for the player to move the game ball to a favorite place in the blind area 701, there is a case that the LED lighting up the structure from the back side is lit during the interval effect after the big hit game is over. It is also good. As a result, it may be possible to help the player to adjust the firing intensity for the player who wants to store the reserve so that the symbol variation after the big hit is repeatedly executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the interval period after the end of the big hit game ends, and the previous stop symbol (here, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”) immediately before the start of symbol fluctuation is displayed once again. It is in the state of At this timing, the LED that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the back side is turned off. As a result, it is suggested to the player who was performing fine adjustment of the firing intensity while gazing at the vicinity of the resin structure 710, while the end of the change is digested, and further because the suspension is digested In some cases, it may be possible to signal the need to win a ball.

  The timing shown in the figure (e) is a state in which one reserve is digested and the variation display of the decoration symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the figure (f) The timing shown indicates a state in which the off pattern of the decorative symbol (in this example, the symbol of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3") is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 . At these timings, turning off of the LED that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the rear side continues.

  In addition, during the interval period after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 24 to FIG. 26 etc., during the right-handed notification, during the electric chow open, during the attacker opening, during the final symbol fluctuation during the electric support state, the final during the definite variation state The LED which illuminates the resin structure 710 from the rear side may be blinked (or turned on) to notify of these during the symbol change or the like.

  In addition, the LED for illuminating the resin structure 710 from the rear side may be extinguished during the stop display of the dislocated symbol. In addition, during the symbol stop display, during the interval period after the end of the big hit game, during right-handed notification, during the electric Chu open, during the attacker open, during the final symbol change during the power support state, during the final symbol change during the probability change state Etc. to light up the resin structure 710 from the back side for notifying that it is any one of the above, when the light on / blink operation condition of the LED is not satisfied, the LED lighting up the resin structure 710 from the back side is extinguished You may do so.

  In addition, the position of the LED (the LED mounted on the LED substrate 748) illuminating the resin structure 710 from the back side is directly behind the (one of the lateral wall portions of the resin structure 710) of one or more resin structures 710. Although it is desirable to back), it may be in a position where one or more resin structures 710 can be illuminated from the back side.

  In addition, the lens body 756 is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of the LED that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the rear side and on the rear side of the resin structure 710, and the light of the LED is the lens The resin structure 710 may be illuminated from behind via the body 756 (see FIG. 23).

  When the lens body 756 is provided, the position of the lens body 756 is preferably directly behind the one or more resin structures 710 (at the rear of the lateral wall portion of the resin structure 710). Any position that illuminates the structure 710 from the rear side is acceptable.

<Another embodiment of the effect body>
FIG. 27 is a view for explaining another embodiment of the effect body 728 (for example, the first effect body 724) which can be seen by the player through part of the effect member 740 (the resin structure 710). Yes, it is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200. In FIG. 27, the left side is the front (player) side, and the right side is the back side. In FIG. 27, the effect movable body 224 provided on the game board 200 (the effect member 740) is not shown. The same reference numerals are given to the same components as those shown in FIG. 12 and FIGS. 21 to 23, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the following example, although it is described as a rendering body 728 (first rendering body 724) provided behind the resin structure 710, the following configuration is a rendering body provided only behind the first structure 711. 728 (first director 724), director 728 (first director 724) provided only behind the second structure 712, or both the first structure 711 and the second structure 712 The present invention is applicable to any of the rendering bodies 728 (first rendering bodies 724) provided behind the lens.

  As shown in FIG. 21, a lens body 760 is provided, for example, above the decorative symbol display device 208, and a light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 is provided at the back (rear) of the lens body 760. The body 760 may move in the back and forth direction.

  The lens body 760 is driven in the front-rear direction by the drive of drive means (for example, a solenoid, a motor, etc.). In addition, when moved forward (to the player), the convex portion 762 moves to the front rather than the front surface of the base plate 736, and a part of the convex portion 762 (the tip on the player side) , May be located in the inner space of the first structure 711). Further, when the lens body 760 is moved backward by the drive of the drive means, the convex portion 762 moves to the rear of the rear surface of the base plate 736, and the convex portion 762 (the tip of the player side) is resin. It moves out of the internal space of the structure 710 (for example, the first structure 711). Further, the convex portion 762 (the tip of the player) moves to the rear of (the rear surface of) the base base 200A.

  Similar to the lens body 756 shown in FIG. 23, the lens body 760 is provided with a lens cut for decoration on at least one of the one side on the LED substrate 748 side and the one side on the resin structure 710 side and the side surface. A convex portion 762 is provided on one side of the player. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 748 L of the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 illuminates the resin structure 710 through the lens body 756. That is, in this case, the light emitting means 748, the lens body 760 and the convex portion 762 become the first effect body 724.

  FIG. 28 is a side sectional view showing the state of the convex portion 762 and the resin structure (for example, the first structure 711) when the lens body 760 moves back and forth in the first effect body 724 shown in FIG. The first structure 711 corresponds to the side sectional view shown in FIG.

  As an example, the convex portion 762 includes at least side wall portions 762a and 762c and a lateral wall portion 762e connected to the tip end portion thereof, and is, for example, a substantially columnar structure similar to the first structure 711 (first structure As in the case of the body 711, not-shown side wall portions 762b and 762d are provided). The convex portion 762 is not limited to this example as long as at least a part of the convex portion 762 can be accommodated in the internal space of the first structure 711.

  FIG. 28A-1 shows a state before movement of the lens body 760 (convex portion 762). In this state, the tip end portion of the convex portion 762 on the player side, that is, the side wall portion 762e is substantially flush with the base board 200A, and is exposed from the opening provided in the base board 200A.

  In the figure (a-2), when the lens body 760 moves forward, the tip end (lateral wall 762e) of the convex portion 762 penetrates the base board 200A, and the tip end (lateral wall 762e) of the convex 762 And a portion including the above are located in the internal space of the resin structure 710 (the first structure 711).

  FIG. 28 (b-1) is another example of the moving lens body 760, and shows a state before the movement of the lens body 760 (convex portion 762). Although the description of the base board 200A is omitted in the following drawings, the position of the base board 200 before movement is the same as that shown in FIG. 28 (a-1). That is, in this state, the tip end portion of the convex portion 762 on the player side, that is, the side wall portion 762e is substantially flush with the base board 200A, and is exposed from the opening provided in the base board 200A.

  In the same figure (b-2), when the lens body 760 moves forward, the tip end portion (lateral wall portion 762e) of the convex portion 762 (penetrates the base board 200A) the resin structure 710 (first It shows a state of being positioned in the same plane as the base plate 736 of the structure 711). Although the base plate 736 is simplified and shown in the figure (b-1), the base plate 736 has a predetermined thickness (for example, tCAP) as shown in the figure (b-2). Then, the tip of the convex portion 762 is located inside the thickness of the base plate 736. Note that “the tip of the convex portion 762 is located in the same plane as the base plate 736” means that the tip of the convex portion 762 is located between the back surface and the front surface of the base plate 736. Also, as shown in the figure, when the end of the convex portion 762 is positioned in the same plane as the base plate 736, it is included in being positioned in the internal space of the first structure 711.

  FIG. 28C-1 is another example of the moving lens body 760, and shows the state before the movement of the lens body 760 (convex portion 762), and the configuration shown in FIG. It is similar.

  The figure (c-2) has shown the state which LED board 748 moved ahead with the movement of the lens body 760. FIG. As described above, the LED substrate 748 may also be driven in the front-rear direction by the drive of the drive unit (for example, a solenoid, a motor, etc.) in accordance with the movement of the lens body 760. Further, in this example, the lens body 760 (convex portion 762) is located at the rear of the base plate 736.

  FIG. 28 (d-1) shows another example of the moving lens body 760, and shows the state before the movement of the lens body 760 (convex part 762), and the configuration shown in FIG. 28 (a-1) It is similar.

  The figure (d-2) has shown the state which LED board 748 moved ahead with the movement of the lens body 760. FIG. In addition to movement in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in the figure) relative to the game board 200, the lens body 760 and the LED substrate 748 are moved in the vertical direction (horizontal direction in the figure) relative to the game board 200 It may be That is, the lens body 760 (convex portion 762) moves forward while moving downward with respect to the game board 200, for example, from the position before the movement shown in FIG. (D-2), a part including the tip of the convex portion 762 may be located in the internal space of the first structure 711. Further, in this case, the convex portion 762 may be moved to a position where a part of the outer wall of the side wall portion 762c abuts on the inner wall of the side wall portion 711c of the first structure 711.

  FIG. 29 shows another example of the moving lens body 760, and shows an example in which the lens body 760 (convex portion 762) moves in a plurality of moving modes. In this example, as the lens body 760 moves (according to the movement), the LED board 748 moves in the same manner, but the LED board 748 may not move (the base board 200A). The description is omitted).

  FIG. 28A shows a state before movement of the lens body 760 (convex portion 762) and the LED substrate 748 (state in the initial position), which is similar to FIG.

  The figure (b) is the state which the lens body 760 (convex part 762) and the LED board 748 (1st effect body 724) moved below with respect to the game board 200 (left direction in the figure).

  The figure (c) is a state which the lens body 760 (convex part 762) and the LED board 748 (the 1st effect body 724) moved upwards (right direction in the figure) with respect to the game board 200. FIG.

  In the figure (d), the lens body 760 (convex portion 762) and the LED substrate 748 (first effect body 724) move obliquely forward (for example, in the lower front direction with respect to the game board 200), and the convex portion A portion of (the outer wall of) the side wall portion 762c of 762 is located in the internal space of the first structure 711 and is in contact with the (the inner wall of) the side wall portion 711c. In addition, you may move to the position which a part of side wall part 711c of the 1st structure 711 does not contact | apart on (a part of side wall part 762c of the convex part 762).

  In the figure (e), the lens body 760 (convex portion 762) and the LED substrate 748 (the first effect body 724) are upward (rightward in the figure) with respect to the game board 200 from the state shown in the figure (d). ), And a portion of (the outer wall of) the side wall portion 762a of the convex portion 762 is positioned in the internal space of the first structure 711 and is in contact with the (the inner wall of) the side wall portion 711a. ing. In addition, you may move to the position which a part of side wall part 711a of the 1st structure 711 does not contact | apart on a part of side wall part 762a of the convex part 762. FIG.

  The figure (f) has shown the state which the lens body 760 (convex part 762) and the LED board 748 (1st effect body 724) reset to the initial position.

  In the above example, the case where the movement of the first effect body 724 moves with the passage of time in the order shown in the figure has been described, but not limited to this, the movement modes shown in the figure are randomly combined. It may be carried out, or any of the movement modes shown in the same figure may be carried out in combination (sequentially or randomly), or the same (or any one or more of them) The movement mode may be repeatedly executed. Specifically, for example, it may be moved from the initial position shown in (a) of the figure to the position diagonally forward shown in (e) of the figure.

  In the above example, the case where the first effect body 724 moves in the back and forth direction and the up and down direction with respect to the game board 200 has been described, but the first effect body 724 is in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 200 The first effect body 724 may move in the front-rear direction, the up-down direction, and the left-right direction with respect to the game board 200.

<Another embodiment of the effect body>
FIG. 30 is a view for explaining another example of the effect body 728 (for example, the first effect body 724), and is a side cross-sectional view similar to FIG. 28 and FIG.

  At least one of the lens body 760 constituting the effect body 728 (for example, the first effect body 724), the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 and the light emitting body (LED) 748L provided on the LED substrate 748 is the game board 200 It may be provided fixedly without moving with respect to the

  The figure (a) is an example in which the lens body 760 (convex part 762) is fixed to the game board 200. For example, the lens body 760 (convex portion 762) is sandwiched between the base plate 736 and the base base 200A, is positioned on the base base 200A, and a portion including the tip of the convex portion 762 is a resin structure 710 (for example, It is located in the inner space of the first structure 711). In this case, the convex portion 762A is a member having colored transparency. The convex portion 762A partially corresponds to one or both of the side wall portions 711a and 711c and the lateral wall 711e of the resin structure 710 (for example, the first structural body 711) (sidewall portions 726a and 726d and the lateral wall portion 726e). It may be configured to contact or may not be configured to abut.

  In the figure (b), the lens body 760 is not provided, and at least one of the LED substrate 748 and the light emitter (LED 748L) provided on the LED substrate 748 is fixedly provided in the base plate 736. It is an example. The LED substrate 748 is sandwiched between the base plate 736 and the base base 200A, and is positioned on the base base 200A. In this example, the tip of the LED 748L is located in the internal space (a position corresponding to the inside of the thickness of the base plate 736) of the resin structure 710 (for example, the first structure 711).

  In the figure (c), at least one of the light emitters (LED 748L) provided on the LED substrate 748 and the LED substrate 748 is fixedly provided in the internal space of the resin structure 710 (first structure 711). Is an example. For example, the LED substrate 748 (LED 748L) is provided on the convex portion 762 of the lens body 760, and the lens body 760 is sandwiched between the base plate 736 and the base base 200A and positioned on the base base 200A. Further, the LED substrate 748 may be formed in a convex shape projecting forward as illustrated, and the LED 748L may be disposed at the tip of the convex portion. In that case, the LED substrate 748 is sandwiched between the base plate 736 and the base base 200A, and is positioned on the base base 200A.

  The side wall portions of the convex portion 762 in contact with the resin structure 710 may be side wall portions 762 b and 762 d (side wall portions corresponding to the side wall portions 711 b and 711 d of the first structure body 711) not shown.

<Example of size of resin structure>
FIG. 31 is a front view showing an example of the size (size) of the resin structure 710 (the first structure 711 and the second structure 712) described above. Size of resin structure 710 (a resin body 710 in which a rendering body 728 is disposed behind the resin structure 710 and the effect performed by the outside effect 728 is visible to the player). Is a size smaller than, for example, several game balls (shown by broken lines in the same drawing) in front view.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6A, for example, the first structure 711 is smaller in size in front view than the size in which the game balls are arranged in two rows and two rows in total.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, for example, the first structure 711 may be smaller in a front view than the size in which the game balls are arranged in a total of six in two rows in three rows.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6C, for example, the second structure 712 may be smaller in a front view than a size in which the game balls are arranged in a total of nine in three rows and three rows.

  In the above embodiments, the lens body 760 shown in FIG. 27 may not have a lens function, and transmits not all but light of the LED substrate 748 (LED 748L) provided on the rear side. It may also be configured to

  In addition, the lens body 760 shown in FIG. 27 may not have a lens function, and is configured to transmit light from the LED substrate 748 (LED 748L) provided on the rear side or a part of the light. May be

  In addition, the lens body 760 may be a movable decorative body that does not transmit light, since the decorativeness may be improved by ensuring the appearance by being transmitted (through the resin structure 710), and in this case, the lens body 760 is The LED substrate 748 (LED 748L) may be omitted. In addition, since the decorativeness is improved if the light emission (the spilled light) of the LED 748L is delivered to the player through the resin structure 710, even if the lens body 760 is a light-impermeable movable decorative body, it is An LED substrate 748 (LED 748L) may be provided.

  The drive means for driving the lens body 760 shown in FIG. 27 may be a device other than a solenoid motor.

  Moreover, although the lens body 760 illustrated the case of another body with LED board 748 in FIG. 27, it is comprised so that the lens body 760 and LED board 748 may be contained in one light emission unit, The said light emission unit is a drive means It may drive by.

  Further, the convex part 762 of the lens body 760 shown in FIG. 27 functions to guide the light of the LED 748L and to emit at least a part of the guided light toward the player through the resin structure 710. You may

Also, although an example is shown in which the lens body 760 shown in FIG. 27 moves into the internal space of the resin structure 710 when moving forward, the inside of the resin structure 710 when the lens body 760 moves forward. It is possible not to move into the space.

  Further, when the lens body 760 shown in FIG. 27 moves forward, the tip of the lens body 760 may be configured to move to a position behind the rear surface (rear surface) of the base plate 736, or the base plate It may be configured to move to a position behind the front surface of the 736.

  Further, in the lens body 760 shown in FIG. 27, the example in which the convex portion 762 is disposed at a position corresponding to one structure (for example, the first structure 711 etc.) of the resin structure 710 is shown, The invention is not limited to this, and the convex portions 762 are disposed at positions corresponding to a plurality of structures (for example, the first structure 711 and the second structure 712 and the like) of a plurality of structures Each (or at least one) of the plurality of protrusions 762 may be moved to the inner space of each of the structures, or all the structures of the plurality of structures (for example, the first structure). The convex portion 762 is disposed at a position corresponding to each of the body 711 and the second structure body 712 or the like, and each of the plurality of convex portions 762 is moved to the internal space of each of all the structural bodies. May be

  In addition, the convex portion 762 is disposed at a position corresponding to each of a plurality or all of the plurality of structures (for example, the first structure 711, the second structure 712, and the like), and a plurality of structures Each of the plurality of convex portions 762 may be separately driven in each internal space, or may be integrally driven.

  Further, although the example in which the convex portion 762 of the lens body 760 is moved is described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a plurality of structures (for example, the first structure 711 and the second structure 712) Etc.) behind the structure of any one or more and all of them, in the interior space, at a position abutted against the lateral wall, and at a position corresponding to one or more of the positions abutted against the sidewall The convex portion 762 may be arranged in a fixed manner.

  In addition, although an example in which the convex portion 762 is moved in one direction is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be movable in a plurality of directions. Instead, it may be configured to move in the left-right direction or in the vertical direction, or may be configured to move in a combined direction (for example, in the back and forth direction, in the vertical direction, etc.).

  Further, the convex portion 762 may be fixedly disposed at a position corresponding to one or more of the positions in contact with the side wall portion.

  In addition, although an example in which the convex portion is configured by the side wall portion and the lateral wall portion has been shown, the lateral wall portion may not be required, or the side wall portion may not partially surround the convex portion 762. It may be a pillar shape.

  In addition, the operation of the convex portion 762 is a big hit notice (it is a notice that it predicts that the symbol variation in the change will be a big hit, it is a notice to expect that the symbol variation in the swing will be a big hit, or it is an advance notice) It may be operated as pre-reading notice of a big hit decision), and may be operated during customer waiting demonstration presentation.

  In addition, the LED 748L behind may be blinked or lighted while the convex portion 762 is in operation.

  Also, as the above-mentioned big hit notice, the LED 748L may be lighted and blinked, or lighted and blinked during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  Further, in the above-described example, the lens body 760 is described as having the convex portion 762. However, the lens body 760 may not have a convex shape, and the internal space of the resin structure 710 may be the same as the above example. Lens body in the interior space from behind the base plate 736 and any of the holes provided in the base base 200A (for example, the router 746), in the base plate 736, and in the holes provided in the base base 200A (At least a portion of) 760 may be configured to move.

<Another embodiment of the effect member and the first effect body>
Next, another embodiment of the effect member and the first effect body will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of a game board 200 according to another embodiment of the effect member 740 and the first effect body 724. In FIG. 32, the left side is the front side (player) side, the right side is the back side, and illustration of the effect movable body 224 provided on the game board 200 (the effect member 740) is omitted. Moreover, in order to avoid the duplicate description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configuration as the configuration shown in FIG. 12, FIG. 21 to FIG. 23, and FIG.

<Another embodiment of the effect member and the first effect body / effect member>
First, another embodiment of the effect member 740 will be described. The effect member 740 of this example includes a base plate 736 substantially parallel to the surface of the game board 200, a structure A (top resin A) 811, a structure B (top resin B) 812, a structure C813, A part 734.

  The structure A (top resin A) 811 is the same structure as the first structure 711 described above. Specifically, structure A (top resin A) 811 is a substantially columnar structure formed of four side wall portions and one side wall portion, and in an internal space surrounded by four side wall portions , Is configured so that the game ball can not enter. This structure A (top resin A) 811 enters from the entry portion 730 (including the entry portion 252a shown in FIG. 10, hereinafter the same) when the launch intensity of the launcher 110 is the first launch intensity. The game ball is provided at a position (for example, at or near the blind area 701 (see FIG. 10) located between the entry portion 730 and the hook portion 734) before contacting the other structure. Note that part (or all) of the configuration described for the first structural body 711 described above may be applied to the structural body A (top resin A) 811 according to the present example.

  The structure B (top resin B) 812 disposed on the top right of the structure A (top resin A) 811 in plan view is the same structure as the second structure 712 described above. Specifically, structure B (top resin B) 812 is a substantially columnar structure formed of four side wall portions and one side wall portion, and in the internal space surrounded by four side wall portions , Is configured so that the game ball can not enter. This structure B (sky resin B) 812 contacts the game ball coming in from the entry section 730 before contacting the other structures when the launch strength of the launch device 110 is the second launch strength. It is provided at a position (for example, at or near the insertion area 701 located between the entry part 730 and the hook part 734). Note that part (or all) of the configuration described for the second structural body 712 described above may be applied to the structural body B (top resin B) 812 according to the present example.

  The wall 734A (see FIGS. 16 and 17 in detail), which is a part of the hook 734, extends in the traveling direction of the gaming ball passing through the blind area 701, and the launch strength of the launch device 110 is third Position where the gaming ball entering from the entry part 730 comes in contact with the other structure (for example, the blind area 701 located between the entry part 730 and the hook part 734). In the vicinity thereof, in other words, at least a part of the area including the central part of the game area 124).

  The structure C813 disposed at the lower left of the structure A (top resin A) 811 in plan view is a substantially columnar structure formed of four side wall portions and one lateral wall portion, and is surrounded by the four side wall portions The game ball can not enter into the closed internal space. Unlike the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812, and the wall portion 734A, the structure C 813 has another structure (for example, a game ball entering from the entry portion 730). , A position (for example, the common drawing starting opening 228 in the game area 124) after being in contact with the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812, the wall 734A, the game nail 238, etc. Above (in other words, at a position downstream of other structures).

  The structure C 813 is a “structure provided at a position where the gaming ball coming from the entry portion 730 comes in contact with another structure after coming into contact with the other structure”, and the “other structure” is a structure Although body A (top resin A) 811, structure B (top resin B) 812, wall portion 734A, game nail 238 and the like have been exemplified, the “other structure” is limited to this example. is not. Therefore, for example, components (for example, the support member 254a and the swinging member 254b) constituting the return ball prevention piece 254 shown in FIG. 10 may not be included in the “other structure”, or in FIG. The outer rail 202 shown may be included in the “other structure”.

<Other embodiment of the effect member and the first effect body / the first effect body>
Next, another embodiment of the first effect body 724 will be described. A first effect body 724 including an illumination unit 744 and a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed on the back side (rear) of the base 200A of this example. In addition, a lens body 760 is provided above the decorative symbol display device 208, and a light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 is provided behind (behind) the lens body 760.

  A part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812) is transparent or translucent, and the base base 200A is transparent Since there is a part of the effect member 740 and the base base 200A, at least a part of the first performer 724 behind (rear) thereof (a light emitting portion of the illumination unit 744, a display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Section) is visible to the player from the front. In addition, light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 is part of the effect member 740 through the lens body 760 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B It is comprised so that (sky resin B) 812) may be illuminated.

  In addition, the other part of the effect member 740 (in the present example, the structure C813) is transparent or translucent, and the other part of the effect member 740 (in the present example, the structure C813) is on the back side ), Since the router hole (opening) of the base base 200A is located, and the first effect body 724 (illumination unit 744, decorative symbol display device 208) is disposed behind (rearward) thereof. , The other part of the effect member 740, and at least a part of the first effect body 724 (the light emitting part of the illumination unit 744, the display part of the decorative symbol display device 208) behind (rear) thereof from the front It is visible to the player.

  In this example, the substrate base 200A is made of a transparent member, but the router hole (opening) of the substrate base 200A is located on the back side (rear) of the structure C813. In order to make the structure C 813 visible to the player from the front, the base base 200A may be made of an opaque member. In addition, by disposing the lens body 760 and the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 on the back side (rear) of the structure C 813, light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 passes through the lens body 760. It may be configured to illuminate another part (in this example, the structure C813) of the effect member 740. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 27, the lens body 760 may be a movable body that can be driven in the front-rear direction by driving a driving unit (for example, a solenoid, a motor, or the like).

  In this example, at least part or all of the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812, the structure C813, etc. is transparent, semitransparent, colored The base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812, and the structure C 813 or the like are either transparent or colored and translucent. An example in which a part is visible to the player is shown.

  However, a decorative body (including a three-dimensional shape), a sealing body, and a film provided inside of a base plate 736, a structure A (top resin A) 811, a structure B (top resin B) 812, a structure C813, etc. Since at least a part (or all) of the film body, the movable body, etc. (details will be described later) is transparent, translucent, colored transparent, or colored translucent, the base plate 736, At least a part (or all) of the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812, the structure C813, etc., and a decoration, a seal, a film, a film, a movable body, etc. It may be configured to allow the player to view the aspect behind the decorative body, the sealing body, the film, the film body, the movable body and the like by transmitting both of at least a part (or all) of them.

<Example of production of the first production body>
Next, a rendering example (display example) of the first rendering body will be described using FIG. FIG. 33 shows a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812, and the structure C 813) penetrating the player. FIG. 18 is a view showing an example (display example) of an effect (a display example) of the first effect body 724 which can be visually recognized, and a schematic front view of the game board 200 showing the effect display during one game in time series as an example.

  The game board 200 shown in the figure is the same as the configuration of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 12, and a part of the effect member 740 (the base plate 736, the structure A (the top resin A) 811, the structure B (the top resin B) 812, at least a part of the structure C 813) is transmitted through, and executed by the first effect body 724 (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the illumination unit 744) disposed behind (behind) these Some of the renditions made are visible. (A) to (j) show the effect display during one game in chronological order as an example, but the display examples are displayed during different games (or during different symbol variation display) It may be done.

<Example of effects of the first effect / part of the background image of the variable display transmits part of the effect member>
Fig.33 (a) has shown the state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the symbol display area 208a-208c of the 1st effect body 724 (decorative symbol display apparatus 208). At this timing, a part of the background image of the variation display of the decorative symbol is a part of the effect member 740 (the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812, the structure C813) is visible to the player through at least a part of C813).

  Thus, part (or all) of the background image of the variable display is a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (the top resin A) 811, the structure B (the A part of (or all of) the background image of the variable display may be displayed on the symbol variation display which can be seen by the player through the sky resin B) 812) (or all of the effect member 740). ) But a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812) (or all of the effect members 740) The final display of the jackpot symbol form may be configured to be more easily (or less likely to be performed) finally than the symbol variation display that has not been transparently visible to the player.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 33 (b), the display of the decorative symbol (in this example, the symbol of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3") is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Show the situation. At this timing, a part of the background image of the out pattern is part of the effect member 740 (the base plate 736, structure A (top resin A) 811, structure B (top resin B) 812, structure C813). It is visible to the player through at least a part.

<Example of effects of the first effect body / A part of the LED light transmits a part of the effect member>
The timing shown in FIG. 33C is a state in which demonstration effects are being performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this timing, as an example of the demonstration effect, the game information display related to the game (in this example, the character display of "Daito Giken CR large city soul! Reach effect is ..." is performed, all of the game information display by the demonstration effect Is visible to the player.

  Also, at this timing, the LEDs of the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 disposed behind (rear) of the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811 and the structure B (top resin B) 812 are lit. Thus, light (LED emission) emitted from the LED is part of the effect member 740 via the lens body 760 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top Shining resin B) 812). Thereby, a part of the LED light is transmitted through a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812) Visible to the elderly.

  Thus, part (or all) of the LED light emission is part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, structure A (top resin A) 811, structure B (top resin B) ) 812) (or all of the effect member 740 may be transmitted) and the symbol variation display made visible to the player through a part of the LED light emission (or all) may be the effect member 740 The player by passing through a part (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812) (or all of the effect members 740). The final confirmation of the jackpot symbol form may be configured to be more easily (or less likely to be performed) than the symbol variation display that is not visible.

  Furthermore, at this timing, by turning on the LED of the light emitting means (LED substrate; not shown) disposed behind (rear) of the structure C 813, the light (LED light emission) emitted from the LED is a lens (shown It illuminates a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the structure C 813) through the omission of As a result, a part of the LED light is visible to the player through a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the structure C 813).

  In this manner, a part (or all) of the LED light may be transmitted through a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the structure C 813 (or all of the effect member 740)). The symbol variation display that can be visually recognized is part (or all) of the LED emission, but part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the structure C 813) (or all of the effect member 740 Even if it is configured such that the finalized display of the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally performed (or it is difficult to be performed) than the symbol variation display which is not visible to the player through the symbol). Good.

<Example of production of the first production body / demonstration production>
The timing shown in FIG. 33D is a state in which demonstration effects are being performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this timing, as an example of the demonstration effect, the game information display related to the game (in this example, the character display of "Daito Giken CR large city soul! Big hit probability ..." is displayed) Is visible to the player.

  In addition, at this timing, the LED of the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 disposed behind (rear) the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, and the structure B (top resin B) 812 Both of the LEDs of the light emitting means (LED substrate, not shown) disposed behind (rear) of the body C813 are turned off. Thus, the LED light emission can not be viewed from the player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 33 (e) is a state where demonstration effects are being performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this timing, as an example of the demonstration effect, the game information display related to the game (in this example, the character display of "Daito Giken CR large city soul! Reach effect is ..." is performed, all of the game information display by the demonstration effect Is visible to the player.

  Also, at this timing, the LEDs of the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 disposed behind (rear) of the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811 and the structure B (top resin B) 812 are lit. Thus, light (LED emission) emitted from the LED is part of the effect member 740 via the lens body 760 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top Shining resin B) 812). Thereby, a part of the LED light is transmitted through a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812) Visible to the elderly. On the other hand, the LED of the light emitting means (LED substrate, not shown) disposed behind (rear) of the structure C 813 remains turned off.

  Thus, part (or all) of the LED light emission is part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, structure A (top resin A) 811, structure B (top resin B) ) 812) to be visible to the player, and light emitting means (LED substrate, not shown) disposed behind (rear) of a part (in this example, the structure C 813) of the effect member 740. A part (or all of them) of the LED light emission in the symbol variation display in which the LED does not emit light is a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, It can be seen by the player through the structure B (sky resin B) 812) and can be seen by the player through a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the structure C 813). The final display of the jackpot symbol form is finally performed rather than the symbol variation display Combed manner (or, as hardly performed) may be constructed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 33 (f) is a state where the demonstration effect is ended and the game information display is erased. In the hold display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold is displayed. The hold icon PI1 is a normal hold icon displayed in a default mode (in this example, a black circle image).

<Example of effects of the first effect body / A part of the LED light transmits a part of the effect member>
The timing shown in FIG. 33 (g) shows a state in which a false big-hit notice (Gase notice) is being executed. At this timing, the LEDs of the light emitting means (LED substrate) 748 disposed behind (rear) the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, and the structure B (top resin B) 812 are lit. The light (LED emission) emitted from the LED is part of the effect member 740 through the lens body 760 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) ) 812). Thereby, a part of the LED light is transmitted through a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812) Visible to the elderly.

  In addition, at this timing, a part (in this example, the structure) of the effect member 740 is generated by light emission (illumination light) by the illumination unit 744 (first effect body 724) disposed behind (rear) the structure C813. C813). As a result, part of the illumination light is visible to the player through part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the structure C 813).

  Thus, part (or all) of the LED light emission is part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, structure A (top resin A) 811, structure B (top resin B) ) 812) to be visible to the player, and part (or all) of the illumination light may be transmitted through part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the structure C 813). The symbol variation display that can be viewed by a person is part (or all) of the LED emission, part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the base plate 736, structure A (top resin A ), And can be seen by the player through the structure B (sky resin B) 812), and can be seen by the player through a part of the effect member 740 (in this example, the structure C 813). The final display of the jackpot symbol form is finally performed than the symbol variation display that became To make it easier (or, as hardly performed) may be constructed.

<Example of effect of the first effect body / A part of the effect movable body transmits a part of the effect member>
The timing shown in FIG. 33 (h) shows a state in which a false big-hit notice (Gase notice) is being executed. At this timing, in the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first effect body 724), a state in which the effect by the other effect body (the second effect body 726) is being executed as a fake big hit advance notice (Gase notice). It is. The second effect body 726 is, for example, the effect movable body 224.

  In this example, the effect movable body 224 is moved upward from below (standby position, initial position) to cover a part in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the tip (portion of the fist) of the effect movable body 224 is , The effect of moving to the back (rear) of the structure C813. That is, at this timing, part (the part of the fist) of the effect movable body 224 (the second effect body 726) and part of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first effect body 724) pass through the structure C813. It is visible to the player.

  In this manner, the symbol variation display in which part (or all) of the effect movable body 224 (the second effect body 726) passes through the structure C 813 and becomes visible to the player is effect Rather than the symbol variation display where part (or all) of the movable body 224 (the second effect body 726) passes through the structure C 813 and can not be made visible to the player, the big hit symbol form finally It may be configured such that the finalized display of () is easily (or hardly) performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 33 (i) shows a state in which a false big-hit advance notice (case advance notice) is being executed. At this timing, in the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first effect body 724), a state in which the effect by the other effect body (the second effect body 726) is continued as a fake big hit advance notice (Gase notice). It is.

  In this example, the effect movable body 224 is further moved upward to cover a part in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the tip (portion of the fist) of the effect movable body 224 is a first structure 711 ( An effect of moving to the back (rear) of the sky resin A) and the structure B (sky resin B) 812 is executed. That is, at this timing, a part (part of the fist) of the effect movable body 224 (the second effect body 726) and a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first effect body 724) A) It is visible to the player through the 811 and the structure B (sky resin B) 812.

  Thus, part (or all) of the effect movable body 224 (the second effect body 726) is the structure A (the top resin A) 811 and the structure B (the top resin B) 812 (or whichever A part (or all of them) of the effect movable body 224 (the second effect body 726) is more effective for the symbol variation display that is visible to the player through the one or the other structure). More than the symbol variation display which is not visible to the player through the structure A (top resin A) 811 and the structure B (top resin B) 812 (or any one of the structures). Finally, it may be configured such that the finalized display of the jackpot symbol form is easily (or hardly) performed.

  In the present example, all or part of the configuration described for the structure A (top resin A) 811 may be applied to the structure B (top resin B) 812 or the structure C 813. In the present example, all or a part of the configuration described for the structure B (top resin B) 812 may be applied to the structure A (top resin A) 811 or the structure C 813 In the present example, all or part of the configuration described for the structure C 813 may be applied to the structure A (top resin A) 811 or the structure B (top resin B) 812 .

<Example of other effects>
Next, another example of effect will be described using FIG.

<Other production examples / error notification>
The timing shown in FIG. 34 (a) is a state in which the holding icon PI1 of the default mode (in this example, a black circle image) is displayed in the holding display area below the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the timing shown in FIG. 34 (b) shows a state in which the front frame door opening error notification is executed in response to the front frame door 106 being opened.

  In this example, in the display area above the decorative symbol display device 208, a predetermined character string (here, a letter "Tobira is open") is issued as a front frame door opening error notification for notifying that the front frame door 106 has been opened. Column is displayed. Then, at this timing, the vicinity of the first character ("T") of the front frame door opening error notification is visible to the player through the structure C813.

  In this manner, the symbol variation display in which part (or all) of the error notification passes through the structure C 813 and becomes visible to the player is part (or all) of the error notification. ) Is configured so that final confirmation of the big hit symbol aspect is easier to be performed (or hard to be made) than the symbol variation display that is not visible to the player through the structure C813. May be

  The timing shown in FIG. 34 (c) shows a state in which the lower plate full error notification (ball removal error notification) is executed in response to the lower plate full pressure sensor detecting the full plate on the lower plate 128. . In this example, in the upper display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a predetermined character string (here, the character "Din full!" As a low level full error notification notifying that the lower plate 128 is full. Column is displayed. At this timing, the first character ("dish") near the lower plate full error notification is visible to the player through the structure A (top resin A) 811 and can be viewed by the lower plate full error notification. The second character from the top ("full") is visible to the player through the structure B (sky resin B) 812.

  In this way, a part (or all) of the error notification passes through the structure A (top resin A) 811 and the structure B (top resin B) 812 (or any one of them). In the symbol variation display that has become visible to the player, part (or all) of the error notification is shown as structure A (top resin A) 811 and structure B (top resin B) 812 (top resin B). Alternatively, the final display of the jackpot symbol form may be performed more easily (or performed) than the symbol variation display which is not visible to the player through the one of the structures. To make it difficult).

  In addition, part (or all) of the error notification may be the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812, and the structure C 813 (or any one (or 2) Part) (the symbol variation display may be visible to the player through the structure)), part (or all) of the error notification may be the structure A (top resin A) 811, From the symbol variation display which can not be made visible to the player through the structure B (sky resin B) 812 and the structure C 813 (or any one (or two) structures). Also, it may be configured such that final confirmation display of the jackpot symbol aspect is easily (or hardly) performed finally.

<Example of other effects / pre-read notice, hold icon with pre-read notice mode>
The timing shown in FIG. 34 (d) is a state in which an effect of pre-reading notice about the propriety of the hold is executed in the display area above the decorative symbol display device 208 and the hold icon PI2 after the error is eliminated. .

  Here, the advance notice is an effect for notifying that there is a possibility that the result of the acceptance determination performed in the special drawing related lottery process (steps SB29 and SB31) shown in FIG. 7 may be a big hit. More specifically, in the present embodiment, even a big hit, a big hit (for example, 15 R system big hit: special figure A, special figure B) and relatively large big hit (for example, 15 R series big hit) For example, the 2R system big hit: special figure C-special figure F) is prepared, for example, it is the production for predicating that it is likely to become an advantageous big hit, for example. In the 2R system, the big hit with a definite change (special figure C, special figure E) may be an advantageous big hit. Further, the prefetch notice is, for example, a notice performed based on the start information (prestarted start information) acquired earlier than the start information acquired in the special drawing related lottery process (steps SB29 and SB31). That is, the pre-reading advance notice is performed based on the pre-decision result based on the pre-reading starting information.

  Also, the pre-reading advance notice here includes a false pre-reading advance notice that falsely gives notice as if the pre-judgment result is not an advantageous jackpot as if it becomes an advantageous jackpot. That is, the advance notice indicates that the result of the pass / fail judgment may be an advantageous jackpot, the advance notice for the player, or that the result of the pass / fail judgment is an advantageous jackpot. It can be said that it is a notice to be expected.

  In this example, while displaying a predetermined character string (here, a character string "immediately a big hit?") As a prefetch notice, a reserve icon of a prefetch notice mode as a reserve icon PI2 (a default form in this example) The icon of a star different from the icon of the icon (black circle) is displayed. Then, at this timing, the vicinity of the first character (“su”) of the advance notice is transmitted to the structure C 813 and can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the prefetch notice mode of the holding icon is not limited to the image of the star mark, and may be another image (for example, an image of a character) or an animation (moving image).

  In this manner, the symbol variation display in which part (or all) of the pre-reading notice is visible to the player through the structure C 813 is part (or all) of the pre-reading notice. ) Is configured so that final confirmation of the big hit symbol aspect is easier to be performed (or hard to be made) than the symbol variation display that is not visible to the player through the structure C813. May be

  Further, the symbol variation display started by digesting the reserve icon PI2 of the prefetching notice mode (in this example, the image of the star mark) shown in FIG. 34 (d) is the default mode (FIG. 34 (a) In this example, the final display of the jackpot symbol form is configured to be more easily (or less likely to be performed) finally than the symbol variation display started by digesting the reserve icon PI1 of the black circle image) and starting it. You may

<Other production examples / modifications>
In the present example, an example is shown where a lower error is displayed behind (backward) structure A (top resin A) 811 and structure B (top resin B) 812; Shows an example of displaying a front frame door opening error, but a bottom plate full error or a front frame door opening error is displayed behind (rear) of the structure A (top resin A) 811 or another. The error display of may be displayed. In addition, it is also possible to display a lower plate full error, a front frame door open error, or another error display behind (backward) the structure C 813. In addition, a lower tray full error or a door open error may be displayed or another error display may be displayed behind (rear) of the structure B (heaven resin B) 812.

  That is, in this example, all or a part of the configuration described for the structure A (top resin A) 811 may be applied to the structure B (top resin B) 812 or the structure C 813 In the present example, all or a part of the configuration described for the structure B (top resin B) 812 may be applied to the structure A (top resin A) 811 or the structure C 813 In the present example, all or part of the configuration described for the structure C 813 may be applied to the structure A (top resin A) 811 or the structure B (top resin B) 812 .

  In addition, as another error display, a display prompting the launch ball arrival position in the game area (for example, "Please return to the left", "Please hit left", "Please hit right". "Attack the attacker Or the magnetic error displayed in response to the detection of an abnormal magnetism, the radio error displayed in response to the detection of an abnormal radio wave, or the like may be applied. Further, the release of the error may be the case where the operation by the error release switch 168 is performed, the case where the other operation is performed, or the case where the error state is resolved.

  Moreover, although the front frame door open error which notifies that the front frame door 106 was open was demonstrated as an example of a door open error, a glass frame (for example, the transparent plate member 118 shown in FIG. 1) was opened. An inner frame open error displayed in response to the glass frame open error displayed in response to the opening of the inner frame (for example, the main body 104 illustrated in FIG. 1) may be applied.

  In addition, although an example in which a part of the display of the character is located behind (rear) the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812, and the structure C 813 is shown The patterns, patterns, colors, characters, etc. displayed during the process are located behind (rear), and some or all of them are structural A (top resin A) 811, structural B (top resin B) 812, Alternatively, the display may be visible to the player by transmitting a part (or all) of the structure C 813. In addition, all of the display of characters displayed at the time of error notification are transmitted by the back (rear) of the structure A (top resin A) 811, the structure B (top resin B) 812, and the structure C 813. The display may be configured to be visible to the player.

In addition, although the structure C813 is disposed at the upper left of the game board 200, the left side of the game board 200 (left side from the center of the game board 200), the right side of the game board 200 (right side from the center of the game board 200), The lower side of the game board 200 (lower than the center of the game board 200) or the like may be disposed, or the lower left side of the game board 200 (the left side of the center of the game board 200 and lower than the center) It may be disposed on the lower right side (right below the center of the game board 200 and below the center), on the right top of the game board 200 (right from the center of the game board 200 and above the center), or the like. In addition, the structure C813 is arranged at one or more of these arrangement locations, and the contents (invention) described as the features of the structure A (top resin A) 811 in the present specification are the structure C813. The present invention may be applied to other embodiments of the present invention, as appropriate.
<Modification of Structure>

  Next, a modification of the structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. 35 (1), (3), (6), (12) to (14) and FIG. 36 are side sectional views of the structure A (top resin A) 811 and are shown in FIG. Corresponding to FIG. In addition, another view in FIG. 35 is a side cross-sectional view of the structure A (top resin A) 811 according to another mode, and is a view corresponding to FIG.

Here, the structure A (top resin A) 811 will be described as a representative example of a structure, but the contents (invention) described as the features of the structure A (top resin A) 811 may be other structures (for example, It is possible to apply suitably as a feature of the structure B (top resin B) 812, the structure C813, the first structure 711 and the second structure 712).
<Modified example of structure / adhered body>

  35 (1) and (2) show an example in which a bonded body (including at least a seal, a film, or a film body) PB1 is attached to the inner wall of the side wall 811e of the structure A (top resin A) 811 It shows. One surface of the patch PB1 is a bonding surface provided with a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (adhesive or the like), and a display (pattern, characters, symbols or the like) is provided on the bonding surface so as to be visible.

  In FIG. 35 (3), the attached body PB1 is attached to the center in the height direction of the inner wall of the side wall 811c (hereinafter referred to as the left side wall 811c) on the left side of the structure A (top resin A) 811 in side view An example is shown, and FIG. 35 (4) shows an example in which the pasting body PB1 is attached to the inner wall below the left side wall 811c of the structure A (top resin A) 811 (below the side wall 811e). 35 (5) shows the inner wall on the upper side (above the lateral wall 811e) of the side wall 811a (hereinafter referred to as the right side wall 811a) on the right side of the structure A (top resin A) 811 in side view. Shows an example in which the pasting body PB1 is pasted.

  FIG. 35 (6) shows an example in which the pasted body PB1 is attached across the inner walls of the left side wall 811c, the side wall 811e, and the right side wall 811a of the structure A (top resin A) 811. 35 (7) shows the lower inner wall of the left side wall 811c of the structure A (top resin A) 811 (lower side than the horizontal wall 811e), the inner wall of the horizontal wall 811e, the lower side of the right side wall 811a (FIG. The example which stuck the sticking body PB1 over the inner wall of the lower side than the side wall part 811e is shown.

FIG. 35 (8) shows an example in which the attached body PB2 is attached to the upper wall (outer wall) of the side wall 811e of the structure A (top resin A) 811. One surface of this patch PB2 is a bonding surface provided with a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (adhesive or the like), and a display (pattern, characters, symbols, etc.) is visibly provided on the surface opposite to the bonding surface. It is done. FIG. 35 (9) shows the inner wall of the upper side (above the lateral wall 811 e) of the left side wall 811 c of the structural body A (top resin A) 811, the upper wall (outer wall) of the lateral wall 811 e, and the upper side of the right side wall 811 a ( The example which stuck the sticking body PB1 across the inner wall of the side wall part 811e and upper side is shown.
<Modification of structure / decoration, movable body>

  The patch bodies PB1 and PB2 according to this example are not limited to the seal, the film, and the film body, and may be, for example, a decorative body to which a decoration including display of a pattern, characters, symbols, etc. is applied. , And the structure itself may be decorated, including the display of pictures, letters, symbols and the like. Also, instead of (or in addition to) the patch bodies PB1 and PB2, a movable body for effect may be applied, and in this case, the movable body for effect is stopped (or moved) at a certain position. In the case where the movable body is located, a part (or all) of the movable body is configured to be located at the attachment site of the attached body PB1, PB2 so as to play the same role as the attached body PB1, PB2 It is also good.

  For example, in FIGS. 35 (10) to 35 (13), a part of the decorative body (or movable body) MB is positioned above the upper wall (outer wall) of the side wall 811e of the structure A (top resin A) 811. By doing this, a state in which it protrudes beyond the open portion on the upper side (player side) of the structure A (the top resin A) 811 is shown. In addition, in the state shown in FIGS. 35 (11) and (13), a part of the decorative body (or movable body) MB is below the inner wall of the side wall 811 e of the structure A (top resin A) 811. By being positioned at the lower side of the structure A (the top resin A) 811 (on the side of the game board 200), the state of protruding from the opening portion is shown.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 35 (14) and (15), the left side wall portion 811c, the side wall portion 811e, and a part, a plurality of, or all of the right side wall portions 811a of the structure A (top resin A) 811 The attached body PB1 or the attached body PB2 may be attached to the wall portion of the Further, instead of (or in addition to) the patch bodies PB1 and PB2, the left side wall portion 811c, the side wall portion 811e, and part of the right side wall portion 811a of the structure A (top resin A) 811 are plural or A decoration or / and a movable body may be disposed on all the walls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35 (16), a boss 811k is integrally (or separately) provided on the left side wall portion 811c (or other wall portion) of the structure A (top resin A) 811; The decorative body (or movable body) 733 may be assembled to the back (rear) of the structure A (top resin A) 811 by the screw 732 fitted into the boss 811 k. Also, some of the plurality of examples shown in FIGS. 35 (1) to 35 (16) may be combined with other examples.
<Modification of Structure / Decoration>

  As shown in FIG. 36 (1), a boss 811k is integrally (or separately) provided on the left side wall portion 811c (or other wall portion) of the structure A (top resin A) 811 and this boss is The decorative portion 735 may be assembled to the front (upper part) of the structure A (top resin A) 811 by a screw 732 fitted to 811k. In addition, the decoration part 735 can be comprised, for example by the display means (for example, liquid crystal display device, organic EL, LED etc.) which can display the information (In this example, information of big hit probability) regarding a game. Further, in this case, the symbol variation display in which the information on the game is displayed by the decoration unit 735 is finally determined as the big hit symbol aspect than the symbol variation display in which the information on the game is not displayed by the decoration unit 735. The display may be configured to be easy to perform (or to be hard to do).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (2), the bosses 811k are integrally (or separately) provided on the left side wall portion 811c (or the other wall portion) of the plurality of structures A (top resin A) 811 respectively. The decorative portion 737 may be assembled to the front (upper part) of the plurality of structures A (top resin A) 811 by screws 732 which are provided and fitted into the bosses 811k. The decorative portion 737 may be configured by, for example, display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, an LED, etc.) capable of displaying information related to a game (in the present example, information on the jackpot probability and the probability change continuation rate). it can.

  In the present example, an example is shown in which the decorative portion 737 is supported by two structures, but the number of structures supporting the decorative portion 737 is not particularly limited, and three, four, or more may be used. It may be. Also, the gaming ball may be configured to be able to pass between the structures shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. In addition, at least a part (or all) of the decorative portions 735 and 737 shown in FIG. 36 may be transparent, translucent, colored transparent, or colored translucent, via the decorative portions 735 and 737. , A structure A (sky resin A) 811 behind, a structure (for example, a sticking body, a decoration body, a movable body) in which at least a part is positioned inside the structure A (sky resin A) 811 or the back The effect means (for example, the illumination unit 744, the decorative symbol display device 208), etc. may be configured to be visible from the player.

  In addition, by combining some of the examples shown in FIGS. 35 (1) to 35 (16) with the example shown in FIG. 36, another structure (for example, sticking on the back (rear) of the decorative portion 735, 737 A body, a decoration, a movable body) may be arranged so as to be visible to the player, or a rendering means (for example, an illumination unit 744, a decoration symbol display device 208) behind (rear) these other structures. And the like may be arranged so as to be visible from the player.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the present embodiment is a game machine capable of rolling game balls, such as a launcher (for example, launcher 110 shown in FIG. 1) capable of firing game balls. A game console comprising an area (for example, the game area 124 shown in FIG. 1) and a game board (for example, the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3) on which the game area is provided The played game ball is configured to enter the game area from the entry portion (for example, the entry portion 730 and the entry portion 252a shown in FIG. 10), and the gaming board has a first structure (for example, The structure C813 shown in FIG. 32 is provided, and the game board is provided with a display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32), and the first structure The game ball advances inside the side wall of the The interior surrounded by the side wall of the first structure is not solid, and the game ball in contact with the side wall of the first structure changes the falling direction. 34. The display means can execute an error display (eg, front frame door opening error, lower tray full error shown in FIG. 34), and at least a part of the error display is the first display. The game console may be characterized in that it may be displayed behind a structure, and at least a part of the first structure has transparency.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the first structure by improving the decorativeness of the first structure, and at least a part of the error display to be the first structure. As it may be displayed behind the body, it may be easier to notice an error display than before.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) of the present embodiment includes a launcher (for example, the launcher 110 shown in FIG. 1) capable of firing game balls and a game area (for example, A game field provided with a game area 124) shown in FIG. 1 and a game board (for example, the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3) provided with the game area, the game ball being fired from the firing means Is configured to enter the game area from the entry section (for example, the entry section 730 shown in FIG. 10, the entry section 252a), and the gaming board has a first structure (for example, shown in FIG. 32) A structure C813) is provided, and the game ball can not enter into the inside surrounded by the side wall of the first structure, and is surrounded by the side wall of the first structure Inside is not solid, but it enters from the entrance The game ball which has come in contact with the other side (for example, the structure A (top resin A), the structure B (top resin B) 812, and the wall 734A shown in FIG. The game console is configured such that the game ball entering from the entry section does not contact other structures and does not contact the side wall. It is also good.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the decorativeness of the first structure itself which is configured to be surrounded by the side wall and to improve the player's interest. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the first structure stand out and make it easy for the player to pay attention.

  In addition, the game board has a third structure (for example, the attached body (seal, film, film body) PB1, PB2 shown in FIGS. 35 (1) to (9), (14), (15), FIG. A decorative body shown in (10) to (13), a lens body 620, a convex portion 762, a light emitting means 748, a first effect body 724) are provided, and the third structure body is the first structure. And at least a portion of the third structure (hereinafter referred to as "third portion") is configured to be located inside the third structure. At least a part of the structure may be configured to be viewed by the player through at least a part of the first structure.

  Further, the symbol variation display in which at least a part of the third structure allows at least a part of the first structure to be seen by the player through the at least a part of the first structure is the third structure The final display of the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally performed than the symbol variation display in which at least a part of the symbols does not become visible to the player through at least a part of the first structure. May be configured. Further, the game board is provided with rendering means, and the third structure is a first rendering body (for example, a first rendering body 724) provided to the rendering means. It is also good. Further, depending on the display mode of the first effect, there may be a case where a notice (including a pre-reading notice) is given. Further, the first effect may be provided with a light emitter.

  Further, the game board is provided with a second structure (for example, structure A (top resin A) 811 shown in FIG. 32), and the inside surrounded by the side wall of the second structure The game ball can not enter into the inside of the second structure, and the inside surrounded by the side wall of the second structure is not solid, and the second structure is such that In the case of two firing strengths, the game ball entering from the entry section may be provided at a position where it is in contact with the first structure before contacting. In addition, the game board is provided with rendering means (for example, the rendering means 732 and the effect member 740), and the game board is provided with a buttocks (for example, the buttocks 734), The buttocks are means provided with a base plate (for example, a base plate 736), and the base plate is fixed to the surface of the game board, and the base plate has the first structure. The body may be provided. In addition, a portion of the first structure (hereinafter referred to as "first portion") has permeability, and a portion of the second structure (hereinafter referred to as "second portion") ") May have permeability.

In addition, when the launch strength of the launch means is the first launch strength, another structure (for example, FIG. 32) is reached before the game ball coming in from the entry section comes in contact with the first structure. It may be configured to be in contact with the structural value B (top resin B) 812 shown or the outer rail 202 shown in FIG. Further, the first structure may be configured to include a lateral wall (for example, a lateral wall 711 e). In addition, the first structure is configured to include a lateral wall, and the inner surface of the side wall of the first structure except for the lateral wall is a protrusion that protrudes from the inner surface toward the interior The face may not be provided.
In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) has a launcher (for example, the launcher 110) capable of firing game balls and a game area (for example, game area 124) where the game balls can roll. , A game board (for example, the game board 200) provided with the game area, a display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32), and a presentation means (for example 732 and the effect member 740), and the attached body (seal, film, film body) PB1, PB2 shown in FIG. 35 (1) to (9), (14), (15), and FIG. (13)), and the game ball fired from the launching means is an entering portion (e.g., an entering portion). From the section 730, the entry section 252a) And the effect means is a means provided on the game board, and the effect means is a means provided with a base plate (for example, a base plate 736). The base plate is fixed to the surface of the game board, and the base plate is a first structure (a first structure 711 shown in FIG. 27, a structure C813 shown in FIG. 32). The game ball can not enter into the internal space surrounded by the side walls (for example, side wall portions 711a, 711b, 711c, 711d) of the first structure body, When the launch intensity of the means is the first launch intensity, the gaming ball coming from the entry section is configured to contact the side wall before contacting the buttocks, and the decoration body is: Separate from the first structure, the decoration (Hereinafter, the first portion (for example, (the tip of the convex portion 762 shown in FIG. 28 to FIG. 30), the light emitter 748 L of the light emitting means 748 of FIG. Part) is configured to be located in the internal space, and at least a part of the decoration body is transparent to at least a part of the first structure from the player. Configured to be visible, the display means is capable of performing a jackpot notice, and at least a portion of the jackpot notice may be displayed behind the first structure, After the game ball entering from the entry section comes in contact with other structures (for example, structure A (top resin A) 811, structure B (top resin B) 812 and wall portion 734A shown in FIG. 32) , Wherein the side wall is configured to be contactable. It is a game stand to make a mark.
Further, the symbol variation display in which at least a part of the decoration can be seen by the player through at least a part of the first structure is at least a part of the decoration. However, the final display of the jackpot symbol form is easier to be finally performed than the symbol variation display which is not visible to the player through at least a part of the first structure. It may be one.
Further, the decorative body may be a first effect body (for example, a first effect body 724) provided in the effect means.
Further, a notice (for example, a pre-reading notice) may be performed depending on a display mode of the first effect.
In addition, depending on the display mode of the first effect body, an error display (for example, a front frame door opening error, a bottom plate full error shown in FIG. 34) may be performed.
In addition, the first effect body may be provided with a light emitter.
Further, the game board is provided with a second structure (for example, structure A (top resin A) 811 shown in FIG. 32), and the inside surrounded by the side wall of the second structure It is comprised so that a game ball can not enter into space, and the game ball which has entered from the said entry part when the shot intensity of the said launch means is the 2nd shot intensity of the said 2nd structure The first structure (for example, the structure C813 shown in FIG. 32) may be provided at a position where the first structure comes into contact before contacting.
Further, a part of the first structure may be permeable, and a part of the second structure may be permeable.
In addition, before the game ball entering from the entry section comes into contact with the first structure (for example, the structure C813 shown in FIG. 32) when the launch strength of the launch means is the first launch strength. It may be configured to be in contact with another structure (for example, structure value B (top resin B) 812 shown in FIG. 32 or outer rail 202 shown in FIG. 10).
Further, the first structure may be configured to include a lateral wall (for example, a lateral wall 711 e).
In addition, the first structure includes a lateral wall (for example, the lateral wall 711e), and the inner surface of the side wall of the first structure is the inner surface from the inner surface except for the lateral wall. It may be a surface not provided with a protrusion protruding toward the internal space.

  In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) has a launcher (for example, the launcher 110) capable of firing game balls and a game area (for example, game area 124) where the game balls can roll. And a game board (for example, the game board 200) provided with the game area, the game ball being fired from the firing means being from the entry part (for example, entry part 730) The game board is configured to enter the game area, the game board is provided with a first structure (e.g., a first structure 711), and the game board has a second structure. Body (for example, lens body 620, convex portion 762, light emitting means 748, first effect body 724) is provided, and the side wall of the first structure (for example, side wall portions 711a, 711b, 711c, Inside the area enclosed by 711d) It is so configured that a ball can not enter, and the inside surrounded by the side wall of the first structure is not solid, and gaming balls coming in from the entry part may come in contact with the side wall The second structure (e.g., the lens body 620, the convex portion 762, the light emitting means 748, the first effect body 724) is a separate body from the first structure, At least a portion of the second structure (for example, the lens body 620, the convex portion 762, the light emitting means 748, the first effect body 724) (hereinafter referred to as “the first portion (for example, the convex shown in FIGS. (The tip portion of the portion 762 and the portion where the light emitting body 748L of the light emitting means 748 in FIGS. 30B and 30C is provided). Second structure (for example, lens body 620, convex portion 762, At least a part of the means 748 and the first effect body 724) is configured to be viewed from the player through at least a part of the first structure body. It is a stand.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the decorativeness of the first structure itself which is configured to be surrounded by the side wall and to improve the player's interest. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the first structure stand out and make it easy for the player to pay attention.

  In addition, the game board is provided with rendering means (for example, the rendering means 732 and the effect member 740), and the game board is provided with a buttocks (for example, the buttocks 734), The buttocks are means provided with a base plate (for example, a base plate 736), and the base plate is fixed to the surface of the game board, and the base plate has the first structure. A body is provided, and when the launch strength of the launch means is a first launch strength, the gaming ball coming in from the entry section comes into contact with the side wall before contacting the buttocks It may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the decoration of the first structure itself, which is provided at a position where the gaming ball having entered the game area from the entry portion comes into contact before contacting the buttocks, is surrounded by the side wall In some cases, it is possible to improve the character and to improve the player's interest. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the first structure stand out and make it easy for the player to pay attention.

  In addition, the second structural body (for example, the lens body 620, the convex portion 762, the light emitting means 748, the first effect body 724) is a first effect body (for example, the first effect body) provided in the effect means. It may be a director 724).

  In addition, the first effect body has a first position (for example, the position of the recess 762 in FIG. 28A-1 or 29D, the position of the light emitter 748L in FIG. 30A), and It is possible to move from one of the two positions (for example, the position of the recess in FIG. 28 (a-2) or 29 (e), the position of the light emitter 748L in FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (c)) to the other. The second position is a position different from the first position, and the first portion is the second position when the first position is at the second position. It may be configured to be located in the inside.

  In addition, when the first effect body is located at the first position (for example, the position of the recess 762 in FIG. 29D), the first portion (recess 762 in FIG. 29D) is It may be configured to be located in the inside.

  In addition, at least a portion (hereinafter referred to as a “first portion”) of the “second structural body (for example, the lens body 620, the convex portion 762, the light emitting means 748, the first effect body 724) described above And “is configured to be positioned inside” means “at least a portion of the second structure (for example, the lens body 620, the convex portion 762, the light emitting means 748, the first effect body 724) Hereinafter, “the first part” is configured to be positioned in the inside ”, and the first effect body is at the first position (for example, FIG. 30). The first portion (for example, the light emitter 748L of FIG. 30 (a)) is configured not to be positioned inside when it is positioned at the position of the light emitter 748L of (a) May be

  Further, the position in the front-rear direction of the first part (for example, the surface of the light emitter 748L shown in FIG. 30B) is a position behind the position in the front-rear direction of the surface of the base plate It may be a position forward of the position in the front-rear direction of the back surface.

  The position in the front-rear direction of the first portion (for example, the surface of the light emitter 748L shown in FIG. 30C) may be a position ahead of the position in the front-rear direction of the surface of the base plate.

  In addition, the base plate is integrally provided with a third structure (for example, a second (resin) structure 712), and the inside is surrounded by the side wall of the third structure. Is configured such that game balls can not enter, and a part of the third structure (hereinafter referred to as "the second part") is located between the first structure and the buttocks. The third structure makes contact with the game ball, which has entered from the entry section, before contacting the buttocks when the launch strength of the launch means is the second launch strength. It is provided at a position, and is configured such that a part of a second effect (for example, a second effect 726) is located inside the third structure, and the second The game ball may be configured to be in contact with the part.

  Moreover, the said base plate may be provided with the said 1st structure integrally.

  Further, the second structure (for example, the lens body 620, the convex portion 762, the light emitting means 748, and the first effect body 724) may be separate from the base plate.

  In addition, when the launch strength of the launch means is the first launch strength, the game ball coming in from the entry section comes into contact with the buttocks after coming into contact with the side wall of the first structure. You may have to.

  In addition, the second structure (for example, the lens body 620, the convex portion 762, the light emitting means 748, the first effect body 724) is fixed so as not to move, and the first portion is It may be a site always located inside.

  In addition, depending on the display mode of the second structural body (for example, the lens body 620, the convex portion 762, the light emitting means 748, the first effect body 724), there may be a case where a big hit is made.

  Further, the internal volume may be smaller than the volume of the gaming ball.

  In addition, the second structure (for example, the lens body 620, the convex portion 762, the light emitting means 748, and the first effect body 724) may be provided with a light emitting body (for example, LED 748L).

  In addition, the second structure (for example, the lens body 620, the convex portion 762, the light emitting means 748, the first effect body 724) may be a decorative portion for decorating the game board.

  Further, the decorative portion is a seal attached to the inner surface of the first structure, and at least a part of the back surface of the seal is configured to be located in the inside. It may be.

  Further, the first structure may be configured to include a lateral wall (for example, a lateral wall 711 e).

  In addition, the first structure is configured to include a lateral wall, and the inner surface of the side wall of the first structure except for the lateral wall is a protrusion that protrudes from the inner surface toward the interior The face may not be provided.

  In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) has a launcher (for example, the launcher 110) capable of firing game balls and a game area (for example, game area 124) where the game balls can roll. , A game board (eg, game board 200) provided with the game area, rail means (eg, outer rail 202 and inner rail 204) surrounding the game area, and a hook portion (eg, hook portion 734) It is a game console provided with the presentation means (for example, presentation means 732 and the presentation member 740) provided, The game ball fired from the said launch means is the said game from the entry part (for example, the entry part 730) It is configured to enter the area, and the rendering means is provided in the area surrounded by the rail means, and the rendering means is provided with a base plate (for example, a base plate 736). With The base plate is fixed to the surface of the game board, and the base plate is provided integrally with a first structure (e.g., a first structure 711). The first structure is located between the entry portion and the buttocks, and the first structure is configured in the case where the firing strength of the firing means is a first firing strength. The game ball which has entered from the entry section is provided at a position where the game ball comes in contact with the other structure before coming into contact with the other structure, and is surrounded by the side wall portion (for example, side wall portions 711a to 711d) of the first structure. The game ball can not enter into the internal space, the side wall portion is a wall standing up from the base plate, and the inner wall (for example, the inner wall 711 IW) of the side wall portion is the inner wall from the inner wall Wall without projections that project toward the A part of the outer wall of the side wall (for example, the outer wall 711 OW) is a flat side wall (for example, flat side wall 711FW) having a flat surface, and a first portion different from the flat side wall of the outer wall is a top (For example, the top portion 711T), and the thickness of the second portion in the planar side wall portion (for example, thickness t1d2 of the side wall portion 711d shown in FIG. 17) is the thickness at the first portion (for example, shown in FIG. The thickness is thinner than the thickness t1d0 of the top portion 711T continuous to the side wall portion 711d, and the rendering means is provided with a first rendering body (for example, a first rendering body 724), and the first rendering means At least a portion of the effect is located behind the first structure, and at least a portion of the first effect is transmitted through at least a portion of the first structure, Authorized by the player It is a game console characterized in that it is composed of

  According to such a configuration, while the strength of the resin structure 710 (for example, the first structure 711) that receives the game ball entering from the entry portion 730 is enhanced, the rendering body is provided behind the resin structure 710. In some cases, it may be possible to make the player visually recognize the effect executed by 728 (for example, the first effect body 724). By providing a resin structure 710 for receiving game balls coming in from the entry portion 730 instead of the ceiling nail, a rendering body (for example, the first rendering end 724) is disposed behind the resin structure 710. In some cases, it is possible to improve the decorativeness and perform various effects.

  On the other hand, when a resin structure is provided instead of the ceiling nail, it is necessary to secure the strength against the collision of the game ball, and as a countermeasure, a plurality of protrusions projecting to the inside (inner space side) of the side wall It is conceivable to provide a (reinforcing rib). However, since the resin structure is a structure that protrudes in the direction of the player, if a plurality of protrusions (reinforcing ribs) are provided on the inner side (inner space side) of the side wall of the resin structure, the resin structure is There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the back of the resin structure even when the case is made of a transparent resin material.

  In the present embodiment, by continuously changing the thickness of the side wall of the resin structure 710, the strength of the resin structure 710 is secured without providing a protrusion (a reinforcing rib or the like due to extreme unevenness) projecting to the inner space side. can do. As a result, the internal space of the resin structure 710 can be secured as wide as possible, so that the effect performed by the effect body 728 disposed behind the resin structure 710 can be viewed by the player through the resin structure 710. In this case, it can be avoided that the effect is difficult to see.

  In addition, when the game ball collides with the resin structure 710, the degree of repulsion of the game ball slightly changes depending on whether the collided part is the thick part or thin part of the side wall part, so in the repulsion direction of the game ball It may be possible to give variation.

  Further, a part of the outer wall of the side wall portion is a curved side wall portion (for example, a flat side wall portion 711FW) whose surface is curved, and the side wall portion is a plurality of the flat side wall portions (hereinafter referred to as “plural flat side wall portions And the side wall portion between two planar side wall portions of the plurality of planar side wall portions is the curved side wall portion, of the plurality of planar side wall portions. One planar side wall portion is a first planar side wall portion (for example, a planar side wall portion of the outer wall of the side wall portion 711b shown in FIG. 17), and one planar side wall portion of the plurality of planar side wall portions is Two planar side wall portions (for example, the planar side wall portion of the outer wall of the side wall portion 711d shown in FIG. 17), and the thickness of the second portion in the second planar side wall portion (for example, the side wall portion 711d shown in FIG. Thickness t 1 d 2) of the first flat side wall portion A third portion of the thickness (e.g., thickness t1b1 of the side wall portion 711b shown in FIG. 17) may be different thicknesses and.

  In addition, it has a transparent plate member (for example, the transparent plate member 118) covering the game area, the game ball can roll between the base plate and the transparent plate member, and the first structure is It is located between the base plate and the transparent plate member, and all of the plurality of planar side wall portions are connected to the side wall (for example, side wall 711e), and the side wall is connected to the side plate The tips of the plurality of planar side wall portions may be parallel to each other and protrude toward the player more than the side wall portions.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the strength of the resin structure 710 (for example, the first structure 711) while preventing a decrease in the visibility of the effect (the first effect). is there. That is, when the gaming ball collides with the side wall of the resin structure 710, the force is transmitted to the side wall through the side wall. Since the side wall portion is provided along the traveling direction of the game ball (parallel to the base plate), the force of the collision of the game ball can be received by the side wall portion, and the strength of the resin structure is improved. There are times when you can. Further, by causing the end on the player side of the plurality of planar side wall portions to protrude to the player side rather than the side wall portion, the junction between the side wall portion and the side wall portion is positioned closer to the center of the game ball colliding with the side wall portion. Since the power of the game ball transmitted through the side wall can be received at the end (nearby) of the side wall, there are cases where the strength can be further enhanced.

  Further, since the side wall portion protrudes to the transparent plate member 118 side, the side wall portion can surely prevent the progress of the game ball, and it may be used as a substitute for the nail which becomes an obstacle to the progress of the game ball. is there.

  In addition, the base plate is provided integrally with a second structure (for example, a second structure 712), and the second structure is provided between the entry portion and the ridge portion. The second structure is located before the game ball coming in from the entry portion comes into contact with the other structure when the firing strength of the firing means is the second firing strength. And the second structure has side walls (eg, side walls 712a to 712d), and the inner space is surrounded by the side walls of the second structure. It is comprised so that a game ball can not enter, The said side wall part is a wall which stands up from the said base plate, At least one part of the said 1st effect body is located behind the said 2nd structure. And since at least a portion of the second structure is transparent, Serial least a portion of the first effect body is visibly composed player, or may be.

  In addition, the effect means is provided with a second effect body (for example, a second effect body 726), and the second effect body is an effect body different from the first effect body. And

  One of the first effect body and the second effect body is an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the other effect body is a movable body for effect (for example, effect movable) Body 224).

  According to such a configuration, a variety of effects can be made, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  Further, the volume of the club space may be smaller than the volume of the gaming ball. The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the pachinko machine 100) includes a launcher (for example, the launcher 110) capable of firing game balls and a game area (for example, game area 124) in which the game balls can be rolled. , A game board (eg, game board 200) provided with the game area, rail means (eg, outer rail 202 and inner rail 204) surrounding the game area, and a hook portion (eg, hook portion 734) It is a game console provided with the presentation means (for example, presentation means 732 and the presentation member 740) provided, The game ball fired from the said launch means is the said game from the entry part (for example, the entry part 730) It is configured to enter the area, and the rendering means is provided in the area surrounded by the rail means, and the rendering means is provided with a base plate (for example, a base plate 736). What The base plate is fixed to the surface of the game board, and the base plate is provided integrally with a first structure (for example, a first structure 711). The first structure is located between the entry portion and the buttocks, and the first structure is configured in the case where the firing strength of the firing means is a first firing strength. The game ball which has entered from the entry section is provided at a position where the game ball comes in contact with the other structure before coming into contact with the other structure, and is surrounded by the side wall portion (for example, side wall portions 711a to 711d) of the first structure. The game ball can not enter into the internal space, the side wall portion is a wall standing up from the base plate, and the inner wall (for example, the inner wall 711 IW) of the side wall portion is the inner wall from the inner wall A wall that is not provided with a protrusion that protrudes toward the The display effect means is provided with a first effect body (for example, the first effect body 724), and at least a portion of the first effect body is positioned behind the first structure. Depending on the display mode of the first effect, a big hit may be made, and at least a portion of the first structure is transmitted to at least a portion of the first effect. Is configured to be visible from the player.

  According to such a configuration, a rendering body 728 (for example, the first rendering body 724) behind the resin structure 710 (for example, the first structure 711) that receives the game ball that has entered from the entry portion 730. There are cases where it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the effect executed by the player. By providing a resin structure 710 for receiving game balls coming in from the entry portion 730 instead of the ceiling nail, a rendering body (for example, the first rendering end 724) is disposed behind the resin structure 710. In some cases, it is possible to improve the decorativeness and perform various effects.

  On the other hand, when a resin structure is provided instead of the ceiling nail, it is necessary to secure the strength against the collision of the game ball, and as a countermeasure, a plurality of protrusions projecting to the inside (inner space side) of the side wall It is conceivable to provide a (reinforcing rib). However, since the resin structure is a structure that protrudes in the direction of the player, if a plurality of protrusions (reinforcing ribs) are provided on the inner side (inner space side) of the side wall of the resin structure, the resin structure is There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the back of the resin structure even when the case is made of a transparent resin material.

  In the present embodiment, since a protrusion (a reinforcing rib or the like due to extreme unevenness) protruding to the inner space side of the resin structure 710 is not provided, the inner space of the resin structure 710 can be secured as wide as possible. Thereby, when making the player visually recognize the effect which the effect body 728 arrange | positioned behind the resin structure 710 performs through the resin structure 710, it can avoid that the said effect becomes inconspicuous.

  Also, the resin structure 710 is provided at a position to receive the game ball that has entered from the entry portion 730 (ie, provided instead of the sky nail), and the player is required to adjust the vicinity of the resin structure 710 when adjusting the firing intensity. Watch closely. Since a big hit notice is performed behind such a resin structure 710, there is a possibility that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses the big hit notice and to improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, a part of the outer wall (for example, outer wall 711 OW) of the side wall part is a flat side wall part (for example, flat side wall part 711FW) whose surface is flat, and a part of the outer wall of the side wall part has a curved surface Curved side wall (e.g., planar side wall 711FW), the side wall including a plurality of the planar side walls (hereinafter referred to as "plural plane side walls"), and the plurality of planes The side wall portion between two planar side wall portions of the side wall portion is the curved side wall portion, and one planar side wall portion of the plurality of planar side wall portions is a first planar side wall portion (for example, The planar side wall portion of one of the plurality of planar side wall portions is a second planar side wall portion (for example, side wall portion 711 d shown in FIG. 17). A planar sidewall of the outer wall), said second planar sidewall The thickness of the second portion (for example, the thickness t1d2 of the side wall portion 711d shown in FIG. 17) is the thickness of the third portion of the first planar side wall portion (for example, the thickness t1b1 of the side wall portion 711b shown in FIG. The thickness may be different from).

  In addition, it has a transparent plate member (for example, the transparent plate member 118) covering the game area, the game ball can roll between the base plate and the transparent plate member, and the first structure is It is located between the base plate and the transparent plate member, and all of the plurality of planar side wall portions are connected to the side wall (for example, side wall 711e), and the side wall is connected to the side plate The tips of the plurality of planar side wall portions may be parallel to each other and protrude toward the player more than the side wall portions.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the strength of the resin structure 710 (for example, the first structure 711) while preventing a decrease in the visibility of the effect (the first effect). is there. That is, when the gaming ball collides with the side wall of the resin structure 710, the force is transmitted to the side wall through the side wall. Since the side wall portion is provided along the traveling direction of the game ball (parallel to the base plate), the force of the collision of the game ball can be received by the side wall portion, and the strength of the resin structure is improved. There are times when you can. Further, by causing the end on the player side of the plurality of planar side wall portions to protrude to the player side rather than the side wall portion, the junction between the side wall portion and the side wall portion is positioned closer to the center of the game ball colliding with the side wall portion. Since the power of the game ball transmitted through the side wall can be received at the end (nearby) of the side wall, there are cases where the strength can be further enhanced.

  Further, since the side wall portion protrudes to the transparent plate member 118 side, the side wall portion can surely prevent the progress of the game ball, and it may be used as a substitute for the nail which becomes an obstacle to the progress of the game ball. is there.

  In addition, the base plate is provided integrally with a second structure (for example, a second structure 712), and the second structure is provided between the entry portion and the ridge portion. The second structure is located before the game ball coming in from the entry portion comes into contact with the other structure when the firing strength of the firing means is the second firing strength. And the second structure has side walls (eg, side walls 712a to 712d), and the inner space is surrounded by the side walls of the second structure. It is comprised so that a game ball can not enter, The said side wall part is a wall which stands up from the said base plate, At least one part of the said 1st effect body is located behind the said 2nd structure. And since at least a portion of the second structure is transparent, Serial least a portion of the first effect body is visibly composed player, or may be.

  In addition, the effect means is provided with a second effect body (for example, a second effect body 726), and the second effect body is an effect body different from the first effect body. And

  One of the first effect body and the second effect body is an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the other effect body is a movable body for effect (for example, effect movable) Body 224).

  According to such a configuration, a variety of effects can be made, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  The first effect (for example, the lens body 760 shown in FIG. 27) is movable in the front-rear direction, and the first effect is at a first position (for example, FIG. 28 (a) (1) and a second position (for example, the position in FIG. 28 (b-1)), which is movable from one to the other, the second position being the first position At least one portion (hereinafter, referred to as “second portion (for example, a tip portion of the convex portion 762 e)”) of the first effect body located at the position before the position and located at the second position is: It may be located in the internal space.

  In addition, light emitting means (for example, an LED substrate 748, LED 748L) are provided behind the first structure and the second portion, and at least a part of the light of the light emitting means corresponds to the second portion and the light A display mode of the first effect body according to claim 1, which is configured to be transmitted through both of the first structures and released to the front side of the game board (for example, the game board 200); According to, “presence of a big hit is performed” may be that the first effect body is located at the second position.

  Further, the first effect body may be capable of executing a customer waiting demonstration effect.

  Further, the volume of the club space may be smaller than the volume of the gaming ball. The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, instead of the conventional ceiling nail, the first structure body 711 and the first structure body 711 are resin moldings in which the thickness of a part of the side wall portion is different in the embedded region 701 (or its vicinity). The second structure 712 (resin structure 710) is disposed. Since the resin structure 710 is formed of a transparent or translucent member, it may be possible for the player to be able to visually recognize the effect body 728 disposed behind the resin structure 710. Further, by varying the thickness of a part of the side wall portion of the resin structure 710, the degree of repulsion when the gaming ball collides with the resin structure 710 can be made different, and it is delicate in the falling direction of the gaming ball. It may be possible to give change.

  In addition, by making the thickness of the side wall (part thereof) having a low possibility of the game ball colliding to be thinner than the thickness of the side wall (part thereof) in which the game ball is highly likely to collide, the resin structure 710 In some cases, it is possible to expand the inner space and to make it easier to visually recognize the rendering object 728 placed behind it.

  In addition, since the thin portion of the side wall portion is more easily bent than the thick portion, the ball clogging may be able to be eliminated even if the gaming balls are concentrated in the vicinity thereof.

  Also, for example, by providing the first structural body 711 and the second structural body 712 apart from each other without providing a head nail in the pop-up area 701, the position to be aimed by the player (the pop-up area 701) can be obtained. There are cases where it can be made easy for the player to recognize.

  In addition, the number of nails to be driven into the game board 200 may be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the side wall portions 711 e and 712 e may have, for example, a seal attached to the inner wall (the inner space side wall) and / or the outer wall (the player side wall), and secondary processing ) Or a lens cut may be applied. In addition, an opening (a hole) or a slit may be provided in part of the lateral wall portions 711 e and 712 e.

  The side walls 711a to 711d may have, for example, a seal attached to the inner wall (the inner space side wall) and / or the outer wall (the player side wall), and perform secondary processing (modeling) or lens cutting And so on. In addition, an opening (a hole) or a slit may be provided in part of the side wall 711a to 711d.

  Further, the side wall portions 712a to 712d may attach, for example, a seal to the inner wall (the inner space side wall) and / or the outer wall (the player side wall), and perform secondary processing (modeling) or lens cutting And so on. In addition, an opening (a hole) or a slit may be provided in part of the side walls 712a to 712d.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resin structure 710 is disposed at or in the vicinity of the insertion region 701 has been described as an example, but the resin structure 710 may be disposed in the vicinity of an electric chew, an attacker, or the like.

  Also, although the resin structure 710 has been described by way of example as a structure integrally molded with the rendering member (center case) 740, the resin structure 710 is molded separately from the rendering member 740. After that, it may be attached to the effect member 740. In addition, parts such as a windmill may be attached to the resin structure 710.

  Further, the material of the resin structure 710 is not limited to polycarbonate, but may be ABS resin, a mixed material of polycarbonate and ABS resin, or the like.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the game board 200 is disposed behind the resin structure 710 (at least a part of which is transparent), and the effect body 728 (the illumination unit 744 and the decorative symbol display device 208) via the game board 200. Although the configuration in which is disposed is described as an example, the opening (router) of the game board 200 may be located behind the resin structure 710 so that the effect body 728 may be visually recognized through the router.

  Further, the outer wall 711 OW of the first structure 711 may have a curved side wall 711 RW in addition to the curved side wall 711 RW including the top 711 T. That is, the curved side wall 711RW may be provided instead of or in part of the flat side wall 711FW in the above-described embodiment. In addition, a part or all of the inner wall 711 IW of the first structure 711 may be the flat side wall portion FW. Further, all the outer walls of the first structural body 711 may be flat side wall portions 711FW, and the top portion 711T in that case is a corner portion (inner corner portion) of 180 degrees or less.

  Further, the outer wall 712 OW of the second structure 712 may have a curved side wall 712 RW in addition to the curved side wall 712 RW including the top 712 T. That is, the curved side wall 712RW may be provided instead of or in part of the flat side wall 712FW in the above-described embodiment. In addition, a part or all of the inner wall 712IW of the second structure 712 may be a curved side wall 712RW. Further, all the outer walls of the first structural body 711 may be flat side wall portions 711FW, and the top portion 712T in that case is a corner portion (inner corner portion) of 180 degrees or less.

  Further, each of the resin structures 710 may be transparent, translucent, colored, patterned, etc., or may be a composite thereof. In addition, a part of the resin structure 710 may be opaque.

  Also, a nail may be present between any of the barb 734, the first structure 711 and the second structure 712.

  Also, three or more resin structures 710 may be provided. Furthermore, a hole, a slit, a notch, or the like may be provided in the side wall portion or the lateral wall portion of the resin structure 710.

  In addition, the light emitting unit of the illumination unit 744 may be disposed behind the resin structure 710 as a first effect body 724.

  Further, the jackpot notice performed by the first director 724 may be a notice that expects a jackpot as well as a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice), or may be a prefetch notice.

  Further, the outer walls 711 OW and 712 OW of the resin structure 710 may be provided with a bounce preventing means (a protrusion or the like) for preventing the bounce of the game ball.

  In addition, the front wall of the side wall portion (ceiling portion) or the side wall portion of the plurality of resin structures 710 (the first structure 711 and the second structure 712) or the player side (i.e., the front frame of the resin structure 710) A transparent decorative plate may be provided which straddles the portion closest to the transparent plate member 118 provided on the door 106. The transparent decorative board is a molded board made of a transparent or translucent resin so that the player can visually recognize the back of the transparent decorative board.

  In addition, the transparent decorative plate may be provided so as to straddle the resin structure 710 and the collar portion 734. In this case, the transparent decorative board is straddled between the player's side tip of the side wall (ceiling part) or side wall of the resin structure 710 and the tip of the brim 734 on the player's side. It is preferable to provide them as follows.

  In addition, other components may not be attached to the resin structure 710 by fastening members (fixing members) such as screws.

  Further, the resin structure 710 may not have a component separate from the resin structure 710.

  In addition, in the final symbol variation game in the power support state (also referred to as a short time state, a common figure high probability state) performed for a predetermined number of times, the LED that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the back side is made to blink It is also good.

  Further, in a final symbol variation game in a definite variation state (special figure high probability state) performed over a predetermined number of times, an LED that illuminates the resin structure 710 from the rear side may be made to blink.

  Further, the inner wall of the side wall portion of the resin structure 710 may be provided with a protrusion which protrudes from the inner wall toward the inner space.

  Further, the thickness of the side wall portion of the resin structure 710 may be constant.

  Furthermore, although the case where the lens body 760 moves back and forth and the case where the light emitting unit 748 (light emitting unit) including the lens body 760 and the LED 748L moves back and forth are illustrated in FIGS. (A unit configured so that there is no transparent body between the LED 748L and the resin structure 710) may be moved (in the movement mode described) in the direction described using FIG. 28, FIG. 29, etc. The LED 748L may move to the inside of the resin structure 710, the inside of the base plate 736, or the like.

  In addition, the volume of the internal space of the resin structure 710 may be smaller than the volume of the gaming ball.

  In addition, the area when the internal space of the resin structure 710 is cut in a direction parallel to the base plate 736 may be smaller than the area of the game ball, or two game balls or three game balls, It may be small.

  In addition, at least a part of the first effect body 724 may be configured to be located in front of the base plate 736 and in the internal space.

  Moreover, one display mode in the display mode of the effect performed by the first effect body 724 is as before the above-mentioned light emitting unit is driven to the front side, and another display mode is as follows: The above-mentioned light emitting unit is driven to the front side, and the first effect body 724 and the second effect body 726 may be separate from the effect means.

  In addition, the positions of the first structure 711 and the second structure 712 are such that the game ball entering from the entry portion 730 does not contact other devices, and the first structure 711 and the second structure 712 As long as it may be in the position where it may touch, it may be any position.

  In addition, at least a part of the rendering means 732 may be provided outside the area surrounded by the rail means (for example, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204).

  Further, the base plate 736 may be fixed at a position other than the surface of the game board 200, or fixed at both of the position of the surface of the game board 200 and the position other than the surface of the game board 200. May be

  In addition, at least a part of the rendering means 732 may be provided outside the area surrounded by the rail means (for example, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204).

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention (for example, the pachinko machine 100) includes a launcher (for example, the launcher 110) capable of firing game balls, and a game area (for example, game area 124) where the game balls can roll. The game board (for example, the game board 200) provided with the game area, the rendering means (for example, the rendering means 732, the rendering member 740) provided with the buttocks, and the rendering part (for example, the lens body 620, convex) A game platform having a unit 762, a light emitting means 748), the gaming ball being fired from the firing means being configured to enter the game area from an entering portion (for example, the entering portion 730) The effect means is a means provided on the game board, the effect means is a means provided with a bedboard (eg, bedplate 736), and the bedplate is a surface of the game board Fixed to the The plate is provided with a first structure (for example, a first structure 711), and is surrounded by the side walls (for example, side walls 711a, 711b, 711c, 711d) of the first structure. The game ball can not enter into the inner space, and the game ball entering from the entering portion contacts the buttock when the firing strength of the firing means is the first firing strength. It is configured to come into contact with the side wall in the front, and the gaming ball can not enter into the internal space of the first structure, and at least a part of the effect portion (hereinafter referred to as “first The portion (for example, the tip of the convex portion 762 shown in FIGS. 28 to 30 and the portion provided with the light emitter 748L of the light emitting means 748 in FIGS. 30B and 30C) is Configured to be located in the internal space, And transmit at least a portion of the serial first structure, at least part of the rendering unit is configured to be viewed from the player, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  The effect part may be fixed so as not to move, and the first part may be a part always located in the internal space.

  In addition, depending on the display mode of the effect section, there may be a case where a big hit notice is given.

  Further, the effect unit may be a first effect body (for example, a first effect body 724) provided in the effect means.

  In addition, the first effect body has a first position (for example, the position of the recess 762 in FIG. 28A-1 or 29D, the position of the light emitter 748L in FIG. 30A), and It is possible to move from one of the two positions (for example, the position of the recess in FIG. 28 (a-2) or 29 (e), the position of the light emitter 748L in FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (c)) to the other. The second position is a position different from the first position, and the first portion is the second position when the first position is at the second position. It may be configured to be located in the internal space.

  In addition, when the first effect body is located at the first position (for example, the position of the recess 762 in FIG. 29D), the first portion (recess 762 in FIG. 29D) is It may be configured to be located in the internal space.

  In addition, “at least a part of the effect part (hereinafter referred to as“ first part ”) is configured to be located in the internal space” according to claim 1, “the effect part” At least a part of (hereinafter, referred to as “first part”) may be configured to be located in the inner space.

  Further, when the first effect body is located at the first position (for example, the position of the light emitter 748L of FIG. 30A), the light emission of the first portion (for example, FIG. 30A) The body 748L) may be configured not to be located in the internal space.

  Further, the position in the front-rear direction of the first part (for example, the surface of the light emitter 748L shown in FIG. 30B) is a position behind the position in the front-rear direction of the surface of the base plate It may be a position forward of the position in the front-rear direction of the back surface.

  The position in the front-rear direction of the first portion (for example, the surface of the light emitter 748L shown in FIG. 30C) may be a position ahead of the position in the front-rear direction of the surface of the base plate.

  In addition, the volume of the internal space may be smaller than the volume of the gaming ball.

  In addition, the base plate is integrally provided with a second structure (for example, the second structure 712), and the inside space surrounded by the side wall of the second structure is A part of the second structure (hereinafter referred to as "the second part") is located between the first structure and the buttocks so that the ball can not enter. And the second structure is in a position where the game ball coming in from the entry portion comes in contact with the buttocks when the launch intensity of the launch means is the second launch intensity. Provided so that a part of a second effect (for example, a second effect 726) is located in the inner space of the second structure, and the second portion The game ball may be configured to be contactable.

  The base plate may be provided with the first structure integrally.

  Further, the effect part may be separate from the base plate.

  Moreover, the said presentation part may be provided with the light-emitting body (for example, LED748L).

  Further, the effect part may be a decorative part that decorates the game board.

  The decorative portion may be a seal attached to the inner surface of the first structure.

  In addition, in the case where the launch strength of the launch means is the first launch strength, the gaming ball coming from the entry section may contact the buttocks after contacting the side wall. .

  Further, the first structure may be configured to include a lateral wall (for example, a lateral wall 711 e).

  In addition, the first structure body is configured to include a lateral wall, and the inner surface of the side wall is not provided with a protrusion protruding from the inner surface toward the internal space except for the lateral wall. It may be

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

In the embodiment and various examples (modifications) described so far, all or part of each configuration is combined or replaced with each other (for example, behind the second resin structure 712). It is possible to implement one of all the first rendering bodies 724 described above, etc.).
Second Embodiment

  Hereinafter, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described using the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launch device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured in a frame shape Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage which can store a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “ball”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guides the gaming balls to the launch device 110 The upper plate 126 provided with the lower plate 128, the lower plate 128 storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the operation of the player are discharged to the lower plate 128 A ball extraction button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player to the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box), and the firing device 110 by the operation of the player And a ball emission handle 134 for launching the guided game ball into the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a channel for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 37) by the operation of the player. With respect to a card unit (CR unit) and a setting operation unit 137 in which various settings can be made by the operation of a setter (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), a chance button lamp 138 for emitting a button 136 and a chance button 136 A ball rental operation button 140 for instructing a ball rental, a return operation button 142 for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance, a ball rental display unit for displaying the player's balance and the status of the card unit Not shown). Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and the confirmation (OK) button, the upper button located above the confirmation button, the lower button located below the confirmation button, and the confirmation It has a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 also includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and an operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 39) by the operation of the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 38 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 37 as viewed from the rear side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, and is located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, and the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 40). The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and effects related to processing based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 A first sub-board housing a first sub-board 160 that comprises a first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing and a rotary-type volume adjustment switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game clerk A second sub-board case 166 for housing a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control part 500 that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control part 400 and a substrate case 162; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls and that releases an error by an operation of a game clerk 68. A payout substrate case 172 housing the payout substrate 170, a launch substrate case 176 housing the launch substrate 174 constituting the launch control unit 630 for performing control processing on launch of the game ball, and various electric gaming machines And a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like. 156 and the first sub substrate 160 etc. and the hall computer etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, etc. are provided on the back of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the firing board 174, the power board 182 etc. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 39 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a so-called game board for a right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, the falling path of the gaming ball is divided into the right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and the left path on the left side of the rendering device 206 by changing the launch strength of the gaming ball by operating the ball emission handle 134 be able to. In this example, to the normal symbol starting opening 228, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the first special symbol starting opening 230, the second special symbol starting opening 232 (opened state), the variable winning opening 234, 235 (opened state) etc. The ease of entering the ball is different between the game ball falling on the right path and the game ball falling on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235 are arranged on the right path Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, with respect to each of the normal symbol starting opening 228, the first special symbol starting opening 230 and the variable winning opening 234, the game of falling on the left path by the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nail 238 and the warp device 242 etc. Entry of balls is relatively easy, and entry of gaming balls falling on the right path is relatively difficult. Although the right-handed machine is described as an example in the present embodiment, it may be other than the right-handed machine.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying a decorative symbol and various images (moving images or still images) used for effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In the lower part of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, and a second special symbol holding lamp 220 The normal symbol hold lamp 216 and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are disposed. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure", a special symbol as "special symbol", a first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special view, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7 segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later) pending, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number (for example, four) of common drawing fluctuation games are displayed. It is possible to put on hold. The special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure variation games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation game is specified. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, around the rendering device 206, predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, 229, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and variable The winning openings 234 and 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry of balls into the general winning openings 226 (general winning openings 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are referred to as balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "winning balls") and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as "rented balls" There are cases) and.

  The general drawing start port 228 and the general drawing start port 229 are devices, which are called gates and through chuckers, for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and the present embodiment In the embodiment, one common drawing start port 228 is disposed on the left side path of the game board 200, and one common drawing start port 229 is disposed on the right side path. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the general drawing start port 228 or the general drawing start port 229 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 or the drawing start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the special opening 1 start opening 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as an award ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 1 display device 212 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 1 variation game") is started. The ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed on the right path. The special figure 2 start opening 232 has a pair of wing members 232a which can be opened and closed from side to side, and while the wing members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and win a common drawing fluctuation game, and a common drawing display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the special opening 2 start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 2 display device 214 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 2 variation game") is started. In addition, the ball entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right route. There is only one in the house. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 respectively include openable and closable door members, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door members are closed. For example, when the special figure display device wins the special figure variation game and the special figure display device stops and displays the symbol, one of the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing) Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 1.5 seconds). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The ball entering the variable winning openings 234 and 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the 146 and the firing rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) Won the start opening (special figure 1 start opening 230, special figure 2 start opening 232) or without winning any winning opening or start opening, or just out of passing the common drawing start opening 228, 229 The mouth 240 is reached.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Warp devices 242 (242a and 242b) and a front stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect device 206, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the non-rollable area of the game ball. It is arranged. In addition, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying a fourth symbol is disposed on the upper right side of the effect movable body 224. The fourth symbol display 248 is provided with two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged in tandem. For example, LEDs are used as light sources of the two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to Special Figure 1 and the lower lamp corresponds to Special Figure 2. Note that the fourth symbol display device 248 may have only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth pattern may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as in this example, the fourth symbol display device may be provided in the rendering device 206 (center product). Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, from the warp outlet 242b to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206. The front stage 244 is capable of rolling balls etc. that are run over by the balls discharged from the warp outlet 242 b and the nails of the game board 200 etc. In the central part of the front stage 244, the passed balls are special opening 1 start opening There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter 230.

  The effect movable body 224 in this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is vertically movable in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown).

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a bottom flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, such as the special view 1 display device 212 or the special view 2 display device 214, and a predetermined view A display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the common view hold lamp 216, special view 1 hold lamp 218, special view 2 hold lamp 220, high Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by two-way communication.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driver circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and output from the speaker 120 The volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 40) for adjusting the volume to be set, the operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors A sensor circuit 428 to output to the basic circuit 402 and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of the reading data, etc. VRAM436, connects the.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from power supply control unit 660 to payout control unit 600 and second sub-control unit 500, and main control unit 300, second sub-control unit 500, and firing control from payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (d). The types of figures and figures will be described. Fig.41 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1, FIG.41 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2. As shown in FIG. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When it passes, the special figure 2 display 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 The process until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol change stop display according to the present embodiment, and the stop symbol form of the special view 1 or 2 is displayed after the start of the “variable view of the special view 1 or 2”. A series of display until it is done is called symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 41 (a), seven types of special views of "special view A" to "special view G" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of the special view 1. In FIG. 41 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "special figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "special figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether or not a special big hit and the number of rounds are performed by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is a difference in whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game, after the end of the 7R special big hit game and after the end of the 7R big hit game, all transition to the time saving state (power support state). The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. 15R special big hit symbol "Special figure A" and 7R special big hit symbol "Special figure B" is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game and is 7R big hit symbol "Special figure C" is a symbol which becomes a special figure low probability common figure high probability state after the end of a big hit game. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B", and "special drawing C" are symbols whose advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and it is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R, and "special figure B" which is 7R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit design called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when "special view E" is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability regular view low probability state, the special view high probability regular view low probability state (so-called so-called high probability game after the open time 100 ms × 2 R) Transition to the latent probability change state, and when “Special figure E” is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special figure low probability regularity figure low probability state, the special figure high probability regularity popularity after the big hit game (opening time 29000ms × 2R) ends The state is shifted to the drawing high probability state (see FIGS. 47A and 47B). That is, the "special figure E" is an operation during the big hit game and the gaming state which is shifted thereafter by the gaming state when the stop display is displayed (in this example, whether it is the special figure low probability general drawing low probability state or not). It is a different pattern.

  "Special figure F" is a small hit design, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, “special figure G” is a removal symbol, and is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small.

  In FIG. 41 (b), four types of special views, “special view a” to “special view d”, are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation stop display of the special view 2. "Special figure a" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "special figure b" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, "special figure c" is a 7R jackpot symbol, and "special figure d" is a detached symbol. In the present embodiment, as the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, while seven special figures (of which five are the big hit) of "special figure A" to "special figure G" are used, As the stop symbol form of the four special figures of “special figure a” to “special figure d” (of which three kinds are big hit) are used. By configuring in this way, it may be possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of becoming a big hit and the probability of becoming a definite change in the big hit. In this example, the jackpot of Toku-zu 1 contains a sudden definite change or latent definite change which can hardly be obtained, while the jackpot of Toku-zu 2 does not contain a definite change or latent definite change. The advantage of the special figure 2 is higher than the advantage of the special figure 1.

  FIG. 41 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. “Decoration 1” to “decoration 9” and “decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, “decoration” is switched in the order of “decoration 1” “decoration 2” “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", 7R special jackpot of "special figure B", 7R jackpot of "special figure C", 15R special jackpot of "special figure a", 7R special jackpot of "special figure b" When notifying the 7R big hit of "special figure c", the symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" or "decor 2-" Stop display of decoration 2-decoration 2 etc.). When explicitly notifying 15R special big hit of "Special figure A" or 15R special big hit of "Special figure a", the symbol combination (for example, "decor 3-decor 3- Stop display of decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "and the like.

  In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called "Tokuku E" (hidden probability change) or a small hit of "Toku F", "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Do. In the case of notifying 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of “special figure D”, “decoration 1 – decoration 3 – decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the release of "special figure G" and "special figure d", the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop and display symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG.

  FIG.41 (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" and "general drawing B" which are hit symbols, and "common drawing C" which is a detached pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 and the drawing start port 229, the drawing display device 210 displays all the seven segments and the central one. Repeat the lighting of the segment of the "general display of the fluctuation display". And, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general diagram A" or the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when the notification of the spread diagram fluctuating game is notified, the "general diagram C" is stopped and displayed. Do. Also in FIG. 41 (d), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If it is less than (in this example, 9 V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. If the power supply status information is not information indicating suspension, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power supply status information is information indicating suspension, all 1 byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to the 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a transmission information storage area is provided. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command representing that the power has been restored, and is described later. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The normal recovery command is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, initial values of four random number counters for generating a common drawing win random value, a common drawing random value, a special drawing 1 random value, and a special drawing 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating the random number value for determining the common drawing fluctuation time and the random value for determining the special drawing fluctuation time are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a random value for determining a common drawing fluctuation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination provided in the RAM 308 1 is added to the above value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated by a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this example), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start at a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process abnormality is not detected) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this example). In this case (in this example, restart is performed once in about 2 ms which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning if the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of false detection and noise of the ball detection sensor.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last, detection signal from last time, presence of current detection signal) Information to indicate that the general prize opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special view 1 start opening 230, and the special view 2 start opening 232, or the common view start opening 228 , 229 is determined to have been passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234, and 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, and 229. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal immediately before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed, and in the next step S209, basic random number updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value and the general drawing are used in the main control unit 300. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random value value, and the special figure 2 random value value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round is next next while setting it in the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. Also, apart from the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value next makes one round, the random number counter for generating the common drawing random value, Special figure 1 random number value generation The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the random number counter for and the random number counter for generating a special number 2 random number value has made one rotation. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random number value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234, 235 and starting openings 230, 232, 228, 229 are awarded, the winning balls provided in RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening are provided. The value of the number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not special drawing 1 start opening 230, special drawing 2 start opening 232, common drawing start openings 228 and 229, and variable winning openings 234 and 235 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When there is a prize in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 start opening 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special figure 1 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 1 from the special figure 1 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (1) Obtain a random number value and store it in the special order 1 random number value storage area in order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 holdings decreases, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair of the holding order is the highest (first) is deleted. And the holding order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value value set is processed to be advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 1 reservations increases, the special order 1 is new to the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair in the lowest order (last). Data of a combination of the winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value is written.

  When there is a prize in special drawing 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special drawing 2 reservation number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to special drawing 2 starting opening 232 of random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 Then, it is stored in the acquisition order in the special figure 2 random value storage area. A set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the special order 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value pair data are deleted each time the number of special figure 2 holding numbers decreases by one, and the remaining data It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value set is advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations increases, the special figure 2 winning random number value is new to the next pending order of the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest pending order. And, the data of the special figure 2 random number value set is written.

  In addition, special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number value) or special figure 2 start information (set of special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random value) was newly acquired. In the case, the special drawing prefetch process is executed using the start information. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later.

  If the common drawing start port 228 or the common drawing start port 229 has a prize, and the corresponding common drawing reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the common drawing selection random number value generating random number counter The random number value is acquired as a winning random number value, and the common-mode random number value is acquired from the random number counter for general-purpose random number value generation provided in the RAM 308, and stored in the general-purpose random number storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random number value in the common drawing random number storage area is stored by the same number as the common drawing reservation number stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area. In the common drawing random number storage area, every time the common drawing reservation number decreases by one, the data of the combination of the common drawing random number and the common drawing random value of the highest rank (first) is erased and It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random value set is incremented by one. In addition, whenever the number of popular drawing reservations increases by one, a new common drawing winning random value and the next pending order of the data of the combination of the lowest drawing (last) common drawing winning random value and the common drawing random value Data of a set of common-mode random number values is written. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 234. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 235, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 235 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  In addition, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the common drawing hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is turned on / off to control the common view display mode, and when the common view hit flag is off, the common view display so as to become the display mode of the out-of-round symbol The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 is any one of a hit symbol (a common-diagram A or a common-diagram B shown in FIG. 41 (d)) and a detached symbol (a common-diagram C shown in FIG. 41 (d)). Make a final display of the symbol of. After that, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for maintaining a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Also, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while the general drawing operation is being set, the predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening and closing solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) of the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 A signal for holding 232 a in an open state is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms) A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held. It is executed using the combination of the first common drawing win random value and the common drawing random value in the common drawing random number storage area as a start condition that is 1 or more.

  The main control unit 300 acquires common drawing start information (a pair of common drawing win random value and common drawing random value) from the earliest (most stored) reservation position in the common drawing random value storage area, A table for determining whether to pass or not stored in the ROM 306 based on the common drawing win random number value in the common drawing start information acquired and the value of the common drawing probability fluctuation flag in the RAM 308 (FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b) Use the reference) to decide whether to win or lose. Next, main control unit 300 determines the common drawing determination table (FIG. 45 (c) shown in FIG. 45C) stored in ROM 306 based on the common drawing random number value in the acquired common drawing start information and the determined success or failure determination result. Use the hour movement table (see table) to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display of the common drawing. Next, the main control unit 300 uses, for example, various tables (for example, timer number selection not shown) stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, and the acquired random number value for common drawing fluctuation time determination. The variable display time (timer number) of the common drawing is determined using the table), and the variable display time is stored in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the common drawing fluctuation display time.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first drawing-up start information from the drawing random number storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the first drawing-general drawing start information from the drawing random number storage area and stores the common drawing reserve number. Subtract 1 from the number of general drawing reservations for the area. At this time, the general drawing start information extracted from the general drawing random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the general drawing start information stored in the temporary area. It is also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets a common drawing per shot flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON if the result of judgment is hit (winning), and sets a common drawing per shot flag to off when the result of judgment is non-winning.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 7R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, out flag, special figure probability change flag, and common drawing probability change flag. . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on 41B shows the special figure a, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability change flag is on, the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability change flag is off. If the special figure c, the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off drive control so as to become the respective special figure d modes, Fig. 2 Make settings to indicate that stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs finalized display of any one of the special view a to special view d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability variations stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability variations, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation flag Turn off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or Solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235 (until the game ball of predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234, 235) A signal for holding the door member in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235, and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening and closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2 in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1). In the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing, it waits for the period which is displaying the image which notifies the player that the big hit by the decoration symbol display device 208 is finished In the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating an effect waiting period is set. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234, 235 during the big hit game, a lot of special figure 2 start hole 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during a big hit as game balls enter and there is a large number of game balls and the euphorism is increased, and this is to solve this.

  In addition, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the number of probability variations (for example, 10000) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol form of the special figure 2, the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the timing shown in FIG. In the special figure 1 status update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, 7R big hit flag is on, if the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, When the chart probability change flag is on, the special view D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special view probability change flag is on, the common view probability change flag is off, the special view E, the small hit flag is on In the special figure F, when the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED which configures the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to turn on / off the control so that it becomes each aspect of the special figure G, the setting area of the RAM 308 To special figure 1 stop To set indicating that it is an Informational codes. By performing this control in the special view 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special view 1 display device 212 performs final display of any one of the special view A to special view G symbols. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) with high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) with low degree of advantage. . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Or a small hit (in the present example, a small hit can be selected only in the special figure 1) using the hit / fail determination table (see FIGS. 46 (a) to (d) described later) stored in Make a decision (whether or not to accept or reject). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 start information acquired and the special figure determination table (FIG. 47 (a), After the variable display of the special figure 2 (refer to the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 48 (a)), the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area 2 The number of reserved numbers in the storage area is decremented by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of Special figure 2 fluctuation game and Special figure 1 fluctuation game, starting mouth winning a prize which starts special figure fluctuation game which depends on the special figure 1 and special figure 2 each reservation in starting point the winning opening It may be forward variation. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the practical upper limit of the number of reservations.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or may be configured to display a plurality of special drawing lottery results in one area. Moreover, when the change regarding several special figures is performed simultaneously, you may influence the lottery result of the special figure which stops a fluctuation | variation by the lottery result of the special drawing which stopped the fluctuation | variation previously.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in the present embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Etc. and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as a command type, a symbol fluctuation start command and a symbol fluctuation stop command concerning a common drawing are also included.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is a special figure start symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlying flags, values such as special figure probability change flags, special drawing related lottery processing In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it contains information indicating the timer number etc. selected in and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outliers flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the start command and end effect start command, information including the value of the special figure probability variation flag etc., and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. I have included it. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 It includes information indicating presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, command data indicating the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol etc stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Included in

  If the command type is a symbol drawing start (rotation start) command of a common drawing, the command data is a per common drawing flag, a common drawing departure flag, a common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a common drawing related lottery process. Information including the information on the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the common drawing, information indicating the value of the common drawing per-flag, the common drawing deviation flag, the common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc. To be included.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 as command data, special figure 1 related lottery process and special value 2 setting information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the common view display device 210 and special figure 1 display through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special view 2 display device 214, the various status display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 42 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 44 (a) is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetching process executed in the winning a prize accepting process (step S217). In the special view pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information (newly acquired start information) increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The determination is made, and the preliminary determination result (the special-figure look-ahead result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see (b) to (e) in FIG. 44) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information of the special view 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 has increased is, for example, the special view 2 pending number stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and the special view 2 reserved count count storage area. Figure 2 compare with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 has increased when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is equal to the special view 2 look-ahead count It is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased. The determination as to whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased is, as in the case of the special view 2, for example, the special view 1 reserve count stored in the special view 1 reserve count storage area and the special view 1 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit timer division is completed. The processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the loading process.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not non-power-supply is in progress, it may be determined in step S309 whether the execution condition of the special view 1 advance warning notification is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is previously determined prior to the success or failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, prefetching is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 2, and pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 1 except during power supply. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 that have been increased. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-read result.

  (B) to (e) of FIG. 44 illustrate a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 44B shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of the special view 1 fluctuation game . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 44 (b), "special figure G" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure G" as the stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 3", and "special figure A" as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 44C shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 44 (c), the special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of the special view 2 fluctuation game . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 44 (c), "special figure d" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and the stopping symbol is stored in the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4". Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG.44 (c), the state which stop symbol information is not memorize | stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 44D shows an example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit during power support. As shown in FIG. 44 (d), “not determined” information is stored in the storage area “pending 1” instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (e), in each storage area of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit, not the stop symbol information but the “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special view 1 change game is the pre-reading result It may be stored as In the example shown in FIG. 44 (e), "Timer 3" is stored as timer number information in the storage area "Hold 1", and "Timer 5" is stored as timer number information in the memory area "Hold 2", The timer number information is not stored in the storage areas "pending 3" and "pending 4". In FIG. 44 (e), the state in which the timer number information is not stored is described as "none". When timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special view 1 pre-fetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set to correspond to the pass / fail result.

  In the above description, the stop symbol and the timer number are determined in advance, and the stop symbol information and the timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the pass / fail determination result is determined in advance and the information is prefetched It may be stored in the result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as pre-reading result information.

  Next, various tables used by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. The various tables shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b) show an example of a success / failure determination table used when making a success / failure determination in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success or failure determination table shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B is configured by items of “normal drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure result”. The item “common drawing probability” indicates a common drawing probability (common drawing low probability or common drawing high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item "random number range" indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired common drawing winning random value. Here, the possible range of the common drawing winning random value of this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 45 (a) is a success / failure determination table for common use, which is used when the common drawing probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 45 (a), when this validity determination table is used, the probability of hitting is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 45 (b) is a success / failure determination table for general drawing, which is used when the drawing probability at the time of the success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of hitting is approximately 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of losing is 0%. Comparing this success / failure determination table with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 45A, the probability of hitting is 100 times. As described above, it may be designed such that only the hit is selected in the general drawing high probability state (during time reduction operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% in the short-time operation, but in the short-time operation, the probability that the hit is selected is higher than that in the short-time non-operation state (generally low probability state).

  FIG. 45 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hit operation for drawing. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is compared with the common drawing random number value when determining the stop symbol in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223), the distribution ratio of random number range for each design (ie Shows the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 45 (c), when the success or failure determination result of the common drawing variation game is a hit, the distribution ratio of the respective symbols is 50% of the common drawing A and 50% of the common drawing B. The common drawings A and B are symbols for which the electric thu open operation is executed after the common drawing fluctuation game. In addition, since the disappointing symbol selected when the success or failure judgment result is disassembly is only one of the map C, the map C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of the disassembly. When the drawing C is selected, the electric chow opening operation is not executed after the drawing fluctuation game.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (c), the opening operation of the special view 2 start port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the normal view A is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is not active, the wing member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. Do. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is a short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for only 1800 ms, and then It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the opening operation of the special figure 2 start opening (electric chow) 232 is executed after the ordinary figure B is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of the stop display in the general view B is not short, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is opened only for 100 ms only once. When the gaming state at the stop display of the common figure B is short time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, and then opened for only 1450 ms, again It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1450 ms.

  46 (a) to 46 (d) show an example of a table for determining a success or failure to be used in the determination of whether or not special drawing 2 related lottery processing (step S229) or special drawing 1 related lottery processing (step S231) is performed. There is. The success or failure determination table shown in FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (d) is configured by items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates the special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of the success or failure determination. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random number value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible ranges of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 1 winning random number value of this example are 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65,536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 46A is a success or failure determination table for special view 1 that is used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when this qualification table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536) and the probability of small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 /). 65536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 46B is a success or failure determination table for special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 46 (b), when this qualification table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of small hit is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 46A, the probability of big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of small hit is the same.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 46C is a success or failure determination table for special view 2 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 46 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of a small hit is zero.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 46D is a success or failure determination table for special view 2 used when the special view probability at the time of success or failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 46 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of a small hit is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 46C, the probability of a big hit is about 10 times.

  FIG. 47 (a) shows a symbol sorting table for the special view 1. FIG. The numerical values in the "sorting" column in the table are compared with the special figure 1 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), the distribution ratio of random number range for each pattern (ie each Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, the special figure A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B 25% for (7R special big hit), 25% for special figure C (7R big hit), 10% for special figure D (sudden probability variation big hit), 10% for special figure E (latency probability variation big hit) is there. Special views A, B, D, E excluding special view C are symbols for which positive change is activated after the end of the big hit game. The ratio of the probability variation big hits (special figures A, B, D, E) in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, that is, the probability of probability variation is 75%.

  The special figures A, B and D indicate the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (during time reduction operation), spread figure low probability (due time not working) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of time)), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view C is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The special view E is a symbol in which time saving is activated after the end of the big hit game only when the gaming state at the time of success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state or the general drawing high probability state. That is, when the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, time saving does not operate after the end of the big hit game. For example, when the special figure E is displayed several times in succession as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability common figure low probability state, time saving does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability common figure) However, after the second and subsequent stop display, the time saving function is activated (it is a special drawing high probability general drawing high probability state). The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is 90% in the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state, 100% in the other game state.

  In this example, the small hit symbol and the detached symbol in the special figure 1 fluctuation game are only one type each. Therefore, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value, and the success judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is In the case of outliers, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value. However, a small hit symbol or an off symbol may be provided in a plurality of types similarly to the large hit symbol, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 1 random value.

  FIG. 47 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special view 1. As shown in FIG. 47 (b), in the big hit game after the special view A is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R with 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after special image B or special image C is stopped and displayed, 7R is performed with 29000 ms per 1R, and in big hit game after special image D is displayed and stopped, the open of attacker Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for the special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the gaming state at the time of symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, the attacker is opened for 2Rs in 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the gaming state other than the special view low probability general view low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, since the opening time is relatively long, it is easy to enter the game ball.

  In the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, 100 ms of attacker opening is performed twice in one opening opportunity. That is, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state and the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, the attacker operates in the same manner.

  FIG. 48 (a) shows a symbol sorting table for Special Figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is the sorting percentage of the random number range for each symbol (ie, each is compared with the special figure 2 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the special figure a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b. (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which positive change is activated after the big hit game is over. The ratio of the probability change big hit (Toku figure a, b) in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, that is, the probability change probability is the same 75% as the probability change probability of the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  The special figures a and b show the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (time reduction operation time), spread figure low probability (time reduction time not active) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view c is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of out pattern in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. Therefore, when the success or failure determination result of the special figure 2 variation game is a loss, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random number value. However, a plurality of types of off symbols may be provided similarly to the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 2 random number value.

  FIG.48 (b) has shown the example of the big hit time operation | movement in each pattern of the special figure 2. In FIG. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), in the big hit game after the special view a is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R for 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special view b or special view c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, 7Rs are performed with 29000 ms per 1R to open the attacker.

  As shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, Special Figure 2 has a high probability of being given time reduction compared to Special Figure 1, and the release time of the attacker is long (or the number of R is large). Therefore, it can be considered that Special Figure 2 has a higher degree of advantage than Special Figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, various initial settings are performed in step S401 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric tune long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S409 into effect data corresponding to pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 49 (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 49C is a flowchart showing the flow of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S421), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  FIG. 49D is a flowchart showing a flow of image control processing (step S413) of the first sub control unit main processing. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 has been input or not. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, otherwise transfer end ratio Wait for incoming signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S 701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise Waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  FIG. 50 (a) shows the flow of electric power long open effect processing that is executed in the effect control processing of the main processing in the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 50 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric Chu Long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the common drawing fluctuation game, and the special drawing 2 starting opening (electric Chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times for a common drawing fluctuation game and won , It may be referred to as long open)) It is an effect to ask whether or not to. It should be noted that, even after the regular drawing fluctuation stop, the electric tune long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "during the electric cheer opening!") May be continued based on the regular drawing stop symbol.

  In the electric chulong open effect processing shown in FIG. 50 (a), in the command processing (step S407) of the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 49 (a) (Start of rotation) It is executed when a command is received.

  The first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether the power-on long open effect execution regulation flag that restricts the execution of the power-on long open effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the power-long open effect execution regulation flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and determines whether the execution of the power-long open effect is restricted. For example, during the dark display where the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completely black, the player can not visually recognize the effect even if the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of electric power Tyuulong is not obtained . Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long open effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display dark rotation. In addition, if the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not darkened, and the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric Chu-long opening effect, the game It is possible to carry out an electric Chu-long opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long long open effect execution regulation flag is turned off based on the effect based on the success or failure determination result of the special figure change game and the demonstration effect.

  In step S801, when the electric Chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is restricted, and for the restriction of the electric Chu-long opening effect. Other control processing is executed to end the present processing, and the process returns to the effect control processing (step S409) of the main processing.

  In step S801, if the power-on long open effect execution restriction flag is off, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the power-on long open effect can be performed, and proceeds to step S803 to start symbol variation (start of rotation) It is determined from the command data of the command whether or not the success / failure determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is hit, by referring to the information regarding the common drawing per game flag and the general drawing deviation flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the success / failure determination result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the process proceeds to step S805, and the common drawing is generated from the command data of the symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information on the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the common drawing change game is the common drawing A.

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is the common drawing A, the process proceeds to step S807, the effect type selects the effect of "success pattern", and the power is open Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809 to execute other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “success pattern”, and ends this processing to effect control of the main process. It returns to a process (step S409).

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is not the common drawing A in step S805, the processing proceeds to step S811, and the effect type selects the effect of "failure pattern A" Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern A”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If it is determined in step S803 that the regularity determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is not a hit, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to step S815, and executes electric power long open false (gasse) effect execution lottery processing. In the electric chew long opening false effect execution lottery process, the electric chew long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 by taking out a random number value from the random number counter for the electric tune long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408 It is judged whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit using

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric power long open false effect based on the result of the determination of success or failure in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the electric power long open false effect in step S 817, the process proceeds to step S 821, and the effect type “failure pattern B” is selected and set as electric power long open effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern B”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 not to execute the electric power long open false effect, it executes other control processing for not executing the electric power long open effect, and ends the present processing to execute the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the processing of the electric Chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 50, when the electric Chu-long opening effect execution regulation flag is off, the electric Chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a hit, but it is a hit. An execution lottery may be performed in the same manner as at the time of moat-off, and the effect may be executed only when the lottery is won. Moreover, in this example, the effect of "failure pattern A" is set in the hit (open view B) when the turn off is open for a short time (short open), and the turn off does not open the turn off (outline C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed with a hit (general view B) and a shift (general view C).

  FIG. 50 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect. FIG. 50 (b) shows display effects being performed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named "land stage" is executed. At the front of the background effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) Is running. A fluctuation icon display area a is disposed on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a fluctuation icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the variation icon display area a, a special view reserve display area c for displaying a reserve for special view is arranged, and a reserve icon b of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. At the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, a power long open effect area d is disposed. The common drawing change game is started by the common drawing display device 210 (not shown), and the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is not regulated, and the electric Chu-long opening effect is executed in the electric Chu-long opening effect area d. An image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed together with the display of "during a helping chance lottery" as an electric Chu-long opening effect, and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 A scruffy effect is being performed which causes the player to expect that the game may be released long. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the effect of opening electric power long. In addition, the right side area of the special view hold display area c is also partially hidden. Thus, if there is a case that the electric Chu-long opening effect makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol makes at least a part of the electric Chu-long opening effect difficult to confirm There may be.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 51A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 51A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S901, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S 903 following step S 901, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S 905. . In step S905, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 907 following step S 905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S909 following step S907, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 907, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first auxiliary control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 51B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 51C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, processing for updating the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 52 (a) shows an example of a lottery table of prefetching notice used when performing prefetching lottery in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. The prefetch lottery is executed when the first sub control unit 400 receives a prefetch result information command including information on the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, and the display mode of the hold icon indicating the suspension corresponding to the prefetch result by the prefetch notice lottery Is determined. The lottery table for previewing notice shown in FIG. 52 (a) is composed of items of "look-ahead notice mode", "big hit" and "missing".

  The “pre-read advance notice mode” in the left column in the drawing indicates the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. "White" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is white circle, "black" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is black circle, and "heat" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is circle. "Heat" indicates that the character is drawn, and "white → black" indicates that a change animation (details will be described later) in which the display mode of the hold icon changes from white circle to black circle is executed. “Black → heat” indicates that a change animation is performed in which the display mode of the reserve icon changes from a black circle to a mode in which the word “heat” is drawn in a circle. In the present embodiment, the default display mode of the hold icon is a white circle. When the pre-reading result includes undetermined information, the pre-reading notice lottery may not be executed, and the holding icon indicating the holding corresponding to the pre-reading result may be displayed in the default display mode.

  The “big hit” in the middle row in the figure is the prefetch random number obtained from the prefetch random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when determining the prefetch notice mode in the effect control process (step S409) when the prefetch result is a big hit. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the prefetching preview mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each prefetch previewing mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the distribution ratio of each pre-reading notice mode when the pre-reading notice result is a big hit is 80% for “white”, 2% for “black”, and “heat” It is 7%, "white → black" is 3%, and "black → heat" is 8%.

  In the right column in the figure, “previous” is the pre-read lottery random number obtained from the pre-read lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when determining the pre-read advance notice mode in the effect control process (step S409) The distribution ratio of the random number range of the prefetching preview mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each prefetch previewing mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the distribution rate of each pre-reading notice mode in the case where the pre-reading notice result is a loss is 94% for “white”, 2% for “black”, and “heat” It is 1%, “white → black” is 2%, and “black → heat” is 1%.

  FIG. 52 (b) is an example of a lottery table of notice at the start of fluctuation (after a big hit determination) used when performing a notice lottery in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 49 (step S409) Is shown. The advance lottery is executed when the first sub control unit 400 receives the symbol change start command from the main control unit 300, and the mode of the announcement effect of the special figure change game being executed is determined by the advance lottery. The lottery table of the advance notice at the start of the change shown in FIG. 52 (b) is composed of items of "notice mode", "big hit", and "off". The "notice mode" in the left row in the figure indicates the mode of the notice performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable object 990 for effect. "Logo fall" indicates that the advance is performed in a mode in which the movable body for effect 990 moves downward, and "rotation" indicates that the advance displayed in a mode in which the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates “Logo drop + rotate” indicates that the advance is performed in a manner in which the movable body for effect 990 moves downward and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates, and “none” indicates It indicates that the advance presentation is not performed.

  The "big hit" in the middle row in the figure is the notice lottery random number obtained from the notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when determining the notice mode in the effect control process (step S409) when the result of the judgment is a big hit. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the preview mode (that is, the selection probability of each preview mode) to be compared is shown. As shown in FIG. 52 (b), the distribution rate of each notice mode in the case where the notice result is a big hit is 4% for "logo fall" and 7% for "rotation", "logo fall + rotation “Is 14%” and “none” is 75%.

  In the right column in the figure, when the result of determination of acceptance is disapproval, the notice lottery random number acquired from the notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when determining the notice mode in the effect control process (step S409) The distribution ratio of the random number range of the preview mode (that is, the selection probability of each preview mode) to be compared is shown. As shown in FIG. 52 (b), the distribution rate of each notice mode in the case where the notice result is out is "logo fall" 3% and "rotation" 2%, "logo fall + rotation" Is 1% and "none" is 94%.

In addition, the notice mode of "logo fall" may be different between the case of the big hit and the case of the break. For example, the distance by which the effect movable body 990 moves downward may be different between the case of the big hit and the case of deviation, or the speed at which the effect movable body 990 moves may be different. Also, the notice mode of "rotation" may be different between the case of the big hit and the case of the change. For example, in the case of a big hit, the image is rotated once, and in the case of a loss, the rotated display is ended without returning the image, and the normal display is returned. Note that the image may be rotated once even in the case of detachment. Further, for example, the rotation angle of the image may be made different between the case of the big hit and the case of the shift, the angular velocity of the image rotation may be made different, or the rotation direction of the image may be made different. The images to be rotated may be different. Further, the notice mode of “logo drop + rotation” may be different as described above between the case of the big hit and the case of the wrong case.
Example 1

  An example of effects according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 53 and each of the drawings to be described later, an example of the special game 1 variation game in each embodiment is shown in time series. Moreover, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is indicated by a white thick arrow.

  First, with reference to FIG. 53 (a), common points between FIG. 53 and the respective drawings described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 53 (a), at the upper left portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative frame f1 having a shape in which the letter “L” is vertically inverted is displayed. A special shape 1 reserved number display area 931 in the form of a square is provided at the upper left portion in the decorative frame f1, and a special figure 2 reserved number display area 932 is provided in the right of the decorative frame f1. A special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 is provided below 931, and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934 is provided below it. In the special figure 1 pending number display area 931, the pending number of the special figure 1 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no pending state of the special figure 1, "0" is displayed. In the special figure 2 reserve number display area 932, the reserve number of the special figure 2 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no reserve of the special figure 2, "0" is displayed. Moreover, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, when the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed as the variation display of the fourth symbol "/" , When the image of "\" is displayed alternately and special figure 1 fluctuation game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is in the stop display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" Is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 change game is out, and "O" is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 change game is a big hit is there. It should be noted that "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during non-execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game regardless of the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. Also, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, when the special figure 2 variation game is being executed, it is informed that the special figure 2 variation game is being executed as the variation display of the fourth symbol "/" , When the image of "\" is displayed alternately and the special figure 2 change game is not being executed (when the special figure 2 is in the stop display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" Is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 change game is out, and "O" is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 change game is a big hit is there. Note that "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during non-execution of the special figure 2 variation game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variation game.

  Below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a horizontally long rectangular decorative frame f2 is displayed. At the center of the decoration frame f2, a square-shaped variation icon display area 940 in which a part of the left and right frames is open is provided. The variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 930 described later. This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon.

  A special figure 1 reserve icon display area 950 is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area 940, and a special figure 2 reserve icon display area 960 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 940. The special figure 1 reserved icon display area 950 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth special drawing 1 holding orders, respectively. That is, the special view 1 suspension icon corresponding to the suspension of the special view 1 of the earliest (most stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the second to fourth areas are 2 The special figure 1 reserve icon corresponding to the reserve of the fourth special figure 1 can be displayed respectively. Similarly, the special view 2 reserved icon display area 960 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth special figure 2 holding orders, respectively. That is, the special view 2 suspension icon corresponding to the suspension of the special view 2 of the earliest (most recently stored) can be displayed in the first area, and the second to fourth areas are similarly 2 The special figure 2 reserve icon corresponding to the reserve of the fourth special figure 2 can be displayed respectively. Also, in the special view 1 pending icon display area 950 and the special view 2 pending icon display area 960, various animations representing movement of the pending icon are executed.

  A navigation character display area 970 having a square shape is provided on the left side of the special view 1 reserved display area 950. In the navigation character display area 970, a merchant character image h1 is displayed. The character image h1 of the merchant is used for an explanatory effect such as a tutorial effect or the like, and an effect such as an advance notice (notice of the variation or advance notice).

  On the right side of the special view 2 reserve display area 960, a square effect custom state display area 980 is provided. In the effect custom state display area 980, “level 1 to 99” are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 100. The level of the effect custom state is set to rise, for example, by performing an effect with a low appearance rate. The level of the effect custom state may be set to increase also when the game ball is hit a predetermined number, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big hit is won.

  FIG. 53 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the special game 1 variation game is disappointing is stopped display It is done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" for notifying the detachment is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth pattern of the display mode of "-" notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game has been displayed is stopped. In addition, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 931 indicating that the pending count in the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 pending count display area 932 is 0 in the special figure 2 pending count. “0” is displayed to indicate that The special figure 1 reserve icon display area 950 displays a default special figure 1 reserve icon 951 displayed in a white circle.

  FIG. 53 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 suspension is digested and the special figure 1 change game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 931, and it is informed that the number of pendings in the special figure 1 decreases by 1 and the pending count in the special figure 1 becomes 0.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 is reduced by one and special figure 1 fluctuation game is started, in the fluctuation icon display area 940 of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special figure 1 reserved icon display area 950, a hold / change icon An animation of movement between is performed. In the movement animation between the holding and changing icons, the special drawing 1 holding icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special drawing 1 holding icon display area 950 becomes the changing icon 941 and moves to the changing icon display area 940 . The right-pointing arrow shown on the upper left of the fluctuation icon 941 in FIG. 53B indicates the moving direction of the fluctuation icon 941.

  In FIG. 53C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the holding and changing icons is ended, and the changing icons 941 are changed in the changing icon display area 940. Indicates a displayed state. Also, based on the game ball entering the special view 1 start opening 230, “1” is displayed in the special view 1 hold count display area 931, and white is displayed in the first area of the special view hold icon display area 950. A state in which a default special view 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle appears due to an increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special view 1 hold icon 952 in FIG. 53 (b) indicates the movement direction of the special view 1 hold icon 952. Further, in FIG. 53C, a balloon image representing a line of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed at the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. . The said balloon image is an image used for the notice by the character image h1 of a merchant.

  FIG. 53D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area 950. A special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is shown in the state of appearing by the increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special view 1 hold icon 953 in FIG. 53 (d) indicates the movement direction of the special view 1 hold icon 953. Further, an image of a character string of "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the character image h1 of the merchant, and an effect of expecting development to reach effect is executed. In addition, a pending change image h2 having a substantially rectangular shape including an image of the "pending change" character string is displayed overlapping with the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. . The pending change image h2 is an image displayed to notify that the effect of the advance notice of changing the display mode of the pending icon or the changing icon being displayed or the notice of the changing is performed. In this example, it is notified that the change animation in which the display mode of the holding icon being displayed changes is performed by the holding change image h2. Note that the pending change image h2 may be a display that is displayed only when the pending icon of the special view 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the pending icon of the special view 2 is changed It may be a display that is displayed only when changing the change icon, or may be a display that is displayed only when changing the holding icon of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It may be a display that appears only when changing the hold icon and the change icon of the special view 2, or appears only when changing the hold icon of the special view 1, the hold icon of the special view 2, and the change icon. It may be a display.

  In FIG. 53 (e), “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out Indicates a reported state. In addition, the deletion animation in which the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward is displayed, and the variation icon 941 is gradually eliminated. Further, FIG. 53 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special view 1 reserve icon 952 changes from “white to black” is performed. In the change animation, an image for lightning strike is displayed from the hold change image h2 to the special view 1 hold icon 952, and an effect image is displayed overlapping the special view 1 hold icon 951. The effect image is displayed on the front side of the special view 1 suspension icon 952, 953, and the entire special view 1 suspension icon 952 and a part of the special view 1 suspension icon 953 are hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 53 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the special game 1 variation game is disappointing is stopped display It is done. Further, in FIG. 53 (f), the change animation ends, the hold change image h2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 53 (e) are erased, and the display mode of the special view 1 reserve icon 952 changes from white circle to black circle. It is changing.

  FIG. 53 (g) shows a state in which the reserve of the special figure 1 at the earliest stage is digested and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Also, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 931, the special figure 1 pending icon 952 becomes a fluctuating icon, and the moving animation between the pending / fluctuating icons and the moving animation of the special figure 1 pending icon 953 are started. ing. Further, in FIG. 53 (g), a balloon image representing a serif of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. .

  FIG. 53 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation between the holding and changing icons and the moving animation of the special view 1 holding icon 953 are finished. Further, in FIG. 53 (h), an image of a character string of "To ~" is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the merchant's character image h1, suggesting that a to-be-character image h3 to be described later appears. The production is being performed. The character image h3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect").

  FIG. 53 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, a character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the upper right portion of the effect display area 208d, and an image of a character string of "Called?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the character image h3 of the hall. In addition, an image of a character string “Tomon!” Is displayed on the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 53 (j) shows a state in which reach effect is started by temporarily displaying “decoration 3” in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image h1, and then the image of "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 of the lord. The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string “chance!” Representing the words of the character image h3 of the lord, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is to be executed.

  In FIG. 53 (k), all the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "rotation target image" in this embodiment) are the image display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. As viewed from the player as the center of rotation as the center of rotation, it shows a state of rotating 45 ° counterclockwise. Further, in FIG. 53 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image rotated 45 ° counterclockwise has a horizontal axis taken in the direction rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and a vertical axis taken in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis The aspect ratio of the case. Likewise, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated after rotation is the aspect ratio when the horizontal axis is taken in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis is taken in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. . For example, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image when the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player is the rotation target image in a state where the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° clockwise as viewed from the player It shows the ratio of vertical length to horizontal length. In addition, the variation display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol of the middle symbol display area 208b is also performed during the execution of the rotation display advance presentation effect.

  While the rotation target image before rotation shown in FIG. 53 (j) is displayed with the aspect ratio adjusted to the screen of aspect ratio 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), The image to be rotated shown in 53 (k) is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen of aspect ratio 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can not be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. Ru. In addition, the variation display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol of the middle symbol display area 208b is also performed during the execution of the rotation display advance presentation effect.

  FIG. 53 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 53 (k). It shows. In addition, the rotation target image is displayed in the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 53L, the entire rotation target image is displayed without being seen.

  FIG. 53 (m) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 53 (l). It shows. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation.

  FIG. 53 (n) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 53 (m). It shows. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen of aspect ratio 7: 5. Further, in FIG. 53 (n), the decoration symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c as the rotation target image while the rotation display advance effect is being executed, and the character of the crown It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 53 (n) is an image used for producing an advance notice of the change to change the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can not be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. Ru.

  FIG. 53 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 53 (n). It shows. The image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 53 (o), the image to be rotated is not seen. Further, FIG. 53 (o) shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is generated in which lightning is generated from the hold change image h2 and lightning strikes on a fluctuation icon displayed as a black circle. The lightning strike fluctuation icon overlaps the effect image, and the effect image hides the entire fluctuation icon. Further, in FIG. 53 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 1 reserve icon display area The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed as a black circle in the second area 950 is shown by the increase animation of the hold icon.

  FIG. 53 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 315 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 53 (o). It shows. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen of aspect ratio 7: 5. Further, in the aspect in which the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 53 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping the entire change icon 941 are erased and the word “heat” is drawn in a circle. The fluctuation icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 53 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (360 ° in total) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 6 shows a state in which the rotation target image has returned to the original display state by one rotation. Also, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 53 (r), “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out It indicates the state of being informed that there is. In addition, when the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward, the deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon is executed. The downward arrow shown at the upper left of the fluctuation icon in FIG. 53 (r) indicates the moving direction of the fluctuation icon.

  As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image may be used for the rotation target image, and the presence of the character image may be enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image, which may give a strong impression to the player. Moreover, although the rotation target image is rotated by one rotation (360 ° rotation) in the rotation display advance presentation effect in the present embodiment, the rotation target image may be rotated by one rotation or more. For example, as the number of rotations of the rotation target image is larger, the jackpot reliability may be set to be higher.

  The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio The display area may be generated using the work area of the VRAM 436. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using random numbers, and generates a display image from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio using the work area of the VRAM 436 You may have to. Further, depending on the change of the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, the display area of the rotation target image may be expanded or reduced, and the rotation target image of the rotation target image may be constant. The aspect ratio may change.

In the present embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of rotation of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center, but may have an arbitrary position of the image display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. It is also good. In addition, the rotation target image may be rotated about a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position of the image display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 It may be rotated as an axis. Further, in the present embodiment, the rotational angular velocity of each image in the rotation target image is constant, but the angular velocity of the rotation of each image may be made different according to the distance from the rotation center. For example, the angular velocity of the rotation of each image may be delayed as the distance from the rotation center increases. In this case, it may be possible to give the player the impression that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks. Further, in the present embodiment, an effect of changing the fluctuation icon is performed in the midst of the rotation display advance notice effect as the notice of the symbol change display being executed. For this reason, there are cases where it is possible to synergistically increase the expectation for the special figure fluctuation game being executed by performing these effects simultaneously.
(Example 2)

  An effect example of the second example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a) to (r) show the effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series. FIG. 54 (a) shows a state in which the special view 1 variation game has ended, and shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 53 (a). Next, FIG. 54 (b) shows the state in which the special figure 1's suspension is digested and special figure 1 floating game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 53 (b). Next, in FIG. 54 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation of the special view 1 hold icon 951 ends, and the fluctuation icon display area 940 is displayed. The state in which the fluctuation icon 941 is displayed is shown. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 931, and black is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area 950. A special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which it appears due to an increase animation of the hold icon. Further, FIG. 54C shows that a balloon image representing a line of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. It shows the state.

  FIG. 54 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area 950. A special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is shown in the state of appearing by the increase animation of the hold icon. Further, an image of a character string of "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image h1.

  In FIG. 54 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is an off Indicates a reported state. Next, FIG. 54 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 53 (f). Next, FIG. 54 (g) shows the state in which the reserve of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started and shows the same state as FIG. 53 (g). Next, FIG. 54 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation between the holding and changing icons and the moving animation of the special view 1 holding icon 953 are finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 53 (h). Next, FIG. 54 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the character image h3 of the statue is displayed, as in FIG. 53 (i). It shows the state.

  FIG. 54 (j) shows a state in which "description 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and reach effect is started. In addition, the image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image h1, and then the image of "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 of the lord. The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string “chance!” Representing the words of the character image h3 of the lord, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is to be executed.

  FIG. 54 (k) shows the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold change image h2, the character image h3 of the statue, the balloon image representing the speech of the character image h3 of the statue, the decoration frame f2, and the decoration frame f2. A balloon image (hereinafter referred to as “rotation target image” in the present embodiment) showing an image (pending icon, variable icon, character image h1 of a merchant, etc.) displayed inside and a line of a character image h1 of a merchant Shows a state in which the player rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the player centering on the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the rotary display preview effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotary display preview effect shown in the first embodiment of the present embodiment, the image displayed in the decoration frame f1 and the decoration frame f1 Rotational display of images of four designs (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as "non-rotation target images" in this embodiment) is not executed, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotation target images does not change. Further, the non-rotational target image is displayed with priority over the rotational target image. The rotation target image may be displayed prior to the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target image may be displayed prior to the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotation target images may be displayed prior to the rotation target image.

  While the rotation target image before rotation is displayed with the aspect ratio adjusted to the screen of aspect ratio 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), the rotation shown in FIG. 54 (k) The target image is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen of aspect ratio 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can not be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. Ru. In addition, the variation display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol of the middle symbol display area 208b is also performed during the execution of the rotation display advance presentation effect.

  FIG. 54 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 54 (k). It shows. In addition, the rotation target image is displayed in the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 54 (l), the entire rotation target image is displayed without being seen.

  FIG. 54 (m) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 54 (l). It shows. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. In addition, the decoration frame f1 is displayed overlapping the decoration frame f2. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed in priority to the decorative frame f2.

  FIG. 54 (n) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 54 (m). It shows. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen of aspect ratio 7: 5. Further, in FIG. 54 (n), the decoration symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c as the rotation change target image h2 during execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the character of the crown It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 54 (n) is an image used for producing an advance notice of the change to change the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the hall, a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can not be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. Ru.

  54 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state shown in FIG. 54 (n). It shows. The image to be rotated is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 54 (o), the image to be rotated is not seen. Further, FIG. 54 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is generated in which lightning is generated from the hold change image h2 and lightning strikes on a fluctuation icon displayed as a black circle. The lightning strike fluctuation icon overlaps the effect image, and the effect image hides the entire fluctuation icon. In FIG. 54 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed as a black circle in the second area 950 is shown by the increase animation of the hold icon.

  FIG. 54 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 315 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 54 (o). It shows. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen of aspect ratio 7: 5. In addition, the change in the mode in which the "Heat" character is drawn in the circle, with the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 54 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping the entire change icon being erased. The icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 54 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (360 ° in total) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 54 (p). 6 shows a state in which the rotation target image has returned to the original display state by one rotation. Also, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 54 (r), “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out It indicates the state of being informed that there is. Further, by moving the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 downward, an erase animation for erasing the fluctuation icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed, the non-rotation target image is not rotated. For the non-rotational target image, the number-of-holds display displayed in the fourth symbol display area or the fourth symbol display area displayed in the fourth symbol display area is used. For this reason, the image for notifying information important to the player is not rotated.
(Example 3)

  An effect example of the third example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a) to 55 (r) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series. FIGS. 55 (a) to (h) show the same state as FIGS. 54 (a) to (h). Next, in FIG. 55 (i), the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the lower right portion of the effect display area 208d. The character image h3 of the hall and the decoration frame f2 are displayed in an overlapping manner, and a part (portion of the chin) of the character image h3 of the hall is hidden by the decoration frame f2. Also, FIG. 55 (i) shows the same state as FIG. 54 (i) except that the display position of the balloon image representing the speech of the character image h3 of the hall and the character image h3 of the hall is different. Next, FIG. 55 (j) shows the same state as FIG. 54 (j) except that the display position of the balloon image representing the speech of the character image h3 of the temple and the character image h3 of the temple is different.

  FIG. 55 (k) is a balloon image (hereinafter referred to as “these images in the present embodiment,” which represents the speech of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image h3 of the statue and the character image h3 of the statue. The image may be referred to as a “rotation target image.” Shows a state rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Moreover, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment, the display is carried out in the decoration frame f1, the image displayed in the decoration frame f1, the decoration frame f2, and the decoration frame f2. The rotated image of the captured image and the balloon image (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as "non-rotation target image" in this example) representing the speech of the character of the eyebrow is not executed, and the non-rotation target image Aspect ratio does not change. Further, the non-rotational target image is displayed with priority over the rotational target image. The rotation target image may be displayed prior to the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target image may be displayed prior to the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotation target images may be displayed prior to the rotation target image.

  In FIG. 55 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. While the rotation target image before rotation is displayed with the aspect ratio adjusted to the screen of aspect ratio 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), the rotation shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the target image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 3: 4. In addition, the character image h3 of the lord is displayed the portion of the jaw that has been hidden. In addition, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a is missing in the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, FIG. 55 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 55 (k) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 1: 1. Next, FIG. 55 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 55 (l) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Next, FIG. 55 (n) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 55 (m) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 3: 4. Also, FIG. 55 (n) shows the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c as the rotation change target image h2 during execution of the rotation display advance presentation effect, and the character of the crown. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 55 (n) is an image used for producing an advance notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

  55 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 55 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 1: 1. Further, FIG. 55 (o) shows a state in which an effect (a change animation of a change icon) for changing the display mode of the change icon is executed. In the effect in the present embodiment, the lightning generated from the hold change image h2 is displayed so as to fall at a position different from the change icon to be changed. In addition, the fluctuation icon of the non-rotation target image changes from the black circle to a mode in which the character of “heat” is drawn in the circle at the timing when the lightning is generated from the hold change image h2 and the effect image is displayed. ing. In this embodiment, since the changing fluctuation icon is not hidden by the effect image, the changed fluctuation icon after the change can be recognized earlier than when the changing fluctuation icon is hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 55 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 55 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 3: 4. The pending change image h2, the lightning image, and the effect image are erased. Next, FIG. 55 (q) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 55 (p) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center and returned to the original state. It shows. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio. Next, in FIG. 55 (r), “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special view 1 variation game is out It indicates the state of being informed that there is. In addition, when the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward, the deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed, the non-rotation target image is not rotated. As the non-rotation target image, an image such as a fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area, a number-of-holds display displayed in the number-of-holds display area, a hold icon, and a change icon is used. For this reason, the image for notifying information important to the player is not rotated.
(Example 4)

  An effect example of the fourth example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (a) to 56 (r) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series. 56 (a)-(i) show the same state as FIG. 55 (a)-(i).

  FIG. 56 (j) shows a state in which reach effect is started with "decoration 3" being temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image h1, and then the image of "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 of the lord. The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string “chance!” Representing the words of the character image h3 of the lord, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is to be executed. Further, FIG. 56 (j) shows a balloon image representing the words of the decoration frame f2, the image displayed in the decoration frame f2 (pending icon, fluctuation icon, merchant character image h1, etc.) and the merchant character image h1. It has been erased.

  FIG. 56 (k) is a balloon image (hereinafter referred to as “in the present embodiment,” showing the words of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold change image h2, the character image h3 of the statue, and the character image h3 of the statue). The image may be referred to as a “rotation target image.)” Shows a state of being rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Further, in the rotary display preview effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotary display preview effect shown in the first embodiment of the present embodiment, an image displayed in the decoration frame f1 and the decoration frame f1 (hereinafter, in this example, These images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images”) are not displayed, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotation target images does not change. Further, the non-rotational target image is displayed with priority over the rotational target image. The rotation target image may be displayed prior to the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target image may be displayed prior to the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotation target images may be displayed prior to the rotation target image. Further, in FIG. 56 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. While the rotation target image before rotation is displayed with the aspect ratio adjusted to the screen of aspect ratio 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), the rotation shown in FIG. 56 (k) The aspect ratio of the target image changes in accordance with the aspect ratio of the screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4.

  56 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state shown in FIG. 56 (k). It shows. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 1: 1. Next, in FIG. 56 (m), the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. It shows the state. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Further, the decoration frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern, and the decoration frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern. Next, in FIG. 56 (n), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. It shows the state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 3: 4. Also, in FIG. 56 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as a rotation target image during execution of the rotation display advance effect, and the hold change image h2g is a decoration displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. The symbol and the character image h3 of the character are displayed overlapping each other. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 56 (n) is an image used for producing an advance notice of the change to change the display mode of the change icon.

  56 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state shown in FIG. 56 (n). It shows. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 1: 1. Further, FIG. 56 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. The effect is different from the effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon during the rotation display preview effect in the above-described Example 1 and Example 2 of the present embodiment, and the lightning generated from the hold change image h2 is changed It is displayed so as not to fall on the target fluctuation icon. In addition, the fluctuation icon of the non-rotation target image is in the circle at the position of the fluctuation icon display area 940 before the rotation display advance presentation effect execution at the timing when the lightning is generated from the hold change image h2 and the effect image is displayed. The variation icon 942 of the aspect in which the character of heat is drawn temporarily overlaps with the pending change image h2 and the "decoration 3" and is placed on the front side in preference to the pending change image h2 and the "decoration 3" It is displayed. Therefore, the player can temporarily confirm that the change icon has changed.

  56 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 315 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state shown in FIG. 56 (o). It shows. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 3: 4. In addition, the hold change image h2, the lightning image, the effect image, and the change icon 941 are deleted. Next, in FIG. 56 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (360 ° in total) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. It shows the state returned to the original. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio. In addition, a balloon image representing the words of the decoration frame f2 which has been erased, the image displayed in the decoration frame f2 (pending icon, fluctuation icon, merchant character image h1, etc.) and the merchant character image h1 is displayed. There is. Next, in FIG. 56 (r), “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out It indicates the state of being informed that there is. In addition, when the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward, the deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed, the images such as the holding icon and the fluctuation icon which are important information for the player are not displayed by dare In some cases, the player can be made to pay attention to the rotational display of the rotation target image. Further, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of this embodiment, an effect of changing the fluctuation icon is performed even though the fluctuation icon is not displayed. For this reason, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise. Further, there may be a case where the player's sense of expectation can be satisfied by displaying only the temporarily changed fluctuation icon during the effect of changing the fluctuation icon. In addition, the fluctuation icon may be temporary or may not be displayed until the rotation display of the rotation target image is finished. In this case, since it takes a predetermined time from the end of the change icon change animation to the display of the change icon, it may be possible to amplify the player's sense of expectation. Further, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, there may be a case where an effect of changing the hold icon is performed although the hold icon is not displayed.
(Example 5)

  An effect example of the fifth example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a) to (l) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and the sixth to ninth embodiments described later includes the sub display device 209 mounted on the effect movable body 225. The effect movable body 225 can move up and down two-dimensionally and rotate in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown) . The effect movable body 225 may operate in a three-dimensional manner. Further, the sub display device 209 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the sub display device 209, it is not necessary to be a liquid crystal display device as long as various effects and various game information can be displayed, for example, a dot matrix display device, Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, the sub display device 209 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400 in the same manner as the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device 209 may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 57 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the special game 1 variation game is disappointing is stopped display It is done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth figure of the display mode for notifying the detachment is stopped and displayed. In addition, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 931 indicating that the pending count in the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 pending count display area 932 is 0 in the special figure 2 pending count. “0” is displayed to indicate that The special figure 1 reserve icon display area 950 displays a default special figure 1 reserve icon 951 displayed in a white circle. Further, FIG. 57 (a) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is positioned at the front upper part of the center upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 57A, the sub display device 209 (effect movable body 225) is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 57 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 change game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 931, and it is informed that the number of pendings in the special figure 1 decreases by 1 and the pending count in the special figure 1 becomes 0. In addition, when the special figure 1 is reduced by one and special figure 1 fluctuation game is started, in the fluctuation icon display area 940 of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special figure 1 reserved icon display area 950, a hold / change icon An animation of movement between is performed. In the movement animation between the holding and changing icons, the special drawing 1 holding icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special drawing 1 holding icon display area 950 becomes the changing icon 941 and moves to the changing icon display area 940 . Thus, in FIG. 57 (b), the moving animation between the holding and changing icons is performed.

  FIG. 57C shows a state in which the moving animation between the holding and changing icons is finished, and the changing icons 941 are displayed in the changing icon display area 940. Further, FIG. 57 (c) shows a state in which the character image h3 of the statue is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. In this example, the character image h3 of the hall is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect").

  FIG. 57 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display preview effect as the reach effect is performed. In the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, rotation display of the character image h3 of you is performed on the sub display device 209. FIG. 57D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character image h3 of a character displayed on the sub display device 209 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation target image" in this example) has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. It shows a state rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise. Further, in FIG. 57 (d), the rotation target image is displayed with the aspect ratio of the image changed. While the rotation target image before rotation is displayed in the aspect ratio according to the screen of the aspect ratio 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the sub display device 209), the rotation target shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 7: 5. Next, in FIG. 57 (e), the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 57 (d). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 1: 1. Next, in FIG. 57 (f), the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 135 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 or in the state of FIG. 57 (e). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 7: 5.

  FIG. 57 (g) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 57 (f). ing. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Next, in FIG. 57 (h), the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 57 (g). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 7: 5. Next, in FIG. 57 (i), the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the subsidiary display device 209 from the state of FIG. 57 (h). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 1: 1. Next, in FIG. 57 (j), the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 315 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 57 (e). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 7: 5. Next, in FIG. 57 (k), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 57 (j). It shows the state returned to. Also, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 57 (l), “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the sub display device 209, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out Indicates that it has been notified. In addition, when the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed.

  As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation display of the rotation target image displayed on the sub display device 209 is performed, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image is used for the rotation target image. By changing the aspect ratio of the character image, the presence of the character image may be enhanced, and an impact may be given to the player. Further, in the rotation display preview effect in the present embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated by one rotation (360 °), but may be rotated by one rotation or more. For example, as the number of rotations of the rotation target image is larger, the big hit reliability may be higher.

  Also, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio There may be a case where a display image is generated from data using a work area of the VRAM 436. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using random numbers, and based on the aspect ratio, the display image is displayed using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 It may be generated. Further, depending on the change of the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, the display area of the rotation target image may be expanded or reduced, and the rotation target image of the rotation target image may be constant. The aspect ratio may change.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of rotation of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center, but may have an arbitrary position of the image display region of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. It is also good. Further, the rotation target image may be rotated about a straight line passing the center of the image display area of the sub display 209 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing an arbitrary position of the image display area of the sub display 209 It may rotate as a rotating shaft.

Further, in the present embodiment, the angular velocity at which the rotation target image rotates is constant, but the rotation angular velocity of the rotation target image may be different according to the distance from the rotation center. For example, the angular velocity of the rotation of the image to be rotated may be delayed as the distance from the rotation center is larger. In this case, it may be possible to give the player an illusion that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks.
(Example 6)

  An effect example of the sixth example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (a) to (l) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series.

  FIG. 58 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the special game 1 variation game is disappointing is stopped display It is done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth figure of the display mode for notifying the detachment is stopped and displayed. In addition, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 931 indicating that the pending count in the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 pending count display area 932 is 0 in the special figure 2 pending count. “0” is displayed to indicate that The special figure 1 reserve icon display area 950 displays a default special figure 1 reserve icon 951 displayed in a white circle. Further, FIG. 58 (a) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of the central upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the sub display device 209 has a reserve display area 209 b in the lower left portion for displaying a reserve number display image. In (a) of FIG. 58, “1” indicating that the number of reservations of the special view 1 is 1 is displayed in the suspension display area 209 b of the sub display device 209 as the number of suspension display image.

  FIG. 58 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 change game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 931, and it is informed that the number of pendings in the special figure 1 decreases by 1 and the pending count in the special figure 1 becomes 0. In addition, when the special figure 1 is reduced by one and special figure 1 fluctuation game is started, in the fluctuation icon display area 940 of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special figure 1 reserved icon display area 950, a hold / change icon An animation of movement between is performed. In the movement animation between the holding and changing icons, the special drawing 1 holding icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special drawing 1 holding icon display area 950 becomes the changing icon 941 and moves to the changing icon display area 940 . In this way, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is performed. In the reserve display area 209b at the lower left portion of the sub display device 209, "0" indicating that the reserve number of the special view 1 is 0 is displayed as a reserve number display image.

  FIG. 58C shows a state in which the moving animation between the holding and changing icons is finished and the changing icons 941 are displayed in the changing icon display area 940. Further, FIG. 58C shows a state in which the character image h3 of the statue is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect").

  FIG. 58 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display preview effect as the reach effect is performed. In the rotary display notice effect of this embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 360 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the player in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 Thus, the character image h3 of the lord is rotated 360 ° counterclockwise. FIG. 58D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 moves from the front position of the central upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 to a lower position, and rotates 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Shows the condition. In addition, the hold display area 209 b in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is moved to the upper left portion of the sub display device 209. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is rotated clockwise about the center of the “0” image as the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed rotated.

  58E shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 58D. Is shown. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is rotated clockwise about the center of the “0” image as the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed as a rotation (total of 90 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 58F, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 58E about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 (total 135 ° rotation). Shows the condition. In addition, the hold display area 209 b in the upper left portion of the sub display device 209 is moved to the upper right portion of the sub display device 209. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in combination with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209 It is displayed rotating (total 135 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 58G, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 58F about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 (total 180 ° rotation). Shows the condition. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in combination with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209 It is displayed rotating (total 180 ° rotation).

  58H shows a state where the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise (total 225 degrees rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 58G. Is shown. In addition, the hold display area 209 b in the upper right portion of the sub display device 209 is moved to the lower right portion of the sub display device 209. In addition, the "0" image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209 It is displayed (total 225 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 58 (i), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 58 (h) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 (total 270 ° rotation) Shows the condition. In addition, the "0" image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209 (Total 270 ° rotation) is displayed.

  58 (j) shows that the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise (total 315 degrees rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 58 (i). Is shown. Further, the hold display area 209 b at the lower right portion of the sub display device 209 is moved to the original position at the lower left portion of the sub display device 209. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in combination with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209 It is displayed rotating (total 315 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 58 (k), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 58 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (total 360 ° rotation). Shows the condition. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of “0” in combination with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209 It is displayed rotating (total 360 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 58 (l), “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out It indicates the state of being informed that there is. Further, the character image h3 of the character is deleted in the sub display device 209, and the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward in the decoration symbol display device 208 so that the fluctuation icon 941 is erased. The animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, rotation display of the rotation target image is performed by rotating the sub display device 209. Further, when the sub display device 209 is rotated, the number-of-holds display image displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode in which it does not rotate as viewed from the player. Further, the hold display area 209 b of the sub display device 209 is moved so as to be displayed in the left corner of the sub display device 209 as viewed from the player in conjunction with the rotation of the sub display device 209. Therefore, while the sub display device 209 is rotating, the number-of-holds display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily view. Further, instead of the rotation of the sub display device 209, by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be performed in some cases, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub display device 209 simultaneously or continuously, an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 may be performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 209 may be fixed to the game board 200 so as not to move.
(Example 7)

  An effect example of the seventh example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (a) to (l) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series.

  FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 57 (a). Next, FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which the reserve of Special Figure 1 is digested and special figure 1 floating game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 57 (b). Next, in FIG. 59 (c), the variation display of the decoration symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display region 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the holding and fluctuation icons is completed, and the fluctuation icon display region In the state 940, a change icon 941 is displayed. Further, FIG. 59 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is moved downward and the character image h3 of the hall is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect").

  FIG. 59 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display preview effect as the reach effect is performed. FIG. 59 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as a rotation center. The character image h3 of the character of the statue displayed at the center of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 209. The image is displayed rotating 45 ° clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the character image h3 of the lord is visually recognized as not rotating by the player. Next, FIGS. 59 (e) to 59 (k) show states in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 59 (e) to (k), the character image h3 of the window is displayed by being rotated clockwise at the same rotational speed as that of the sub display device 209. For this reason, while the sub display device 209 is rotating, the player always visually recognizes that the character image h3 of the character is not rotating. Next, in FIG. 59 (l), “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right design display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out It indicates the state of being informed that there is. Further, the character image h3 of the character is deleted in the sub display device 209, and the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward in the decoration symbol display device 208 so that the fluctuation icon 941 is erased. The animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of this embodiment, the character image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction as the sub display device 209 while the sub display device 209 is rotated. The character image is displayed in such a manner that the character image is not rotating as viewed from the player. For this reason, since the image displayed on the sub display device does not rotate although the sub display device 209 is rotating, it may be possible to give a player unexpectedness. Further, in this embodiment, the character image is rotated at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209 in the opposite direction of the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. The character image may be rotated at a speed different from the rotation speed of the sub display 209, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display 209, the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display 209 or The character image may be rotated at different speeds.
(Example 8)

  An effect example of the eighth example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a) to 60 (f) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series.

  FIG. 60 (a) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 57 (a). Next, FIG. 60 (b) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves downward and the character image h3 of your character is displayed on the sub-display device 209, and shows the same state as FIG. 59 (c). . The character image h3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect"). 60 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 60 (b). . The image data shown in FIG. 60 (b-1) has a character image h3 of the shrine and a character image h4 of the princess at the lower left of the character image h3 of the statue. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in the present example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice of high jackpot reliability. 60 (b-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 60 (b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 60 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 60 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out as display data by centering on the center of the image data. FIG. 60 (b-3) shows a state where an image is displayed on the sub display 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 60 (b-2).

  FIGS. 60 (c) to 60 (e) show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is performed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decoration symbol display device 208 in front of the decoration symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. It is rotated 45 degrees. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in the drawings of (c) to (e) in FIG. 60 indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before rotation. The arrows shown in FIGS. 60 (c) to 60 (e) indicate the rotation direction of the sub display 209.

  60C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 60B about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. . In addition, the character image h3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 which has been missed from the sub display device 209 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not to rotate from the player. 60C-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 60C. The image data shown in FIG. 60 (c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 60 (b-1) clockwise by 30 ° about the center of the image data. 60 (c-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 60 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 60 (c). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 60 (c-1), the display data is cut out from a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the image data as the display data. 60 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 60 (c-2) and rotates the sub display 209 in the counterclockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b). 60 (c) shows the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 60 (c).

  FIG. 60 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 60 (c) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. . In addition, the character image h3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, in the lower left portion, the entire character image h4 of the princess is displayed in a mode in which the character image h4 does not rotate as viewed from the player. 60 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 60 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 60 (d-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 60 (c-1) clockwise by 15 ° about the center of the image data. 60 (d-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 60 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 60 (d). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 60 (d-1), the display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 centering on the center of the image data as display data. 60 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 60 (d-2) and rotates the sub display 209 in the counterclockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (e). FIG. 60 (d) shows the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 60 (d).

  60E shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise by 15 ° from the state shown in FIG. 60D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. In addition, the character image h3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player, and another part is missing from the sub display device 209. Further, FIG. 60E shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display preview effect as the reach effect. FIG. 60 (e-1) shows image data read out from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 60 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 60 (e-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 60 (d-1) is rotated counterclockwise by 15 ° around the center of the image data. It is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). 60 (e-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 60 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 60 (e). The generated display data is shown. The said display data are the same as the display data shown to FIG. 60 (c-2). FIG. 60 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 60 (c-2) and rotates the sub display 209 in the clockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (d). FIG. 60 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 15 °. FIG. 60 (e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 60 (c-3).

  In FIG. 60 (f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right design display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is a big hit Indicates a reported state. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of "o" notifying that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit is displayed. In FIG. 60 (f), the sub display device 209 rotates clockwise by 30 ° from the state shown in FIG. 60 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center and returns to the original state. Show the situation. In addition, the character image h3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. In addition, on the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. 60 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 60 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 60 (f-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 60 (e-1) is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise about the center of the image data. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 60 (f-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 60 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 60 (f). The generated display data is shown. The said display data are the same as the display data shown to FIG. 60 (b-2). FIG. 60 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 60 (f-2) and rotates the sub display 209 in the clockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (e). FIG. 60 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 30 °. FIG. 60 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 60 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display preview effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction as the sub display device 209 while rotating the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the character is displayed in such a manner that the character image h3 is not rotated from the player. Further, in the rotation display preview effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the image in which the character image h4 of the princess who has been missed in the sub display device 209 is displayed on the sub display device 209 before the rotation display preview effect is executed. Is displayed on the sub display device 209. The princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 as the sub display device 209 rotates at a predetermined angle or more. For this reason, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 209, which may improve the interest of the game. Further, in the rotary display advance presentation effect of this embodiment, the character image h4 of the princess is displayed by the rotation of the sub display device 209, but the character according to the big hit reliability of the symbol variation display being executed is displayed You may do it. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the lord may be displayed. In addition, while the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, the princess character image h4 is displayed, whereas the sub display device 209 is rotated by a predetermined angle and the enemy of the princess is displayed. Characters may be displayed. In addition, the aspect ratio of the character image h3 of the statue or the character image h4 of the princess used for the rotation display preview effect in the present embodiment may change during the rotation display preview effect.
(Example 9)

  An effect example of the ninth example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (a) to 61 (f) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series.

  FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 57 (a). Next, in FIG. 61 (b), the variation display of the decoration symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the holding and changing icons is finished, and the variation icon display In the state 940, a change icon 941 is displayed. Further, in FIG. 61 (b), the sub display 209 moves downward, and the character image h3 of the statue at the center of the sub display 209 and the character image h1 'of the merchant at the lower left of the sub display 209 are displayed. It shows the condition that has been The character image h3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect"). The merchant character image h1 ′ is the same character image as the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970. FIG. 61 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 61 (b). . The image data shown in FIG. 61 (b-1) has a character image h3 of the shrine and a character image h4 of the princess at the lower left of the character image h3 of the statue, and the character image h3 of the statue and the character image h4 of the princess It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in the present example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice of high jackpot reliability. 61 (b-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 61 (b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 61 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 61 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out as display data by centering on the center of the image data. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 61 (b-2) corresponds to the first sub-control unit 400 at a predetermined position (lower left portion of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 61 (b-1). It is display data in which a merchant character image h1 'read out from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 61 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 61 (b-2). The character image h1 'of the merchant is displayed in preference to the image data shown in FIG. 61 (b-1), but the image data shown in FIG. 61 (b-1) is displayed based on the character image h1' of the merchant In some cases, priority may be given to display.

  (C) to (e) of FIG. 61 show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is performed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decoration symbol display device 208 in front of the decoration symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. It is rotated 45 degrees. Further, a rectangle shown by a two-dot chain line in the drawings of FIGS. 61C to 61E indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before the rotation. The arrows shown in FIGS. 61C to 61E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 61C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 61B about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. . In addition, the character image h3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Also, the merchant's character image h1 'displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. It is displayed in a manner of rotating 30 degrees counterclockwise around the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 which has been missed from the sub display device 209 is displayed on the lower right of the character image h1 'in such a manner that it is not rotating as seen from the player. 61C-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 61C. The image data shown in FIG. 61 (c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 61 (b-1) clockwise by 30 degrees about the center of the image data. 61 (c-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 61 (c-1) to display the image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 61 (c). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 61 (c-1), the display data is cut out of a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the image data as the display data. The display data shown in FIG. 61 (c-2) is the first display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 61 (c-1) at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 61 (b-2)). The display data is obtained by superposing the merchant character image h1 'read from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400. 61 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 61 (c-2) and rotates the sub display 209 in the counterclockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 61 (b). FIG. 61 (c) shows the state of the sub display 209 in FIG. 61 (c).

  FIG. 61D shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 61C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. . In addition, the character image h3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Also, the merchant's character image h1 'displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 61 (c) as the sub display device 209 rotates. It is displayed in a mode of rotating 15 degrees counterclockwise around the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 209, all of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the right of the merchant character image h1 'in a manner not to rotate from the player. Further, FIG. 61D-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 61D. The image data shown in FIG. 61D-1 is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 61C1 clockwise by 15 ° about the center of the image data. 61 (d-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 61 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 61 (d). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 61 (d-1), the display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the image data as the display data. The display data shown in FIG. 61 (d-2) is the first display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 61 (d-1) at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 61 (b-2)). The display data is obtained by superposing the merchant character image h1 'read from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400. 61 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 61 (d-2) and rotates the sub display 209 in the counterclockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 61 (c). FIG. 61 (d) shows the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 61 (d).

  FIG. 61E shows a state where the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise by 15 ° from the state shown in FIG. 61D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. In addition, the character image h3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Also, the merchant's character image h1 'displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 61 (d) as the sub display device 209 rotates. It is displayed in a mode of rotating 15 degrees clockwise around the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower right of the character image h1 ′ in a mode in which the character image h4 is not rotated as seen from the player It is missed. Further, FIG. 61E shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. Further, FIG. 61 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 61 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 61 (e-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 61 (d-1) counterclockwise about the image data center by 15 °. 61 (e-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 61 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 61 (e). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 61 (e-1), the display data is cut out as a display data by cutting a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the image data at the center. The display data shown in FIG. 61 (e-2) is the first display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 61 (e-1) at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 61 (b-2)). The display data is obtained by superposing the merchant character image h1 'read from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400. 61 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 61 (e-2) and rotates the sub display 209 in the clockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 61 (d). FIG. 61 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 15 °.

  In FIG. 61 (f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit Indicates a reported state. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of "o" notifying that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit is displayed. Also, in FIG. 61 (f), the sub display device 209 rotates clockwise by 30 ° from the state shown in FIG. 61 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center and returns to the original state. Show the situation. In addition, the character image h3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Also, the merchant's character image h1 'displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 61 (e) as the sub display device 209 rotates. It is displayed in a manner of being rotated 30 ° clockwise about the center of rotation and returned to the original state. In addition, on the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. FIG. 61 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 61 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 61 (f-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 61 (e-1) counterclockwise about the image data center by 30 °. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 61 (f-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 61 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 61 (f). The generated display data is shown. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 61 (f-2) corresponds to the first sub-control unit 400 at a predetermined position (lower left portion of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 61 (b-1). The display data is obtained by superimposing the merchant character image h1 'read out from the ROM 406, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 61 (b-2). 61 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 61 (f-2), and the sub display 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 61 (e). FIG. 61 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 30 °. FIG. 61 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 61 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, a character image (character image h3 of the character displayed on the sub display device 209 in a non-rotating manner on the sub display device 209 while the sub display device 209 is rotated). The character image h4) of the princess and the character image (character image h1 'of the merchant) displayed in a manner rotating from the player are displayed. By displaying simultaneously on the rotating sub display device 209, a character image displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player and a character image displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player. In some cases, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.
(Example 10)

  An effect example of the tenth example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62 (a) to 62 (f) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series.

  FIG. 62 (a) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 60 (a). Next, FIG. 62 (b) shows the state in which the special figure 1's suspension is digested and the special figure 1 change game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 60 (b). Further, FIG. 62 (b) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves downward and the sub-display device 209 displays a character image h3 of your head. The character image h3 of the hall is an image used for the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect.

  (C) to (e) of FIG. 62 show a state in which the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect is performed. In the lateral movement display effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves in the horizontal direction in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in the drawings of (c) to (e) in FIG. 62 indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before movement in the left and right direction.

  FIG. 62C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved in the left direction from the state shown in FIG. In addition, the character image h3 of the statue displayed at the center of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode of moving in the right direction by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction. There is. Therefore, the character image h3 of the character is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 which has been missed in the sub display device 209 is displayed in the upper left portion. Further, in the present example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice of high jackpot reliability.

  FIG. 62 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved in the left lateral direction from the state shown in FIG. 62 (c). In addition, the character image h3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a manner of moving in the right direction by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction. For this reason, the character image h3 of the character is displayed so as to be viewed as not moving from the player. In addition, in the sub display device 209, all of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the upper left portion.

  FIG. 62 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 62 (d). Also, the character image h3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a manner of moving in the left direction by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the right direction. Therefore, the character image h3 of the character is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the upper left portion, and a part of the princess character image h4 is missing. Further, FIG. 62 (e) shows a state immediately before the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect is finished.

  In FIG. 62 (f), “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is a big hit Indicates a reported state. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of "o" notifying that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit is displayed. Also, FIG. 62 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved rightward from the state shown in FIG. 62 (e) and returned to the original state. Also, the character image h3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a manner of moving in the left direction by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the right direction. Therefore, the character image h3 of the character is displayed in a mode in which the character image h3 is not moved as seen from the player. In addition, on the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed.

As described above, in the lateral movement display advance presentation effect of this embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is moved at the same speed in the opposite direction as the sub display device 209 while moving the sub display device 209 sideways. The character image h3 of the character is displayed in such a manner that the character image h3 does not move from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, the character image h4 of the princess, which has been missed in the sub display device 209, is displayed on the sub display device 209 before the lateral movement display advance presentation effect is executed. As the horizontal movement display is performed, the display is displayed on the sub display device 209. In addition, the character image h4 of the princess is displayed on the sub display device 209 as the sub display device 209 moves more than a predetermined distance. For this reason, the player pays attention to the moving distance of the sub display device 209, which may improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the lateral movement display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, a character combined with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed may be displayed. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the lord may be displayed. In addition, while the sub display device 209 moves a predetermined distance in the left direction, the princess character image h4 is displayed, while the sub display device 209 moves a predetermined distance in the right direction. May be displayed. In addition, the aspect ratio of the character image h3 of the lord used for the lateral movement display advance presentation effect in the present embodiment and the character image h4 of the princess may change during the lateral movement display advance presentation effect.
(Example 11)

  An effect example of the eleventh example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (n) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series. The pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and the eleventh embodiment described later has the effect movable body 990. The performance movable body 990 can be moved and rotated two-dimensionally in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). . The effect movable body 990 may be capable of moving and rotating three-dimensionally. The effect movable body 990 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a character string image of "CR Tokyo Metropolitan Machine" is displayed on the surface.

  FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the special game 1 variation game is disappointing is stopped display It is done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth figure of the display mode for notifying the detachment is stopped and displayed. In addition, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 931 indicating that the pending count in the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 pending count display area 932 is 0 in the special figure 2 pending count. “0” is displayed to indicate that The special figure 1 reserve icon display area 950 displays a default special figure 1 reserve icon 951 displayed in a white circle. Further, FIG. 63 (a) shows a state where the effect movable body 990 is positioned at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 63 (a), the effect movable body 990 is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 63 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 931, and it is informed that the number of pendings in the special figure 1 decreases by 1 and the pending count in the special figure 1 becomes 0. Further, when the special drawing 1 suspension is reduced by one and the special drawing 1 change game is started, the movement animation of the special drawing 1 holding icon 951 is shown being executed. Further, in the hold display area 209 b at the lower left portion of the sub display device 209, “0” is displayed, which indicates that the number of holds in the special view 1 is zero.

  In FIG. 63 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the holding and changing icons is ended, and the changing icons 941 are changed in the changing icon display area 940. Indicates a displayed state. Also, based on the game ball entering the special view 1 start opening 230, “1” is displayed in the special view 1 hold count display area 931, and white is displayed in the first area of the special view hold icon display area 950. A state in which a default special view 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle appears due to an increase animation of the hold icon. Further, FIG. 63 (c) shows a balloon image immediately after displaying a speech of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. It shows the state.

  FIG. 63 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area 950. A special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is shown in the state of appearing by the increase animation of the hold icon. Further, an image of a character string of "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 63E shows a state in which an effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “logo drop effect”) in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward is performed. The logo falling effect is an effect used for announcing "logo falling" shown in FIG. 52 (b). In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the position around the effect movable body 990 behind. The effect image h5 is an image used for producing a logo drop. Also, in FIG. 63 (e), after the effect image h5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 2-decorative 4-decorative 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c. 1 shows the state of being notified that the result of the fluctuation game is out. In addition, when the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed. Further, FIG. 63E shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is executed. In addition, the logo falling effect shown in FIG. 63 (e) may be used as an effect combined with the change animation in which the display icon 952 is changed from white circular to black circular, and may be displayed as black circular There may be a case where it is used as an effect combined with the display of the special figure 1 suspension icon 953 that has been displayed, or it may be used alone as an effect of the advance notice. Next, FIG. 63 (f) shows a state in which the effect movable body 990 has moved upward from the position shown in FIG. 63 (e) and returned to the original position shown in FIG. 63 (a). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is erased along with the upward movement of the effect movable body 990.

  FIG. 63 (g) shows a state in which the reserve of the special figure 1 at the earliest stage is digested and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold count display area 931, which shows a state immediately after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the special view 1 hold icon 952 are started. Further, FIG. 63 (g) shows a balloon image immediately after displaying a speech of the character image h1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. It shows the state.

  FIG. 63 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation between the holding and changing icons and the moving animation of the special view 1 holding icon 953 are finished. Further, in FIG. 63 (h), an image of a character string of "To ~" is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant's character image h1, suggesting that a to-be-described character image h3 will appear. The production is being performed. The character image h3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect").

  FIG. 63 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character image h3 of the hall is displayed at the lower right portion of the effect display area 208d, and an image of a character string of "Called?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the character image h3 of the hall. In addition, an image of a character string “Tomon!” Is displayed on the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 63 (j) shows a state in which "description 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and reach effect is started. In addition, the image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image h1, and then the image of "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 of the lord. The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string “chance!” Representing the words of the character image h3 of the lord, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is to be executed.

  FIG. 63 (k) shows a state in which the rotation display advance presentation effect as the reach effect is executed. Further, in FIG. 63 (k), all the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “rotation target image” in this example) are the image display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state of rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise as seen from the player with the center of the area as the center of rotation. Further, in FIG. 63 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. While the rotation target image before rotation is displayed in the aspect ratio according to the screen of the aspect ratio 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), the rotation shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the target image is changed to the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 4: 5. In addition, a part of the "decoration 3" and a part of the navigation character display area 970 displayed in the right symbol display area 208c can not be seen from the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 63 (k), in order to make the notice of the rotation display notice noticeable, the effect movable body 990 moves to a position not visible by the player above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 63 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 63 (k). It shows. In addition, the rotation target image is displayed in the aspect ratio in accordance with the screen of aspect ratio 1: 1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 209, the image to be rotated is not seen. Further, FIG. 63 (l) shows a state in which logo falling effect is performed in which the movable body for effect 990 moves downward from the position (not shown) of FIG. 63 (k) during the rotation display advance notice effect. . Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is displayed as a rotation target image. Also, in FIG. 63 (l), unlike the state shown in FIG. 63 (e), the effect image h5 is displayed on the left of the effect display area 208d in a mode rotated 90 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player. ing. Further, the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 63 (l) is smaller than the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 63 (e) It is a size. The same applies to the hold icon, the change icon, the merchant character image h1, and the effect image h5.

  In FIG. 63 (m), the image to be rotated is rotated 270 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 63 (j). It shows the returned state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio and the original size. Also, in FIG. 63 (m), the effect movable body 990 moves upward from the position of FIG. 63 (l) and is positioned at the position of the original state (the position shown in FIG. 63 (a)) . Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is deleted. Next, in FIG. 63 (n), “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out It indicates the state of being informed that there is. In addition, when the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed.

As described above, when moving the effect movable body 990 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the logo falling effect of the present embodiment, the effect image is displayed on the back of the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208 When moving the effect movable body 990 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. There is an effect to be displayed. The effect image displayed at a position behind the effect movable body 2990 may cause the player to emphasize the operation of the effect movable body 990, and is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 Because the effect image is displayed at an unexpected position, the effect image may be able to give the player an unexpected surprise. In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the size of the effect image, the display color and the display position.
(Example 12)

  A presentation example of the example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (f) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series.

  FIG. 64 (a) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 63 (a). Next, FIG. 64 (b) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 63 (b). Next, in FIG. 64 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and shows the same state as FIG. 63 (c).

  FIG. 64 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, FIG. 64 (d) shows a state in which an effect (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "logo drop effect") in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position shown in FIG. 64 (c) is performed. It shows. The logo falling effect is an effect used for announcing "logo falling" shown in FIG. 52 (b). In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the position around the effect movable body 990 behind. The effect image h5 is an image used for producing a logo drop.

  FIG. 64 (e) shows a state in which island simultaneous rendering has been started during execution of the logo falling rendering. The island simultaneous rendering is a rendering in which pachinko machines of the same model installed in the same island facility execute the same rendering at the same timing. In the simultaneous island production of this embodiment, the character character h6 of the princess is singing a song on the left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the left middle right pattern display area 208a to 208c. The displayed decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character string image of “island simultaneous effect start!” Is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 64 (e), the effect image h5 displayed in FIG. 64 (d) is different from the position displayed in FIG. 64 (d) in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state of being displayed in a reduced size at the lower right. Further, FIG. 64E shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is performed. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area 950. A special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is displayed. Note that the logo falling effect of the present embodiment may be used as an effect that suggests that the display mode of the holding icon 952 is changed from white circle to black circle. It may be used alone as an effect.

  In FIG. 64 (f), during the simultaneous island production, the movable body for effect 990 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 64 (d) and returns to the original position (position shown in FIG. 64 (a)) Is shown. In addition, a character string image of "during all at once" is displayed on the right of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the all at once is being performed. In addition, the effect image h5 reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and the lower middle portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced in the left middle right display region 208a to 208c. -Decoration 4-Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In addition, when the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward, a deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 941 is executed.

  As described above, in the logo falling effect of this embodiment, when moving the effect movable body 990 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When moving the effect movable body 990 in the state of being displayed and in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the back of the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208 There is a state. In the state where the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be possible to give the player unexpectedness. Sometimes you can offer a topic. In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the size of the effect image, the display color and the display position.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the second embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 64 again.
(A1)

  It is a game console provided with an image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 209),

  The image display means may rotate and display the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the statue).

When the rotational display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIG. 53 (j) to (q), or FIG. 57 (c) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, the aspect ratio of the first image may change when the first image is rotationally displayed, so the presence of the first image is amplified. In some cases, it may be possible to give the player a strong impression. In addition, there may be a case where one or all of the images such as the character image, the decorative symbol, the holding icon, the variation icon, and the background pattern, etc., may be used as the first image. The first image may be the first image.
(A2)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (A1),

When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the holding icon or the number of holdings display) may not be rotated (for example, FIG. 55 (j) to (q) or FIG. 58 (c) to ( k)),
A game stand characterized by
(A3)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (A2),

When the rotational display is performed, the second image (for example, the fourth symbol) does not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 54 (j) to (q)).
A game stand characterized by

According to the game console having the configuration, the rotational display of the second image may not be performed when the rotational display of the first image is performed, so the rotational display of the first image is emphasized. Meanwhile, the second image can be firmly viewed by the player. In addition, there may be a case where one or all of the images such as the character image, the decoration pattern, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background pattern are used as the second image, and these images may be used. The second image may be a different image.
(A4)

  The game console according to any one of (A1) to (A3) above,

When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, a character image h4 of a princess) which is missed in the image display unit before the rotation display is displayed is displayed on the image display unit by the rotation display. (See, for example, FIGS. 60 (b) to (d)),
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, an image which has been missed in the image display means before the rotational display of the first image is performed is displayed on the image display means by the first rotational display. In some cases, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.
(A5)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above,

When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, a decorative symbol) displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display is performed may be missed in the image display unit by the rotation display. Some (see, for example, FIGS. 53 (i) to (k)),
A game stand characterized by

According to the game console having the configuration, the image displayed on the image display means before the rotational display of the first image is performed can not be read on the image display means due to the first rotational display being performed In some cases, it is possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.
(A6)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,

The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(A7)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,

The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by
(B1)

  An effect movable body (for example, an effect movable body 990);

Image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with

  In the first state (for example, FIG. 63E), when the movable body for effect is operated in front of the image display means, the first image (for example, the effect image h5) is displayed at the first position. It may be the display state of the effect image h5 shown or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG.

  The first position refers to the position behind the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 63 (e) or FIG. 64 (d)).

  The first image is an effect image,

  When the movable body for effect is operated in front of the image display means, a second state (for example, display of an effect image h5 shown in FIG. 63 (l)) in which the first image is displayed at a second position State or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG.

The second position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 63 (l) or FIG. 64 (e)).
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, when operating the movable body for effect in front of the image display means, the first image is placed at the second position different from the position behind the movable body for effect The effect image of the first image may be displayed at a position unexpected to the player because the second effect image may be displayed. There are times when you can.
(B2)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (B1),

  In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,

The third position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 63 (e) or FIG. 64 (d)).
A game stand characterized by
(B3)

  The gaming machine according to (B1) or (B2) above,

  The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,

  The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,

The third size is smaller than the first size (see, for example, FIGS. 63 (e) and (f) or FIGS. 64 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by

According to the game console having the configuration, the size of the first image in the first state and the size of the first image in the second state are different, so the player enjoys the variation of the first image to the player. There are times when you can not.
(B4)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B3) above,

  In the first state, a second image (for example, a decorative symbol) may be displayed in a first direction (for example, see FIG. 63E).

  In the second state, the second image may be displayed in a second orientation (a direction rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the first orientation) (see, for example, FIG. 63 (l)).

  The first image is an image different from the second image,

The second direction is a direction different from the first direction.
A game stand characterized by
(B5)

  It is a game stand according to the above (B4),

  The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,

  The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,

The fourth size is smaller than the second size (see, for example, FIGS. 63 (e) and (l)).
A game stand characterized by

According to the game console having the configuration, the size of the second image in the first state is different from the size of the second image in the second state, so the player enjoys the variation of the second image to the player. There are times when you can not. In addition, there may be a case where one or all of the images such as the character image, the decoration pattern, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background pattern are used as the second image, and these images may be used. The second image may be a different image.
(B6)

  The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,

The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(B7)

  The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,

The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by
(C1)

  An image display unit (for example, a sub display device 209) capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game;

Drive means (for example, a movable body for effect 225) for driving the image display unit;
A game console equipped with

  The image display unit may move by the drive of the drive means,

  The image display is performed in a period (hereinafter, referred to as a “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (rotational direction about the rotation axis of the image display unit or linear direction). The unit may display a first moving image (for example, a moving image of a character image h3 of the lord or a moving image of a character image h4 of a princess),

The first moving image is a moving image including an aspect in which a first image (for example, a character image h3 of a shrine or a character image h4 of a princess) moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, an impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and by changing the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit during the period of the movement, as a notification means This makes it possible to cause the player to perform an action that does not appear on a non-daily basis, and may allow the player to forget everyday and concentrate on playing more games. Alternatively, all the periods in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the periods in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. As the first period. In addition, with a certain effect as an opportunity, all periods of the period from when the image display unit starts moving in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period, or with an effect different from the effect. A part of a period from the movement of the image display unit in the first direction to the stop may be set as the first period.
(C2)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (C1),

  The game console characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the first image.

Although the example according to the present embodiment shows an example in which the expression, the outer shape, and the like of the first image (character image h3 of the temple or the character image h4 of the princess) are displayed in a fixed manner, the expression of the first image , The outer shape, etc. may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, if FIG. 60 is illustrated and demonstrated, the face of the shrine which was not displayed in FIG. 60 (a) will be displayed as a true face in FIG. 60 (b), and it will become a smile a little in FIG. In 60 (d), a full smile may be obtained, and in FIG. 60 (e), a slight smile may be made, and in FIG. 60 (f), an animation may be made to return to the real face. The movement of the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the temple) in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image h3 of the statue moves. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the display of the character, and the change of the outer shape of the character or the like, the variable display of the speech (display of change from partial character string indicating speech to whole character string, etc.), character or icon The color change, the movement display of a character or an icon, or the like may be used, or a combination of these may be included.
(C3)

  The gaming machine according to (C1) or (C2) above,

  During the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction,

  During the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation,

The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions,
A game stand characterized by

In the game stand provided with the configuration, the first direction in which the image display unit is operated with one of the effects as an opportunity (for example, arrival of timing to start the image display unit operation effect during super reach) is one. Image (for example, when the timing to start rendering by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not a definite change at the end of the big hit starts, etc.) The first orientation when the display unit operates may be another orientation (for example, rightward). Also, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite direction, in which case the player may move or rotate the first image faster than the movement or rotation of the image display unit. Is visible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an unusual feeling which can not be obtained in a mode in which the image is rotated in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is further accelerated. In some cases, it is possible to forget a more everyday feeling from turning and moving, and to concentrate on the game.
(C4)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (C3),

  During the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at a first speed,

  During the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed,

The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, the image display unit appears to move to the player, but the display position, the display angle, etc. of the first image does not seem to move, so the notification means is unusual. When it is possible to perform a static operation, the notification by the image display unit display itself can play the same role as when it is not moving, and it becomes possible to achieve both of the operation with impact and the notification. There is. In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be different from each other in the first direction and the second direction, and in this case, the first and second directions may be different from each other. The player visually recognizes that one image moves or rotates slowly. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an unusual feeling that can not be obtained in a mode in which the image is rotated in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is the image display unit. It may be possible to focus on the game by forgetting a more everyday feeling from performing movement or rotation so as to follow movement or rotation slowly. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with emphasis on impact, the notification by the image display unit display is close to the case where it is not moving by moving and rotating the first image gently. It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.
(C5)

  The game console according to any one of (C1) to (C4) above,

The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image h1 ′) is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(C6)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (C5),

During the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction,
A game stand characterized by

The gaming machine having the configuration may be configured such that a second image which does not move in the first direction is not displayed in the first period. That is, in the first period, all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, so that the image display unit and the movement of the image are given a sense of unity, which has more impact. The rendering operation may be executable.
(C7)

  The game console according to (C5) or (C6) above,

  A game console characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.

In the example according to the present embodiment, the expression, the outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1 ′) are fixedly displayed, but according to the game console having the configuration, The expression, outline, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, if FIG. 61 is illustrated and demonstrated, the merchant's face which was not displayed on the sub display 209 in FIG. 61 (a) will be displayed in a true face in FIG. 61 (b) and a little on FIG. 61 (c). It is possible to have an animation that makes the face look steep, that in FIG. 61 (d) becomes the face stinky, in FIG. 61 (e) returns to the face slightly steep, and in FIG. 61 (f) returns to the real face. Also, the manner in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation does not move. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the display of the character, and the change of the outer shape of the character or the like, the variable display of the speech (display of change from partial character string indicating speech to whole character string, etc.), character or icon The color change, the movement display of a character or an icon, or the like may be used, or a combination of these may be included.
(C8)

  The gaming machine according to (C3) or (C4) above,

  The term "moves by the drive of the drive means" described in the above (C1) means "rotates by the drive of the drive means",

  The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in the above (C1) means "the first image rotates in the first direction",

The first direction is a rotation direction (for example, a circumferential direction) around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by
(C9)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (C8),

The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by
(C10)

  The game console according to any one of (C1) to (C7) above,

  The term “moves by the drive of the drive means” described in the above (C1) means “moves linearly by the drive of the drive means”,

“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the above (C1) means “the first image linearly moves in the first direction”.
A game stand characterized by

  “The first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction”. The above-mentioned first direction in this case is one of upward and downward. In addition, “the first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the left and right direction”. The above-mentioned first direction in this case is one of the left direction and the right direction. “The first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the oblique direction”. The above-mentioned first direction in this case is one of the left upward, right downward, right upward, and left downward directions.

  A modification of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, when the driving means (the movable body 225 for effect) shown in FIGS. 57 to 62 performs combined movement of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, oblique direction, front to rear direction as seen from the player) There may be. Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to be equipped with a plurality of image display units. Also, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. An LED may be mounted in the image display unit, and a movable body for effect may be mounted. In addition, after the effect movable body moves from the initial state to the movable state before the image display unit rotates or moves, and the effect display movable body moves in the movable state after the effect movable body moves. After stopping, the movable body for effect may be configured to move to the initial state. Also, during the symbol variation display, the symbol in which the symbol variation display is finally stopped is displayed when the attraction operation shown in FIG. 59 is performed, as compared to the case where the rendering operation shown in FIG. 58 is performed. The aspect may be configured to be a big hit aspect easily, and when the effect operation of FIG. 58 is performed while the effect operation of FIG. 59 is performed during the symbol variation display, The symbol aspect to be finally displayed in stop in the symbol variation display may be configured to be likely to be a big hit aspect. Further, when the effect operation of FIG. 58 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the big hit mode, During the symbol variation display, when the rendering operation of FIG. 59 is performed, the symbol aspect to be finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the big hit aspect. 58 and 59 show an example in which the same effect display is performed in both cases, but when the sub display shown in FIG. 58 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display also rotates together. The effect to be viewed by the player is different from the effect to be viewed by the player so that the image displayed on the sub-display device is not rotating together when the sub-display device shown in FIG. 59 is rotated. It may be configured to be an effect of. For example, "one of the other effects" is an effect that the hall is fighting with the musician, and "the other effect of the other effects" is such that the princess dances. It is also good. One type of “one of the different effects” may be mounted, or a plurality of types may be mounted, or “one of the other effects of the other effects” may be mounted. You may carry multiple types. Also, as shown in FIG. 58, when the sub display device rotates, the figure is more than the number of types of effects in which at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device rotates together. As shown in 59, when the sub-display device rotates, at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub-display device may not be rotated together. The number of types may be configured to be larger. Conversely, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 59, the player visually recognizes that at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotating together. Of the effect in which at least a portion (or all) of the images displayed on the sub display device are rotated together, as shown in FIG. 58, rather than the number of types of effects The number of types may be configured to be larger.

Also, the effect example shown in FIG. 58 and the effect example shown in FIG. 59 may be combined. For example, in a period in which the sub display starts rotating (period A), the sub display is rotated at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) and displayed on the sub display The image prevents the rotation of the image displayed on the sub-display to be viewed by the player to rotate with the sub-display. In the next period (period B), the sub-display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display device is more than the sub-display device. At least a portion or all of the image is rotated in another orientation (e.g., clockwise) at a speed B '(e.g., 20 rpm) so as to be viewed by the player as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub-display device is rotated at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and the image displayed on the sub-display device is larger than that of the sub-display device. At least a portion or all of the image is rotated in another orientation (e.g., clockwise) at a speed C '(e.g., 40 rpm) so as to be viewed by the player as rotating slowly. Also, in the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is rotated. First, at least part or all of the image is rotated at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm) in another direction (for example, clockwise) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated at a speed E (for example, 50 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and an image displayed on the sub display device is larger than that of the sub display device. At least a portion or all of the image is rotated in another orientation (e.g., clockwise) at a speed E '(e.g., 40 rpm) to be viewed by the player as if it is rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub-display device is rotated at a speed F (for example, 40 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and the image displayed on the sub-display device is larger than that of the sub-display device. At least a portion or all of the image is rotated in another orientation (e.g., clockwise) at a speed F '(e.g., 20 rpm) to be viewed by the player as if it is rotating slowly. The sub display device is rotated at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) in a period (period G) before the sub display device of the next period finishes rotation, and displayed on the sub display device The image to be displayed may not rotate so as to be viewed by the player as it rotates with the sub display device. Thus, as illustrated in the period A to the period D, as the period in which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually deviates from the rotation of the sub display device. The sub-display device rotates, and a part or all of the display of the sub-display device is shifted to a state where it is viewed by the player as if it is stopped, thereby creating a new sense of unity with the sub-display device and the image. It may be possible to perform certain effects. In addition, as illustrated in the period D to the period G, as the period in which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually rotated together with the sub display device By causing the player to visually recognize so as to change as described above, it may be possible to perform an effect with a new sense of unity by the sub display device and the image. In these examples, in the periods A to D, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually decreased, and in the period D to G, the sub display Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, in the period A to D, the rotation of the sub display device is The difference between the speed and the speed of rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, and in the periods D to G, the speed of rotation of the sub display device and the speed of rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device. The difference in speed may be gradually reduced. In addition, although the images displayed on the rotating sub-display device and the rotating sub-display device are illustrated here, the present invention is also applicable to an image displayed on a linearly moving sub-display device and a linearly moving sub-display device. Is also possible.
Third Embodiment

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. The same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the component same as the pachinko machine 100 by the said 2nd Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the following description excluding FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, the side closer to the player with the pachinko machine 100 installed on an island facility of a game arcade is referred to as “front” (front, front, front side, front end, etc.) Also, the reverse is referred to as “rear” (rear, rear, rear side, rear end, etc.), and the vertical upper side as viewed from the player is “upper” (upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and vice versa. (Lower, lower side, lower end etc.), the horizontal left side is "left" (left side, left side, left end etc.) viewed from the player, and vice versa "right" (right side, right side, right end etc. And).

  FIG. 65 is a schematic front view of the game board 1000 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is disposed in a center case substantially at the center of the game area 124 defined by the outer rails 202 and the inner rails 204. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is for driving effects by driving the decorative symbol display device 208 and a lamp, and the details will be described later.

  The game board 1000 of this example is a game board for so-called right-handed machines. With regard to the common view start port 228 and the special view 2 start port 232, since these common view start port 228 and the special view 2 start port 232 are disposed on the right path, entering of the game ball falling on the right path Is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the gaming ball falling on the left path. With regard to the variable winning opening 234, it is relatively easy to enter the gaming ball falling on the right path according to the arrangement pattern of the game nails, and it is relatively difficult to enter the gaming ball falling on the left path. In FIG. 65, illustration of the game nail is omitted. On the other hand, with regard to the special figure 1 starting opening 230, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the left path due to the presence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails and the warp device 242 etc. Entry of falling game balls is relatively difficult. Although the right-handed machine is described as an example in the present embodiment, it may be other than the right-handed machine. In addition, a general winning opening (not shown) is provided on the right path and the left path.

  Warp devices 242 (242a and 242b) and a front stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, and a plurality of movable bodies are arranged in the non-rollable area of the game ball It is done. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has six movable bodies of a movable body 1002, a movable body 1004, a movable body 1006, a movable body 1008, a movable body 1010, and a movable body 1012. These movable bodies are disposed in the order of the movable body 1010, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1002, the movable bodies 1006 and 1008, and the movable body 1012 from the front side. The movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are arranged such that the positions in the front-rear direction are the same. In addition, the movable body 1004 is disposed on the front side of the movable body 1002. The second auxiliary control unit 500 executes drive control of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1010, and the movable body 1012. The drive control may be performed by the first auxiliary control unit 400.

  The movable body 1002 has a laterally long rectangular outer appearance when viewed from the front side. The movable body 1002 is movable in the vertical direction behind the front stage 244. In the state shown in FIG. 65, the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position. Further, the movable body 1002 has a sub display device 1030 on the front side.

  A liquid crystal display is used for the sub display 1030. The sub display device 1030 includes a horizontally long rectangular display area smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208, and displays one or a plurality of images. In this example, the sub display device 1030 displays an image of the view of the sea on which the yacht floats. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is adopted as the sub display device 1030, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, display control of the sub display device 1030 is executed by the first sub control unit 400. The display control of the sub display device 1030 may be executed by the second sub control unit 500, or a display control unit for executing the display control may be newly provided. The display control unit may execute display control of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, the movable body 1002 includes an elongated illumination unit 1014a, an illumination unit 1014b, an illumination unit 1014c, and an illumination unit 1014d, which are disposed so as to surround the sub display device 1030. The illumination unit 1014 a is disposed to the left of the sub display device 1030 such that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014 b is disposed below the sub display device 1030 such that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014 c is disposed to the right of the sub display device 1030 such that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014 d is disposed above the sub display device 1030 such that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of LEDs are used as light sources of the illumination units 1014 a to 1014 d, and the illumination units 1014 a to 1014 d can emit light of a plurality of colors.

  Further, at the upper left portion of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1004 is disposed. The movable body 1004 has an external shape imitating lightning. The movable body 1004 is fixed at one point on the upper left portion of the movable body 1002, which is outside the display area of the sub display device 1030. By driving the movable body 1004 with a stepping motor (not shown), the front of the sub display device 1030 can be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen, with the one point as a rotation center. In the state shown in FIG. 65, the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. The movable body 1004 overlaps the display area of the sub display device 1030 in a state where the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. As a result, part of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1004. The initial position of the movable body 1004 is a position in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. The movable body 1004 does not overlap with the display area of the sub display 1030 when positioned at the initial position.

  A movable body 1006 is disposed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1006 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001, and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1002 has a plate-like shape, a transmitting portion 1006a is provided at the upper portion, and a transmitting portion 1006b is provided at the lower portion. The transmitting portions 1006a and 1006b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1006 is visible through the transmitting portions 1006a and 1006b. Note that the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b may be visible as far as the rear side can be seen, a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be disposed in the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b, and the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b are openings. May be In addition, an elongated illumination unit 1016 is disposed at the front right end of the movable body 1006. The illumination unit 1016 is disposed such that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of color LEDs are used as a light source of the illumination unit 1016, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light of a plurality of colors.

  A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1006. The movable body 1006 moves to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. The operation range of the movable body 1006 is from the position where the right end portion of the movable body 1006 is positioned to the left of the display area left end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position where it is located at the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 . The movable body 1006 can not be viewed by the player in the state of being located at the left end of the operation range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 65, the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1006 overlaps a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when located at the initial position. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized through the transmission parts 1006 a and 1006 b of the movable body 1006.

  A movable body 1008 is disposed on the right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1008 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001, and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1008 has a plate-like shape, a transmission portion 1008 a is provided at the upper portion, and a transmission portion 1008 b is provided at the lower portion. The transmitting portions 1008 a and 1008 b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1008 is visible through the transmitting portions 1008 a and 1008 b. The transparent portions 1008a and 1008b may be visible if the rear side is visible, and a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be disposed in the transparent portions 1008a and 1008b, and the transparent portions 1008a and 1008b are openings. May be Further, at the left end on the front side of the movable body 1008, an elongated illumination unit 1018 is disposed. The illumination unit 1018 is disposed such that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of color LEDs are used as light sources of the lighting unit 1018, and the lighting unit 1016 can emit light of a plurality of colors.

  A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1008. The movable body 1008 moves left and right along with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. The operating range of the movable body 1008 is from the position where the left end of the movable body 1008 is positioned to the right of the display area right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position where it is located at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 . The movable body 1008 can not be viewed by the player in the state of being positioned at the right end of the operation range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 65, the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1008 overlaps a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when located at the initial position. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1008. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized through the transmission parts 1008 a and 1008 b of the movable body 1008.

  The movable body 1006 functions as a left shutter, and the movable body 1008 functions as a right shutter. When the movable body 1006 moves to the right end of the movement range and the movable body 1008 moves to the left end of the movement range, the right end of the movable body 1006 and the left end of the movable body 1008 are in contact with each other. An effect of opening and closing the shutter is performed by the movable bodies 1006 and 1008.

  A movable body 1010 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1010 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and a character string of "chance" is attached to the front side. Further, the movable body 1010 is movable in the vertical direction in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown). Further, in a state in which the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 are closed, the movable body 1010 can move in front of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 in the vertical direction. In the state shown in FIG. 65, the movable body 1010 is located at the initial position.

  The movable body 1012 is disposed at the upper left portion of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The movable body 1012 has an appearance similar to that of the movable body 1004 and imitating lightning. Further, the movable body 1012 is fixed at one point on the upper left side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. By driving the movable body 1012 with a stepping motor (not shown), the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen with the one point as a rotation center. The movable body 1012 can rotate 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. The movable body 1012 may be rotatable by 360 ° or more.

  Further, in the game board 1000, one sensor is disposed for each movable body to detect whether the movable bodies 1002 to 1012 are positioned at the initial position. The sensor is included in the effect movable body sensor 424 shown in FIG. Further, for example, a photo sensor is used as the sensor.

  A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is disposed on the rear side of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed at the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. In the state shown in FIG. 65, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand design display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the effect display area 208d below the left middle right graphic display area 208a to 208c, a white circular fluctuation icon a1, a white circular reservation icon b1, a white circular reservation icon b2, and a white circle character of "heat" The hold icon b3 drawn and the black circular hold icon b4 are displayed side by side in this order from the left. The hold icon b1 indicates that the special figure 1 change game with the first hold order is held, the hold icon b2 indicates that the special figure 1 change game with the second hold order is held, and the hold icon b3 has the third hold order. The special figure 1 variation game is shown on hold, and the hold icon b4 is showing the fourth special order 1 variation game on hold. In the effect display area 208d, a background image including an image of the sun, clouds, and a balloon is displayed. A part of the image of the sun is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun is visible to the player through the transparent portion 1006a of the movable body 1006. Also, a part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible to the player through the transparent portion 1006b of the movable body 1006. Further, part of the image of the cloud is hidden by the movable body 1002.

  In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 includes an elongated illumination unit 1020, an illumination unit 1022, an illumination unit 1024, and an illumination unit 1026 which are arranged to surround the decorative symbol display device 208. The illumination unit 1020 is disposed to the left of the decorative symbol display device 208 such that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1022 is disposed to the right of the decorative symbol display device 208 such that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1024 is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 such that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1026 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208 such that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of color LEDs are used as light sources of the illumination units 1020 to 1026, and the illumination units 1020 to 1026 can emit light of a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 65, the entire illumination units 1024 and 1026 are visible from the player, and only a part of the illumination unit 1020 is visible from the player via the transmission unit 1006 a. Is visible from the player only through the transparent portion 1008a.

  Next, the movable body 1002 will be described in more detail using FIG. FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the front. Below the movable body 1002, a motor 1040 which is a drive source of the movable body 1002 is disposed. The motor 1040 is fixed to the center case of the game board 1000 so that the rotation axis is in the vertical direction. One end of a screw shaft 1042 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1040 so that the extending direction is in the vertical direction.

  A lower base 1044 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the motor 1040. The lower base 1044 is fixed to the game board 1000. The motor 1040 and the lower base 1044 are disposed behind and below the front stage 244 and are invisible to the player. The lower base 1044 has a receiving portion 1044a having a flat surface for receiving the movable body 1002 on the right side and a shaft fixing portion 1044b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. The receiving portion 1044a and the shaft fixing portion 1044b are stepped, and the receiving portion 1044a is positioned higher than the shaft fixing portion 1044b. Therefore, when the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost position in the movement range, the movable body 1002 contacts with the receiving portion 1044a but does not contact with the shaft fixing portion 1044b.

  Further, the receiving portion 1044a is provided with a through hole penetrating the lower base 1044 in the vertical direction, and a slide bearing is disposed in the through hole. The screw shaft 1042 passes through the slide bearing and is supported by the slide bearing.

  Moreover, in the state shown to Fig.66 (a), the movable body 1004 is located in the initial position. The movable body 1004 can rotate about 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. The movable body 1004 may be rotatable by 60 ° or more (for example, 360 °).

  66B and 66C show the movable body 1002 viewed from the rear right side. In the state shown in FIG. 66 (b), the movable body 1002 is located at the top of the movement range. In the state shown in FIG. 66C, the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position in the movement range. As shown in FIGS. 66B and 66C, the movable body 1002 includes a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a moving unit 1036. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is disposed on the front side of the movable body 1002, and includes a movable body 1004, illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and a sub display 1030 as shown in FIG.

  The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a driver for the sub display device 1030, LEDs of the lighting units 1014a to 1014d, a driver for the LED, a motor for driving the movable body 1004, and a gear. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 also has a rectangular window 1034a, a window 1034b, a window 1034c, a window 1034d (not shown in FIG. 66B), and a window 1034e on the rear side. The window unit 1034a is disposed behind the illumination unit 1014a, the window unit 1034b is disposed behind the illumination unit 1014b, the window unit 1034c is disposed behind the illumination unit 1014c, and the window unit 1034d is disposed behind the illumination unit 1014d It is done. A transparent plate is disposed in the windows 1034a to 1034e, and the front side of the windows 1034a to 1034e is visible. On the front side of the windows 1034 a to 1034 d, LEDs, an LED driver mounting substrate, lenses for decoration, and the like are disposed. The windows 1034a to 1034d are used for inspection of the lighting unit. In addition, the window 1034 e is disposed at the rear of the movable body 1004. A motor for driving the movable body 1004 and a gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor and transmitting power to the movable body 1004 are disposed on the front side of the window portion 1034e. The window 1034 e is used for checking the drive mechanism of the movable body 1004.

  The moving unit 1036 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape smaller than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and is disposed on the rear surface side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The moving unit 1036 has a motor for driving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to rotate, a gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor, and transmitting a power of the motor to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 therein. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 are connected via a harness. Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is installed in the moving unit 1036 so that it can be rotationally operated within the same plane including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 with the display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation when in the initial posture. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial position shown in FIG. 66 (b), and can be rotated 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial position. Thus, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 also functions as a movable body.

  When the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable unit 1036 are connected using a connection unit (slip ring or the like) shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 described later, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction. , May be rotatable to a predetermined angle of more than 180 degrees, may be rotatable to a predetermined angle of more than 360 degrees, and may have no limitation of the rotation angle.

  Further, in the moving unit 1036, two through holes penetrating in the vertical direction are provided. A nut is fixed to the right through hole, and the screw shaft 1042 is fitted in the nut. By rotating the screw shaft 1042, the nut can be moved up and down to move the movable body 1002 up and down. Further, a guide shaft 1046 passes through the left through hole. The movable body 1004 is guided by the guide shaft 1046 and can be stably moved up and down.

  An upper base 1048 is disposed above the moving unit 1036. The upper base 1048 is fixed to a transparent plate (not shown) disposed at a position where the position in the front-rear direction is between the movable body 1002 and the movable bodies 1006 and 1008, and is disposed at a position hardly visible to the player. The upper base 1048 has a receiving portion 1048a provided with a flat surface for receiving the moving unit 1036 on the right side and a shaft fixing portion 1048b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. A slide bearing is disposed in the receiving portion 1048b, and the other end of the screw shaft 1042 is supported by the slide bearing. Further, the receiving portion 1048a and the shaft fixing portion 1048b are stepped, and the receiving portion 1048a is located at a lower position than the shaft fixing portion 1048b. In addition, the moving unit 1036 has an upper surface portion 1036a having a flat surface that comes in contact with the receiving portion 1048a when moved to the uppermost position. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the movable body 1002 is at the uppermost position, the upper surface portion 1036a of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

  In addition, the moving unit 1036 has a lower surface portion 1036 b having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044 a of the lower base 1044 when moving to the lowermost position. As shown in FIG. 66C, when the movable body 1002 is at the lowermost position, the lower surface 1036b of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

  The moving unit 1036 further includes control means for controlling the moving operation of the movable body 1002 and the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 inside. The movement control means disposed in the movement unit 1036 may include a microprocessor, a programmable IC, an ASIC, a DSP, a ROM, a RAM, an LSI, a communication control circuit, and the like. The mobile unit 1036 may be provided with only one of these movement control means, or may be provided with a plurality. Also, a control board (for example, a harness (not shown) whose one end is connected to the sub display device 1030 extends from the rear side of the moving unit 1036 and the other end of the harness is arranged on the back side of the game board 1000 (for example, It is connected to the first sub-substrate 160). The other end of the harness may be connected to the relay board, and the sub display device 1030 and the control board may be connected via the harness and the relay board.

  Next, the operation of the movable body 1002 will be described using FIGS. 66 (b) and 66 (c). FIG. 66 (b) shows a state where the movable body 1002 is positioned at the top of the movement range. The top surface 1036 a of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1048 a of the upper base 1048. The receiving portion 1048 a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002.

  From the state shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the screw shaft 1042 is viewed clockwise from below by driving the motor 1040 and rotated clockwise, the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted to the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves below the shaft 1042. Thereby, the movable body 1002 moves downward.

  FIG. 66 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position in the movement range. The lower surface portion 1036 b of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1044 a of the lower base 1044. The receiving portion 1044 a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002. Also, from the state shown in FIG. 66C, when the screw shaft 1042 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from above from below by the motor 1040, the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted to the screw shaft 1042 is a screw. It moves above the shaft 1042. Thereby, the movable body 1002 moves upward.

  Further, when the movable body 1002 is to be stopped at a position higher than the lowermost position, a load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 by the weight of the movable body 1002, so that a torque having a size commensurate with the load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 by the motor 1040. . Thus, the screw shaft 1042 can be prevented from rotating due to the load of the movable body 1002 by its own weight, and the movable body 1002 can be made to stand still.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off for some reason in a state where the movable body 1002 stands still at a position higher than the lowermost position, power for driving the motor 1040 can not be obtained. Therefore, the screw shaft 1042 rotates clockwise as viewed from below from above by the load of the movable body 1002 by its own weight, and moves until the movable body 1002 contacts the receiving portion 1044 b of the lower base 1044. Even when the movable body 1002 moves downward by its own weight, the movable body 1002 can be received by the receiving portion 1044b, so breakage of the movable body 1002 can be prevented.
Example 1

  FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 show an example of effects in Example 1 of the present embodiment. 67 and 68 show the effect state in time series. Each of FIGS. 67 (a) to (q), (t), (u), (x) to (z), (i) to (d) and FIG. 68 show the game of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 67 (r) and 67 (s) show only the main liquid crystal unit 1001, and FIGS. 67 (v) and 67 (w) show only the movable body 1002. In FIG. 67 and the following figures, the general drawing display device 210, the special drawing 1 display device 212, the special drawing 2 display device 214, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the high certainty lamp 222 are omitted. And illustration of the game ball is also omitted.

  FIG. 67 (a) shows a state in which the special figure change game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at initial positions. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is a position higher than the lowermost position shown in FIG. 66 (c), and is a position closer to the lowermost position than the uppermost position shown in FIG. 66 (b). When the movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position, the whole is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be viewed through the transmitting portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transmitting portion 1006b.

  FIG. 67 (b) continuing from FIG. 67 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted in special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular holding icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is one. In addition, the black circular holding icon is a holding icon of the prefetching notice mode as shown in FIG. 52 (a).

  FIG. 67 (c) continuing from FIG. 67 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. After the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 67 (d) continuing from FIG. 67 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started. In FIG. 67 and thereafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol is indicated by a downward-pointing white thick arrow. In the present embodiment, after the start of the moving animation of the holding and changing icon, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 67 (e) continuing from FIG. 67 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Reach production is started from FIG.

  FIG. 67 (f) continuing from FIG. 67 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position in the operation range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image becomes invisible from the player. In the pachinko machine 100, at least a part of the decorative symbol or the notice image (for example, an image such as the sun, clouds, a balloon, a holding icon, a fluctuation icon, etc.) overlaps with the movable body and becomes invisible to the player. Is more likely to be a big hit in the special figure fluctuation game being executed or the special figure fluctuation game being held, as compared to the case where at least a part of the decorative symbol or the notice image does not overlap with the movable body. It may be configured as follows.

  67 (g) continuing from FIG. 67 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position of the movement range of the movable body 1010. When the movable body 1010 returns to the initial position, the rendering operation of the movable body 1010 in the reach effect is ended.

  FIG. 67 (h) continuing from FIG. 67 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved to the right from the initial position. A part of the image of the sun and a part of the "decoration 2" are viewed through the transmitting portion 1006a, and a portion of the cloud image is viewed through the transmitting portion 1006b. When the movable body 1006 is positioned at the initial position as shown in FIG. 67 (g) and when the movable body 1006 is moved rightward from the initial position as shown in FIG. 67 (h), an image of the sun and The visible parts of the cloud image are different. When the image of the sun or the image of the cloud is displayed as the preview image, the visible portion of the preview image is different before and after the movement of the movable body. The symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image may be different before and after movement of the movable body is such that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily determined than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image may not be different. It may be configured.

  67 (i) continuing from FIG. 67 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved leftward and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1006 in the reach rendering is completed.

  FIG. 67 (j) continuing from FIG. 67 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the left. A part of the image of the cloud and a part of the "decoration 2" are viewed through the transmissive portion 1008a, and a portion of the image of the cloud is viewed through the transmissive portion 1008b. Thus, as shown in FIG. 67 (i), when the movable body 1008 is positioned at the initial position, and when the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the left as shown in FIG. 67 (j), The visible part of the image of and the image of the cloud is different. The symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image may be different before and after movement of the movable body is such that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily determined than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image may not be different. It may be configured. When prefetching notice is performed in which the visible portion of the notice image may be different before and after movement of the movable body, the prefetch notice is performed in which the visible portion of the notice image may not be different before and after movement of the movable body. The jackpot symbol form may be configured to be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case where it is read.

  67 (k) continuing from FIG. 67 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1008 in the reach rendering is completed.

  FIG. 67 (l) continuing from FIG. 67 (k) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position from the initial position. In the present example, the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position and starts the rendering operation.

  FIG. 67 (m) continuing from FIG. 67 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be rotated 180 ° clockwise and counterclockwise from an initial posture in which the upper and lower end sides are parallel to the horizontal direction and the left and right sides are parallel to the vertical direction as shown in FIG. It is. In FIG. 67 (m), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise.

  67 (n) continuing from FIG. 67 (m) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 (m). As shown in FIGS. 67 (l) to 67 (n), before and after the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the portion where the balloon image and the cloud image can be viewed is different. When an image of a balloon or an image of a cloud is displayed as a preview image, the visible portion of the preview image is different before and after the operation of the movable body. The symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image may be different before and after movement of the movable body is such that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily determined than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image may not be different. It may be configured. When prefetching notice is performed in which the visible portion of the notice image may be different before and after movement of the movable body, the prefetch notice is performed in which the visible portion of the notice image may not be different before and after movement of the movable body. The jackpot symbol form may be configured to be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case where it is read.

  67 (o) continuing from FIG. 67 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 (n) and returned to the initial posture.

  FIG. 67 (p) continuing from FIG. 67 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved downward and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 in the reach rendering is completed.

  67 (q) continuing from FIG. 67 (p) shows a state where the movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 67 (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 at the same timing as FIG. 67 (q), and shows that the movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. By the rotation operation of the movable body 1012, the movable body 1012 and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap. For this reason, the movable body 1012 makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the sun image and part of the "decoration 2". The symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image may be different before and after movement of the movable body is such that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily determined than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image may not be different. It may be configured. When prefetching notice is performed in which the visible portion of the notice image may be different before and after movement of the movable body, the prefetch notice is performed in which the visible portion of the notice image may not be different before and after movement of the movable body. The jackpot symbol form may be configured to be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case where it is read.

  67 (s) which follows from FIGS. 67 (q) and (r) show only the main liquid crystal unit 1001, and the movable body 1012 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 67 (q) and (r). It shows a state where it has been rotated by 90 ° and returned to the initial position. FIG. 67 (t) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 67 (s). When the movable body 1012 returns to the initial position, the rendering operation of the movable body 1012 in the reach effect is ended.

  FIG. 67 (u) continued from FIGS. 67 (s) and (t) shows a state where the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 67 (v) shows only the movable body 1002 at the same timing as that of FIG. 67 (u), and shows a state where the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. By the rotation operation of the movable body 1004, the movable body 1004 and the image of the view of the sea displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap. For this reason, a part of the image of the view of the sea can not be viewed from the player by the movable body 1004. Images of sea views may be displayed as preview images. The symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image may be different before and after movement of the movable body is such that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily determined than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image may not be different. It may be configured. When prefetching notice is performed in which the visible portion of the notice image may be different before and after movement of the movable body, the prefetch notice is performed in which the visible portion of the notice image may not be different before and after movement of the movable body. The jackpot symbol form may be configured to be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case where it is read.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 67 (u), the number of reservations for special figure 1 increases from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted in special figure 1 start opening 230, and is displayed in effect display area 208d. A white circular hold icon is displayed.

  67 (w) continued from FIG. 67 (u) and (v), only the movable body 1002 is extracted and shown, and the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 67 (u) and (v). It shows a state where it has been rotated and returned to the initial position. FIG. 67 (x) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 67 (w). When the movable body 1004 returns to the initial position, the rendering operation of the movable body 1004 in the reach effect is finished.

  FIG. 67 (y) continuing from FIGS. 67 (w) and (x) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change game is ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle-right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is reported that the result of the special view 1 variation display is out.

  FIG. 67 (z) continuing from FIG. 67 (y) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is executed during non-execution of the special figure fluctuation game. In the effect display area 208d, the black circular fluctuation icon corresponding to the finished special figure 1 fluctuation game is erased.

  FIG. 67 (b) continuing from FIG. 67 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. After the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and the movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  67 (b) continued from FIG. 67 (b), the variation display of the decorative symbol was started based on the first sub-control unit 400 receiving the symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300. It shows the state. The symbol variation start command includes information on variation time. The fluctuation time of this example is determined to, for example, 30 seconds in the special view 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 67 (C) continuing from FIG. 67 (B) shows a state where power interruption occurs when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off. Further, in this example, all the movable bodies other than the movable body 1002 stand still at the timing at which the power interruption occurred.

  FIG. 67 (D) continuing from FIG. 67 (C) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost position in the movement range by its own weight. The movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state where the power is off. The lowermost position of the movable body 1002 is the non-operating position of the movable body 1002. When the movable body 1002 is located at the non-operating position, only the upper end of the display area of the sub display device 1030 is visible to the player.

  FIG. 68 (a) continuing from FIG. 67 (d) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

  FIG. 68 (b) continuing from FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. The pachinko machine 100 starts up in the order of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 when the power is turned on from the off state. In (b) of FIG. 68, the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed and the special view 1 change game in the special view 1 display device 212 is resumed, and the first sub control unit 400 is in operation. On the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, a character string image of "during startup .." is displayed.

  FIG. 68 (c) continuing from FIG. 68 (b) shows a state in which the second auxiliary control unit 500 has been activated. After the start of the second sub control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub control unit 500 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is to be performed.

  FIG. 68 (d) continuing from FIG. 68 (c) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, first, an initial operation of the movable body 1002 is performed. As shown in FIG. 68 (d), the movable body 1002 is moved to the uppermost position. Further, on the sub display device 1030 provided on the movable body 1002, a character string image of "initially operating" is displayed as in the case of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 68 (e) continued from FIG. 68 (d) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 68 (f) continuing from FIG. 68 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68 (e). 68 (g) continuing from FIG. 68 (f), the movable body 1002 is in the initial position after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68 (f) and returned to the initial posture. It shows the moved state. In the initial operation of the movable body 1002 in this example, first, the movable body 1002 moves from the lowermost position to the uppermost position, and then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates counterclockwise 45 degrees from the initial posture, and then The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 90 degrees clockwise, and then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates counterclockwise 45 degrees to return to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1002 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is the start position of the rendering operation of the movable body 1002.

  FIG. 68 (h) continuing from FIG. 68 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started an initial operation. The movable body 1010 is moved from the initial position to the lowermost position in the movement range. FIG. 68 (i) continuing from FIG. 68 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1010 moves upward and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position (uppermost position) to the lowermost position, and then the movable body 1010 returns from the lowermost position to the initial position . When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

  FIG. 68 (j) continuing from FIG. 68 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1006 is moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. FIG. 68 (k) continuing from FIG. 68 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 moves to the left and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, first, the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 returns from the rightmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

  FIG. 68 (l) continuing from FIG. 68 (k) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the leftmost end in the movement range. FIG. 68 (m) continuing from FIG. 68 (l) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 moves rightward and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1008 of this example, first, the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the leftmost position, and then the movable body 1008 returns from the leftmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1008 is completed.

  FIG. 68 (n) continuing from FIG. 68 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 68 (o) continuing from FIG. 68 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1012 of this example, first, the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then, the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1012 is completed.

  FIG. 68 (p) continuing from FIG. 68 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 68 (q) continuing from FIG. 68 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then, the movable body 1004 rotates counterclockwise 60 ° and returns to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. Also, in this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed.

  In this example, the initial operation of the movable body is performed in the order of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1010, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1012, and the movable body 1004. The execution order of the initial operation of the movable body can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 68 (r) continuing from FIG. 68 (q) shows a state in which a special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 is being executed. If a power failure occurs during the execution of the special figure variation game, the first secondary control unit 400 is decorative until the symbol variation stop command is received from the main control unit 300 after the completion of the initial operation of the movable body. The symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are controlled to be the preparation screen. Thereby, the character string image of "under preparation" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Also, although one game ball is inserted in the special figure 1 start opening 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (r), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a holding icon indicating an increased holding because of the preparation screen. I did not. The LED at the left end of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 is turned on, and the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 notifies that the number of reserve of the special figure 1 is one.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is a power-off process (step S243) executed at the time of power-off, and the special figure 1 running result of the success / failure determination of the changing game stored in the RAM 308, stop symbol, changing time, special figure 1 A display symbol update timer or the like is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data. The main control unit 300 returns to the gaming state before the power failure based on the return data by the power recovery process after power on (step S111). Thereby, the main control unit 300 executes control to end the special figure 1 fluctuation game when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game which has been executed at the time of power interruption has elapsed for 30 seconds.

  FIG. 68 (s) continuing from FIG. 68 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game of this example is off. The first sub-control unit 400 displays the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 based on the fact that the main control unit 300 receives the symbol variation stop command including the information that the success or failure determination result is disapproval. Resume. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of out-of-edge symbols, is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display area 208d is an image of the sun and clouds A background image is displayed, including the image of the image and the image of the balloon. Further, since the suspension of the special view 1 is 1, one white circular suspension icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the fluctuation icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game which has been executed before the power interruption is not displayed in the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the power recovery. In addition, an image of a seascape is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 68 (t) continuing from FIG. 68 (s) shows a state in which one reserve of special figure 1 is digested and special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. After the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed, and then the change display of the decorative symbol is started. Also, the movable body 1002 stands by at the initial position until the second sub control unit 500 receives the rendering operation start command. Further, the movable body 1008 is moved from the initial position to the position of the rightmost end. When the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the right end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes visible. For this reason, when the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, there is a possibility that the notice image overlapping the movable body 1008 may be visible when the movable body 1008 is positioned at the initial position. The symbol variation display in which the preview image may be visible may be configured such that the jackpot symbol aspect is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the preview image remains invisible.

  FIG. 68 (u) continuing from FIG. 68 (t) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has started the rendering operation. The second sub control unit 500 starts driving control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of the command including the start instruction of the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub control unit 400. The movable body 1002 is moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  FIG. 68 (v) continuing from FIG. 68 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1002 waits at the initial position until the second sub control unit 500 receives the rendering operation start command. In addition, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 increases from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and a black circular retention icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. .

  FIG. 68 (w) continuing from FIG. 68 (v) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special view 1 variation display is out. Also, the movable body 1008 has returned to the initial position. In addition, during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is executed, and the white circular fluctuation icon is erased.

  FIG. 68 (x) continuing from FIG. 68 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold is digested and special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. After the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed, and then the change display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the movable body 1002 is waiting to receive an instruction to start the rendering operation at the initial position.

  FIG. 68 (y) continued from FIG. 68 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the rendering operation. The second sub control unit 500 starts driving control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of the command including the start instruction of the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub control unit 400. In this example, after the movable body 1002 is moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 68 (z) continuing from FIG. 68 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. After the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, the movable body 1002 moves downward and returns to the initial position. Note that the movable body 1002 may move downward while the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture.

  FIG. 68 (b) continuing from FIG. 68 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special view 1 variation display is out.

  FIG. 68 (b) continuing from FIG. 68 (b) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is executed during the stop display of the decorative symbol. As a result, the black circular fluctuation icon is erased.

In the present embodiment, the movable body 1002 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and ends the rendering operation at the initial position. The movable body 1002 may start the rendering operation from a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may start the rendering operation from the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may end the rendering operation at the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may end the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may start the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position, and may end the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The start position of the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 and the end position of the rendering operation may be the same or different.
A game stand characterized by

  Also, even when the power is turned off with the movable body 1002 at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position (for example, the fourth position), the movable body 1002 is at the lowermost position from the fourth position. It may be configured to move to

  Also, even when the power is turned off in a state where the movable body 1002 is at the third position which is a position other than the fourth position, the initial position and the lowermost position, the movable body 1002 starts from the third position. It is configured to move to the lowermost position.

  Further, fourth control means (for example, the second sub control unit 500) for controlling the movable body 1002 and drive means for driving the movable body 1002 are provided.

In addition, a sensor is provided to detect whether the movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position, and when the power is turned off, the sensor detects that the movable body 1002 is not positioned at the initial position. The movable body 1002 is configured to move to the lowermost position. A sensor is provided to detect whether or not the movable body is in the initial posture, and when the power is turned off, when the sensor detects that the movable body is not in the initial posture, the movable body is in the initial posture It may be configured to return to The drive control in the present embodiment of the movable body 1002 may be applied to another movable body.
(Example 2)

  FIG. 69 shows an example of effects in Example 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 69 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 69 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 69 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 69 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 69A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at the initial position.

  In FIG. 69 (b) continuing from FIG. 69 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball entered the special view 1 starting opening 230. It shows that the special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, variable display of the decorative symbols is executed, and a black circular change icon is displayed on the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 69 (c) continuing from FIG. 69 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started executing the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 is moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 is moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. The timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 may be simultaneous or one of them may be earlier. The symbol variation display with a large number of movable objects moving forward of the decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the same timing is better than the symbol variation display with a small number of movable objects moving forward of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same timing. Also, the jackpot design may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 69 (d) continuing from FIG. 69 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 perform the rotation operation and the movable body 1006 performs the rendering operation. In the present embodiment, the movable body 1010 can be rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 69 (c), and can be rotated 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. The initial attitude of the movable body 1010 is an attitude in which the upper and lower end sides of the movable body 1010 are parallel to the horizontal direction. Further, as a drive mechanism for rotating the movable body 1010, the same drive mechanism for rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be adopted. In the state shown in FIG. 69 (d), the movable body 1010 rotates 30 ° clockwise, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 moves rightward from the initial position. The operation start timings of the movable body 1010, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and the movable body 1006 may be simultaneous, or the operation start timings of the two movable bodies may be simultaneous, or the operation start of the three movable bodies The timing may be separate. The symbol variation display with a large number of movable members rotating in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the same timing is a symbol variation with a small number of movable members rotating in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same timing. You may be comprised so that the big hit symbol aspect may be easy to be displayed fixedly rather than a display.

  FIG. 69 (e) continuing from FIG. 69 (d) shows a state in which a power interruption has occurred during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 69 (f) continuing from FIG. 69 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is in the power-off state. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or initial posture even after the power from the outside is cut off. Prepare for The second sub-control unit 500 drives the movable body by the power supply supplied from the storage circuit and restores the initial position and the initial posture when the power interruption occurs. In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs, control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and control for returning the movable body 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable body 1006 remains stationary at the position where the power interruption occurred. In addition, when the movable body 1006 is capable of rotational operation and power interruption occurs after the movable body 1006 performs the rotational operation, the movable body 1006 stands still in the state of being rotated from the initial posture.

  FIG. 69 (g) continuing from FIG. 69 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. After the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, the second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002. Therefore, in the power-off state of the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 1002 is moved by its own weight to a lowermost position below the initial position. The second sub-control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowermost position. Good.

  FIG. 69 (h) continuing from FIG. 69 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. 69 (i) continuing from FIG. 69 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 69 (j) continuing from FIG. 69 (i) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for power on.

  FIG. 69 (k) continuing from FIG. 69 (j) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In FIG. 69 (k), the start of the main control unit 300 is completed, and the special view 1 fluctuation game in the special view 1 display device 212 is resumed, and the first sub control unit 400 is in operation. On the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, a character string image of "during startup .." is displayed. In addition, the character image of “Yuki” in the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

  FIG. 69 (l) continuing from FIG. 69 (k) shows a state in which the second auxiliary control unit 500 has been activated. After the start of the second sub control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub control unit 500 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is to be performed.

  FIG. 69 (m) continuing from FIG. 69 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, first, an initial operation of the movable body 1002 is performed. As shown in FIG. 69 (m), the movable body 1002 is moved from the lowermost position to the uppermost position. Further, on the sub display device 1030 provided on the movable body 1002, a character string image of "initially operating" is displayed as in the case of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  69 (n) continuing from FIG. 69 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. 69 (o) continuing from FIG. 69 (n) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 69 (n). 69 (p) continuing from FIG. 69 (o), the movable body 1002 is in the initial position after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 69 (o) and returned to the initial posture. It shows the moved state. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed.

  FIG. 69 (q) continuing from FIG. 69 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started an initial operation. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 is moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. FIG. 69 (r) continuing from FIG. 69 (q) shows a state where the movable body 1010 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture. 69 (s) continuing from FIG. 69 (r) shows a state where the movable body 1010 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 69 (r) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 69 (t) continuing from FIG. 69 (s) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowermost position, and then, the movable body 1010 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture, and then, the movable body 1010 Turns 45 degrees counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1010 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

  FIG. 69 (u) continued from FIG. 69 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started its initial operation. When the movable body 1006 is stopped at a position other than the initial position at the start of the initial operation, first, the movable body 1006 returns to the initial position. FIG. 69 (v) continued from FIG. 69 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. FIG. 69 (w) continuing from FIG. 69 (v) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 moves to the left and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, first, the movable body 1006 returns to the initial position, then the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 reaches the rightmost position. Return to the initial position from. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

  FIG. 69 (x) continuing from FIG. 69 (w) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started an initial operation. The movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the leftmost end in the movement range. FIG. 69 (y) continuing from FIG. 69 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 moves rightward and returns to the initial position.

  FIG. 69 (z) continuing from FIG. 69 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 69 (i) continuing from FIG. 69 (z) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position.

Further, in FIG. 69 (A), the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. 69 (b) continuing from FIG. 69 (b) shows a state where the movable body 1004 has rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position. 69 (c) continuing from FIG. 69 (b) shows a state where the movable body 1004 has rotated clockwise by 60 °. FIG. 69 (2) continuing from FIG. 69 (c) shows a state where the movable body 1004 has rotated clockwise by 60 ° and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position, and then The movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. Thus, the same operation may be performed multiple times in the initial operation of the movable body. Also, in this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed.
(Example 3)

  FIG. 70 shows an example of effects in the third example of the present embodiment. FIG. 69 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 70 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 70 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 70 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at initial positions.

  In FIG. 70 (b) continuing from FIG. 70 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball entered the special view 1 start opening 230. It shows that the special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, variable display of the decorative symbols is executed, and a black circular change icon is displayed on the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 70 (c) continuing from FIG. 70 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started executing the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 is moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 is moved from the initial position to the lowermost position.

  FIG. 70 (d) continuing from FIG. 70 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the movable body 1004, and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 perform the rotation operation and the movable body 1006 performs the rendering operation. There is. In the present embodiment, the movable body 1010 is rotatable 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 70 (c), and can be rotated 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In the state shown in FIG. 70 (d), the movable body 1010 rotates 30 ° clockwise, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 rotates. Is moving from the initial position to the right. The timing of the operation start of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1004 may be simultaneous or different.

  FIG. 70 (e) continuing from FIG. 70 (d) shows a state in which a power failure has occurred during execution of the special view 1 variation game, and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 70 (f) continuing from FIG. 70 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is in the power-off state. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or initial posture even after the power from the outside is cut off. Prepare for The second sub-control unit 500 drives the movable body by the power supply supplied from the storage circuit and restores the initial position and the initial posture when the power interruption occurs. In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs, control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable bodies 1004 and 1006 remain stationary at the position where the power interruption occurred. In addition, when the movable body 1006 is capable of rotational operation and power interruption occurs after the movable body 1006 performs the rotational operation, the movable body 1006 stands still in the state of being rotated from the initial posture. Also, control may be performed to return the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to their initial positions.

  FIG. 70 (g) continuing from FIG. 70 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. After the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, the second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002. Therefore, in the power-off state of the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 1002 is moved by its own weight to a lowermost position below the initial position. The second sub-control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowermost position. Good.

  FIG. 70 (h) continuing from FIG. 70 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 70 (i) continuing from FIG. 70 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 70 (j) continuing from FIG. 70 (i) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for power on.

  FIG. 70 (k) continuing from FIG. 70 (j) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In (k) of FIG. 70, activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, and the special view 1 fluctuation game in the special view 1 display device 212 is resumed, and the first sub control unit 400 is in operation. On the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, a character string image of "during startup .." is displayed. In addition, the character image of “Yuki” in the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

  FIG. 70 (l) continuing from FIG. 70 (k) shows a state in which the second auxiliary control unit 500 has been activated. After the start of the second sub control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub control unit 500 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is to be performed.

  FIG. 70 (m) continuing from FIG. 70 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In the present example, when there is a movable body stopped at a position different from the initial position at the start of the initial operation of the movable body, control for returning the movable body to the initial position is executed. In FIG. 70 (m), first, the movable body 1006 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 70 (n) continuing from FIG. 70 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position.

FIG. 70 (o) continuing from FIG. 70 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to its initial value from the lowermost position. FIG. 70 (p) continuing from FIG. 70 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started its initial operation and moved to the uppermost position. The movable body 1002 starts an initial operation after returning to the initial position.
(Example 4)

  FIG. 71 shows an example of effect in the fourth example of the present embodiment. FIG. 71 shows the effect state in time series. Each of FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (n) shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 71 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 71 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 71 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at initial positions.

  In FIG. 71 (b) continuing from FIG. 71 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball entered the special view 1 starting opening 230. It shows that the special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, variable display of the decorative symbols is executed, and a black circular change icon is displayed on the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 71 (c) continuing from FIG. 71 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started executing the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 is moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  FIG. 71 (d) continued from FIG. 71 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has performed a rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise.

  FIG. 71 (e) continuing from FIG. 71 (d) shows a state in which a power failure has occurred during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 71 (f) continuing from FIG. 71 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position by its own weight while the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has not returned to the initial posture. In this example, the control for returning the movable body to the initial posture or initial position at the time of power interruption is not executed.

  FIG. 71 (g) continuing from FIG. 71 (g) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for power on.

  FIG. 71 (h) continuing from FIG. 71 (g) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 71 (h), the start of the main control unit 300 is completed, and the special view 1 fluctuation game in the special view 1 display device 212 is resumed, and the first sub control unit 400 is in operation. A character string image of “in operation...” Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400, and a character string image of “in operation” is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 71 (i) continuing from FIG. 71 (h) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 has been activated. After the start of the second sub control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub control unit 500 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is to be performed.

  FIG. 71 (j) continuing from FIG. 71 (i) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is started. After the movable body 1002 is moved to the uppermost position, an operation of rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 clockwise is performed. In the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 180 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. In the present example, since the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is stopped rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture at the start of the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360 degrees clockwise after the start of the initial operation.

  FIG. 71 (k) continuing from FIG. 71 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has rotated clockwise by 180 ° from the initial posture and has come to rest. 71 (l) continuing from FIG. 71 (k) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotating counterclockwise. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 360 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71 (k), and then rotated 180 ° clockwise to return to the initial posture. 71 (m) continuing from FIG. 71 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 71 (n) continuing from FIG. 71 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the initial position. When the movable body 1002 moves to the initial position, the initial operation is ended.

  FIG. 71 (o) shows a state where the movable body 1002 in the states shown in FIGS. 71 (f) to (i) is viewed from the rear right side. In this example, the movable body 1002 is moved to the lowermost position in a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture. As shown in FIG. 71 (o), a lower escapement portion 1050 provided with a space for escaping the movable body 1002 is provided on the lower front side of the lower base 1044. The lower escapement portion 1050 is provided on the rear lower side of the front stage 244 of the gaming board 1000 and in the center case of the gaming board 1000. At the lowermost end of the lower escape portion 1050, a receiving portion 1052 having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is disposed. A buffer portion 1054 is provided on the upper surface of the receiving portion 1052. A sheet-like buffer member is used for the buffer unit 1054.

  If the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off with the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotated by, for example, 45 ° or more from the initial posture, the lower base 1044 can not receive the moving unit 1036 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. It can be received by the receiving unit 1052. This makes it possible to prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with peripheral devices or peripheral members even if the movable body 1002 in a posture different from the initial posture moves to the lower limit position.

Although illustration is omitted, when the movable body 1002 is movable above the initial position of the movable body 1010, an upper escape portion may be provided. Similar to the lower escape portion 1050, the upper escape portion is provided to prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with peripheral devices and peripheral members. The upper relief portion may be provided with a receiving portion having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and a buffer portion on the lower surface of the receiving portion.
(Example 5)

  FIG. 72 shows an example of effects in the fifth example of the present embodiment. FIG. 72 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 72 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 72 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Moreover, in the state shown to Fig.72 (a), movable body 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 is located in the initial position.

  FIG. 72 (b) continuing from FIG. 72 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted in special drawing 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular holding icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is one.

  FIG. 72 (c) continuing from FIG. 72 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. After the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 72 (d) continuing from FIG. 72 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started.

  FIG. 72 (e) continuing from FIG. 72 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Reach production is started from FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate. As a drive mechanism for executing the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, a mechanism similar to the drive mechanism for executing the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the above embodiment is used. Thus, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 also functions as a movable body. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 45 ° clockwise and counterclockwise about the center of the display area from the initial posture in which the upper and lower end sides of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are parallel to the horizontal direction. It is possible. Further, when the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is capable of rotating, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may not be capable of rotating, or both units may be capable of rotating. In the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and can not rotate. When the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can not rotate as in the above embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may or may not be capable of rotating.

  FIG. 72 (f) continuing from FIG. 72 (e) shows a state in which the effect of the previous stage of the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is started. In this example, before the main liquid crystal unit 1001 starts the rotation operation, after the fluctuation icon, the hold icon, and the decoration symbol are displayed on the sub display device 1030, these displays are erased from the decoration symbol display device 208. . In this example, first, after the black circular fluctuation icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the fluctuation icon is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the hold icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, after the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the hold icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. The display modes of the variation icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display 1030 are the same as the display modes of the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 208.

  FIG. 72 (g) continuing from FIG. 72 (f) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the sub display device 1030. After the sub display device 1030 temporarily displays “decoration 2” as the left and right symbols, and displays the middle symbol variably, the display of the decorative symbol is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the display of the variable icon, the holding icon, the decorative symbol, etc. is erased, another display overlapped with these displays may be visible to the player. The other display may be displayed as a preview image. The symbol variation display in which the other display may be visible to the player may make the big hit symbol aspect easier to be displayed than the symbol variation display in which the other display remains invisible to the player. It may be configured.

  FIG. 72 (h) continuing from FIG. 72 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has started the rendering operation. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture.

  72 (i) continuing from FIG. 72 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 72 (h). In addition, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 increases from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball enters the special figure 1 start opening 230, and a white circular retention icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030. .

  FIG. 72 (j) continuing from FIG. 72 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 72 (i) to return to the initial posture. In addition, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed as a middle symbol on the sub display device 1030, and the sub display is performed based on the first sub control unit 400 receiving the symbol fluctuation stop command transmitted from the main control unit 300. On the device 1030, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed as a final design.

  FIG. 72 (k) continuing from FIG. 72 (j) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the variation icon has been executed. In the sub display device 1030, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is executed, and the black circular fluctuation icon is deleted.

  FIG. 72 (l) continuing from FIG. 72 (k) shows the non-execution state of the special figure fluctuation game. The special figure 1 of the untouched symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), and the "display 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the sub display 1030.

  FIG. 72 (m) continuing from FIG. 72 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. After the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the suspension icon becomes a variation icon, and a moving animation between the suspension and variation icons moving leftward is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Moreover, after the start of the special figure 1 change game, the movable body 1006 is moving to the left end. Therefore, the movable body 1006 can not be viewed by the player.

  FIG. 72 (n) continuing from FIG. 72 (m) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 72 (o) continuing from FIG. 72 (n) shows a state in which the variation display of the decoration symbol is resumed in the decoration symbol display device 208. In this example, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed during the execution of the special figure variation game following the special figure variation game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 executes the rotation effect operation. After the variation display of the decoration symbol is started in the decoration symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decoration symbol is erased in the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 72 (n) continuing from FIG. 72 (o) shows a state in which the display of the variation icon has been resumed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the display of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed during execution of the special figure fluctuation game following the special figure fluctuation game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 executes the rotation effect operation. After the display of the fluctuation icon is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon is erased in the sub display device 1030. When the reserve icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, after the display of the reserve icon is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserve icon is deleted in the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 72 (q) continuing from FIG. 72 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle-right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special view 1 variation display is out. In addition, the movable body 1006 may return to the initial position after the end of the special figure 1 change game.

FIG. 72 (r) continuing from FIG. 72 (q) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is executed during non-execution of the special figure fluctuation game. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular fluctuation icon corresponding to the finished special figure 1 fluctuation game is deleted.
(Example 6)

  FIG. 73 shows an example of effects in the sixth example of the present embodiment. FIG. 73 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 73 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 73 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 73 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and can not move and rotate, and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves up and down by the same drive mechanism as the movable body 1002 shown in FIG. It is possible. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate as in the fifth embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 73 (a), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is positioned at the initial position in the initial posture. Note that both units of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be vertically movable.

  FIG. 73 (b) continuing from FIG. 73 (a) shows a state in which a power failure occurs during non-execution of the special figure variation game, and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 73 (c) continuing from FIG. 73 (b) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has been moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. As with the movable body 1002, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves to the lowermost position in the movement range by its own weight. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is positioned at the lowermost position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state where the power is off. In addition, the second auxiliary control unit 500 may execute drive control to move the main liquid crystal unit 1001 to the lowermost position by the power supplied from the storage circuit provided in the power control unit 660.

  FIG. 73 (d) continuing from FIG. 73 (c) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered off.

  FIG. 73 (e) continuing from FIG. 73 (d) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In FIG. 73 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 is in operation, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 display a character string image of "under activation". It is done.

  FIG. 73 (f) continuing from FIG. 73 (e) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 has been activated. After the start of the second sub control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub control unit 500 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "in initial operation" is displayed to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is to be performed. In addition, the character string image of "under activation" is continuously displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 73 (g) continuing from FIG. 73 (f) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, only the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is performed. As shown in FIG. 73 (g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is moved upward and located at the initial position.

  FIG. 73 (h) continuing from FIG. 73 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 73 (i) continuing from FIG. 73 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 73 (h). FIG. 73 (j) continuing from FIG. 73 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 73 (i) to return to the initial posture. In the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 of this example, first, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is moved from the lowermost position (non-operating position) to the initial position, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is turned counterclockwise from the initial position. Then, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° clockwise, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is completed.

  FIG. 73 (k) continuing from FIG. 73 (j) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed, and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is resumed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left middle right-hand symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop design of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is the default stop design. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 73 (k), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero.

The movement of the movable body 1002 from the initial position to the lowermost position in FIGS. 67C and 67D and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 in FIGS. 73B and 73C from the initial position to the lowermost position. The movement of the first movable body to the first position when the power is turned off, such as movement, may be performed not only when the power is turned off, but also as a big hit advance notice. The big hit symbol form may be configured so that the big hit symbol aspect may be more easily stopped in the end when the big hit symbol is displayed, rather than the symbol change display in which the big hit advance is not made. In the symbol variation display in which the button has been performed, the big hit symbol form may be finally stopped and displayed. On the contrary, even if it is the symbol variation display in which the said big hit notice was made, it may be made to be a stop display of the symbol form finally finally. Of course, even the symbol variation display in which the big hit advance notice has not been made may finally be displayed in a stopped state as a big hit symbol aspect.
(Example 7)

  FIG. 74 shows an example of effects in the seventh example of the present embodiment. FIG. 74 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 74 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 74 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 74 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can execute the vertical movement and the rotation operation, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can perform the vertical movement and the rotation operation. In the state shown in FIG. 74 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at the initial position, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the initial position in the initial posture, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is at the initial position. It is stationary in posture.

  FIG. 74 (b) continuing from FIG. 74 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted in special drawing 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular holding icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is one.

  FIG. 74 (c) continuing from FIG. 74 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. After the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 74 (d) continuing from FIG. 74 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started.

  FIG. 74 (e) continuing from FIG. 74 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Reach production is started from FIG. 74 (e) onward.

  FIG. 74 (f) continuing from FIG. 74 (e) shows a state in which the rendering operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has been started. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 74 (g) continuing from FIG. 74 (f) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 74 (g).

  FIG. 74 (h) continuing from FIG. 74 (g) shows a state in which the rendering operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has been started. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 74 (i) continuing from FIG. 74 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 74 (h). The timing to start the rotation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be simultaneous or one of them may be earlier. In the rotation operation, the rotation speeds of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are the same.

  FIG. 74 (j) continuing from FIG. 74 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 74 (h). In the rotation operation, the rotation speed of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is larger than that of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and at the time shown in FIG. 74 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 74 (i).

  In FIG. 74 (k) continued from FIG. 74 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 74 (j) and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is shown in FIG. 74 (j) Shows a state rotated 30 ° clockwise from. In the rotation operation, the rotation speed of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is larger than that of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  In FIG. 74 (l) continued from FIG. 74 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 74 (k) and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is shown in FIG. 74 (k) It shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 30 °. As a result, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 return to their initial attitudes.

  FIG. 74 (m) continued from FIG. 74 (l) shows a state in which a rendering operation is performed in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move up and down. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves downward, and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves upward. Thus, in the rendering operation of this example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in opposite directions.

  FIG. 74 (n) continuing from FIG. 74 (m) shows a state in which the special view 1 variation game has ended. Further, prior to the end of the special view 1 change game, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are returned to their initial positions. In addition, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is off. "Decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special view 1 variation display is out of order.

FIG. 74 (o) continuing from FIG. 74 (n) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is executed during non-execution of the special figure fluctuation game. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular fluctuation icon corresponding to the finished special figure 1 fluctuation game is deleted.
(Example 8)

  Next, the connection unit 1060 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A slip ring is used for the connection unit 1060 of this embodiment.

  FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (d) are external perspective views of the connection unit 1060 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment as viewed from the front. First, the external configuration of the connection unit 1060 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). The connection unit 1060 includes an upper case 1062 and a lower case 1064. The upper case 1062 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1062 has a shape longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (d) and (f), the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to make the configuration easily distinguishable.

  A lower case 1064 is disposed below the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. The entire top surface of the lower case 1064 is open. In addition, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1062 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1064 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1062 have the same size, and the lower case 1064 is disposed such that the upper surface coincides with the lower surface of the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 has a shorter length in the vertical direction than the upper case 1062 when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (e), the lower case 1064 is hatched in the upper right direction in order to make the configuration easily distinguishable. In addition, the upper case 1062 and the lower case 1064 are disposed on the moving unit 1036 side.

  A fixed side connector 1066 is provided at the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1062. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the fixed side connector 1066 is connected to the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the said harness and the 1st sub board | substrate 160 may be connected via the relay board.

  Further, a circular opening 1068 is provided at the center of the upper surface of the upper case 1062. A circular rotating case 1070 is disposed in the opening 1068. The rotating case 1070 is disposed on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. At the center of the rotating case 1070, a rotating shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided. In the rotating shaft fixing hole 1072, a shaft whose one end is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor disposed in the moving unit 1036 and whose other end is fixed to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the rotating case 1070 It is arranged to be stretched. Further, the rotation side case 1070 is provided with a rotation side connector 1074. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the rotation side connector 1074 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  The rotating case 1070 is adapted to rotate with the shaft. FIGS. 75 (b) to (d) show a state in which the rotating case 1070 is rotated. FIG. 75 (b) shows a state where the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 75 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 75 (c) shows a state where the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 75 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 75 (d) shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 270 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 75 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above.

  FIG. 75 (e) shows the inside of the lower case 1064 of the connection unit 1060 as viewed from the upper case 1062 side. A circular rotation shaft hole 1076 is provided at the center of the lower case 1064. A shaft for rotationally driving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 passes through the rotation shaft hole 1076.

  Further, six pins are provided in the fixed side connector 1066, and conductive portions 1078, 1080, 1082, 1084, 1086, 1088 are provided in the lower case 1064 respectively connected to respective pins of the fixed side connector 1066. There is. Taking the conductive portion 1078 as an example, the conductive portion 1078 has an elongated conductive plate 1078 a and a fixture 1078 b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1078 a to the lower case 1064. The fixture 1078 b fixes the conductive plate 1078 a to the lower case 1064 so that the conductive plate 1078 b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1078b. The conductive portions 1080 to 1088 have the same configuration as the conductive portion 1078.

  FIG. 75 (f) shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the lower case 1064 side. The rotation side substrate 1090 is disposed on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070. The rotating side substrate 1090 is a slip ring. The rotating side substrate 1090 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1092. Further, circumferential wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1092 of the rotation side substrate 1090. The wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are arranged concentrically in this order from the outer peripheral side. Further, the insulating portion 1092 and the wires 1094 to 1104 are arranged concentrically, and the rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. In FIG. 75F, the insulating portions 1092 and the wiring portions 1094 to 1104 are hatched in an upward direction to easily distinguish the configurations.

  Six pins are provided on the rotation side connector 1074 of the rotation side case 1070, and each pin is connected to the wirings 1094 to 1104 respectively. The wiring 1094 is connected to the conductive portion 1078 shown in FIG. 75 (e), the wiring 1096 is connected to the conductive portion 1080 shown in FIG. 75 (e), and the wiring 1098 is connected to the conductive portion 1082 shown in FIG. The wiring 1100 is connected to the conductive portion 1084 shown in FIG. 75 (e), the wiring 1102 is connected to the conductive portion 1086 shown in FIG. 75 (e), and the wiring 1104 is connected to the conductive portion 1088 shown in FIG. Connected with

  Next, referring to FIGS. 75 (g) and (h), the connection between each conductive portion and each wire will be described by taking the connection between conductive portion 1078 and the wire 1094 as an example. FIGS. 75 (g) and (h) show the conductive portion 1078 cut along the line A-A in FIG. 75 (e). The conductive plate 1078 a has a shape that extends obliquely upward from the lower case 1064. When the lower case 1064 is placed on the upper case 1062 by aligning the upper surface of the lower case 1064 with the lower surface of the upper case 1062, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the wiring 1094 has the other end of the conductive plate 1078a downward. Contact with the conductive plate 1078a so as to push it in. Thus, the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are connected. The connection state between the conductive portions 1080 to 1088 and the wirings 1096 to 1104 is the same.

  The conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are used to supply power to circuits provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1080 and the wiring 1096 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1082 and the wiring 1098 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub substrate 160. The conductive portion 1084 and the wiring 1100 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub substrate 160. The conductive portion 1086 and the wiring 1102 are used to transmit various signals from the first sub-substrate 160 to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1088 and the wiring 1104 are used to transmit various signals from the first sub-substrate 160 to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  As an example of various signals, in the case where a microcomputer for controlling an image control unit (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) is mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the first sub-control unit 400 to the microcomputer The presentation command (a presentation, the progression of the presentation, a still image, a moving image, a command to designate the progression of the image display scenario, etc.) may be mentioned.

  Further, the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) may be mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and in this case, the image control provided to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer. There are image commands to the means (still images, moving images, commands for specifying progress of an image display scenario, etc.).

In addition, a microcomputer for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) and an image control means are not mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, but they are mounted on the first sub-substrate 160 and the moving unit 1036. The image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means etc.) may be mounted on the 1032, and in this case, the image drive control means (from the image control means provided in the first sub control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036) Image data (for example, image data transmitted a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second), RGB information of each dot, and the like with respect to the liquid crystal driving means etc.) can be mentioned.
(Example 9)

  Next, the connection unit of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a connection unit 1110 is used as the connection unit.

  FIG. 76 (a) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. Connection unit 1110 is disposed in moving unit 1036 shown in FIG. 66, and is electrically connected to sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  First, the external configuration of the connection unit 1110 will be described using FIG. 76 (a). The connection unit 1110 includes an upper case 1112 and a lower case 1114. The upper case 1112 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1112 has a shape longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (c), the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to make the configuration easily distinguishable.

  A lower case 1114 is disposed below the upper case 1112. The lower case 1114 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. The entire top surface of the lower case 1114 is open. In addition, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1112 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1114 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1112 have the same size, and the lower case 1114 is disposed such that the upper surface matches the lower surface of the upper case 1112. The lower case 1114 is shorter in length in the vertical direction than the upper case 1112 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b), the lower case 1114 is hatched in an upward direction to make it easier to distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1112 and the lower case 1114 are disposed on the moving unit 1036 side.

  A fixed side connector 1116 is provided at the lower center of the side of the front side of the upper case 1112. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the fixed side connector 1116 is connected to the first sub-board 160 which constitutes the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the said harness and the 1st sub board | substrate 160 may be connected via the relay board.

  Further, a circular opening 1118 is provided at the center of the upper bottom surface of the upper case 1112. A circular rotating case 1120 is disposed in the opening 1118. The rotation side case 1120 is disposed on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The rotating side case 1120 is provided with a rotating side connector 1022. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the rotation side connector 1122 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  On the upper surface of the rotating case 1112, cylindrical rotating body connection shafts 1124, 1126, and 1128 are fixed, which extend perpendicularly to the upper surface and extend upward. The rotor connection shafts 1124, 1126, 1128 have the same length. The rotating body connection shafts 1124 to 1128 are arranged at equal intervals on the rotation side case 1112. A bearing is attached to the tip of the rotary body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is attached to the bearing. In addition, when the tips of the rotating body connection shafts 1124 to 1128 are connected, they form an equilateral triangle, and data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 described later are disposed at the center of gravity of the equilateral triangle.

  FIG. 76 (b) shows the inside of the lower case 1114 of the connection unit 1110 as viewed from the upper case 1112 side. The fixed side connector 1116 is provided with six pins, and conductive parts 1130, 1132, 1134, and 1136 connected to four pins of the six pins of the fixed side connector 1164 are provided in the lower case 1164 respectively. . Taking the conductive portion 1130 as an example, the conductive portion 1130 has an elongated conductive plate 1130 a and a fixture 1130 b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1130 a to the lower case 1114. The fixture 1130 b fixes the conductive plate 1130 a to the lower case 1114 so that the conductive plate 1130 b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1130 b. The conductive portions 1132 to 1136 have the same configuration as the conductive portion 1130.

  In the present embodiment, the conductive parts 1130 to 1136 are used for power supply and GND connection, and signal communication is performed by optical communication (wireless communication). At the center of the lower case 1114, a data transmission / reception unit 1138 for optical communication is disposed. The data transmission / reception unit 1138 is connected to two of the six pins of the fixed side connector 1114. In the present embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1138 is used for signal transmission, but signal reception is also possible.

  FIG. 76C shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the lower case 1114 side. The rotation side substrate 1140 is disposed on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120. The rotating side substrate 1140 is a slip ring. The rotating side substrate 1140 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1142. Further, a data transmission / reception unit 1144 is disposed at the center of the rotation side substrate 1140. The data transmission / reception unit 1144 is disposed to face the data transmission / reception unit 1138 so as to overlap the data transmission / reception unit 1138 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from above. Signal transmission / reception is performed between the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 by optical communication. Further, the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is connected to two of the six pins of the rotation side connector 1122. Although the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is used for signal reception in the present embodiment, signal transmission is also possible.

  Further, circumferential wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, 1152 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1142 of the rotation side substrate 1140. The wires 1146, 1148, 1150, 1152 are arranged concentrically from the outer periphery in this order. In addition, the insulating portion 1142 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 are arranged concentrically, and the data transmitting / receiving unit 1144 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. In FIG. 76C, the insulating portions 1142 and the wiring portions 1146 to 1152 are hatched in an upward direction to easily distinguish the configurations.

  In the rotation side connector 1122 of the rotation side case 1120, four pins out of six pins and the wires 1146 to 1152 are respectively connected. In addition, the wiring 1146 is connected to the conductive portion 1130 shown in FIG. 76B, the wiring 1148 is connected to the conductive portion 1132 shown in FIG. 76B, and the wiring 1150 is connected to the conductive portion 1134 shown in FIG. The wiring 1152 is connected and connected to the conductive portion 1136 shown in FIG. 76 (b).

  76 (d) and 76 (e) show the connection between the conductive portion 1130 and the wire 1146. FIG. FIGS. 76 (d) and 76 (e) show the conductive portion 1130 cut along the line AA in FIG. 76 (b). The connection state of the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 is the same as the connection state of the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 shown in FIGS. 75 (e) and (f). Note that the connection states of the conductive portions 1132 to 1136 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 are the same.

  The conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 are used to supply power to circuits provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1132 and the wiring 1148 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1134 and the wiring 1150 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub substrate 160. The conductive portion 1136 and the wiring 1152 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub substrate 160.

  Also, as an example of various signals transmitted and received between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144, when a sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.). Examples of the rendering command for the micro computer from the first sub-control unit 400 (a command for specifying rendering, progression of presentation, still image, moving image, progression of an image display scenario, and the like).

  Further, the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) may be mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and in this case, the image control provided to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer. There are image commands to the means (still images, moving images, commands for specifying progress of an image display scenario, etc.).

  In addition, a microcomputer for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) and an image control means are not mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, but they are mounted on the first sub-substrate 160 and the moving unit 1036. The image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means etc.) may be mounted on the 1032, and in this case, the image drive control means (from the image control means provided in the first sub control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036) Image data (for example, image data transmitted a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second), RGB information of each dot, and the like with respect to the liquid crystal driving means etc.) can be mentioned.

  In the present embodiment, the data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 is optical wireless communication. Laser light is used for optical wireless communication. Data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 may be radio wave communication instead of optical wireless communication. Further, LED light may be used in place of laser light for optical wireless communication.

  When both the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 are used for signal transmission / reception, the data transmitted from the data transmission / reception unit 1138 to the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is as described above, but data transmission / reception from the data transmission / reception unit 1144 For the unit 138, control means and the like provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 (for example, an image control means, a microcomputer for controlling the image control means, an ACK signal from an image drive means (liquid crystal drive means) Information indicating the rotation angle of the rotating body (for example, a detection signal output when a sensor provided on the rotation side detects a detection piece provided on the fixed side, an output signal of an encoder provided on the rotation side, etc. ) May be sent.

  FIG. 76 (f) is an external perspective view of a connection unit 1110 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment, as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has only the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 as the rotating body connecting shaft. The rotating body connection shaft 1124 is disposed at the center (rotation center) of the rotating case 1120.

FIG. 76 (g) is an external perspective view of a connection unit 1110 provided in a pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment, as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of the present modified example has rotating body connecting shafts 1124 and 1126 as rotating body connecting shafts. A straight line connecting the rotating body connection shaft 1124 and the tip of the rotating body connection shaft 1126 passes through the center (rotation center) of the rotating case 1120. Further, the rotating body connection shaft 1124 and the rotating body connection shaft 1126 are disposed equidistant from the center.
(Example 10)

  FIG. 77 shows an effect example 1 in the tenth example of the present embodiment. FIG. 77 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 77 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. The movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of this embodiment and Examples 11 to 16 described later are different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. And is movable in the left and right direction on the front side of the movable body 1002.

  FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 77 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 77 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position, the whole is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be viewed through the transmitting portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transmitting portion 1006b.

  FIG. 77 (b) continuing from FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into special drawing 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular holding icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is one. In addition, the black circular holding icon is a holding icon of the prefetching notice mode as shown in FIG. 52 (a).

  FIG. 77 (c) continuing from FIG. 77 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. After the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 77 (d) continuing from FIG. 77 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started. In FIG. 77 and thereafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol is indicated by a downward thick arrow. In the present embodiment, after the start of the moving animation of the holding and changing icon, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 77 (e) continuing from FIG. 77 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Reach production is started from FIG. 77 (d) onward.

  77 (f) continued from FIG. 77 (e), the movable body 1008 started the rendering operation from the initial position, and moved to a position where the left end of the movable body 1008 was positioned at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the state. FIG. 77 (f) shows a state in which the player shields the area of the right half of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 so as not to be easily visible by the movable body 1008. An image of a cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208c are visually recognized through the transmitting portion 1008a. In addition, a partial region on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008 b. The image of the yacht or the image of the cloud displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the image of the yacht or the image of the cloud may be shielded by the movable body 1008, the jackpot symbol aspect is determined as compared to the symbol variation display in which these images are not shielded by the movable body 1008. You may be comprised so that it may be easy to be displayed.

  FIG. 77 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmitting portion 1008b at the same timing as FIG. 77 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from the other configurations. It is hatched in order to 77 (h)-(k) continuing from FIG. 77 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmitting portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008 is the same as the movable body 1008. Hatching is given to make it easy to distinguish from the structure of In FIG. 77 (g), the image of the view of the sea displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. Although an image of a cloud is displayed at a position behind the movable body 1008 below the transmitting portion 1008 b, the image of the cloud is not viewed by overlapping with the movable body 1008. Further, in the present embodiment, the image of the cloud is an image displayed as a preview image.

  77 (h) following FIG. 77 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. In FIG. 77 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated approximately 10 ° counterclockwise.

  77 (i) following FIG. 77 (h) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated approximately 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 77 (h). Further, in FIG. 77 (i), in the state of FIGS. 77 (g) and 77 (h), the image of the cloud that was not visible by overlapping with the movable body 1008 is caused by the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. It shows a state in which it becomes visible through 1008b. The symbol variation display in which an image of a cloud is viewed through 1008b by the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is a case where the image of a cloud is viewed through 1008b by the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 not rotating. The big hit symbol aspect may be configured to be displayed more easily as compared with the symbol variation display that is not present. Further, in the present embodiment, by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 by about 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 77H, the entire image of the cloud can be viewed through 1008b. , Only part of the cloud image may be visible through 1008b.

  77 (j) following FIG. 77 (i) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated approximately 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 77 (i). In FIG. 77 (j), a part of the cloud image is viewed through 1008b. Although the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 77 (j) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 77 (h) are the same, they are viewed through 1008b in the state shown in FIG. Since the display for moving the image of the cloud not present is moved upward with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, a part of the image of the cloud is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 77 (j). Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 77 (j), a part of the cloud image is viewed through 1008b, but the cloud is viewed so that the entire cloud image is viewed through 1008b. The movement display of the image of may be performed.

  77 (k) following FIG. 77 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated approximately 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 77 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. As for FIG. 77 (k), the image of the cloud which was not visually recognized via 1008b in the state shown to FIG. 77 (g) is visually recognized via 1008 b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 77 (k) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 77 (g) are the same, but after the state shown in FIG. 77 (j) Is displayed as it is moved upward with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, so in FIG. 77 (k), it is viewed through 1008b. In addition, since the display for moving the image of the cloud upward is performed, the region of the image of the cloud visible through 1008 b in FIG. 77 (k) is viewed through 1008 b in FIG. 77 (j) It is wider than the possible cloud image area. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 77 (k), a part of the image of the cloud is viewed through 1008b, but the entire image of the cloud is viewed through 1008b, Moving display of the image of the cloud may be performed.

  In FIG. 77 (l) continued from FIG. 77 (k), after the movable body 1008 is moved to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 change indicatory result shows the state where it informed that it is a big hit.

  FIG. 78 shows an effect example 2 in the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 78 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 78 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (f) show the same state as FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (f). 78 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmitting portion 1008b at the same timing as FIG. 78 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from the other configurations. It is hatched in order to Further, in FIGS. 78 (h) to 78 (k) continuing from FIG. 78 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmitting portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008 Hatching is given to make it easy to distinguish from the structure of Further, FIG. 78 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 77 (g). FIG. 78 (h) following FIG. 78 (f) and (g) shows the state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts the rotation operation, and shows the same state as FIG. 77 (h).

  FIG. 78 (i) following FIG. 78 (h) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated approximately 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 78 (i). In FIG. 78 (i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 77 (i), the image of the cloud displayed behind the movable body 1008 is moved and displayed to the left as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. , 1008 b are shown in a state of not being viewed. Further, the image of the cloud may be erased as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates, or may not be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 78 (j) following FIG. 78 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated approximately 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 78 (i). In FIG. 78 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 77 (j), the state in which the cloud image is not visually recognized is shown.

  78 (k) following FIG. 78 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated approximately 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 78 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 78 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 77 (k), the state in which the cloud image is not visually recognized is shown.

  In FIG. 78 (l) continuing from FIG. 78 (k), after the movable body 1008 is moved to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which it is informed that the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display is a loss.

  As described above, in the effect of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may execute the rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, there is a case where the player can visually recognize the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 through the movable body 1006 and the transparent portion of the movable body 1008. is there. Further, in the present embodiment, the image of the cloud displayed on the sub display device 1030 which can not be visually recognized by the movable body 1008 when the movable body 1008 moves to the left is displayed as a notice image. In this embodiment, the effect of causing the player to visually recognize at least a part of the preview image through the transparent portion 1008b by the moving operation of the movable body 1008, and at least the preview image through the transparent portion 1008b. There is an effect when the player is not allowed to visually recognize a part of the image. In addition, when a part of the notice image is visually recognized by the player through the transmitting portion 1008 b of the movable body 1008 by the movement operation of the movable body 1008, the notice image of the notice image is transmitted through the transmitting portion 1008 b of the movable body 1008 As compared with the case where at least a part of the image is not visually recognized by the player, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed as the final result of the symbol variation display.

The images of the cloud, the balloon, and the sun displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be able to be moved and displayed as the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. For example, the image of the cloud displayed at the upper center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 206 is moved so that the movable body 1008 can not be visually recognized through the transmitting portion 1008a when it moves leftward from the initial position. The display may be performed, and the balloon or sun image is moved so as to be visible through the transmitting portion 1008 a or the transmitting portion 1008 b when the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the left. It may be displayed. When the movable body 1008 moves leftward from the initial position, the symbol variation display in which an image of a cloud, a balloon or the sun can be visually recognized through the transmitting portion 1008a or the transmitting portion 1008b is through the transmitting portion 1008a or the transmitting portion 1008b. As compared with the symbol variation display in which the image of the cloud, the balloon or the sun can not be visually recognized, the big hit symbol aspect may be configured so as to be easily displayed. When the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the left, moving images of clouds, balloons and the sun are displayed, and images of the clouds and balloons and the sun can not be viewed through the transmitting portion 1008a and the transmitting portion 1008b. If the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the symbol variation display may not be displayed by moving images of clouds, balloons or the sun, and the cloud or the like through the transmitting part 1008a or the transmitting part 1008b. As compared with the symbol variation display in which the image of the balloon or the sun remains visible, the big hit symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed. In addition, when the movable body 1008 moves leftward from the initial position, the image of the cloud, balloon or sun when viewed through the transmitting portion 1008a or the transmitting portion 1008b is displayed in a color different from that in the normal time. There may be cases. For example, when an image of a cloud is usually displayed in white and the movable body 1008 is viewed through the transmitting portion 1008a or the transmitting portion 1008b when moving from the initial position to the left, blue, green, or It may be displayed in red. The symbol variation display in which the cloud image may be displayed in a color different from that in the normal time is likely to make the big hit symbol aspect easier to be displayed as compared to the symbol variation display in which the cloud image is displayed in the normal color. May be configured. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may execute the rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect shown in FIGS. 77 (g) to (k) or 78 (g) to (k) of this embodiment is executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the sub display device 1030. It may be.
(Example 11)

  FIG. 79 shows an effect example 1 in the eleventh example of the present embodiment. FIG. 79 shows the effect state in time series. 79 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 79 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at the initial position. When the movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position, the whole is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be viewed through the transmitting portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transmitting portion 1006b.

  FIG. 79 (b) continuing from FIG. 79 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball has entered the Special Figure 1 start opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular holding icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is one. In addition, the black circular holding icon is a holding icon of the prefetching notice mode as shown in FIG. 52 (a).

  FIG. 79 (c) continuing from FIG. 79 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. After the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 79 (d) continuing from FIG. 79 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started. In FIG. 77 and thereafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol is indicated by a downward thick arrow. In the present embodiment, after the start of the moving animation of the holding and changing icon, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 79 (e) continuing from FIG. 79 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Reach production is started from FIG. 79 (d) onward.

  In FIG. 79 (f) continued from FIG. 79 (e), the movable body 1008 started rendering operation from the initial position, and moved to a position where the left end of the movable body 1008 was positioned at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the state. FIG. 79 (f) shows a state where the player shields the area of the right half of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 so as not to be easily visible by the movable body 1008. An image of a cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208c are visually recognized through the transmitting portion 1008a. In addition, a partial region on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008 b. The image of the yacht or the image of the cloud displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which an image of a yacht or an image of a cloud may be blocked by the movable body 1008 is determined as a big hit symbol aspect in comparison with a symbol variation display in which these images may not be blocked by the movable body 1008. You may be comprised so that it may be easy to be displayed.

  FIG. 79 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmitting portion 1008b at the same timing as FIG. 79 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from the other configurations. It is hatched in order to Further, in FIGS. 79 (h) to 79 (k) continuing from FIG. 79 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmitting portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008 Hatching is given to make it easy to distinguish from the structure of In FIG. 79 (g), the movable body 1008 blocks a part except the right part of the illumination unit 1014b, the lower end of the illumination unit 1014c, and the right end of the illumination unit 1014d, and illumination is performed via the transmission unit 1008b. The portion excluding the shielded portion of the portion 1014c and the right end portion of the illumination portion 1014d are visually recognized. Further, FIG. 79 (g) shows that the portions of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d visible by the player emit light in blue. Further, in FIG. 79 (g), the image of the view of the sea displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission part 1008b.

  FIG. 79 (h) following FIG. 79 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. In FIG. 79 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated approximately 10 ° counterclockwise. Further, in FIG. 79 (h), compared to the state shown in FIG. 79 (g), the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is reduced via the transmission unit 1008b. Moreover, in the area | region which is not shielded in the movable body 1008, the area of the visible part of the illumination part 1014d is increasing.

  79 (i) following FIG. 79 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated approximately 35 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 79 (h). In FIG. 79 (i), a black-painted portion of the illumination unit 1014d indicates a blue-emitting portion, and a white-painted portion indicates a red-emitting portion. In FIG. 79 (i), in the area which is not shielded in the movable body 1008, the portion illuminated in red of the illumination unit 1014d which is not recognized by the player by overlapping with the movable body 1008 is visible by the player. It shows the state that In the symbol variation display in which the portion emitting in red may be visible due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the symbol variation display in which the portion emitting in red may not be visible because the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate. In contrast to the above, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed.

  79 (j) following FIG. 79 (i) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated approximately 35 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 79 (i). Further, FIG. 79 (j) shows a state in which the area of the red light-emitting portion of the illumination unit 1014d is large and the area of the blue light-emitting portion is small. In FIG. 79 (j), a part of the cloud image as the preview image is visually recognized through 1008b. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 77 (j), a part of the cloud image is viewed through 1008b, but the cloud is viewed so that the entire cloud image is viewed through 1008b. The display of the image of may be performed. The symbol variation display in which at least a part of the image of the cloud as the notice image is visually recognized through the transmitting portion 1008 b by the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is an image of the cloud as the notice image through the transmitting portion 1008 b As compared with the symbol variation display in which at least a part of the symbol is not visually recognized, the big hit symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed.

  79 (k) following FIG. 79 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated approximately 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 79 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 79 (k) shows a state in which the area of the portion emitting light in red in the illumination unit 1014d is further increased, and the illumination unit 1014d emits light in all in red. In FIG. 79 (k), a part of the cloud image as the preview image is visually recognized through 1008b. Further, since the display for moving the image of the cloud upward is performed, the region of the image of the cloud visible through 1008 b in FIG. 79 (k) is viewed through 1008 b in FIG. 79 (j) It is wider than the possible cloud image area. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 79 (k), a part of the image of the cloud is viewed through 1008b, but the entire image of the cloud is viewed through 1008b, Moving display of the image of the cloud may be performed.

  In FIG. 79 (l) continued from FIG. 79 (k), after the movable body 1008 is moved to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 change indicatory result shows the state where it informed that it is a big hit.

  FIG. 80 shows an effect example 2 in the eleventh example of the present embodiment. FIG. 80 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 80 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 80 (a)-(f) show the same state as FIGS. 79 (a)-(f). FIG. 80 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmitting portion 1008b at the same timing as FIG. 80 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from the other configurations. It is hatched in order to Further, in FIGS. 80 (h) to 80 (k) continuing from FIG. 80 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmitting portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008 Hatching is given to make it easy to distinguish from the structure of Further, FIG. 80 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 79 (g). FIG. 80 (h) following FIGS. 80 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts the rotation operation, and shows the same state as FIG. 79 (h).

  FIG. 80 (i) following FIG. 80 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated approximately 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 80 (i). 80 (i) differs from the state shown in FIG. 79 (i) in that the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is small, so that it overlaps with the movable body 1008 to make the red of the illumination unit 1014d invisible from the player. It shows a state in which the light emitting part is not visible.

  FIG. 80 (j) following FIG. 80 (i) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated approximately 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 80 (i). Further, in FIG. 80 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 79 (j), the area of the portion emitting light of red in the illumination unit 1014d is not large, so the portion emitting light in red of the illumination unit 1014d is visually recognized Not showing. Further, FIG. 80 (j) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a notice image is not visually recognized through 1008b unlike the state shown in FIG. 79 (j).

  FIG. 80 (k) following FIG. 80 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates approximately 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 80 (j) and returns to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 80 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 79 (j), since the area of the portion emitting light in red in the illumination unit 1014d is not large, the portion emitting light in red in the illumination unit 1014d is not visually recognized It shows the state. Further, FIG. 80 (k) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a notice image is not visually recognized through 1008b unlike the state shown in FIG. 79 (j).

  In FIG. 80 (l) continuing from FIG. 80 (k), after the movable body 1008 returns to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which it is informed that the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display is a loss.

As described above, in the effect of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may perform a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. The light emission mode of 1014 d may change. In the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 45 ° at maximum behind the movable body 1008, the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d is changed, and the sub liquid crystal is displayed behind the movable body 1008. When the unit 1032 rotates clockwise by at most 30 °, an effect is performed in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014 d is not changed. The symbol variation display in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d changes due to the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008 is compared with the symbol variation display in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change. The jackpot symbol pattern may be configured to be displayed in a definite manner.
(Example 12)

  FIG. 81 shows an example of effects in Example 12 of the present embodiment. FIG. 81 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 81 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 81 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 81 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 81 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1010 and 1012 are located at initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position, the whole is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be viewed through the transmitting portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transmitting portion 1006b.

  FIG. 81 (b) continuing from FIG. 81 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball has entered the special view 1 start opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular holding icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is one. In addition, the black circular holding icon is a holding icon of the prefetching notice mode as shown in FIG. 52 (a).

  FIG. 81 (c) continuing from FIG. 81 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. After the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 81 (d) continuing from FIG. 81 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started.

  FIG. 81 (e) continuing from FIG. 81 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Reach production is started from (d) onward in FIG.

  81 (f) continued from FIG. 81 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the state shown in FIG. 81 (e), and the left end of the transmitting portion 1008b of the movable body 1008 is the screen of the sub display device 1030. It shows the state of movement to the position located at the left end. FIG. 81 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as not to be easily visible. In addition, an image of a cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208b are visually recognized through the transmitting portion 1008a. In addition, the display area of the sub display device 1030 and the illumination unit 1014 d are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008 b. In addition, the image of the yacht and the image of the clouds displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 are viewed through the transmissive portion 1008b.

  81 (g) continuing from FIG. 81 (f) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position and is hidden by the movable body 1008 behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 81 (g), in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008, an image of a cloud as a notice image is displayed. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable member 1008 is the symbol variation display in which the part hiding behind the movable member 1006 or the movable body 1008 is not performed In comparison, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed.

  In FIG. 81 (h) continued from FIG. 81 (g), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state of FIG. 81 (g) behind the movable body 1008 and passes through the transmitting portion 1008b. , The screen of the sub display device 1030 is viewed. FIG. 81 (h) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b.

  FIG. 81 (i) continuing from FIG. 81 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 81 (h). FIG. 81 (i) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a preview image displayed on the right side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b.

  81 (j) continued from FIG. 81 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the state of FIG. 81 (i) behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 81J shows a state in which a cloud image can not be viewed as a notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 that has been viewed through the transmissive portion 1008 b.

  81 (k) continued from FIG. 81 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 81 (k) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. Further, in FIG. 81 (k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated through the transmissive portion 1008b while the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 which is visually recognized is changing. Further, the image of the cloud is displayed moving upward from the state shown in FIG. 81 (i).

  In FIG. 81 (l) continued from FIG. 81 (k), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 81 (k) (90 ° in total). It shows the state of rotation. FIG. 81 (l) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. Further, in FIG. 81 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated through the transmissive portion 1008b while the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 visually recognized is changing.

  In FIG. 81 (m) continued from FIG. 81 (l), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 110 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 81 (l) (total 200 °). It shows the state of rotation. FIG. 81 (m) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 can not be viewed through the transmissive portion 1008b.

  81 (n) continuing from FIG. 81 (m), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 160 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 81 (l) (total 360 ° It shows the state where it returned to the initial posture after rotation. FIG. 81 (m) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 can not be viewed through the transmissive portion 1008b.

  In FIG. 81 (o) continued from FIG. 81 (n), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. 81 (o) and returns to the initial position Shows the condition. FIG. 81 (o) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a notice image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008 b.

  FIG. 81 (p) continued from FIG. 81 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 81 (o) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 81 (p) shows a state in which the rendering operation of each movable body (movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012) is completed.

  FIG. 81 (q) continuing from FIG. 81 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is reported that the result of the special view 1 variation display is a big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is viewed by the player via the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. The area of an image (for example, an image of a cloud as a preview image) may be configured to change. The symbol variation display in which the area may change may be configured so that the big hit symbol aspect may be more easily determined display than the symbol variation display in which the area may not change. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may execute movement and rotation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decorative symbol display device 208 may execute effects in the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment.
(Example 13)

  FIG. 82 shows an example of effects in Example 13 of the present embodiment. FIG. 82 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 82 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 82 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 82 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 82 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position, the whole is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be viewed through the transmitting portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transmitting portion 1006b. Further, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and another part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, on the sub display device 1030, an image of a yacht, an image of a cloud, and an image of a landscape of the sea are displayed.

  FIG. 82 (b) continuing from FIG. 82 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into special drawing 1 starting opening 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular holding icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is one. In addition, the black circular holding icon is a holding icon of the prefetching notice mode as shown in FIG. 52 (a). In addition, on the sub display device 1030, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is not a symbol in which the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 As compared with the variable display, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 82 (c) continuing from FIG. 82 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. After the start of the special figure 1 change game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 82 (d) continuing from FIG. 82 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started.

  FIG. 82 (e) continuing from FIG. 82 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Reach production is started from (d) onward in FIG.

  In FIG. 82 (f) continued from FIG. 82 (e), the movable body 1008 starts rendering operation from the initial position, and the left of the movable body 1008 moves to a position to hide the left of the screen of the sub display device 1030. Is shown. FIG. 82 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as not to be easily visible. In addition, an image of a cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208b are visually recognized through the transmitting portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008 b. FIG. 82F shows a state in which the balloon image displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1008 and can not be viewed. In addition, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through 1008 b.

  In FIG. 82 (g) continued from FIG. 82 (f), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the initial position and is hidden by the movable body 1008; The image of the balloon displayed on and the image of the yacht are not visible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable member 1008 is the symbol variation display in which the part hiding behind the movable member 1006 or the movable body 1008 is not performed In comparison, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed.

  82 (h) continuing from FIG. 82 (g) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 82 (g) behind the movable body 1008 There is. FIG. 82 (h) shows a state in which the balloon image displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be viewed through the transmission portion 1008b, and the yacht image can not be viewed by overlapping with the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 82 (i) continued from FIG. 82 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 82 (h). Further, FIG. 82 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 240 ° counterclockwise (total 300 ° total rotation) from the state of FIG. 82 (h) behind the movable body 1008. ing. Further, in FIG. 82 (i), an image of a part of a balloon displayed on the sub display 1030 can be viewed in an area not shielded by the movable body 1008, and an image of a yacht displayed on the sub display 1030 Indicates an invisible state by overlapping with the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 82 (j) continuing from FIG. 82 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the left from the state of FIG. 82 (i). In FIG. 82 (j), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 60 degrees counterclockwise (360 degrees in total) from the state of FIG. 82 (g). Both of the operations for moving to the lower initial position are performed in parallel, and show the state of returning to the initial posture and the initial position. Further, FIG. 82 (j) shows a state in which both the balloon image and the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are erased.

  FIG. 82 (k) continuing from FIG. 82 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 82 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 82 (l) continuing from FIG. 82 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle-right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is reported that the result of the special view 1 variation display is out.

As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moving to a position behind the movable body 1008. Among the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by configuring the image to be invisible from the player and moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. Only one character image may be configured to be visible to the player. In addition, in the case of the symbol variation display in the case where one character image that becomes visible at that time is a specific character image (for example, a notice image), the one character image that becomes visible at that time is specified As compared with the symbol variation display in the case where the character image is not the character image, the big hit symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed. In addition, one of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 causes the movable bodies of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 to perform a movement operation. In some cases, it may be visible. One of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can be viewed by the movable body of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 performing the movement operation. The symbol variation display in the case is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect can be easily determined and displayed as compared to the symbol variation display in the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can not visually recognize even when performing the movement operation. It may be done. In addition, one of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 causes the movable body of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 to perform a movement operation. The symbol variation display in the case where it is possible to visually recognize the jackpot symbol aspect is likely to be determined and displayed in comparison with the symbol variation display in the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can not be visually recognized May be configured. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may execute vertical movement and rotation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decorative symbol display device 208 may execute effects in the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment.
(Example 14)

  FIG. 83 shows an example of effects in the fourteenth example of the present embodiment. FIG. 83 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 83 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Unlike the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 14 of the present embodiment and Examples 15 and 16 described later, the variation icon and the hold icon are displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1030 unlike the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. .

  FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 83 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 83 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position, the whole is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be viewed through the transmitting portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transmitting portion 1006b. Further, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and another part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, on the sub display device 1030, an image of a yacht, an image of a cloud, and an image of a landscape of the sea are displayed.

  FIG. 83 (b) continuing from FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted in special drawing 1 starting opening 230. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular normal state reserved icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of reservations of the special view 1 is one. In addition, on the sub display device 1030, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is not a symbol in which the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 As compared with the variable display, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 83 (c) continuing from FIG. 83 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special view 1 change game, the transfer icon as the change icon becomes a change icon and movement animation between the hold and change icons is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a state in which the image of the balloon has been erased is shown.

  FIG. 83 (d) continuing from FIG. 83 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started. Further, FIG. 83 (d) shows a state in which, on the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special view 1 variation game, the suspension icon becomes a variation icon and the movement animation between the suspension and variation icons ends. ing.

  FIG. 83 (e) continuing from FIG. 83 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Reach production is started from FIG. 83 (d) onward.

  In FIG. 83 (f) continuing from FIG. 83 (e), the movable body 1008 starts rendering operation from the initial position, and the left portion of the movable body 1008 hides the fluctuation icon on the left portion of the screen of the sub display device 1030. It shows the moved state. FIG. 83F shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as not to be easily visible. In addition, an image of a cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208b are visually recognized through the transmitting portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008 b. FIG. 83 (f) shows a state in which the moving icon can not be viewed by overlapping the moving icon displayed on the left of the screen of the sub display device 1030 with the movable body 1008. In addition, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through 1008 b.

  FIG. 83 (g) continued from FIG. 83 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the left from the state shown in FIG. 83 (f). Further, in FIG. 83 (g), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position, is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is displayed on the sub display 1030. The variation icon and the image of the yacht are not visible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable member 1008 is the symbol variation display in which the part hiding behind the movable member 1006 or the movable body 1008 is not performed In comparison, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed.

  83 (h) continuing from FIG. 83 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 83 (g) behind the movable body 1008 There is. Further, FIG. 83 (h) shows a state in which the image of the balloon is displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the image of the balloon is viewed through the transmitting portion 1008b. In addition, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 can not be viewed by overlapping with the movable body 1008. Further, in FIG. 83 (h), when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the fluctuation icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the notice mode (white diamond). 11 shows a state in which the change icon of the notice mode is visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008 b. In the effect of the present embodiment, there is a case where the player makes the player visually recognize that the fluctuation icon in the normal mode changes to the notice mode through the transparent portion 1008 b by the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The player may be made to visually recognize after the change icon of the normal mode changes to the advance notice mode.

  83 (i) continuing from FIG. 83 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1008 is rotated counterclockwise by 200 ° (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 83 (h) and returned to the initial posture There is. Further, FIG. 83 (i) shows a state in which an image of a balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030, an image of a yacht, and a fluctuation icon of the notice mode overlap with the movable body 1008 so that they can not be viewed.

  FIG. 83 (j) continuing from FIG. 83 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 83 (i) and returned to the initial position. Further, FIG. 83 (j) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon of the notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmitting portion 1008b. Further, in FIG. 83 (j), in the sub display device 1030, the image of the yacht and the image of the balloon show a state in which the image can not be viewed.

  FIG. 83 (k) continuing from FIG. 83 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 83 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 83 (l) continuing from FIG. 83 (k) shows a state in which the special view 1 variation game is ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is reported that the result of the special view 1 variation display is a big hit.

  As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variation icons, and a hold icon may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moving to a position behind the movable body 1008. The image, the fluctuation icon, and the hold icon are displayed on the sub display device 1030 when configured so as not to be visible to the player and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008 In some cases, only one character image of the plurality of character images and only the variation icon may be visible to the player. In addition, the symbol variation display may be either in the case where one of the character images visible at that time is a specific character image (for example, a notice image) or in the case where the variation icon is in the notice mode. At that time, it is configured that the big hit symbol aspect is easily determined and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display when the one character image that is visible at that time is not a specific character image and the variation icon is not the advance notice aspect. It may be Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, all character images of the plurality of character images, a fluctuation icon, And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or only the variation icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or the variation icon May be configured to allow the player to view only the icon, or may be configured to allow the player to view only the hold icon.

In addition, one of the character images and the variation icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 causes the movable body of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 to move. In some cases, visual recognition may be possible. One of the character images and the variation icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 causes the movable bodies of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 to move. The symbol variation display in the case where it is possible to visually recognize with is a big hit symbol aspect is easy to be determined and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can not be visually recognized It may be configured as follows. Also, one of the character images and the variation icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 causes the movable bodies of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 to move. The symbol variation display, which may be visible by performing, is determined as a big hit symbol aspect as compared to the symbol variation display in the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can not be visually recognized because they do not move. You may be comprised so that it may be easy to be displayed. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may execute vertical movement and rotation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decorative symbol display device 208 may execute effects in the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment.
(Example 15)

  FIG. 84 shows an example of effects in Example 15 of the present embodiment. FIG. 84 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 84 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 84 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 84 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 84 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at the initial position. When the movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position, the whole is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be viewed through the transmitting portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transmitting portion 1006b. Further, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and another part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, on the sub display device 1030, an image of a yacht, an image of a cloud, and an image of a landscape of the sea are displayed.

  FIG. 84 (b) continuing from FIG. 84 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular normal state reserved icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of reservations of the special view 1 is one. In addition, on the sub display device 1030, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is not a symbol in which the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 As compared with the variable display, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 84 (c) continuing from FIG. 84 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special view 1 change game, the transfer icon as the change icon becomes a change icon and movement animation between the hold and change icons is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a state in which the image of the balloon has been erased is shown.

  FIG. 84 (d) continuing from FIG. 84 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started. Further, FIG. 84 (d) shows a state in which, on the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special view 1 variation game, the suspension icon becomes a variation icon and the movement animation between the suspension and variation icons ends. ing. Further, FIG. 84 (d) shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball enters the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular normal state reserved icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of reservations of the special view 1 is one.

  FIG. 84 (e) continuing from FIG. 84 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Reach production is started from (d) onward in FIG.

  In FIG. 84 (f) continuing from FIG. 84 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to the position to hide the holding icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 Shows the condition. FIG. 84 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as not to be easily visible. In addition, an image of a cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transmitting portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008 b. FIG. 84 (f) shows a state in which the hold icon can not be visually recognized because the hold icon displayed on the left portion of the screen of the sub display device 1030 and the movable body 1008 overlap. In addition, in the area not shielded by the movable body 1008, the fluctuation icon displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized.

  FIG. 84 (g) continuing from FIG. 84 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the left from the state shown in FIG. 84 (f). In FIG. 84 (g), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position, is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The change icon, the hold icon, and the image of the yacht are not visible. The symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1006 or the movable object 1008 is compared with the symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 or the movable object 1008 is not performed Then, the jackpot design may be configured to be easily displayed.

  84 (h) continuing from FIG. 84 (g) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 83 (g) behind the movable body 1008 There is. Further, in FIG. 84 (h), the holding icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the advance notice mode (white diamond shape) by performing the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The state is shown in which the fluctuating icon in the normal mode and the hold icon in the pre-reading notice mode are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008 b. In the effect of the present embodiment, there is a case where the player makes the player visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the pre-reading notice mode through the transparent portion 1008 b by the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. There is a case where the player makes the player visually recognize after the hold icon of the normal mode changes to the pre-reading notice mode.

  FIG. 84 (i) continuing from FIG. 84 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has rotated 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 84 (h) and returned to the initial posture There is. Also, in FIG. 84 (i), the balloon image displayed on the sub display device 1030, the yacht image, the fluctuation icon of the normal mode, and the reserved icon of the prefetching notice mode are visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008. It shows the impossible state.

  FIG. 84 (j) continuing from FIG. 84 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 84 (i) and returned to the initial position. Further, FIG. 84 (j) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon of the normal mode and the fluctuation icon of the advance notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b. Further, in FIG. 84 (j), in the sub display device 1030, the image of the yacht shows a state in which the image can not be viewed.

  FIG. 84 (k) continuing from FIG. 84 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 84 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 84 (l) continuing from FIG. 84 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle-right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is reported that the result of the special view 1 variation display is out.

  FIG. 84 (m) continuing from FIG. 84 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special view 1 change game, the transfer icon as the change icon becomes a change icon and movement animation between the hold and change icons is started.

  In FIG. 84 (n) continuing from FIG. 84 (m), in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 change game, the move icon between the hold and change icons moves to the left as the change icon becomes a change icon. It shows the finished state. Moreover, FIG. 84 (n) has shown the state which "decoration 2" stopped temporarily in left-right symbol display area 208a, 208c. The predetermined reach effect is started from (n) onward in FIG.

  FIG. 84 (o) continuing from FIG. 84 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is ended after the predetermined reach effect is ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is reported that the result of the special view 1 variation display is a big hit. In this manner, the symbol variation started when the pending corresponding to the pending icon in the pre-reading notice mode is digested is started rather than the symbol variation started when the pending icon corresponding to the pending icon is taken normally. The jackpot symbol form may be configured to be easily determined and displayed.

  As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variation icons, and a hold icon may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moving to a position behind the movable body 1008. The image, the fluctuation icon, and the hold icon are displayed on the sub display device 1030 when configured so as not to be visible to the player and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008 Only the variation icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. In addition, when the hold icon that has become visible at that time is the pre-reading notice mode, the hold icon corresponding to the hold icon is compared with the case where the hold icon that is now visible is not the pre-reading notice mode. In the special figure variation game started by being digested, there may be a case that the big hit symbol aspect is easy to be displayed. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, all character images of the plurality of character images, a fluctuation icon, And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or only the variation icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or the variation icon May be configured to allow the player to view only the icon, or may be configured to allow the player to view only the hold icon.

Also, among the movable icon 1006 and the movable object 1008, the movable icon of the movable object 1006 and the movable object 1008 performs the movement operation. In some cases, it may be visible. Of the movable icon 1006 and the sub-display device 1030 at a position behind the movable object 1008, the fluctuation icon or the holding icon is visually recognized by the movable object of both the movable object 1006 and the movable object 1008 performing the movement operation. The symbol variation display which can be made is easier to be determined display of the big hit symbol aspect compared with the symbol variation display which can not be seen even if the movable members of both the movable member 1006 and the movable member 1008 perform the movement operation. It may be configured as follows. When the advance notice is performed, in which the visible portion of the fluctuation icon or the holding icon may be different before and after movement of the movable body, the visible portion of the fluctuation icon or the holding icon is different before and after the movement of the movable body The jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than when the pre-reading advance notice is performed. Also, among the movable icon 1006 and the movable object 1008, the movable icon of the movable object 1006 and the movable object 1008 performs the movement operation. In this case, the symbol variation display which can be visually recognized is determined as a big hit symbol aspect in comparison with the symbol fluctuation display in the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can not be visually recognized because they do not move. You may be comprised so that it may be easy to be displayed. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may execute vertical movement and rotation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decorative symbol display device 208 may execute effects in the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment.
(Example 16)

  FIG. 85 shows an example of effects in the sixteenth embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 85 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 85 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 85 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 85 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 85 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is positioned at the initial position, the whole is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the sun can be viewed through the transmitting portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the image of the cloud displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and another part of the image of the cloud is visible through the transmitting portion 1006b. Further, a part of the image of the balloon displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and another part of the image of the balloon is visible. Further, on the sub display device 1030, an image of a yacht, an image of a cloud, and an image of a landscape of the sea are displayed.

  FIG. 85 (b) continuing from FIG. 85 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted in special drawing 1 starting opening 230. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular normal state reserved icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of reservations of the special view 1 is one. In addition, on the sub display device 1030, the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the same character image is displayed simultaneously in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is the symbol variation display in the case where the same character image is not simultaneously displayed in the decoration symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 In contrast to the above, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 85 (c) continuing from FIG. 85 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) is started. In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special view 1 change game, the transfer icon as the change icon becomes a change icon and movement animation between the hold and change icons is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a state in which the image of the balloon has been erased is shown.

  FIG. 85 (d) continuing from FIG. 85 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol has been started. Further, FIG. 85 (d) shows a state in which, on the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special view 1 variation game, the suspension icon becomes a variation icon and the movement animation between the suspension and variation icons ends. ing.

  FIG. 85 (e) continuing from FIG. 85 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Reach production is started from FIG.

  FIG. 85 (f) continuing from FIG. 85 (e) shows a state in which the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted in special figure 1 starting opening 230. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular normal state reserved icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of reservations of the special view 1 is one. In FIG. 85 (f), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the hold icon can be viewed through the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. It has been moved to the position where Further, FIG. 85F shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as not to be easily visible. In addition, an image of a cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transmitting portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008 b.

  In FIG. 85 (g) continued from FIG. 85 (f), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the initial position and is hidden by the movable body 1008; It shows that the fluctuation icon, the hold icon, and the image of the yacht that are displayed on are invisible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 or the movable member 1008 is the symbol variation display in which the part hiding behind the movable member 1006 or the movable body 1008 is not performed In comparison, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be easily displayed.

  85 (h) continuing from FIG. 85 (g) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 83 (g) behind the movable body 1008 There is. Further, in FIG. 84 (h), the holding icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the advance notice mode (white diamond shape) by performing the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The state is shown in which the fluctuating icon in the normal mode and the hold icon in the pre-reading notice mode are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008 b. In the effect of the present embodiment, there is a case where the player makes the player visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the pre-reading notice mode through the transparent portion 1008 b by the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. There is a case where the player makes the player visually recognize after the hold icon of the normal mode changes to the pre-reading notice mode.

  FIG. 85 (i) continuing from FIG. 85 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1008 is rotated counterclockwise 300 ° (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 85 (h) and returned to the initial posture There is. Further, FIG. 85 (i) shows a state in which the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030, the fluctuation icon of the normal mode, and the hold icon of the prefetch notice mode overlap with the movable body 1008 and can not be viewed. ing.

  FIG. 85 (j) continuing from FIG. 85 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 85 (i) and returned to the initial position. In addition, on the sub display device 1030, an image imitating a button, a character string image of "push" above it, and a meter image that displays the effective period of pressing the button are displayed overlapping the hold icon. There is. In addition, there may be a case where the holding icon in the pre-reading notice mode changes to an image or the like imitating a button. Further, FIG. 85 (j) shows a state in which an image imitating a variation icon and a button and a character string image of “push” are visually recognized through the transmission portion 1008b, and the meter image is the movable body 1008. It shows the state which can not be seen by being hidden by. Further, in FIG. 85 (j), in the sub display device 1030, the image of the yacht shows a state in which the image can not be viewed.

  In FIG. 85 (k) continued from FIG. 85 (j), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the state of FIG. 85 (j), and the screen of the sub display 1030 is viewed through the transmissive portion 1008a. It shows the possible states. Further, FIG. 85 (k) shows a state in which the character string image of “Push” displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transmission part 1008a. Further, the variable icon displayed on the sub display device 1030, the image imitating a button, and the meter image show a state in which they can not be viewed by being hidden by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be viewed through the transmissive portion 1008 a is a big hit symbol aspect compared to the symbol variation display in the case where the screen of the sub display device 1030 is not viewed. You may be comprised so that it may be decided and displayed easily.

  FIG. 85 (l) continuing from FIG. 85 (k) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 in the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the character string image of “Push” is erased based on the player's pressing of the chance button 136, and an effect image is displayed around the image imitating the button and the periphery thereof. Further, FIG. 85 (l) shows a state in which the effect image is viewed through the transmitting portion 1008b.

  In FIG. 85 (m) continuing from FIG. 85 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is shown in FIG. 85 (l) based on the fact that the player presses the chance button 136 in the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It shows the state moved from the state of to the top position. Further, FIG. 85 (m) shows a state in which a part of the button image and the effect image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are viewed through the transmissive part 1008a.

  FIG. 85 (n) continuing from FIG. 85 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 85 (m) and returned to the initial position. In addition, on the sub display device 1030, a fluctuation icon, a button image, and an effect image are displayed.

  In FIG. 85 (o) continuing from FIG. 85 (n), the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is executed in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 in the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Show the situation. FIG. 85 (o) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 85 (n).

  In FIG. 85 (p) continuing from FIG. 85 (o), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 85 (o) and returns to the initial posture. It shows the state returned to the initial position below. Further, in the operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 executed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136, both the operation of rotating counterclockwise and the operation of moving to the lower initial position are performed in parallel. And may return to the initial attitude and the initial position.

  FIG. 85 (q) continuing from FIG. 85 (p) shows a state in which the button image and the effect image are deleted in the sub display device 1030 and the variation icon like normal status is changed to the variation icon of the notice mode. Further, FIG. 85 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is reported that the result of the special view 1 variation display is a big hit. The symbol variation display in which the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is performed based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is a big hit symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is not performed. May be configured to be displayed easily.

  As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may display a plurality of character images, a variation icon, a hold icon, and an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment moves all the sub-liquid crystal units 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008 so that all the character images of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub-display device 1030 When the sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is positioned at a position behind the movable body 1008, the sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is positioned so that the sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is positioned so as not to be visible from the player. Only the variation icon displayed on the display 1030 and the image prompting to press the chance button 136 may be configured to be visible to the player. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008, all character images of the plurality of character images, a fluctuation icon, The player may be configured to be able to visually recognize the hold icon and an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136, or the player can visually recognize only the hold icon and the image prompting to press the chance button 136 In the case where it is configured such that it may be configured such that the player can view only the variation icon, or if it is configured so that the player can view only the hold icon Or the player may be able to view only the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. .

In addition, of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, an image prompting the user to press the change icon, the holding icon, and the chance button 136 among those displayed on the sub display device 1030 at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. It may become visible when both movable bodies perform the movement operation. Of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, the movable icon 1006 and the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 behind the movable body 1008 prompt the pressing of the change icon, the holding icon and the chance button 136. The symbol variation display which may be visible when the movable body performs the movement operation is compared with the symbol variation display which can not be recognized even when the movable bodies of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the movement operation. The jackpot symbol pattern may be configured to be displayed in a definite manner. When the advance notice is executed in which the visible part of the image prompting the user to press the fluctuation icon or the hold icon or the chance button 136 may be different before and after the movement of the movable body, the fluctuation icon or the hold before and after the movement of the movable body It is configured that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than when the advance notice is executed in which the visible part of the image prompting the pressing of the icon or chance button 136 may not be different. It may be Of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, the movable icon 1006 and the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 behind the movable body 1008 prompt the pressing of the change icon, the holding icon and the chance button 136. In the case where the movable body can be visually recognized by performing the movement operation, compared with the case where the movable bodies of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can not be visually recognized by not performing the movement operation, The jackpot symbol form may be configured to be easily determined and displayed. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may execute vertical movement and rotation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decorative symbol display device 208 may execute effects in the sub display device 1030 of this embodiment.
(Example 17)

  An example of effects in the sub display device 1030 of the example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Further, in FIG. 86 and each of the drawings to be described later, a presentation example of the special drawing 1 variation game in each embodiment is shown in time series. In addition, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030 is indicated by a white thick arrow. In addition, in the period when the effect of the sub display 1030 shown in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 described later is displayed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect different from the effect of the sub display 1030 is displayed. The other effects may be, for example, effects for displaying a predetermined background or character without displaying the decoration pattern, or effects for displaying a predetermined background or character by displaying the decoration pattern. Good. Moreover, in the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 is being performed, the same effect as the effect of the sub display device 1030 may be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  First, with reference to FIG. 86 (a), common points between FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 86A, at the upper left portion in the display area of the sub display device 1030, a decorative frame F1 having a shape in which the letter “L” is vertically inverted is displayed. In the upper left part of the decorative frame F1, a square-shaped special figure 1 reservation number display area 1931 is provided, and a square special figure 2 reservation number display area 1932 is provided on the right side. A special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 is provided below 1931 and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934 is provided below it. In the special figure 1 reserve number display area 1931, the reserve number of the special figure 1 is displayed as a number, and for example, “0” is displayed when there is no reserve of special figure 1. In the special figure 2 reserve number display area 1932, the reserve number of the special figure 2 is displayed as a number, and for example, “0” is displayed when there is no reserve of the special figure 2. Moreover, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, when the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed as the variation display of the fourth symbol "/" , When the image of "\" is displayed alternately and special figure 1 fluctuation game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is in the stop display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" Is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 change game is out, and "O" is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 change game is a big hit is there. It should be noted that "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during non-execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game regardless of the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. Also, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, when the special figure 2 variation game is being executed, it is informed that the special figure 2 variation game is being executed as the variation display of the fourth symbol "/" , When the image of "\" is displayed alternately and the special figure 2 change game is not being executed (when the special figure 2 is in the stop display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display The image is displayed. "-" Is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 change game is out, and "O" is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 change game is a big hit is there. Note that "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during non-execution of the special figure 2 variation game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variation game.

  Under the display area of the sub display device 1030, a horizontally long rectangular decorative frame F2 is displayed. At the center of the decoration frame F2, a square-shaped variation icon display area 1940 in which a part of the left and right frames is open is provided. The variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 1930 described later. This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon.

  A special figure 1 reserve icon display area 1950 is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area 1940, and a special figure 2 reserve icon display area 1960 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 1940. The special figure 1 reserved icon display area 1950 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth special drawing 1 holding orders, respectively. That is, the special view 1 suspension icon corresponding to the suspension of the special view 1 of the earliest (most stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the second to fourth areas are 2 The special figure 1 reserve icon corresponding to the reserve of the fourth special figure 1 can be displayed respectively. Similarly, the special view 2 reserved icon display area 1960 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth special figure 2 holding orders, respectively. That is, the special view 2 suspension icon corresponding to the suspension of the special view 2 of the earliest (most recently stored) can be displayed in the first area, and the second to fourth areas are similarly 2 The special figure 2 reserve icon corresponding to the reserve of the fourth special figure 2 can be displayed respectively. Also, in the special view 1 pending icon display area 1950 and the special view 2 pending icon display area 1960, various animations representing movement of the pending icon are executed.

  A navigation character display area 1970 in the form of a square is provided on the left of the special view 1 reserved display area 1950. In the navigation character display area 1970, a character image H1 of a merchant is displayed. The character image H1 of the merchant is used as an instructional effect such as a tutorial effect or the like, and an effect such as an advance notice (notice of the change or advance notice).

  On the right side of the special view 2 reserved display area 1960, a square-shaped effect custom state display area 1980 is provided. In the effect custom state display area 1980, “level 1 to 99” are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 1000. The level of the effect custom state is set to rise, for example, by performing an effect with a low appearance rate. The level of the effect custom state may be set to increase also when the game ball is hit a predetermined number, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big hit is won.

  FIG. 86 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is disappointing is displayed in a stop ing. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" for notifying the detachment is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, the fourth pattern of the display mode of "-" notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game has been canceled is displayed. In addition, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 1931 indicating that the pending count in the special figure 1 is 1, and the pending figure in the special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 pending count display area 1932. “0” is displayed to indicate that The special figure 1 reserve icon display area 1950 displays a default special figure 1 reserve icon 1951 displayed in a white circle.

  FIG. 86 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold is digested and the special figure 1 change game is started. In the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 1931, and it is informed that the number of pending times of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 and the pending figure of the special figure 1 becomes 0.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 suspension is reduced by one and special figure 1 fluctuation game is started, in the fluctuation icon display area 1940 of the sub display device 1030 and the special figure 1 reserved icon display area 1950, The movement animation of is performed. In the movement animation between the holding and changing icons, the special drawing 1 holding icon 1951 displayed in the first area of the special drawing 1 holding icon display area 1950 becomes the changing icon 1941 and moves to the changing icon display area 1940 . The right-pointing arrow shown on the upper left of the fluctuation icon 1941 in FIG. 86B indicates the moving direction of the fluctuation icon 1941.

  In FIG. 86C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030, the moving animation between the holding and changing icons is ended, and the changing icon 1941 is displayed in the changing icon display area 1940. It shows the displayed state. Also, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 1931 and white in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area 1950 A state in which the default special view 1 hold icon 1952 displayed in a circle appears due to the increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special view 1 hold icon 1952 in FIG. 86 (b) indicates the movement direction of the special view 1 hold icon 1952. Further, in FIG. 86C, a balloon image representing a serif of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed at the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d. The said balloon image is an image used for the notice by the character image H1 of a merchant.

  FIG. 86 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a and the right symbol display area 1030 c of the sub display device 1030. Also, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 1931 and black in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area 1950 A special figure 1 hold icon 1953 displayed in a circle is shown in the state of appearing due to the increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special view 1 retention icon 1953 in FIG. 86 (d) indicates the movement direction of the special view 1 retention icon 1953. In addition, an image of a character string of "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the character image H1 of the merchant, and an effect of expecting development to reach effect is executed. In addition, a pending change image H2 having a substantially rectangular shape including an image of the "pending change" character string is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b and the right symbol display area 1030c. . The pending change image H2 is an image displayed to notify that the effect of the advance notice of changing the display mode of the pending icon or the changing icon being displayed or the notice of the changing is performed. In this example, it is notified that the change animation in which the display mode of the holding icon being displayed changes is performed by the holding change image H2. Note that the pending change image H2 may be a display that is displayed only when the pending icon of the special view 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the pending icon of the special view 2 is changed. It may be a display that is displayed only when changing the change icon, or may be a display that is displayed only when changing the holding icon of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It may be a display that appears only when changing the hold icon and the change icon of the special view 2, or appears only when changing the hold icon of the special view 1, the hold icon of the special view 2, and the change icon. It may be a display.

  In (e) of FIG. 86, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is an off It shows the notified state. In addition, the deletion animation in which the variation icon 1941 displayed in the variation icon display area 1940 moves downward is displayed, and the variation icon 1941 is gradually eliminated. Further, FIG. 86 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special view 1 hold icon 1952 changes from “white to black” is performed. In the change animation, an image to be struck from the hold change image H2 is displayed on the special view 1 hold icon 1952, and an effect image is displayed overlapping the special view 1 hold icon 1951. The effect image is displayed on the front side of the special view 1 suspension icon 1952, 1953, and the entire special view 1 suspension icon 1952 and a part of the special view 1 suspension icon 1953 are hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 86 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" indicating that the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is disapproval is displayed ing. Also, in FIG. 86 (f), the change animation ends, the hold change image H2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 86 (e) are erased, and the display mode of the special view 1 reserve icon 1952 changes from white circle to black circle. It is changing.

  FIG. 86 (g) shows a state in which the reserve of the special figure 1 at the earliest stage is digested and the special figure 1 change game is started. In the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In addition, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 pending count display area 1931 and the special figure 1 pending icon 1952 becomes a fluctuating icon, and the moving animation between the pending and fluctuating icons and the moving animation of the special figure 1 pending icon 1953 are started. ing. Further, in FIG. 86 (g), a balloon image representing a serif of the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed at the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d.

  FIG. 86 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation between the holding and changing icons and the moving animation of the special view 1 holding icon 1953 are finished. Further, in FIG. 86 (h), an image of a character string of "To ~" is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the merchant's character image H1, suggesting that a to-be-described character image H3 will appear. The production is being performed. The character image H3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect").

  FIG. 86 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030. Also, a character image H3 of the hall is displayed in the upper right portion of the effect display area 1030d, and an image of a character string of "Called?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the character image H3 of the hall. In addition, an image of a character string “Tomon!” Is displayed on the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image H1.

  FIG. 86 (j) shows a state in which reach effect is started with "decoration 3" being temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image H1, and then the image of "chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string "chance!" Representing the speech of the character image H3 of the lord, it is suggested that the rotation display preview effect is executed.

  FIG. 86 (k) shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the variation display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 and the decorative symbol of the middle symbol display area 1030 b is also performed during the execution of the rotation display advance presentation effect. Further, the variation display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 and the decorative symbol of the middle symbol display area 1030 b is also performed during the execution of the rotation display advance presentation effect. Note that FIG. 86 (k) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in the longitudinal direction as compressed due to the problem of space on the paper.

  86 (l) shows that the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center from the state of FIG. 86 (k) (total 90 ° rotation) The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. Further, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 before the rotation of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 86 (j) and (k) has an aspect ratio of 9:16 (an aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 The image displayed on the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 86 (l) has an aspect ratio according to the aspect ratio 1: 1, while the aspect ratio according to the screen of FIG. It is displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 rotated 90 ° counterclockwise has a horizontal axis taken in the direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and is orthogonal to the horizontal axis It is an aspect ratio at the time of taking a vertical axis in the direction. Likewise, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the rotated sub display device 1030 has a horizontal axis in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and a vertical axis in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. Aspect ratio.

  FIG. 86 (m) shows the sub display device 1030 rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) viewed counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 86 (k) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed to the aspect ratio before rotation.

  86 (n) shows a state in which the sub display 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display 1030 from the state of FIG. 86 (m). It shows. Also, in FIG. 86 (n), the pending change image H2 overlaps the character image H3 of the temple, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, during the execution of the rotation display advance presentation effect. Is displayed. The pending change image H2 displayed in FIG. 86 (n) is an image used for producing an advance notice of the change to change the display mode of the change icon. Although FIG. 86 (n) compresses the screen of the sub display 1030 due to the problem of space on the paper, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display 1030 does not change.

  86 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 86 (n). Further, FIG. 86 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, a display in which lightning is generated from the change-in-hold image H2 is displayed, and an animation in which a lightning strikes on a fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle is executed. The lightning strike fluctuation icon overlaps the effect image, and the effect image hides the entire fluctuation icon. Also, in FIG. 86 (o), "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 reservation number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 1 reservation icon display area The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed as a black circle in the second area 1950 is shown as it appears due to the increase animation of the hold icon. Also, the special view 1 hold icon 954 is displayed in an enlarged manner as compared to other hold icons. For this reason, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the hold icon displayed in an enlarged manner during execution of the rotation display advance presentation effect. Although FIG. 86 (n) compresses the screen of the sub display 1030 due to the problem of space on the paper, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display 1030 does not change.

  FIG. 86 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 315 ° rotation) about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 86 (o). Also, in the embodiment in which the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 86 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping with the entire change icon 1941 are erased and the word “heat” is drawn in a circle. The fluctuation icon is displayed enlarged. For this reason, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the fluctuation icon displayed in an enlarged manner during execution of the rotation display advance presentation effect. Although FIG. 86 (n) compresses the screen of the sub display 1030 due to the problem of space on the paper, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display 1030 does not change. Next, in FIG. 86 (q), the sub-display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) about the center of the sub-display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 86 (p). It shows a state where 1030 has made one rotation and returned to the original state. Also, the hold icon and the fluctuation icon, which were displayed in an enlarged manner, are returned to their normal size. Next, in FIG. 86 (r), “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out. Indicates that it has been notified. In addition, when the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 1940 moves downward, the deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon is executed. The downward arrow shown on the upper left of the fluctuation icon in FIG. 86 (r) indicates the moving direction of the fluctuation icon.

  As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of this embodiment, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change. A character image or a decorative pattern may be used for the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the presence of the character image or the decorative pattern is enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image or the decorative pattern. It may be possible to give the player a strong impression. In addition, although the sub display device 1030 makes one rotation (360 ° rotation) in the rotation display preview effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate one rotation or more by using the above-described slip ring. It may be done. For example, the larger the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

  The aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display 1030 may change in relation to the rotation angle of the sub display 1030. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030 as a variable, and based on the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. The work area of the VRAM 436 may be used to generate a display image. Also, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change randomly. For example, when the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using random numbers, and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio There may be. The display area of the image may be expanded or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may be displayed. The aspect ratio of the image may change so as to make the display area constant.

  Further, the symbol variation display in which the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed in comparison with the symbol variation display in which the rotation display advance presentation effect is not performed. . Further, the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change is compared to the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change. The jackpot symbol pattern may be configured to be displayed in a definite manner. In addition, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the frequency or the degree of change of the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the reliability of the jackpot may be configured to be higher as the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes more frequently, or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 The greater the degree of change in the aspect ratio, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, an effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon and the fluctuation icon is performed during the rotation display preview effect. If the effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon and the fluctuation icon is performed, the big hit symbol aspect is finally displayed and stopped and displayed, compared to the case where the effect of displaying the hold icon and the fluctuation icon is not performed is not performed. It may be configured to be easy. Although the effect of rotating the sub display device 1030 is performed in the rotation display advance presentation effect of this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device is rotated by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the rotation of the sub display device 1030. An effect of rotating the image displayed in 208 may be performed, or by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 simultaneously or separately, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display may be performed. An effect of rotating the image displayed on the device 1030 may be performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and may be fixed to the game board 200 so that the sub display device 1030 can not rotate and move.
(Example 18)

  A sub-display apparatus 1030 according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (r) show effects of the special view 1 change game in time series. FIG. 87 (a) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is ended, and shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 86 (a). Next, FIG. 87 (b) shows the state in which the special figure 1's suspension is digested and the special figure 1 floating game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 86 (b). Next, in FIG. 87 (c), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation of the special view 1 hold icon 1951 ends, and the fluctuation icon display area 1940 is displayed. The state in which the change icon 1941 is displayed is shown. In addition, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 and black is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area 1950 A special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which it appears due to an increase animation of the hold icon. Further, FIG. 87 (c) shows that a balloon image representing a serif of the character image H1 of the merchant displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d. It shows the state.

  FIG. 87 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 1931 and black in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area 1950 A special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is shown in the state of appearing by the increase animation of the hold icon. Further, an image of a character string of "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image H1.

  In FIG. 87 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out Indicates a reported state. Next, FIG. 87 (f) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is ended, and shows the same state as FIG. 86 (f). Next, FIG. 87 (g) shows the state in which the reserve of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variation game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 86 (g). Next, FIG. 87 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation between the holding and changing icons and the moving animation of the special view 1 holding icon 953 are finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 86 (h). Next, FIG. 87 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the character image h3 of the statue is displayed, as in FIG. 86 (i). It shows the state.

  FIG. 87 (j) shows a state in which "description 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of a character string of "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image H1, and thereafter, an image of "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the character image h3. The image of the character string is displayed. By displaying the image of the character string “chance!” Representing the words of the character image h3 of the lord, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is to be executed.

  FIG. 87 (k) shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In the case where the decoration frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the images displayed in the decoration frame F1 (number of pendings display, the image of the fourth pattern) (hereinafter, these images are referred to as "non-rotation target images" ) Is given priority over an image other than the non-rotation target image (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “rotation target image”) in a mode in which the player does not rotate as viewed from the player. It is displayed at the top left. Further, the variation display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 and the decorative symbol of the middle symbol display area 1030 b is also performed during the execution of the rotation display advance presentation effect. Further, the rotation target image may be displayed prior to the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target image may be displayed prior to the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotation target images may be displayed prior to the rotation target image. FIG. 87 (k) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed state due to the problem of space on the paper.

  FIG. 87 (l) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has been rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 87 (k). In addition, the non-rotation target image is given priority to a part of the character image H3 of Yoshimune and a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area, in the upper right part of the sub display device 1030 The movement is displayed in a non-rotated manner as viewed from the side. FIG. 87 (l) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed state due to the problem of space on the paper.

  FIG. 87 (m) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has been rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (total 180 degrees rotation) about the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center from the state of FIG. . Further, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed in the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030 in a mode in which it is not rotating as viewed from the player, prior to the decoration frame F2.

  FIG. 87 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise (total 225 degrees rotation) counterclockwise about the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 87 (m) . Further, in FIG. 87 (n), the pending change image H2 overlaps the character image H3 of the temple, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the like during execution of the rotation display advance effect. Is displayed. The pending change image H2 displayed in FIG. 87 (n) is an image used for producing an advance notice of the change to change the display mode of the change icon. In addition, the non-rotation target image is rotated from the player to the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 with priority given to a part of the decoration frame F2 and a part of the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image H1. There is no movement and it is displayed. FIG. 87 (n) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed state due to the problem of space on the paper.

  FIG. 87 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise (total 270 degrees rotation) about the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center from the state of FIG. . Further, FIG. 87 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is generated in which lightning is generated from the holding change image H2 and lightning strikes on a fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle. The lightning strike fluctuation icon overlaps the effect image, and the effect image hides the entire fluctuation icon. Further, in FIG. 87 (o), "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 reservation number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 1 reservation icon display area The special figure 1 hold icon 1954 displayed as a black circle in the second area 1950 is shown as it appears due to the increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, the non-rotational target image gives priority to a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area and a part of the balloon image representing the line of the character image H1 of the merchant, The movement is displayed in a non-rotating manner as seen from the player. Note that FIG. 87 (o) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed state due to the problem of space on the paper surface.

  FIG. 87 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise (total 315 degrees rotation) about the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 87 (o). In addition, the change in the mode in which the "Heat" character is drawn in a circle, with the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 87 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping the entire change icon being erased. The icon is displayed. Also, the special view 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed smaller than the other hold icons. In addition, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed in the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 in a mode in which it is not rotating as seen from the player, prior to a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area. It is done. FIG. 87 (p) illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 in a compressed state due to the problem of space on the paper. Next, in FIG. 87 (q), the sub-display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) about the center of the sub-display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 87 (p). It shows a state where 1030 has made one rotation and returned to the original state. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed on the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 in a mode in which it is not rotating as viewed from the player, and is returned to the state before the rotation display advance presentation effect is performed. Also, the special view 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed in the same size as the other hold icons. Next, in FIG. 87 (r), “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out Indicates that it has been notified. In addition, when the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 1940 moves downward, the deletion animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 1941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, rotation display of the rotation target image is performed by rotating the sub display device 1030. In addition, when rotating the sub display device 1030, the non-rotation target of the decoration frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the image (number-of-holds display, the image of the fourth pattern) displayed in the decoration frame F1. The image is displayed in such a manner that it does not rotate as viewed from the player. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured so that the big hit symbol aspect may be easily determined and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in which the rotation display advance effect is not performed. Further, the non-rotation target image of the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed so as to be displayed at a position where the sub display device 1030 stands out as viewed from the player, in conjunction with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. In addition, all images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are not to be rotated, and any of the decorative symbol, the character image H3 of Yoshimune, the character image H1 of a rose, the reserve icon, the variation icon, the decoration frame F2 etc. The image may be displayed in a mode in which the player does not rotate as viewed from the player. Also, in this case, the larger the number of non-rotational target images, the higher may be configured to have a large hit reliability. Also, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 may produce an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 simultaneously or separately, an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so as to be incapable of rotating and moving.
(Example 19)

  A presentation example of the sub display device 1030 of the example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (l) show the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series. In the period during which the effects of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 88 and FIGS. 89 to 93 described later are displayed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, effects different from the effects of the sub display device 1030 are displayed ing. As another effect, for example, an effect of displaying a decorative symbol and displaying a predetermined background or character may be used.

  FIG. 88 (a) shows a state in which “1” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 is displayed as the number of reservations display image in the suspension display area 1030e at the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 There is. Next, FIG. 88 (b) shows that the reserve of special figure 1 is digested and the reserve number of special figure 1 is 0 as the reserve number display image in the reserve display area 1030e at the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030. It shows the state in which "0" shown is displayed.

  FIG. 88 (c) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the statue is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect").

  FIG. 88 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display preview effect as the reach effect is performed. The sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the reserved display area 1030 e in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is moved to the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030 e is rotated clockwise about the center of the image of “0” 45 as the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotated.

  In FIG. 88 (e), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 88 (d). Is shown. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030 e is rotated clockwise about the center of the image of “0” 45 as the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed as a rotation (total of 90 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 88 (f), the sub display 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 88 (e) around the center of the image display area of the sub display 1030 (total 135 ° rotation) Shows the condition. In addition, the reserved display area 1030 e in the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 is moved to the upper right portion of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030 e is 45 ° clockwise about the center of the image of “0” as the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotating (total 135 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 88 (g), the sub display 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 88 (f) about the center of the image display area of the sub display 1030 (total 180 ° rotation). Shows the condition. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030 e is 45 ° clockwise about the center of the image of “0” as the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotating (total 180 ° rotation).

  FIG. 88H shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 88G. Is shown. In addition, the reserved display area 1030 e in the upper right portion of the sub display device 1030 is moved to the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the "0" image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise about the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030 It is displayed (total 225 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 88 (i), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 88 (H) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 (total 270 ° rotation) Shows the condition. In addition, the "0" image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise about the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030 (Total 270 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 88 (j), the sub display 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 88 (i) with the center of the image display area of the sub display 1030 as the rotation center (total 315 ° rotation). Shows the condition. Further, the reserved display area 1030 e at the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030 is moved to the original position at the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030 e is 45 ° clockwise about the center of the image of “0” as the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotating (total 315 ° rotation). Next, in FIG. 88 (k), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 88 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (total 360 ° rotation). Shows the condition. In addition, the image of “0” as the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030 e is 45 ° clockwise about the center of the image of “0” as the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotating (total 360 ° rotation). Next, FIG. 88 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect is finished, and the character image H3 of the character of the lord is deleted in the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, rotation display of the character image of the character is performed by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the number-of-holds display image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode in which it does not rotate as viewed from the player. Further, the hold display area 1030 e of the sub display device 1030 is moved so as to be displayed in the left corner of the sub display device 1030 as viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the number-of-holds display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily view. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured so that the big hit symbol aspect may be easily determined and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in which the rotation display advance effect is not performed. In addition, although the sub display device 1030 is configured to make one rotation (360 ° rotation) in the rotation display advance presentation effect in the present embodiment, by using the above-described slip ring for the sub display device 1030, one or more rotations are performed. It may be configured to For example, the larger the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set. Also, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effects of the present embodiment may be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be rotated simultaneously or separately. Thus, the effects of the present embodiment may be performed in both of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. When the effect of the present embodiment is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that rotation and movement can not be performed.
Example 20

  A presentation example of the example 20 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (a) to 89 (k) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series.

  FIG. 89 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device at which the special view 1 change game has started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the statue is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect").

  FIG. 89 (c) shows a state in which the rotation display preview effect as the reach effect is performed. FIG. 89C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the character image H3 of the character of the statue displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise. The image is displayed rotating 45 ° clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the character image H3 of the player is visually recognized as not rotating by the player. Next, FIGS. 89D to 89J show states in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 89 (d) to 89 (j), the character image H3 of your character is rotated clockwise and displayed at the same rotation speed as that of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the character image H3 of the main character is always viewed by the player as not rotating. Next, FIG. 89 (k) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect is finished, and the character image H3 of the character of the lord is deleted in the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display preview effect of this embodiment, the character image H3 of the character displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 is rotated. By displaying the character image, the character image is displayed in a mode in which the character image is not rotated as seen from the player. For this reason, since the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate although the sub display device 1030 is rotating, it may be possible to give a player unexpectedness. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured so that the big hit symbol aspect may be easily determined and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in which the rotation display advance effect is not performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed at a speed different from the rotation speed of the sub display 1030 in the direction, or the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display 1030 in the same direction as the rotation of the sub display 1030. In some cases, the character image may be rotated and displayed at different speeds. Also, instead of the rotation of the sub display device 1030, an effect of rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 may be performed, or the decoration symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be rotated simultaneously or separately. An effect may be performed.
(Example 21)

  A presentation example of the example 21 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (l) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series.

  FIG. 90 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device at which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 90 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the statue is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect").

  FIG. 90 (c) shows a state in which the rotation display preview effect as the reach effect is performed. FIG. 90C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the character image H3 of the character of the statue displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise. The image is displayed rotating 45 ° clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the character image H3 of the player is visually recognized as not rotating by the player. Further, from the state shown in FIG. 90 (b), the character image H3 of the statue is compressed slightly in the horizontal direction, and enlarged and displayed in the vertical direction. Next, in FIG. 90 (d), the sub display 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 90 (c) with the center of the image display area of the sub display 1030 as the rotation center (total 90 ° rotation). Shows the condition. In addition, the character image H3 of the character of the statue displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise. The image is displayed rotating 45 ° clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the character image H3 of the player is visually recognized as not rotating by the player. Further, from the state shown in FIG. 90 (c), the character image H3 of the statue is compressed slightly in the horizontal direction, and enlarged and displayed in the vertical direction. Next, in FIG. 90 (e), the sub display 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 90 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display 1030 as the rotation center (total 135 ° rotation) Shows the condition. In addition, the character image H3 of the character of the statue displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise. The image is displayed rotating 45 ° clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the character image H3 of the player is visually recognized as not rotating by the player. Also, from the state shown in FIG. 90 (d), the character image H3 of the statue is slightly expanded in the horizontal direction, and compressed and displayed in the vertical direction. Next, in FIG. 90 (f), the sub display 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 90 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display 1030 as the rotation center (total 180 ° rotation). Shows the condition. In addition, the character image H3 of the character of the statue displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise. The image is displayed rotating 45 ° clockwise about the rotation center. Therefore, the character image H3 of the player is visually recognized as not rotating by the player. Also, from the state shown in FIG. 90 (e), the character image H3 of the temple is compressed slightly in the horizontal direction and enlarged and displayed in the vertical direction, and the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the statue is shown in FIG. It has returned to the state of (b). Next, FIGS. 90 (g) to 90 (j) show states in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 90 (g) to 90 (j), the character image H3 of your character is rotated clockwise and displayed at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the character image H3 of the main character is always viewed by the player as not rotating. Further, in FIGS. 90 (g) to 90 (j), the aspect ratio of the character image H3 is not changed. Next, FIG. 89 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display advance notice effect is finished, and the character image H3 of the character of the lord is deleted in the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display preview effect of this embodiment, the character image H3 of the character displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 is rotated. By displaying the character image, the character image is displayed in a mode in which the character image is not rotated as seen from the player. Further, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the character displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes. For this reason, the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate even though the sub display device 1030 is rotating, which may allow the player to be surprised. By changing the aspect ratio, the presence of the character image may be enhanced, and the player may be given a strong impression. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured so that the big hit symbol aspect may be easily determined and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in which the rotation display advance effect is not performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed at a speed different from the rotation speed of the sub display 1030 in the direction, or the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display 1030 in the same direction as the rotation of the sub display 1030. In some cases, the character image may be rotated and displayed at different speeds. Also, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the frequency or the degree of change of the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the reliability of the jackpot may be configured to be higher as the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes more frequently, or the sub display device 1030 is displayed. As the degree of change in the aspect ratio of the character image is larger, the reliability of the big hit may be higher. Also, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effects of the present embodiment may be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effects of the present embodiment may be performed in both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. When the effect of the present embodiment is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that rotation and movement can not be performed.
(Example 22)

  A presentation example of the example 22 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (f) show effects of the special view 1 change game in time series.

  FIG. 91 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device at which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 91 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the statue is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the hall is an image used for the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect.

  FIGS. 91 (c) to 91 (e) show a state in which the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect is performed. In the lateral movement display effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 moves in the horizontal direction in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in the drawings of FIGS. 91C to 91E indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before movement in the left and right direction.

  FIG. 91 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved in the left direction from the state shown in FIG. 91 (b). Also, the character image H3 of the statue displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in such a manner as to move in the right direction by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 in the left direction. There is. For this reason, the character image H3 of the character is displayed so as not to move as seen from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been missed in the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the upper left portion. Further, in the present example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice of high jackpot reliability.

  FIG. 91 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved in the left direction from the state shown in FIG. 91 (c). In addition, the character image H3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed to move in the right direction by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 in the left direction. Therefore, the character image H3 of the player is displayed so as to be viewed as not moving from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, all of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the upper left portion.

  FIG. 91 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved in the right direction from the state shown in FIG. 91 (d). In addition, the character image H3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a manner of moving in the left direction by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 in the right direction. For this reason, the character image H3 of the character is displayed so as not to move as seen from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the upper left portion, and a part of the princess character image H4 is missing.

  FIG. 91 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved in the right direction from the state shown in FIG. 91 (e), and the side movement display effect as the reach effect has ended. The character image H3 of the character displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a manner of moving in the left direction by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 in the right direction. Therefore, the character image H3 of the character is displayed in a mode in which the character image H3 is not moving as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed.

As described above, in the lateral movement display advance presentation effect of this embodiment, while moving the sub display device 1030 sideways, moving and displaying the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 In this way, the character image H3 of the character is displayed in a mode in which the character image H3 is not seen from the player. In addition, in the lateral movement display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, the character image H4 of the princess who has been missed in the sub display 1030 before the horizontal movement display advance presentation is executed is a side of the image displayed on the sub display 1030 The movement display is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance. For this reason, the player will pay attention to the movement distance of the sub display device 1030, and in some cases, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in the effect during symbol fluctuation, when the horizontal movement display advance effect of this embodiment is performed, the symbol fluctuation display is finally the big hit symbol aspect compared to the case where the horizontal movement display advance effect is not performed. The decision stop may be configured to be displayed easily. In addition, in the lateral movement display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, a character combined with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed may be displayed. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the lord may be displayed. In addition, while the sub-display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance in the left direction, the princess character image H4 is displayed, whereas the sub-display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance in the right direction. May be displayed. In addition, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the statue or the character image H4 of the princess used for the lateral movement display advance presentation effect in the present embodiment may change during the lateral movement display advance presentation effect. Also, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effects of the present embodiment may be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effects of the present embodiment may be performed in both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. When the effect of the present embodiment is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that rotation and movement can not be performed.
(Example 23)

  A presentation example of the example 23 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 92 (a) to 92 (f) show effects of the special view 1 change game in time series.

  FIG. 92 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device at which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 92 (b) shows a state in which the character image H3 of the statue is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect"). FIG. 92 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 92 (b). . The image data shown in FIG. 92 (b-1) has a character image H3 of the shrine and a character image H4 of the princess at the lower left of the character image H3 of the statue, and the character image H3 of the statue and the character image H4 of the princess It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in the present example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice of high jackpot reliability. 92 (b-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 92 (b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 92 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 92 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out as display data by centering on the center of the image data. FIG. 92 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 92 (b-2).

  (C) to (e) of FIG. 92 show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is performed. In the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decoration symbol display device 208 in front of the decoration symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. It is rotated 45 degrees. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in the drawings of FIGS. 92C to 92E indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. The arrows shown in FIGS. 92C to 92E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 92C shows a state where the sub display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 92B about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. . Also, the character image H3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotated manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 which has been missed from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not to rotate from the player. FIG. 92 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display 1030 in the state of FIG. 92 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 92 (c-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 92 (b-1) is rotated 30 ° clockwise about the center of the image data. 92 (c-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 92 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display 1030 in the state of FIG. 92 (c). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 92 (c-1), the display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the image data as the display data. 92 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 92 (c-2) and rotates the sub display 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 92 (b) counterclockwise. FIG. 92 (c) shows the state of the sub display 1030 in FIG. 92 (c).

  FIG. 92 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 92 (c) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. . Also, the character image H3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotated manner as viewed from the player. In addition, in the sub display device 1030, in the lower left portion, the entire character image H4 of the princess is displayed in a mode in which it is not rotating as seen from the player. FIG. 92 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display 1030 in the state of FIG. 92 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 92 (d-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 92 (c-1) clockwise by 15 ° around the center of the image data. 92 (d-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 92 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 92 (d). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 92 (d-1), the display data is cut out as a display data by cutting a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 centering on the center of the image data. 92 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 92 (d-2) and rotates the sub display 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 92 (e) counterclockwise. FIG. 92 (d) shows the state of the sub display 1030 in FIG. 92 (d).

  FIG. 92 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise by 15 ° from the state shown in FIG. 92 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Also, the character image H3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotated manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player, and another part is missing from the sub display device 1030. Further, FIG. 92 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 92 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display 1030 in the state of FIG. 92 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 92 (e-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 92 (d-1) is rotated counterclockwise by 15 ° around the center of the image data. It is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). 92 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 92 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 92 (e). The generated display data is shown. The said display data are the same as the display data shown to FIG. 92 (c-2). FIG. 92 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 92 (c-2) and rotates the sub display 1030 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 92 (d). It shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows the state of the sub display 1030 in FIG. 92 (d). FIG. 92 (e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 92 (c-3).

  FIG. 92F shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 92E about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 and returned to the original state. Is shown. Also, the character image H3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotated manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. FIG. 92 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display 1030 in the state of FIG. 92 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 92 (f-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 92 (e-1) is rotated counterclockwise by 30 ° about the center of the image data. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 92 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 92 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display 1030 in the state of FIG. 92 (f). The generated display data is shown. The said display data are the same as the display data shown to FIG. 92 (b-2). 92 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 92 (f-2), and the sub display 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 92 (e). FIG. 92 (f) shows a state where the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 30 °. FIG. 92 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 92 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated and displayed at the same speed in the opposite direction as the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 is rotated. The character image H3 of the character is displayed in a mode that is not rotated as seen from the player. Further, in the rotation display preview effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the image in which the character image H4 of the princess who was missed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 before the rotation display preview effect is executed. Is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player may pay attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, which may improve the interest of the game.

  Also, the princess character image H4 may be displayed at the upper left portion of the character image of the lord. In this case, the character image H4 of the princess, which has been displayed before the rotation, can be missed on the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise. In addition, by adjusting the display position of the princess character image H4, the sub display device 1030 can be seen from the sub display device 1030 by rotating the sub display device 1030 by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player may pay attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, which may improve the interest of the game.

In the rotary display advance notice effect of this embodiment, although the character image H4 of the princess is displayed by the rotation of the sub display device 1030, the character according to the big hit reliability of the symbol variation display being executed is displayed You may For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the lord may be displayed. Further, while the sub display 1030 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, the princess character image H4 is displayed, whereas the sub display 1030 rotates by a predetermined angle clockwise. Characters may be displayed. In addition, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the statue or the character image H4 of the princess used for the rotation display preview effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display preview effect. In addition, in the effect during symbol fluctuation, when the horizontal movement display advance effect of this embodiment is performed, the symbol fluctuation display is finally the big hit symbol aspect compared to the case where the horizontal movement display advance effect is not performed. The decision stop may be configured to be displayed easily. Also, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effects of the present embodiment may be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effects of the present embodiment may be performed in both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. When the effect of the present embodiment is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that rotation and movement can not be performed.
(Example 24)

  A presentation example of the twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (a) to 93 (f) show effects of the special figure 1 fluctuation game in time series.

  FIG. 93 (a) shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device at which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, in FIG. 93 (b), the sub display device 1030 moves downward, and the character image H3 of the statue at the center of the sub display device 1030 and the character image H1 of the merchant are displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 1030. Show the situation. The character image H3 of the statue is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 52 (b) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display advance effect"). FIG. 93 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 93 (b). The image data shown in FIG. 93 (b-1) has a character image H3 of the lord and a character image H4 of the princess at the lower left of the character image H3 of the lord, and the character image H3 of the lord and the character image H4 of the princess It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in the present example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice of high jackpot reliability. 93 (b-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 93 (b-1) to display an image on the sub display 1030 in the state of FIG. 93 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 93 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out as display data by centering on the center of the image data. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 93 (b-2) corresponds to the first sub-control unit 400 at a predetermined position (the lower left portion of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 93 (b-1). It is display data in which the merchant character image H1 read out from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 93 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 93 (b-2). Further, although the character image H1 of the merchant is displayed prior to the image data shown in FIG. 93 (b-1), the image data shown in FIG. 93 (b-1) is prioritized over the character image H1 of the merchant May be displayed.

  Figs. 93 (c) to 93 (e) show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is performed. In the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decoration symbol display device 208 in front of the decoration symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. It is rotated 45 degrees. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in the drawings of FIGS. 93C to 93E indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. The arrows shown in FIGS. 93C to 93E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 93C shows a state where the sub display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 93B about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. . Also, the character image H3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotated manner as viewed from the player. In addition, the merchant's character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 93 (b) to the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates. Is displayed in a manner rotating 30 ° counterclockwise around the rotation center. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 which has been missed from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower right of the character image H1 in a manner not to rotate from the player. Further, FIG. 93 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 93 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 93 (c-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 93 (b-1) is rotated clockwise by 30 ° about the center of the image data. 93 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 93 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 93 (c). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 93 (c-1), the display data is cut out as a display data by cutting a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 centering on the center of the image data. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 93 (c-2) is the first display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 93 (c-1) at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 93 (b-2)). The display data is obtained by superposing the merchant character image H1 read out from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400. FIG. 93 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 93 (c-2) and rotates the sub display 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 93 (b) counterclockwise. FIG. 93 (c) shows the state of the sub display 1030 in FIG. 93 (c).

  FIG. 93D shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has been rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 93C about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 by 15 °. . Also, the character image H3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotated manner as viewed from the player. In addition, the merchant's character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 93 (c) by the rotation of the sub display device 1030 and the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 The image is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated counterclockwise by 15 ° around the rotation center. Further, in the sub display device 1030, all of the princess character image H4 is displayed on the right of the merchant's character image H1 in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. 93D-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 93D. The image data shown in FIG. 93 (d-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 93 (c-1) clockwise by 15 ° about the center of the image data. 93 (d-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 93 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 93 (d). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 93 (d-1), the display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the image data as a display data. The display data shown in FIG. 93 (d-2) is the first display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 93 (d-1) at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 93 (b-2)). The display data is obtained by superposing the merchant character image H1 read out from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400. FIG. 93 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 93 (d-2) and rotates the sub display 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 93 (c) counterclockwise. FIG. 93 (d) shows the state of the sub display 1030 in FIG. 93 (d).

  FIG. 93 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise by 15 ° from the state shown in FIG. 93 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Also, the character image H3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotated manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant's character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 93 (d) by the rotation of the sub display device 1030, and the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 is displayed. Is displayed clockwise by 15 ° around the rotation center. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower right of the character image H1 in a mode in which it is not rotating as viewed from the player, and another part is missed from the sub display device 1030 ing. Further, FIG. 93 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 93 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display 1030 in the state of FIG. 93 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 93 (e-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 93 (d-1) counterclockwise about the image data center by 15 °. 93 (e-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 93 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 93 (e). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 93 (e-1), the display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the image data as the display data. The display data shown in FIG. 93 (e-2) is the first display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 93 (e-1) at a predetermined position (the position shown in FIG. 93 (b-2)). The display data is obtained by superposing the merchant character image H1 read out from the ROM 406 of the sub control unit 400. 93 (e-3) displays the image on the sub display 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 93 (e-2) and rotates the sub display 1030 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 93 (d). FIG. 93 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 °.

  FIG. 93 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise by 30 ° from the state shown in FIG. 93 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center Is shown. Also, the character image H3 of the character displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotated manner as viewed from the player. Also, the merchant's character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 93 (e) by the rotation of the sub display device 1030, and the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 is displayed. Is rotated clockwise by 30 ° and is displayed in a mode returned to the original state. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. FIG. 93 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display 1030 in the state of FIG. 93 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 93 (f-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 93 (e-1) is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise about the center of the image data. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 93 (f-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 93 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display 1030 in the state of FIG. 93 (f). The generated display data is shown. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 93 (f-2) corresponds to the first sub-control unit 400 at a predetermined position (lower left portion of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 93 (b-1). The display data is obtained by superimposing the merchant character image H1 read out from the ROM 406, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 93 (b-2). FIG. 93 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 93 (f-2) and rotates the sub display 1030 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 93 (e). FIG. 93 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 30 °. FIG. 93 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 93 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display advance presentation effect of the present embodiment, a character image (a character image H3 of a character displayed on the sub display device 1030 in a non-rotating manner on the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 is rotated). The character image H4 of the princess and the character image (the character image H1 of the merchant) displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player are displayed. By displaying simultaneously on the rotating sub-display device 1030, a character image displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player and a character image displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player. In some cases, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise. In addition, in the effect during symbol fluctuation, when the horizontal movement display advance effect of this embodiment is performed, the symbol fluctuation display is finally the big hit symbol aspect compared to the case where the horizontal movement display advance effect is not performed. The decision stop may be configured to be displayed easily. Also, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effects of the present embodiment may be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effects of the present embodiment may be performed in both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. When the effect of the present embodiment is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that rotation and movement can not be performed.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the second embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 93 again.
(D1)

  A game console provided with a first movable body (for example, movable body 1002) capable of executing a rendering operation for producing a game,

  The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) or a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000).

  The first movable body is configured to move from a second position (for example, an initial position) to a first position (for example, a lowermost position) when the power is turned off.

  The first movable body is configured to move from the first position (e.g., the lowermost position) to the second position (e.g., the initial position) when the power is turned on. ,

  The second position and the first position are different positions,

The rendering operation is configured to start from the second position (for example, the initial position) and end at the second position.
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table provided with the above configuration, the durability of the drive means for driving the first movable body may be able to be improved.
(D2)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (D1),

Also when the power is turned off with the first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) positioned at a position different from the second position (for example, the initial position), the first movable body is Configured to move to said first position,
A game stand characterized by
(D3)

  The game console according to (D1) or (D2) above,

  The rendering operation includes an operation of moving to a third position (for example, the uppermost position),

  The third position and the first position are different positions,

The third position and the second position are different positions,
A game stand characterized by
(D4)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (D3),

  Image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means,

The third position is a position on the front side of the image display means.
A game stand characterized by
(D5)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (D4),

  It is possible to execute the operation of the big hit (for example, the production of the big hit game),

  The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208),

  When the first movable body is located at the third position (for example, the uppermost position), at least at least a notice image (for example, a cloud image or a balloon image) displayed on the image display means In some cases, the first movable body may overlap,

The notice image is a notice image of the big hit.
A game stand characterized by
(D6)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,

  The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,

“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in (D1) refers to “the first movable body moves from the first position to the initial movement” And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation (see, for example, FIGS. 68 (c) to (g)).
A game stand characterized by
(D7)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,

  The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,

The phrase “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in the above (D1) means “the first movable body is from the first position to the second position”. Starting the initial operation and moving to the second position again at the end of the initial operation (see, for example, FIGS. 70 (n) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by
(D8)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D7) above,

  The "when the power is turned off" described in the above (D1) is "when the main power of the game console is turned off",

The "when the power is turned on" described in the above (D1) is "when the main power of the game console is turned on",
A game stand characterized by
(D9)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D8) above,

The first movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is a movable body capable of changing its posture.
A game stand characterized by
(D10)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D9) above,

  The second movable body (for example, the movable body 1006) capable of executing a rendering operation for producing a game,

The second movable body is a movable body which starts operation from a position at the time of the power being turned off when the power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by
(D11)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,

The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(D12)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,

The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by

All the rendering operations of the first rendering movable body are configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.
(D13)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (12) above,

  The rendering operation may start from the second position and end at the fourth position,

  The rendering operation may be started from the fourth position and ended at the second position,

  The fourth position is a position different from the first position,

  The fourth position is a position different from the second position,

The fourth position is a position different from the third position.
A game stand characterized by
(D14)

  The gaming machine according to (D13) above,

The rendering operation may be started from the fourth position and ended at the fourth position,
A game stand characterized by
(D15)

  The gaming machine according to (D13) or (14) above,

The first movable body is configured to move from the fourth position to the first position also when the power is turned off with the first movable body in the fourth position. ing,
A game stand characterized by
(D16)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D15) above,

The first movable body is configured to move from the third position to the first position also when the power is turned off with the first movable body in the third position. ing,
A game stand characterized by
(D17)

  The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D16) above,

  Fourth control means for controlling the movable body;

And driving means for driving the movable body.

  The first control means is the main control unit 300 which performs a lottery (for example, a big hit lottery etc.) which is advantageous to the player. The first control means may be composed of one or more control circuits, or may be composed of one or more control boards.

  The second control means is an effect means (for example, an illumination unit (such as an LED), a sound output means (such as a speaker), an image display means (a liquid crystal display, etc.) that produces a game in response to a command signal from the first control means. Device, dot matrix, etc.) sub-control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) which performs effect control of the device, the second control means may be composed of one or more control circuits; The second control means may, for example, draw the effect to be performed by the effect means in response to the drive control of the effect means or the command signal from the first control means. Make selections etc.

  The third control means communicates with the second control means and is effect control means for effect control (for example, drive control) of the effect means. The effect control means may be composed of one or more control circuits, or may be composed of one or more control boards. The third control means may control the effect means in accordance with the effect command from the second control means, or determines the effect to be executed in response to the effect command from the second control means. Information based on the determined result may be returned to the second control means, or the effect means may be driven.

The fourth control means communicates with the third control means, and is effect control means for effect control (one or a plurality of or all of the sub liquid crystal units 1030 and movable bodies 1002 to 1012). The fourth control means may be composed of one or more control circuits, or may be composed of one or more control boards, and the fourth control means may be composed of third control means. The effect means may be controlled according to the effect command, or the effect to be executed is determined according to the effect command from the third control means, and information based on the determined result is returned to the third control means Alternatively, the fourth control means may be mounted on the moving unit 1036.
(D18)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (D17),

  The fourth control means is mounted on a drive unit (for example, mobile unit 1036),

The drive unit also performs the same operation during at least one operation (for example, up and down movement) of the plurality of operations by the movable body.
A game stand characterized by

  In the above embodiment, since the moving unit 1036 is provided on the movable body 1002, when moving the movable body 1002 up and down, the moving unit 1036 also operates together with the movable body 1002, but the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 In this case, the moving unit 1036 is configured not to rotate. Note that the moving unit 1036 may be disposed separately from the movable body 1002 so that the moving unit 1036 does not operate together even when the movable body 1002 moves up and down, or even when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. The moving units 1036 may be configured to operate together, or the moving units 1036 may be configured to operate together during all the operations of the movable body 1002.

The movable body 1002 shows an example capable of performing vertical movement (position change, movement) and rotational movement (posture change), but may perform other operations (for example, position change / movement in the horizontal direction) other than vertical movement. Tilt operation (for example, the left or right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is tilted forward or backward around the vertical rotation axis) or the upper or lower side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is forward or It may be possible to perform an operation of tilting backward).
(D19)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D18) above,

Fourth control means for controlling the movable body;
Driving means for driving the movable body;

  And detection means for detecting the position of the first movable body,

  When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the position of the first movable body is confirmed.

  The first movable body is configured to move to the first position when the position of the first movable body is not the first position,

The confirmation condition is a condition that is satisfied when the power is turned off.
A game stand characterized by (E1)

  An image display unit (for example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 or the sub liquid crystal unit 1032) capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game;

Driving means (for example, a motor) for driving the image display unit;
A game console equipped with

  The image display unit may move by the drive of the drive means,

  The image display is performed in a period (hereinafter, referred to as a “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (rotational direction about the rotation axis of the image display unit or linear direction). The unit may display the first moving image (for example, the moving image of the character image H3 of the lord or the character image H4 of the princess),

The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 93 (b) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, an impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and by changing the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit during the period of the movement, as a notification means It is possible to cause the player to perform an operation that does not appear on a daily basis, and the player may be able to forget everyday and concentrate on playing more games. Alternatively, all the periods in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the periods in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. As the first period. In addition, with a certain effect as an opportunity, all periods of the period from when the image display unit starts moving in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period, or with an effect different from the effect. A part of a period from the movement of the image display unit in the first direction to the stop may be set as the first period.
(E2)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (E1),

The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the first image (see, for example, FIGS. 93 (b) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by

Although the example according to the present embodiment shows an example in which the expression, the outer shape, and the like of the first image (the character image H3 of the temple and the character image H4 of the princess) are displayed in a fixed manner, the expression of the first image , The outer shape, etc. may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, if FIG. 93 is illustrated and demonstrated, the face of the shrine which was not displayed in FIG. 93 (a) will be displayed as a true face in FIG. 93 (b), and it will become a smile a little in FIG. In FIG. 93 (d), a full smile may be obtained, and in FIG. 93 (e), a slight smile may be made, and in FIG. 93 (f), an animation may be made to return to the real face. The movement of the first image (for example, the character image H3 of the temple) in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image H3 of the statue moves. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the display of the character, and the change of the outer shape of the character or the like, the variable display of the speech (display of change from partial character string indicating speech to whole character string, etc.), character or icon The color change, the movement display of a character or an icon, or the like may be used, or a combination of these may be included.
(E3)

  The game console according to (E1) or (E2) above,

  In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction (for example, a counterclockwise direction) (see, for example, FIGS. 93 (b) to (d)).

  In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction (for example, clockwise direction) (for example, FIG. 93 (b-1), (c-1), (D-1)),

The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions,
A game stand characterized by

In the game stand provided with the configuration, the first direction in which the image display unit is operated with one of the effects as an opportunity (for example, arrival of timing to start the image display unit operation effect during super reach) is one. Image (for example, when the timing to start rendering by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not a definite change at the end of the big hit starts, etc.) The first orientation when the display unit operates may be another orientation (for example, rightward). Also, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite direction, in which case the player may move or rotate the first image faster than the movement or rotation of the image display unit. Is visible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an unusual feeling which can not be obtained in a mode in which the image is rotated in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is further accelerated. In some cases, it is possible to forget a more everyday feeling from turning and moving, and to concentrate on the game.
(E4)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (E3),

  During the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at a first speed,

  During the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed,

The first speed and the second speed are the same speed (for example, FIG. 93 (b) to (d) and FIG. 93 (b-1), (c-1), (d-1) )reference),
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, the image display unit appears to move to the player, but the display position, the display angle, etc. of the first image does not seem to move, so the notification means is unusual. When it is possible to perform a static operation, the notification by the image display unit display itself can play the same role as when it is not moving, and it becomes possible to achieve both of the operation with impact and the notification. There is. In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be different from each other in the first direction and the second direction, and in this case, the first and second directions may be different from each other. The player visually recognizes that one image moves or rotates slowly. For this reason, although the aspect in which an image rotates in a fixed image display unit can be routinely seen in a TV, a net, etc., since the image display unit rotates, it can not be obtained in a fixed image display unit. Gives the player a realistic sensation, and furthermore, the first image in the image display unit moves and rotates so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation of the image display unit, making the player feel more everyday It may be possible to forget and concentrate on the game. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with emphasis on impact, the notification by the image display unit display is close to the case where it is not moving by moving and rotating the first image gently. It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.
(E5)

  The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E4) above,

The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image H1) is displayed (for example, see FIG. 93).
A game stand characterized by
(E6)

  The gaming machine according to (E5) above,

In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 93 (b-2), (c-2), and (d-2). ),
A game stand characterized by

The gaming machine having the configuration may be configured such that a second image which does not move in the first direction is not displayed in the first period. That is, in the first period, all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, so that the image display unit and the movement of the image are given a sense of unity, which has more impact. The rendering operation may be executable.
(E7)

  The game console according to (E5) or (E6) above,

  A game console characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.

In the example according to the present embodiment, the expression, the outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1 ′) are fixedly displayed, but according to the game console having the configuration, The expression, outline, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, if FIG. 61 is illustrated and demonstrated, the merchant's face which was not displayed on the sub display 209 in FIG. 61 (a) will be displayed in a true face in FIG. 61 (b) and a little on FIG. 61 (c). It is possible to have an animation that makes the face look steep, that in FIG. 61 (d) becomes the face stinky, in FIG. 61 (e) returns to the face slightly steep, and in FIG. 61 (f) returns to the real face. Also, the manner in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation does not move. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the display of the character, and the change of the outer shape of the character or the like, the variable display of the speech (display of change from partial character string indicating speech to whole character string, etc.), character or icon The color change, the movement display of a character or an icon, or the like may be used, or a combination of these may be included.
(E8)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,

  The phrase "moves by the drive of the drive means" described in the above (E1) means "rotates by the drive of the drive means",

  "The first image moves in the first direction" described in (E1) above means "the first image rotates in the first direction",

The first direction is a rotation direction about the rotation axis of the image display unit (see, for example, FIG. 93).
A game stand characterized by
(E9)

  The game console according to (E3) or (E4) above,

The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise (see, for example, FIG. 93).
A game stand characterized by
(E10)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,

  The term “moves by the drive of the drive means” described in the above (E1) means “moves linearly by the drive of the drive means”,

“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the above (E1) means “the first image moves linearly in the first direction” (see, for example, FIG. 91). ),
A game stand characterized by

  “The first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction”. The above-mentioned first direction in this case is one of upward and downward. In addition, “the first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the left and right direction”. The above-mentioned first direction in this case is one of the left direction and the right direction. “The first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the oblique direction”. The above-mentioned first direction in this case is one of the left upward, right downward, right upward, and left downward directions.

  A modification of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the movement by driving of the drive means may be combined movement of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, left and right direction, oblique direction, front and rear direction seen from the player). Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to be equipped with a plurality of image display units. Also, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. An LED may be mounted in the image display unit, and a movable body for effect may be mounted. In addition, after the effect movable body moves from the initial state to the movable state before the image display unit rotates or moves, and the effect display movable body moves in the movable state after the effect movable body moves. After stopping, the movable body for effect may be configured to move to the initial state. Moreover, during the symbol variation display, the symbol in the case where the rendering operation shown in FIG. 89 is performed is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, as compared to the case where the rendering operation shown in FIG. 88 is performed. The mode may be configured to be a big hit mode easily, and during the symbol variation display, the direction when the effect operation of FIG. 88 is performed is more than the case where the effect operation of FIG. 89 is performed, The symbol aspect to be finally displayed in stop in the symbol variation display may be configured to be likely to be a big hit aspect. Further, when the effect operation of FIG. 88 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol aspect to be finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the big hit aspect, During the symbol variation display, when the rendering operation of FIG. 89 is performed, the symbol aspect to be finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the big hit aspect. 88 and 89 show an example in which the same effect display is performed, but when the sub display shown in FIG. 88 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display also rotates together. The effect to be viewed by the player is different from the effect to be viewed by the player so that the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotating together when the sub display device shown in FIG. 89 is rotated. It may be configured to be an effect of. For example, "one of the other effects" is an effect that the hall is fighting with the musician, and "the other effect of the other effects" is such that the princess dances. It is also good. One type of “one of the different effects” may be mounted, or a plurality of types may be mounted, or “one of the other effects of the other effects” may be mounted. You may carry multiple types. Also, as shown in FIG. 58, when the sub display device rotates, the figure is more than the number of types of effects in which at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device rotates together. As shown in 89, when at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub-display device is rotated when the sub-display device is rotated, the effect of the effect being visually recognized by the player as not rotating together The number of types may be configured to be larger. Conversely, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 89, the player visually recognizes that at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device may not rotate together. The effect that at least a portion (or all) of the images displayed on the sub-display device rotate together when the sub-display device rotates as shown in FIG. 88 rather than the number of types of effects The number of types may be configured to be larger.

Also, the effect example shown in FIG. 88 and the effect example shown in FIG. 89 may be combined. For example, in a period in which the sub display starts rotating (period A), the sub display is rotated at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) and displayed on the sub display The image prevents the rotation of the image displayed on the sub-display to be viewed by the player to rotate with the sub-display. In the next period (period B), the sub-display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display device is more than the sub-display device. At least a portion or all of the image is rotated in another orientation (e.g., clockwise) at a speed B '(e.g., 20 rpm) so as to be viewed by the player as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub-display device is rotated at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and the image displayed on the sub-display device is larger than that of the sub-display device. At least a portion or all of the image is rotated in another orientation (e.g., clockwise) at a speed C '(e.g., 40 rpm) so as to be viewed by the player as rotating slowly. Also, in the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is rotated. First, at least part or all of the image is rotated at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm) in another direction (for example, clockwise) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated at a speed E (for example, 50 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and an image displayed on the sub display device is larger than that of the sub display device. At least a portion or all of the image is rotated in another orientation (e.g., clockwise) at a speed E '(e.g., 40 rpm) to be viewed by the player as if it is rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub-display device is rotated at a speed F (for example, 40 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and the image displayed on the sub-display device is larger than that of the sub-display device. At least a portion or all of the image is rotated in another orientation (e.g., clockwise) at a speed F '(e.g., 20 rpm) to be viewed by the player as if it is rotating slowly. The sub display device is rotated at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) in a period (period G) before the sub display device of the next period finishes rotation, and displayed on the sub display device The image to be displayed may not rotate so as to be viewed by the player as it rotates with the sub display device. Thus, as illustrated in the period A to the period D, as the period in which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually deviates from the rotation of the sub display device. The sub-display device rotates, and a part or all of the display of the sub-display device is shifted to a state where it is viewed by the player as if it is stopped, thereby creating a new sense of unity with the sub-display device and the image. It may be possible to perform certain effects. In addition, as illustrated in the period D to the period G, as the period in which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually rotated together with the sub display device By causing the player to visually recognize so as to change as described above, it may be possible to perform an effect with a new sense of unity by the sub display device and the image. In these examples, in the periods A to D, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually decreased, and in the period D to G, the sub display Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, in the period A to D, the rotation of the sub display device is The difference between the speed and the speed of rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, and in the periods D to G, the speed of rotation of the sub display device and the speed of rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device. The difference in speed may be gradually reduced. In addition, although the images displayed on the rotating sub-display device and the rotating sub-display device are illustrated here, the present invention is also applicable to an image displayed on a linearly moving sub-display device and a linearly moving sub-display device. Is also possible.
(F1)

  An effect movable body (for example, movable body 1001 or movable body 1002) capable of executing a movable operation for producing a game;

A decorative body (movable body 1008) provided with windows (for example, transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b);
A game console equipped with

Behind the decorative body, the effect movable body may execute an operation (see, for example, FIGS. 77 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body can make the player visually recognize the operation of the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body, and as the effect means It becomes possible to cause the player to perform an operation that does not appear on a daily basis, and the player may be able to forget everyday and concentrate on playing more games.
(F2)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (F1),

  The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,

It is configured to allow the player to visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window portion (see, for example, FIGS. 77 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body is configured to be able to display an image, so the operation and the image of the effect movable body to the player through the window portion of the decorative body In some cases, it is possible to make the notification means perform operations that are not seen on a daily basis, and to allow the player to forget everyday and concentrate on the game. Also, there may be a plurality of effect movable bodies capable of displaying an image, or only one may be provided. In addition, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image capable of being operated behind the decorative body may have the main liquid crystal unit or may have the sub liquid crystal unit. In addition, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image capable of being operated behind the decorative body may have both the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, and in the case of having two or more sub liquid crystal units There may be.
(F3)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (F2),

The operation of the effect movable body may change the image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window (see, for example, FIGS. 77 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, it is possible to change the image displayed on the effect movable body visually recognized through the window portion of the decorative body by performing the operation behind the decorative body, so that the player thinks You may be able to give surprises that don't bother you. In addition, the above-mentioned "the image of the effect movable body is changed" means that the image displayed on the effect movable body is changed (for example, the shape of the image of the cloud and the display color are changed) Also, it includes the case where the appearance of the image displayed on the effect movable body changes.
(F4)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F3) above,

The decorative body is operable (see, for example, FIGS. 77 (e) and (f)),
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, since the decorative body becomes operable, it may be possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the decorative body and the operation of the effect movable body are interlocked.
(F5)

  The game console according to any one of (F1) to (F4) above,

It has symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing variable display of symbols,
A game stand characterized by
(F6)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (F5),

  In the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means, the player visually recognizes a part of the image (for example, the image of the cloud) on the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body When it becomes possible, the jackpot as a final result of the fluctuation display of the symbol than when the player can not visually recognize part of the image on the effect movable body through the window portion of the decoration. The symbol form is configured to be easily determined (see, eg, FIGS. 77 and 78),

The part of the image on the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the preview image,
A game stand characterized by
(F7)

  The gaming machine according to (F5) or (F6) above,

By the operation of the decorative body, a part of the image of the holding icon in the prefetching mode (for example, the white diamond shaped aspect) in the effect movable body via the window portion (for example, the transparent portion 1008b) of the decorative body When it becomes visible to the player, the player can not visually recognize part of the image of the holding icon in the look-ahead mode in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body, The jackpot symbol aspect is configured to be easily displayed as a final result of the variation display of the symbol started when the suspension corresponding to the suspension icon is digested and started (for example, see FIG. 84).
A game stand characterized by
(F8)

  The gaming machine according to any one of the above F1 to F7, wherein

The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(G1)

  It is a game console provided with image display means,

  The image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030) can execute a rotation operation (for example, see FIG. 86).

  The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a first image (for example, a character image H1 of a statue, a decorative symbol, a holding icon, a variation icon, etc.),

When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIG. 86 (l)).
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, when the image display means is rotated, the aspect ratio of the first image may change, so the presence of the first image is amplified. And may give the player a strong impression. In addition, there may be a case where one or all of the images such as the character image, the decoration pattern, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background pattern, etc. may be used as the first image. In some cases, a different image may be the first image. Further, the image display means capable of performing the rotation operation may be a main liquid crystal unit or a sub liquid crystal unit. In both cases, the aspect ratio of the first image may be displayed to change. For example, when the first image is displayed by the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, and the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit are simultaneously or separately rotated, and the aspect ratio of the first image is changed simultaneously or separately There may be. In addition, by arranging two sub liquid crystal units, a first image may be displayed by two sub liquid crystal units. In this case, there may be a case where the aspect ratio of the first image is changed by rotating the two sub liquid crystal units in a line.
(G2)

  The gaming machine according to (G1) above,

  The image display means in which the rotation operation is being performed may display a second image (for example, the decoration frame F1, the number of holdings display, the image of the fourth symbol).

When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (k) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by
(G3)

  The gaming machine according to (G2) above,

When the rotation operation is performed, the second image is not rotated (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (k) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, when the first image is rotated, the second image may not be rotated. Therefore, while the rotation of the first image is emphasized, the second image is firmly fixed. It can be made visible to the player. In addition, there may be a case where one or all of the images such as the character image, the decoration pattern, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background pattern are used as the second image, and these images may be used. The second image may be a different image.
(G4)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G3) above,

When the rotation operation is performed, an image (for example, a princess character image H4) missed in the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed is displayed on the image display unit by the rotation operation. (See, for example, FIGS. 92 (b) and (c)),
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table having the above configuration, the image which has been missed in the image display means before the rotation operation of the image display means is displayed on the image display means by the rotation operation of the image display means. In some cases, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.
(G5)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G4) above,

When the rotation operation is performed, an image (for example, a princess character image H4) displayed on the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed is performed by the rotation operation. May be missed,
A game stand characterized by

According to the game console having the above configuration, the image displayed on the image display means before the image display means is rotated can not be read out on the image display means by the image display means being rotated. In some cases, it is possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.
(G6)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,

The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by
(G7)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,

The gaming machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000),
A game stand characterized by
(H1)

  An effect movable body (for example, a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) capable of executing an effect operation for producing a game;

A base body (for example, a moving unit 1036) capable of supporting the effect movable body;
A game console equipped with

  The effect movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is capable of performing a rotational operation,

  A slip ring (eg, rotating side substrates 1090 and 1140) is provided on one of the effect movable body and the base body,

  The other of the effect movable body and the base body is provided with a conductive portion (for example, conductive portions 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136),

When the slip ring and the conductive portion come into contact with each other, power is supplied from the side of the base body to the side of the effect movable body.
A game stand characterized by
(H2)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (H1),

  The base body is provided with a first communication unit (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1138),

  The effect movable body is provided with a second communication unit (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1144),

The second communication unit is a unit capable of receiving a signal transmitted from the first communication unit.
A game stand characterized by
(H3)

  The gaming machine according to (H1) or (H2) above,

Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of optical wireless communication.
A game stand characterized by
(H4)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (H1) to (H3) above,

Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of laser communication.
A game stand characterized by
(H5)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (H1) to (H4) above,

  The slip ring (for example, the rotation side substrates 1090 and 1140) is provided on the effect movable body,

The conductive part (for example, conductive parts 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) is provided on the base body,
A game stand characterized by
(H6)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (H1) to (H5) above,

  The effect movable body is provided with an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

The second communication unit is a unit capable of receiving an image information signal transmitted from the first communication unit.
A game stand characterized by
Fourth Embodiment

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. The same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the component same as the pachinko machine 100 by the said 2nd Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the chance button 136, an opportunity button 139 is disposed side by side with the chance button 136. The opportunity button 139 has the same function as the chance button 136.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an outline of the effect pattern shown in each example of the present embodiment. FIG. 94 shows an effect pattern in which effects relating to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are executed in each example of the present embodiment. The effects relating to these buttons can be roughly classified into five effect patterns (effect patterns 1 to 5). The presentation related to the button is a presentation related to the operation of the chance button 136 and / or the opportunity button 139. In FIGS. 94 (a) to (d), time passes from left to right.
<Effect pattern 1>

The effect pattern 1 will be described using FIG. 94 (a). The effect pattern 1 is an effect on the chance button 136 and is an effect that does not use the chance button 139. The effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern starting from the button operation waiting display 1 of the display performed when waiting for the pressing of the chance button 136, and the chance during the display of the button operation waiting display 1 on the decorative symbol display device 208 When the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button 136, the button response display 1 of the display performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 1 is a display that does not include the display that is performed when waiting for the pressing of the opportunity button 139. As described above, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 1 to operate the button does not include the opportunity button pressing waiting display.
<Effect pattern 2>

The effect pattern 2 will be described using the upper part of FIG. 94 (b). The effect pattern 2 is effect on the chance button 136. The effect pattern 2 starts from the button operation waiting display 3 of the display performed when waiting for the pressing of the chance button 136 and the operation of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 When the player operates the chance button 136 during the effective period, the button response display 3 of the display performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 3 is a display that does not include a part of the display that is performed when the opportunity button 139 is pressed.
<Effect pattern 3>

  The effect pattern 3 will be described using the lower part of FIG. 94 (b). The effect pattern 3 is an effect on the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 3 is an effect pattern starting from the button operation waiting display 3 of the display performed when waiting for the pressing of the chance button 136, and the chance during the display of the button operation waiting display 3 on the decorative symbol display device 208 When the player operates the chance button 136 during the effective period of operation of the button 136, the display is performed according to the operation of the chance button 136 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is performed when waiting for pressing the chance button 139 When the button response display 4 including the display is displayed and then the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the effective period of operation of the chance button 139 in the display of the button response indication 4, the decoration symbol display 208 is used as the opportunity button 139. A button response display 5 performed in response to pressing is displayed.

When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed and the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 3 to operate the chance button 136, the effect pattern 2 (effect regarding the chance button) or the effect pattern 3 (chance button and good opportunity) One of the presentation patterns of the presentation related to the button is determined. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the effect pattern may be determined in advance, or the effect pattern is determined by the timing or the number of times the player presses the chance button 136, etc. There may be cases. As described above, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 3 to operate the button is the machine button waiting display (or a part of the machine button pressing display). It may or may not be included.
<Effect pattern 4>

The effect pattern 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern 4 is an effect on the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 4 starts from the button operation waiting display 4 of the display performed when waiting for the pressing of the chance button 136, and the operation of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 When the player operates the chance button 136 during the effective period, the display is performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and includes a display performed when waiting for the pressing of the chance button 139 When the player operates the machine button 139 while the response display 4 is displayed and then the player operates the machine button 139 while the button response display 4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol display device is displayed. A button response display 5 performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139 is displayed at 208. As described above, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 4 to operate the button includes the opportunity button press waiting display.
<Effect pattern 5>

  The effect pattern 5 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern 5 is an effect on the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 5 starts from the button operation waiting display 5 of the display performed when waiting for the pressing of the machine button 139, and operates the machine button 139 while the button operation waiting display 5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the machine button 139 during the effective period, the button response display 2 of the display performed in response to the operation of the machine button 139 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in the effect pattern 5, when the effect on the button is started, the button operation waiting display 5 for prompting the user to operate the chance button 139 is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 performed during the symbol variation display, the easiness of the finalized display of the big hit symbol aspect is made different depending on the effect pattern. In the present embodiment, among the effect patterns 1 to 5, the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 4 is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is most easily displayed, whereas only the effect pattern 2 is a line The said symbol fluctuation display is comprised so that the big hit symbol aspect may not be decidedly displayed most. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without performing the effect pattern 3 is configured such that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed without performing the effect pattern 3 is configured such that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed. When the symbol variation display in which the presentation pattern 5 is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the presentation pattern 1 is performed without the presentation pattern 5 is configured such that the big hit symbol is easily displayed, or the presentation pattern 5 is In the case of being configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is displayed with the same probability in the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without being performed and in the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed without performing the effect pattern 1 There is also. In the effect pattern 4 in which it is easy to stop and display the big hit mode, since the chance button 136 must be pressed to press the chance button 139, the chance to operate the chance button 139 of the player is enhanced simultaneously with the chance The desire to operate the button 136 can also be enhanced, and the player's interest can be improved in some cases. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to adopt other than the examples mentioned above. In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 performed during symbol variation display, depending on the effect pattern, the easiness of the confirmation display of the big hit symbol aspect may be configured to be the same.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in the effect patterns 1 to 5, when the chance button 136 is pressed, it is determined that the chance button 136 has been operated. It may be determined that it has been done. For example, when the chance button 136 is configured to be rotatable, it is determined that the chance button 136 has been operated when the player rotates the chance button 136 from the normal state by a predetermined angle or more. It may be configured.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in effect patterns 1 to 5, when opportunity button 139 is pressed, it is determined that opportunity button 139 is operated, but in effect patterns 1 to 5, operations are performed using other operation methods as well. It may be determined that it has been done. For example, when the chance button 139 is configured to be rotatable, it is determined that the chance button 139 is operated when the player turns the chance button 139 from the normal state by a predetermined angle or more. It may be configured. The predetermined angle of the chance button 136 and the predetermined angle of the opportunity button 139 may be the same or different.

As shown in FIG. 94, although the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are used in the effect patterns 1 to 5, other operation means may be used. For example, instead of the chance button 136 or the chance button 139, an operation means using the setting operation unit 137 or the transparent member 118 as a button may be used, or a handle operation means may be used. The start and end times of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the effect patterns 1 to 5 are determined before the button operation waiting display 1 or the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, and the operation valid of the chance button 139 is effective. The start time and the end time of the period are determined before the button operation waiting display 2 or the button response display 4 is displayed. In addition, the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 94 may be executed by the sub display device 1030 instead of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the effects of the decoration symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be performed. It may be performed by both.
Example 1-1

  An effect example of the example 1-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 shows an example of effect in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 94 (a), and shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 95 (a) shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 65, and FIGS. 95 (b) to (f) show the main liquid crystal unit from the game board 1000. 1001 and the movable body 1002 are shown. In FIG. 95 to FIG. 122, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. On the pressed surface of the chance button 136, a character string of "push" is written, and on the pressed surface of the chance button 139, a character string of "pushed" is written. Note that, in FIG. 95 and thereafter, illustration of the movable bodies 1006, 1008, and 1012 is omitted.

  FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. In the state shown in FIG. 95 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is zero.

  FIG. 95 (b) continuing from FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the special view 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special view 1 start opening 230. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 95 and thereafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol is indicated by a downward thick arrow. FIG. 95 (b) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state. The chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 uses an LED as a light source. The opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 uses an LED as a light source. When the chance button 136 is in the normal state, the chance button lamp 138 may not emit light, or the chance button lamp 138 may emit light in a predetermined manner. When the opportunity button 139 is in the normal state, the opportunity button lamp 141 may not emit light, or the opportunity button lamp 141 may emit light in a predetermined mode. The light source of the chance button lamp 138 and the chance button lamp 141 may use light emitting means other than the LED.

  FIG. 95 (c) continuing from FIG. 95 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 95 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 95 (d) continuing from FIG. 95 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 1 of the present example, an image (hereinafter referred to as a “chance button image”) which is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and looks over the chance button 136 may be used. And the image of the aspect where three inverted triangles overlap (hereinafter, may be referred to as “button pressing instruction image”) correspond to each other. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 95 (d), the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. A plurality of lines illustrated above the chance button 136 is in a state where the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode Represents The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A stop display may be made outside the operation effective period.

  In FIG. 95 (e) continuing from FIG. 95 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 (in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed In the display, the character string image of "chance" is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, and the operation of the chance button 136 may be performed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed.

FIG. 95 (f) continuing from FIG. 95 (e) shows a state where the finalized display of the out-of-design pattern has been performed with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of the present example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol form finalized display may be performed.
(Example 1-2)

  An effect example of the example 1-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 shows an example of effect in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 94, and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 96 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 96 (b) continuing from FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 96 (b) onwards, effects (reach effects) by the advance animation are started.

  FIG. 96 (c) continuing from FIG. 96 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of the present example corresponds to the button pressing instruction image in the same manner as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-1, in which the chance button image and the three inverted triangles overlap. In FIG. 96 (c), a state in which the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. The color of the chance button image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same or may be configured to be different. May be Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A stop display may be made outside the operation effective period.

  In FIG. 96 (d) continued from FIG. 96 (c), the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 96 (c) is displayed. The state in which the display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. The button response display 1 of the present example corresponds to the character string image of “chance !!” different from the button response display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-1. If the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, and the operation of the chance button 136 may be effective. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed.

  FIG. 96 (e) continuing from FIG. 96 (d) shows a state where the finalized display of the out-of-design pattern has been performed with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out.

  An effect example of the example 1-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 shows an example in which the special figure variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 96 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. FIGS. 97 (a)-(d) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 96 (a)-(d).

  FIG. 97 (e) continuing from FIG. 97 (d) shows a state in which a confirmation display of the jackpot symbol form has been made with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit.

Thus, in FIGS. 95-97, an example of the effect pattern 1 shown to Fig.94 (a) was shown. In the effect shown in the embodiment 1-1, the character string image of "chance" is displayed as the button response display 1, and in the effect shown in the embodiment 1-2, the character string image of "chance !!" as the button response display 1. Is displayed. In the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the button response display is more than the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance" is displayed without the character string image of "chance !!" being displayed as the button response display 1. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance !!" is displayed as 1 may be configured such that the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol form is more easily performed. Even if the effect pattern 1 is of the same type, it may be possible to improve the player's interest by changing the easiness of the confirmation display of the big hit symbol aspect by the display of the button response display 1. . In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the character string image of "chance" is not displayed as the button response display 1, and the character string image of "chance !!" is displayed rather than the symbol variation display. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance" is displayed as the response display 1 may be configured so that the finalized display of the jackpot symbol aspect may be facilitated, or as the button response display 1, In the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance !!" is displayed without displaying the character string image and in the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance !!" is displayed as button response display 1, You may comprise so that the ease of the decision display of a symbol aspect may become the same.
(Example 1-3)

  An example of effects according to Example 1-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 shows a modification of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 94 (a) and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 98 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 98 (b) continuing from FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 98 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 98 (c) continuing from FIG. 98 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 of the present example corresponds to a button pressing instruction image in which the chance button image and the inverted triangle are overlapped by three in the same display as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-1. In FIG. 98 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 1, the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or different from the normal state). It shows the state of emitting light in a mode. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A stop display may be made outside the operation effective period.

In FIG. 98 (d) continuing from FIG. 98 (c), the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 98 (c) is displayed. After the period ends, the button response display is not displayed, and the effect by the advance animation is ended, and the state in which the confirmation display of the out-of-out pattern mode is displayed is shown. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed may be a finalized display of a big hit symbol aspect.
(Example 1-4)

  An effect example of the example 1-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 shows an example of effects in the above-mentioned effect pattern 1, and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 99 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has been started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 99 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 99 (b) continuing from FIG. 99 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 99 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 99 (c) continuing from FIG. 99 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of the present example is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image and the "press!" The character string image of corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. FIG. 99 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A stop display may be made outside the operation effective period.

  In FIG. 99 (d) continued from FIG. 99 (c), when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 99 (c) is displayed, the player presses the chance button 136 to display the button response display 1 ( As the display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136, a state is shown in which a character string image of "big chance" is displayed substantially at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, and the operation of the chance button 136 may be performed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed. The character of "big chance" as button response display 1 rather than the symbol variation display which displays the character string image of "chance" or "chance !!" without displaying the character string image of "big chance" as button response display 1 The symbol variation display for displaying the row image may be configured so that the big hit symbol form can be easily displayed.

FIG. 99 (e) continuing from FIG. 99 (d) shows a state in which the finalized display of the out-of-design pattern has been performed with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out.
(Example 1-5)

  An effect example of the example 1-5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 shows an example of effect in the above-mentioned effect pattern 1, and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 100 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 100 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 100 (b) continuing from FIG. 100 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 100 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 100 (c) continuing from FIG. 100 (b) shows a state in which button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-4, in which the button pressing instruction image and the "press!" Character string images correspond. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. FIG. 100 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A stop display may be made outside the operation effective period.

  In FIG. 100 (d) continuing from FIG. 100 (c), when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 100 (c) is displayed, the player presses the chance button 136 to display the button response display 1 ( As the display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136, a character string image of "big chance!" Different from the button response display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-4 is a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the state displayed on. When the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, and the operation of the chance button 136 may be performed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed. The character string image of "big chance!" Is displayed as the button response display 1 rather than the symbol variation display that displays the character string image of "big chance" without displaying the character string image of "big chance!" As the button response display 1. In the case of the symbol variation display to be displayed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol aspect may be easily determined and displayed, or the opposite may be made.

FIG. 100 (e) continuing from FIG. 100 (d) shows a state in which the finalized display of the out-of-design pattern is displayed with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of the present example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol form finalized display may be performed.
(Example 1-6)

  An effect example of the example 1-6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 shows a modification of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 94 (a) and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started based on the fact that one gaming ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 101 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 101 (b) continuing from FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 101 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 101 (c) continuing from FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-3, and the button pressing instruction image and the "press!" The character string image of corresponds. FIG. 101 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A stop display may be made outside the operation effective period.

  In FIG. 101 (d) continuing from FIG. 101 (c), the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 101 (c) is displayed. It shows the state immediately before the end of the period.

  In FIG. 101 (e) continuing from FIG. 101 (d), the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 101 (c) is displayed. Even when the period ends, the character string image of the "big chance" same as the button response display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-3 is decorated as the button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136). The state shown in the approximate center of the display area of the symbol display device 208 is shown. In addition, even in the effect of displaying the same "large chance" character string image as the button response display 1, by pressing the chance button 136, the "large chance" character string image is displayed in Example 1-3. In some cases, the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed may be configured so that the big hit symbol aspect may be more easily displayed than the symbol variation display in which the indicated effect is executed, or The opposite may be the case. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol fluctuation display in which the effect shown in the embodiment 1-3 is executed and the symbol fluctuation display in which the effect of the present embodiment is executed, the big hit symbol aspect is displayed with the same ease There may be. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

FIG. 101 (f) continuing from FIG. 101 (e) shows a state where the finalized display of the out-of-design pattern has been performed with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of the present example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol form finalized display may be performed.
(Example 1-7)

  An effect example of the example 1-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 shows a modification of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 94 (a) and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 102 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 102 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are in the normal state.

  FIG. 102 (b) continuing from FIG. 102 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 101 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 102 (c) continuing from FIG. 102 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-3, and the button pressing instruction image and the "press!" The character string image of corresponds. FIG. 102 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A stop display may be made outside the operation effective period.

  In FIG. 102 (d) continuing from FIG. 102 (c), the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 102 (c) is displayed. It shows the state immediately before the end of the period.

  In FIG. 102 (e) continuing from FIG. 102 (d), the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 102 (c) is displayed. Even when the period is over, a character string image of “big chance?” Is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136). It shows the condition that has been The button response display 1 of the character string image of “big chance?” Shown in this example is a button response display not displayed when the player operates the chance button 136 when displaying the button operation waiting display 1. In addition, when the player does not operate the chance button 136 at the time of display of the button operation waiting display 1, the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in the embodiment 1-6 for displaying the character string image of "big chance" is executed Rather, the symbol variation display in which the effect of the present example is executed may be configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be determined and displayed, or vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in the embodiment 1-6 is executed and the symbol variation display in which the effect of the present embodiment is executed, the big hit symbol form is configured to be displayed with the same ease There may be. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  FIG. 102 (f) continuing from FIG. 102 (e) shows a state where the finalized display of the out-of-design pattern has been performed with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of the present example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol form finalized display may be performed.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in the embodiments 1-1 to 1-7, when the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the middle of showing the button operation waiting display 1 There are a button response display 1 displayed on the screen and a button response display 1 displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. The button response display 1 displayed when the chance button 136 is operated and the button response display 1 displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated may have the same display or different displays. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 is shown, the button response display 1 may not be displayed.

In the example of effects shown in the embodiments 1-1 to 1-7, the button response display 1 depends on the timing at which the player's chance button 136 is pressed when the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, and the presence or absence of pressing. , May be configured differently. Even if the effect of the same effect pattern 1 is, depending on the display of the button response display 1, the big hit reliability may be configured to be different. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest. On the other hand, even if what kind of button response display 1 is displayed, as long as it is an effect of the same effect pattern 1, there may be a case where the big hit reliability becomes the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.
(Example 2-1)

  An effect example of the example 2-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 shows an example of effect in the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 94 (b), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 103 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 103 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 103 (b) continuing from FIG. 103 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 103 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 103 (c) continuing from FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, an image (hereinafter referred to as “chance button light emission image”) which is displayed substantially at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and which overlooks the mode in which the chance button 136 is lighted. May correspond to a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap. The chance button emission image is an image not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 103 (c), the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A stop display may be made outside the operation effective period.

  The display color of the chance button light emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the light emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. May be The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the chance button 136 of the chance button emission display 3 rather than the symbol variation display in which the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display of different luminescent colors may be configured to facilitate the display of the big hit symbol, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button light emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the light emission color of the chance button 136 are the same, and the display color of the chance button light emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the chance button 136 In the symbol variation display in which the luminescent color is different, the easiness of the finalized display of the big hit symbol aspect may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  In FIG. 103 (d) continuing from FIG. 103 (c), the player enters the chance button 136 during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 103 (c) is displayed. When pressed, the beginning of the button response display 3 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display of the button response display 3 in this example corresponds to the character string image of “further chance” and an image (hereinafter, may be referred to as “a machine button image”) in which the opportunity button 139 moving and displayed is displayed. At the start of the display of the button response display 3, the chance button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 103 (e) continuing from FIG. 103 (d) shows a state where the middle part of the button response display 3 is displayed. In FIG. 103 (e), an opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 passes the center of the display area, moves to the left end, and frames out. It is erased by displaying on. The arrow shown in FIG. 103 (e) represents the direction in which the chance button image has moved and the locus thereof, but the button response display 3 may actually be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 103 (f) continuing from FIG. 103 (e) shows a state in which the end of the button response display 3 is displayed. As the button response display 3, a state is shown in which a character string image of “sorry” is displayed at substantially the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 103 (g) continuing from FIG. 103 (f) shows a state in which the display of the button response display 3 is ended and the finalized display of the out-of-design pattern is displayed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out.

  As described above, the button response display 3 of this example is configured not to be displayed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139.

  An effect example of the example 2-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 shows an example in which the special view variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 103 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (f) show the same effect state as FIGS. 103 (a) to 103 (f).

  In FIG. 104 (g) continuing from FIG. 104 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is ended, and the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” of the symbol design mode is shifted to the left middle symbol display area The temporary stop display is shown.

FIG. 104 (h) continuing from FIG. 104 (g) shows the state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed again and the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol form is displayed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. In addition, after the resurrection effect is performed in FIG. 104 (g) or later, the variation display of the decorative symbol may be performed.
(Example 2-2)

  An effect example of the example 2-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 shows a modification of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 94 (a) and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 2-1.

  FIG. 105 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 105 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are in the normal state.

  FIG. 105 (b) continuing from FIG. 105 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From (b) onward in FIG. 105, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 105 (c) continued from FIG. 105 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 3 in the present example corresponds to a button pressing instruction image in which the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the three inverted triangles overlap. An image in which the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light is an image not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 105 (c), during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A stop display may be made outside the operation effective period.

  The display color of the chance button light emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the light emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. May be The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the chance button 136 of the chance button emission display 3 rather than the symbol variation display in which the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display of different luminescent colors may be configured to facilitate the display of the big hit symbol, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button light emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the light emission color of the chance button 136 are the same, and the display color of the chance button light emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the chance button 136 In the symbol variation display in which the luminescent color is different, the easiness of the finalized display of the big hit symbol aspect may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  FIG. 105 (d) continuing from FIG. 105 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 105 (e) continuing from FIG. 105 (d), immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed. Indicates the state of

  In FIG. 105 (f) continuing from FIG. 105 (e), the button operation waiting display 3 is erased when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is ended, and a character string image of “sorry” is displayed as the button response display 3. Shows the condition. In this example, since it takes time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 3 in comparison with the embodiment 2-1, with the opening of the button response display 3 shown in the embodiment 2-2 and It is configured not to display the character string image of "more chances" and the chance button image on the display of the middle stage. In addition, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button response display 3 of the character string image of "sorry" may not be displayed.

  FIG. 105 (g) continuing from FIG. 105 (f) shows a state in which the display of the button response display 3 is ended and the confirmation display of the out-of-design pattern mode is performed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out.

  An effect example of the example 2-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 shows an example in which the special view variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 105 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (f) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (f).

  In FIG. 106 (g) continuing from FIG. 106 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is ended, and the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” of the symbol pattern is shifted to the left middle symbol display region 208a-208c. The temporary stop display is shown.

  FIG. 106 (h) continuing from FIG. 106 (g) shows the state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed again and the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol form is displayed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. In addition, after the resurrection effect is performed in FIG. 106 (g) or later, the variation display of the decorative symbol may be performed.

In the effects shown in the embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, the button response display 3 depends on the timing of pressing the chance button 136 of the player when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed or the presence or absence of the pressing. It may be configured differently. Even in the effect of the same effect pattern 2, depending on the display of the button response display 3, it may be configured to be different in the big hit reliability. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest. On the other hand, the jackpot reliability may be configured to be the same as long as the effect of the same effect pattern 2 is displayed no matter what button response display 3 is displayed. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.
Example 3-1

  An effect example of the example 3-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 shows an example of effect in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 94 (b), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started based on the fact that one gaming ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 107 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the chance button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 107 (b) continuing from FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From (b) onward in FIG. 107, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 107 (c) continued from FIG. 107 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles and a chance button emission image, which is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and which overlooks the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light The button pressing instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. The chance button emission image is an image not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 107 (c), the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. Note that the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A stop display may be made outside the operation effective period.

  The display color of the chance button light emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the light emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. May be The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the chance button 136 of the chance button emission display 3 rather than the symbol variation display in which the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display of different luminescent colors may be configured to facilitate the display of the big hit symbol, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button light emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the light emission color of the chance button 136 are the same, and the display color of the chance button light emission image as the button operation wait display 3 and the chance button 136 In the symbol variation display in which the luminescent color is different, the easiness of the finalized display of the big hit symbol aspect may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  In FIG. 107 (d) continued from FIG. 107 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 107 (c), button response display 4 (chance button 136 The initial stage of the display (displayed in response to pressing) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 4 in this example corresponds to the character string image of "More chance!". The character string image of “further chance” is an image not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. In the present example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 107 (e) continued from FIG. 107 (d) shows a state in which the middle part of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of this example, after the character string image of “More chance !!” is displayed, the opportunity button image with the opportunity button 139 turned over is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 As shown in the state shown.

  FIG. 107 (f) continuing from FIG. 107 (e) shows a state in which the end of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 107 (f), the machine button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "More chance !!" A state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlap is displayed is displayed. The button pressing instruction image is an image not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. The chance button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the chance button 139 is started. The stop display of the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the chance button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 107 (f), the state where the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. Represents The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case. Note that the machine button image and the button pressing instruction image move (for example, repeat movement display in the vertical and horizontal directions) during the operation valid period of the machine button 139 are displayed, and the operation valid period of the machine button 139 It may be stopped and displayed outside.

  The display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the light emission color of the opportunity button 139 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. Good. Rather than the symbol variation display in which the display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the light emission color of the opportunity button 139 are the same, the display color of the opportunity button image as the button and the response display 4 and the light emission color of the opportunity button 139 The different symbol variation display may be configured to easily display the big hit symbol, or the opposite may be made.

  In FIG. 107 (g) continued from FIG. 107 (f), the button response display 5 is displayed when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 107 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a state in which a character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

FIG. 107 (h) continuing from FIG. 107 (g) shows a state in which the finalized display of the out-of-design pattern has been performed along with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In addition, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 5, there may be a case where the big hit symbol form finalized display may be performed.
(Example 3-2)

  An effect example of the example 3-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 shows an example in which the special view variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 107 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (f) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (f).

  In FIG. 108 (g) continued from FIG. 108 (f), the button response display 5 is displayed by pressing the machine button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 108 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a state is shown in which a character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 108 (h) continuing from FIG. 108 (g) shows a state in which a confirmation display of the jackpot symbol form has been made with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. Even if a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 5, the finalized display of the missing symbol form may be displayed.

In the symbol variation display in which the effect of the present embodiment is performed, the character string image of "big hit !?" is not displayed as the button response display 5, and the character string image of "sorry" is displayed rather than the symbol variation display. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed as the response display 5 is configured so that the big hit design aspect is displayed more easily. In addition, when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed as the button response display 5, and when the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed, the ease of confirmation display of the big hit design pattern is the same. It may be configured to be
(Example 3-3)

  An effect example of the example 3-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 shows an example of effect in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 94 (b), and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 109 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 109 (b) continuing from FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 109 (b) onwards, effects (reach effects) by the advance animation are started.

  FIG. 109 (c) continued from FIG. 109 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles and a chance button emission image, which is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and which overlooks the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light The button pressing instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 109 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3 Represents the state of The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case.

  FIG. 109 (d) continued from FIG. 109 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 109 (c) is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 109 (e) continued from FIG. 109 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 109 (c) and (d) is displayed. A state in which the button response display 4 shown in 107 (e) is displayed is shown. In this example, since it takes more time for the player to press the chance button 136 after the button operation waiting display 3 starts being displayed than in the case of Example 3-1, as shown in FIG. 107 (d). The middle part of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 107 (e) is displayed without displaying the first part of the button response display 4 shown. In addition, according to the time required from the display start of the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4, all of the button response display 4 shown in the embodiment 3-1 from the beginning to the end of the button response display In some cases, the display may be displayed so as to reproduce at double speed.

  FIG. 109 (f) continued from FIG. 109 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 107 (f) is displayed. In FIG. 109 (f), the machine button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "More chance !!" A state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlap is displayed is displayed. The chance button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that it is the operation valid period of the chance button 139. The stop display of the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the chance button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 109 (f), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. Represents The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case.

  In FIG. 109 (g) continued from FIG. 109 (f), the button response display 5 is displayed by pressing the machine button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 109 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a state in which a character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

FIG. 109 (h) continuing from FIG. 109 (g) shows a state where the finalized display of the out-of-design pattern has been performed with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In addition, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 5, there may be a case where the big hit symbol form finalized display may be performed.
Example 3-4

  An effect example of the example 3-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 shows an example of effect in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 94 (b), and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started based on the fact that one gaming ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 110 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 110 (b) continuing from FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From (b) onward in FIG. 110, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 110 (c) continuing from FIG. 110 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles and a chance button emission image, which is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and which overlooks the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light The button pressing instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 110C, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3. Represents the state of The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case.

  FIG. 110 (d) continuing from FIG. 110 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 110 (c) is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 110 (e) continuing from FIG. 110 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 110 (c) and (d) is displayed. The state which displayed the beginning of the button response display 4 shown to 107 (d) on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 is shown. In the present example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 110 (f) continuing from FIG. 110 (e) shows a state in which the end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 107 (f) is displayed and the opportunity button 139 reports that it is an operation valid period. There is. In this example, since it takes more time for the player to press the chance button 136 after the button operation waiting display 3 starts being displayed than in the case of Example 3-1, as shown in FIG. 107 (e). The middle part of the button response display 4 shown is not displayed, and the last part of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 107 (f) is displayed. In addition, according to the time required from the display start of the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4, all of the button response display 4 shown in the embodiment 3-1 from the beginning to the end of the button response display In some cases, the display may be displayed so as to reproduce at double speed. In FIG. 110 (f), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. Represents The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case.

  In FIG. 110 (g) continued from FIG. 110 (f), the button response display 5 is displayed by pressing the machine button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 110 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a state is shown in which a character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 110 (h) continuing from FIG. 110 (g) shows a state in which the big hit design is displayed with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. Even if a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 5, the finalized display of the missing symbol form may be displayed.
(Example 3-5)

  An effect example of the example 3-5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 94 (b) and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 111 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 111 (b) continuing from FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From (b) onward in FIG. 107, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 111 (c) continuing from FIG. 111 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles and a chance button emission image, which is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and which overlooks the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light The button pressing instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 111 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3 Represents the state of The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case.

  FIG. 111 (d) continuing from FIG. 111 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 111 (c) is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 111 (e) continued from FIG. 111 (d), the player operates the chance button 136 without pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 111 (f) is displayed. It shows the state immediately before the end of the effective period.

  FIG. 111 (f) continuing from FIG. 111 (e) erases the button operation waiting display 3 when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is finished, and the end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 107 (f) Indicates a state where is displayed. In this example, since the chance button 136 was not operated during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, in the opening of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 107 (d) and in FIG. 107 (e) shown in Example 3-1. The middle of the button response display 4 shown is not displayed, and the end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 107 (f) is displayed. By displaying the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 107 (f), it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is in the operation valid period. In FIG. 111 (f), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. Represents The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case. In the case where the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, all the button response displays 5 shown in FIGS. 107 (d) to 107 (f) may not be displayed.

  In FIG. 111 (g) continuing from FIG. 111 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 111 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response indication 5 ( As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a state is shown in which a character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 111 (h) continuing from FIG. 111 (g) shows a state in which the big hit design is displayed with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. Even if a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 5, the finalized display of the missing symbol form may be displayed.
(Example 3-6)

  An effect example of the example 3-6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 shows an example of the effect of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 94 (b), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 112 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 112 (b) continuing from FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From (b) onward in FIG. 107, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 112 (c) continued from FIG. 112 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles and a chance button emission image, which is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and which overlooks the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light The button pressing instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 112C, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3. Represents the state of The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case.

  In FIG. 112 (d) continuing from FIG. 112 (c), the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 112 (c) is displayed. As an early stage of the display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136, the character string image of "Further chance !!" is displayed in the central part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 112 (e) continuing from FIG. 112 (d) shows a state in which the end of the button response display 4 is displayed, and shows a state in which it is notified that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is available. In FIG. 112 (e), the image of "Further chance !!" displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased, and a button pressing instruction image of an aspect in which three inverted triangles overlap is displayed. An image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “probable button projecting image”) showing the decorative symbol display device 208 displayed and the state in which the chance button 139 is protruded is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 it's shown. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the upper image from the middle of the chance button protrusion image, and the sub display device 1030 displays the whole image of the chance button protrusion image by displaying the image below the middle portion of the chance button protrusion image. it's shown. In FIG. 112 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139, and the normal state It represents a more prominent state. The player operates the opportunity button 139 by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 to emit light (or emit light in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner and to be projected more than the normal state. There are times when you can know things. In addition, it is easier to stop and display the big hit design when the symbol variation display in which the machine button 139 protrudes during display of the button response display 4 than in the symbol variation display in which the machine button 139 does not protrude while displaying the button response display 4 There may be cases where it is configured, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest. On the other hand, the symbol variation display in which the chance button 139 does not protrude during display of the button response display 4 and the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 protrudes during display of the button response display 4 is the ease of stop display of the big hit symbol aspect. May be configured to be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

  In FIG. 112 (f) continuing from FIG. 112 (e), the button response display 5 is displayed by pressing the machine button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 112 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a state in which a character string image of "super heat !!!" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In addition, the character string image of "super heat up !!!" is not displayed as button response display 5, and the character string image of "sorry" or "big hit !?" The symbol variation display in which the character string image of "super heat !!!" is displayed is configured such that the big hit symbol form is more easily stopped and displayed. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

FIG. 112 (g) continuing from FIG. 112 (f) shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol form is displayed together with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stop-displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that it is a big hit as a result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In addition, even when the character string image of "super heat up !!!" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 5, even if there is a case where the stop display of the detached symbol form may be displayed. Good.
Example 3-7

  An effect example of the example 3-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 94 (b) and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 113 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started based on the fact that one gaming ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 113 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 113 (b) continuing from FIG. 113 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From (b) onward in FIG. 107, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 113 (c) continuing from FIG. 113 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles and a chance button emission image, which is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and which overlooks the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light The button pressing instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c are arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 113 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3 Represents the state of The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case.

  In FIG. 113 (d) continued from FIG. 113 (c), when the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 113 (c) is displayed, the player presses the chance button 136 to display the button response display 4 As an early stage of the display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136, the character string image of "Further chance !!" is displayed in the central part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 113 (e) continuing from FIG. 113 (d) shows a state where the middle part of the button response display 4 is displayed. In (e) of FIG. 113, the image of “Further chance !!” displayed in the central part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased, and a button pressing instruction image of three inverted triangles is displayed. An image of a chance button projecting image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and showing the projecting state of the chance button 139 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the upper image from the middle of the chance button protrusion image, and the sub display device 1030 displays the whole image of the chance button protrusion image by displaying the image below the middle portion of the chance button protrusion image. it's shown. In FIG. 113 (e), although the opportunity button 139 protrudes from the normal state, since the opportunity button lamp 141 is in the normal state, it is not the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139.

  FIG. 113 (f) continuing from FIG. 113 (e) shows a state in which the end of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 113 (f), an opportunity button image with the opportunity button 139 turned back to the normal state is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the opportunity button 139 returns from the projecting state to the normal state. .

  FIG. 113 (g) continuing from FIG. 113 (f) erases the button response display 4 without the start of the operation valid period of the machine button 139 and displays the character string image of “sorry” as the button response display 5 Shows the condition.

  FIG. 113 (h) continuing from FIG. 113 (g) shows a state where the stop display of the out-of-design pattern is displayed along with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In addition, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 5, the stop display of the jackpot symbol may be displayed.

In the effect examples shown in the embodiments 3-1 to 3-7, the button response display 4 is based on the timing when the player's chance button 136 is pressed when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, and the presence or absence of the press. The button response display 5 is configured to be different depending on the timing at which the player presses the machine button 139 when the button response display 4 is displayed, and the presence or absence of the pressing. May be Even in the effect of the same effect pattern 3, depending on the display of the button response display 4 or the button response display 5, the big hit reliability may be configured to be different. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest. On the other hand, the jackpot reliability may be configured to be the same as long as it is the same effect pattern 3 regardless of what button response display 4 or button response display 5 is displayed. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.
Example 4-1

  An effect example of the example 4-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 shows an example of the effect of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 94 (c), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 114 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the chance button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 114 (b) continuing from FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From (b) onward in FIG. 114, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 114 (c) continuing from FIG. 114 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 4 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. By the button operation waiting display 4 being displayed, it is informed that it is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the button operation waiting display 4 of the present example, an image (hereinafter referred to as “chance button special”) showing the chance button 136 emitting light in a special mode displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 An image in a mode in which three inverted triangles displayed in a special color overlap with each other (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “button pressing special instruction image”) corresponds to “a light emission image”. . The chance button special light emitting image and the button pressing special instruction image are images which are not displayed in the button operation waiting displays 1 to 3, and by displaying these images, the button response display is always displayed after the button operation waiting display 4 4 will be displayed. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 114 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 4. Represents the state of The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. The luminescent color of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the chance button special luminescent image displayed on the button operation waiting display 4.

  In FIG. 114 (d) continued from FIG. 114 (c), the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 114 (c) is displayed. As an early stage (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136), a character string image of "Further chance !!" is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 114 (e) continuing from FIG. 114 (d) is displayed as the middle of the button response display 4 so that an opportunity button image with the opportunity button 139 turned over is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the condition that has been

  FIG. 114 (f) continuing from FIG. 114 (e) shows a state in which the end of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 114 (f), the machine button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "More chance !!" A state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlap is displayed is displayed. The chance button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that it is the operation valid period of the chance button 139. In FIG. 114 (f), the state where the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. Represents The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case. In addition, as the button response display 4, an image (hereinafter, may be referred to as an "appropriate button special light emission image") over the light of the chance button 139 emitting light in a special mode and a button pressed shown in FIG. A special instruction image may be displayed.

  In FIG. 114 (g) continued from FIG. 114 (f), the button response display 5 is displayed when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 114 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a state in which a character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

  FIG. 114 (h) continuing from FIG. 114 (g) ends the display of the button response display 4, and the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” of the symbol pattern aspect is shifted to the left middle symbol display area 208a-208c. The temporary stop display is shown.

FIG. 114 (u) continuing from FIG. 114 (h) shows the state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed again and the stop display of the big hit symbol form is performed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. In addition, after the resurrection effect is performed in FIG. 114 (h) or later, the variation display of the decorative symbol may be performed.
(Example 4-2)

  An effect example of the example 4-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 shows an example of the effect of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 94 (c), and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 4-1.

  FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started based on the fact that one gaming ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 115 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 115 (b) continuing from FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 115 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  FIG. 115 (c) continuing from FIG. 115 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 4 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. By the button operation waiting display 4 being displayed, it is informed that it is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the button operation waiting display 4 of this example, the chance button special light emission image and the special button image are displayed over the chance button 136 emitting light in the special mode displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 The button pressing special instruction image corresponds to a mode in which three inverted triangles displayed in color overlap. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c may be arranged to be displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. It may be. In FIG. 114 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode in association with the display of the button operation waiting display 3. Represents the state of The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode of the chance button special light emission image displayed on the button operation waiting display 4.

  In FIG. 115 (d) continuing from FIG. 115 (c), the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 115 (c) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136, a character string image of “further chance !!” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as compared with Example 4-1, the time from when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed until the player presses the chance button 136 is longer.

  In FIG. 115 (e) following FIG. 115 (d), after displaying the character string image of “More chance !!” in the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 115 (d), a new button response display 4 is displayed. A state in which an opportunity button image with the opportunity button 139 displayed being moved and displayed is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

  FIG. 115 (f) continuing from FIG. 115 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 115 (f), the machine button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "More chance !!" A state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlap is displayed is displayed. The button pressing instruction image is an image not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. The chance button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the chance button 139 is reached. The stop display of the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the chance button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 115 (f), the state where the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. Represents The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case. In addition, as the button response display 4, an image (hereinafter, may be referred to as an "appropriate button special light emission image") over the light of the chance button 139 emitting light in a special mode and a button pressed shown in FIG. A special instruction image may be displayed.

  In FIG. 115 (g) continuing from FIG. 115 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 115 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response indication 5 ( As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a state is shown in which a character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as compared with Example 4-1, since the time taken for the player to press the opportunity button 139 after the button response display 4 is displayed is longer, the button response is started after the symbol variation display is started. The time until the display 5 is displayed is long.

  FIG. 115 (h) continuing from FIG. 115 (g) shows the state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed again and the stop display of the big hit symbol form is performed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit.

  In this example, since the time from the button response display 5 to the end of the symbol variation display is shorter than in Example 4-1, the effect of temporarily stopping the off pattern shown in FIG. 114 (h) is performed. It is configured not to. When the player presses the chance button 136 immediately before the end of the effective period of the chance button 136 after the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the display of the beginning or middle of the button response display 4 is displayed. The effect of temporarily stopping the off-set symbol shown in FIG. 114 (h) may be performed.

In the effect examples shown in the embodiments 4-1 and 4-2, the button response display 4 depends on the timing when the player's chance button 136 is pressed when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, and the presence or absence of the press. When configured differently, the button response display 5 is configured to be different depending on the timing at which the player presses the machine button 139 when displaying the button response display 4 or the presence or absence of the pressing. There is a case. Even in the effect of the same effect pattern 4, depending on the display of the button response display 4 or the button response display 5, the big hit reliability may be configured to be different. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest. On the other hand, even if what kind of button response display 4 or button response display 5 is displayed, in the case of the same effect pattern 4, there may be a case where the big hit reliability becomes the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.
(Example 5-1)

  An example of effects in Example 5-1 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 116 shows an example of the effect of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 94 (d), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 116 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 116 (b) continuing from FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 116 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  116 (c) continuing from FIG. 116 (b) shows the chance button emission displayed in the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the beginning of the button operation waiting display 2 A state is shown in which a button pressing instruction image of an aspect in which an image and three inverted triangles overlap is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image of the aspect in which the chance button luminescent image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains normal.

  FIG. 116 (d) continuing from FIG. 116 (c) erases the button pressing instruction image in the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle of the button operation waiting display 2 and displays the chance button light emission image on the decorative symbol display device 208 A state where an opportunity button image is displayed to be frame-in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in parallel to the movement display at the left end of the area and the deletion so as to frame out. The left arrow shown in the figure represents the direction of movement display of the chance button emission image and the locus thereof, and the right arrow shown in the drawing represents the movement display direction of the chance button emission image and the locus thereof However, the display may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button waiting display 2.

  FIG. 116 (e) continued from FIG. 116 (d) is a button press of an aspect in which three good triangles and an inverted triangle overlap the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the end of button operation waiting display 2 It shows a state in which the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 116 (e), the state where the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. Represents The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case. It should be noted that as the button operation waiting display 2, an image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "a machine button special light emitting image") obtained by looking over the machine button 139 emitting light in a special mode and a button shown in FIG. The pressed special instruction image may be displayed.

  FIG. 116 (f) continuing from FIG. 116 (e) moves upward from the position at which the button pressing instruction image in the mode in which the chance button image and the three inverted triangles overlap is displayed in FIG. 116 (e) Shows the condition. The chance button image is moved to a more prominent position to prompt the operation of the chance button.

  In FIG. 116 (g) continued from FIG. 116 (f), when the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 116 (f) is displayed, the player presses the machine button 139 to display the button response display 2 (FIG. 116 (f)). As a display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 139, the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 116 (g) continuing from FIG. 116 (f) shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-design pattern is displayed along with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In addition, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, the stop display of the jackpot symbol form may be performed.
(Example 5-2)

  An example of effect of Example 5-2 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 117 shows an example of the effect of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 94 (d), and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 117 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 117 (b) continuing from FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 116 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  117 (c) continuing from FIG. 117 (b) shows the chance button emission displayed in the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the beginning of the button operation waiting display 2 A state is shown in which a button pressing instruction image of an aspect in which an image and three inverted triangles overlap is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image of the aspect in which the chance button luminescent image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains normal.

  In FIG. 117 (d) continuing from FIG. 117 (c), the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decoration symbol display device 208 as the middle of the button operation waiting display 2, and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208. A state where an opportunity button image is displayed to be frame-in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in parallel to the movement display at the left end of the area and the deletion so as to frame out. The left arrow shown in the figure represents the direction of movement display of the chance button emission image and the locus thereof, and the right arrow shown in the drawing represents the movement display direction of the chance button emission image and the locus thereof However, the display may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  In FIG. 117 (e) continued from FIG. 117 (d), a button depression in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap with the machine button image in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the final stage of button operation waiting display 2 It shows a state in which the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 117 (e), the state where the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. Represents The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case. It should be noted that even if there is a case where the special button special light emission image shown in FIG. 114 (c) and the special button special light emission image shown in FIG. 114 (c) are displayed as the button operation waiting display 2 Good.

  FIG. 117 (f) continuing from FIG. 117 (e) moves upward from the position where the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlapped with the chance button image was displayed in FIG. 117 (e) Shows the condition. The chance button image is moved to a more prominent position to prompt the operation of the chance button.

  In FIG. 117 (g) continued from FIG. 117 (f), when the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 117 (f) is displayed, the player presses the machine button 139 to display the button response display 2 (FIG. The character string image of "big hit?" Is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as an early stage of the display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 139).

  117 (h) continuing from FIG. 117 (g) is a middle of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a middle of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the machine button 139). The character string image of "is displayed.

  In FIG. 117 (i) continuing from FIG. 117 (h), as the final stage of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the machine button 139), “big hit in the central part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208! The character string image of "!" Is displayed. In addition, the character string images of “big hit ?!” and “big hit? !!” displayed in the middle and end of the button response display 2 are displayed when the opportunity button 139 is held longer than a predetermined time or a predetermined time It may be configured to be displayed when pressed a predetermined number of times or more.

  FIG. 117 (j) continuing from FIG. 117 (i) shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol form is displayed together with the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. Even when a character string image of "big hit?", "Big hit ?!" or "big hit? !!" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, the symbol pattern is stopped in the off state. It may be displayed.

The button response display 2 in this example displays “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, and “big hit? !!” in this order to gradually increase the player's sense of expectation of the jackpot. There is a possibility. In addition, the big hit reliability may be displayed by the number of "!". For example, when "big hit?" And "big hit ?!" are displayed in this order as the button response display 2 ("big hit? !!" is not displayed), "big hit?", "Big hit ?!""Big hit? !!", "Big hit? !!!" may be displayed in this order.
Example 5-3

  An effect example of the example 5-3 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 shows a modification of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 94 (d) and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

  FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 118 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the chance button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 118 (b) continuing from FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 116 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  In FIG. 118 (c) continued from FIG. 118 (b), the chance button light emission displayed in the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the beginning of the button operation waiting display 2 A state is shown in which a button pressing instruction image of an aspect in which an image and three inverted triangles overlap is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image of the aspect in which the chance button luminescent image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains normal.

  In FIG. 118 (d) continuing from FIG. 118 (c), the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle of the button operation waiting display 2, and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state where an opportunity button image is displayed to be frame-in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in parallel to the movement display at the left end of the area and the deletion so as to frame out. The left arrow shown in the figure represents the direction of movement display of the chance button emission image and the locus thereof, and the right arrow shown in the drawing represents the movement display direction of the chance button emission image and the locus thereof However, the display may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  In FIG. 118 (e) continued from FIG. 118 (d), a button depression in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap with the machine button image in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the end of button operation waiting display 2 It shows a state in which the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 118 (e), the state where the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. Represents The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case. It should be noted that even if there is a case where the special button special light emission image shown in FIG. 114 (c) and the special button special light emission image shown in FIG. 114 (c) are displayed as the button operation waiting display 2 Good.

  In FIG. 118 (f) continuing from FIG. 118 (e), the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles overlap is moved upward from the position where it was displayed in FIG. 118 (e) Shows the condition. The chance button image is moved to a more prominent position to prompt the operation of the chance button.

  FIG. 118 (g) continued from FIG. 118 (f) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 118 (f) is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 118 (h) continuing from FIG. 118 (g), the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 118 (f) is continuously displayed, and shows a state immediately before the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. There is.

  FIG. 118 (i) continued from FIG. 118 (h) is a button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the machine button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the machine button 139 in Example 5-1. A character string image of “big hit? !!” at the end of the button response display 2 shown is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, since it takes more time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2 than in Example 5-1, with the opening of the button response display 2 shown in Example 5-2. It is configured not to display the middle stage.

FIG. 117 (j) continuing from FIG. 118 (i) shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol form is displayed together with the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. Even when a character string image of “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, or “big hit? !!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, A stop indication may be made.
Example 5-4

  An effect example of the example 5-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 shows a modification of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 94 (d) and shows the effect state in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 119 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 119 (b) continuing from FIG. 119 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 116 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the advance animation is started.

  119 (c) continuing from FIG. 119 (b) shows the chance button emission displayed in the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the beginning of the button operation waiting display 2 A state is shown in which a button pressing instruction image of an aspect in which an image and three inverted triangles overlap is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image of the aspect in which the chance button luminescent image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains normal.

  In FIG. 119 (d) continuing from FIG. 119 (c), the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle of the button operation waiting display 2, and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state where an opportunity button image is displayed to be frame-in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in parallel to the movement display at the left end of the area and the deletion so as to frame out. The left arrow shown in the figure represents the direction of movement display of the chance button emission image and the locus thereof, and the right arrow shown in the drawing represents the movement display direction of the chance button emission image and the locus thereof However, the display may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  In FIG. 119 (e) continued from FIG. 119 (d), a button depression in a mode in which three inverted triangles with an opportunity button image overlap the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the end of button operation waiting display 2 It shows a state in which the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 119 (e), a state in which the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. Represents The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case. It should be noted that even if there is a case where the special button special light emission image shown in FIG. 114 (c) and the special button special light emission image shown in FIG. 114 (c) are displayed as the button operation waiting display 2 Good.

  119 (f) continuing from FIG. 119 (e) moves upward from the position where the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlapped with the chance button image was displayed in FIG. 119 (e) Shows the condition. The chance button image is moved to a more prominent position to prompt the operation of the chance button.

  FIG. 119 (g) continuing from FIG. 119 (f) continuously displays the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 119 (f) and shows a state immediately before the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. There is.

  119 (h) continued from FIG. 119 (g) is a button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the machine button 139) in the embodiment 5-1 with the end of the operation valid period of the machine button 139. A character string image of “big hit ?!” in the early stage of the button response display 2 is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  119 (i) continued from FIG. 119 (h) is a button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the machine button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the machine button 139 in Example 5-1. A character string image of “big hit? !!” at the end of the button response display 2 shown is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, since it takes more time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2 than in the example 5-1, the middle of the button response display 2 shown in the example 5-2 is used. It is thinned out so as not to be displayed. In addition, according to the time required from the start of the symbol variation display until the button response display 2 is displayed, all the display from the beginning to the end of the button response display 2 shown in Example 5-1 are doubled It may be displayed to reproduce.

  FIG. 119 (j) continuing from FIG. 119 (i) shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol aspect is performed with the end of the effect by the advance animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit. Even when a character string image of "big hit?", "Big hit ?!" or "big hit? !!" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, the symbol pattern is stopped in the off state. It may be displayed.

In the example of effects shown in the embodiments 5-1 to 5-4, the button response display 2 depends on the timing at which the player presses the machine button 139 when the button operation waiting display 2 is displayed, and the presence or absence of the depression. , May be configured differently. Even in the effect of the same effect pattern 2, depending on the display of the button response display 2, it may be configured to be different in the big hit reliability. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest. On the other hand, the jackpot reliability may be configured to be the same as long as the effect of the same effect pattern 2 regardless of what button response display 2 is displayed. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.
Example 6-1

  An effect example of the example 6-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 shows a modification of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 94 (b) and shows the effect state in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 94 (b) correspond to the hold icon. In and after FIG. 120, the movable body 1002 is located at a position not overlapping with the main liquid crystal unit 1001 as viewed from the player.

  FIG. 120 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. A white circular holding icon b1 and a white circular holding icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right graphic display area 208a to 208c. FIG. 120 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 120 (b) continuing from FIG. 120 (a) shows a state in which one of the reservations in Special Figure 1 is digested and symbol variation display is started. The change icon of the decoration pattern is displayed when the moving animation between the holding and changing icons moves to the left with the holding icon b1 becoming a changing icon a1 and the moving animation of the holding icon moves to the left with the holding icon b2 It is started. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 120 (c) continuing from FIG. 120 (b) shows the default white circular reserved icon b3 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 during execution of the symbol variation display. It shows a state of increasing display. A state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 120 (d) following FIG. 120 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 120 (c) is being executed.

  In FIG. 120 (e) continuing from FIG. 120 (d), one game ball is inserted in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 while executing the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 120 (d) In this state, the hold icon b4 is displayed on an increased basis. In the present example, a hold icon (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “chance button hold icon”) of an image obtained by turning over the chance button 136 corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3. In FIG. 120 (e), since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 120 (f) following FIG. 120 (e) shows a state in which the stop display of the missing symbol form is displayed and the fluctuation icon a1 is deleted. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In FIG. 120 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  In Fig. 120 (g) continuing from Fig. 120 (f), the suspension of Special Figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the chance button holding icon is displayed as button operation waiting display 3 Showing the status. An animation of moving between pending and changing icons with the pending icon b2 becoming a fluctuating icon a2 and a moving animation of a pending icon with a pending icon b3 and b4 moving to the left are displayed, and a variation display of a decorative symbol The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 120 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal mode). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case.

  In FIG. 120 (h) continuing from FIG. 120 (g), the player continues to display the decorative symbol change display shown in FIG. By pressing the chance button 136, a state is shown in which the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 3. The button response display 3 in this example corresponds to a hold icon (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "chance button light emission hold icon") of an image in which the chance button 136 lighted in a mode different from the normal state is displayed. ing.

  In FIG. 120 (i) continuing from FIG. 120 (h), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 120 (i) shows a state in which the chance button emission suspension icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 120 (h).

  FIG. 120 (j) following FIG. 120 (i) shows a state in which the stop display of the missing symbol form is displayed and the fluctuation icon a1 is deleted. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In FIG. 120 (j), the chance button emission suspension icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 3.

  In FIG. 120 (k) continuing from FIG. 120 (j), the suspension of Special Figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the chance button emission suspension icon b4 is displayed as button response display 3 It shows the state of doing. The moving icon a3 moves to the left as the holding icon b3 moves to the left, and the moving animation between the holding and moving icons and the moving animation to the holding icon moving the left icon b4 to the left are displayed, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the chance button 136 operation effective period is started. FIG. 120 (k) shows that the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal mode). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. As described above, in this example, the button response display 3 is a display including a display that is performed when waiting for the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 120 (l) continuing from FIG. 120 (k), while the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 120 (k) is being displayed continuously, the player performs the operation valid period of the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, a state is shown in which the chance button light emission suspension icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 is changed to the black circular suspension icon b4 of the previewing notice mode. In this example, the symbol variation display started with the black circle retention icon being digested and started is a big hit than the symbol variation display started with the white circle retention icon being digested and started. The symbol form is configured to be easily stopped and displayed. Note that the chance button light emission holding icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 may be changed to a white circular holding icon, a white diamond holding icon, or another holding icon.

  In FIG. 120 (m) continuing from FIG. 120 (l), “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

  FIG. 120 (n) continuing from FIG. 120 (m) shows a state in which the stop display of the missing symbol form is displayed and the fluctuation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out.

  In FIG. 120 (o) continuing from FIG. 120 (n), one reserve of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, the variation display of the decoration symbol is started, and the black circular retention icon b4 The state of moving animation between the holding and changing icons moving to the left as a black circular changing icon a4 is shown.

  FIG. 120 (p) continuing from FIG. 120 (o) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by a predetermined advance animation is started from FIG. 120 (p) onward.

  FIG. 120 (q) continuing from FIG. 120 (p) shows a state in which temporary stop display of the missing symbol form is performed. "Decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right pattern display area 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 120 (r) continuing from FIG. 120 (q) shows a state in which the stop display of the missing symbol form is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 3 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player presses the chan button By operating the button 136, the icon is changed to a black circular holding icon which is a pre-reading notice mode. As described above, the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response display 3 in this example correspond to the hold icon, and are configured to include the display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136.

  In this example, when the pending icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 in an increasing manner, after the pending icon moves to the left and the moving animation of the pending icon is displayed, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Although it comprises, there may be cases other than this. For example, from the time required to start the symbol variation display started when the pending icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is additionally displayed and the pending of the pending icon is digested and started, The start timing of the operation valid period and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

  In this example, the hold icon is configured to be displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 when the hold icon is displayed in an increase, but when the hold icon is displayed with a decrease, the specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. It may be configured to change to the hold icon as display 3 or at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display, a specific hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3 It may be configured to change to.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but one or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 3, but one or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button response display 3 There may be.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation wait display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 are configured by the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button operation wait display 3 and the button response The hold icon corresponding to the display 3 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the white circular hold icon in the default mode at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 is displayed, or a preview notice for prefetching other than white circle It may be changed to the hold icon which made the aspect.
(Example 6-2)

  An effect example of the example 6-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 94 (b) and shows the effect state in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 shown in FIG. 94 (b) correspond to the hold icon.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. A white circular holding icon b1 and a white circular holding icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right graphic display area 208a to 208c. FIG. 121 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 121 (b) continuing from FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which one suspension of special figure 1 is digested and symbol variation display is started. The change icon of the decoration pattern is displayed when the moving animation between the holding and changing icons moves to the left with the holding icon b1 becoming a changing icon a1 and the moving animation of the holding icon moves to the left with the holding icon b2 It is started. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Figure 121 (c) continued from Figure 121 (b) shows the default white circular reserved icon b3 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 during execution of symbol variation display It shows a state of increasing display. A state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 121 (d) continuing from FIG. 121 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 121 (c) is being executed.

  121 (e) continuing from FIG. 121 (d) shows that one gaming ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230 while executing the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 121 (d) In this state, the hold icon b4 is displayed on an increased basis. In this example, the chance button hold icon of the image obtained by turning over the chance button 136 corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3. In FIG. 121 (e), since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 121 (f) continuing from FIG. 121 (e) shows a state in which the stop display of the missing symbol form is displayed and the fluctuation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In FIG. 121 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  121 (g) continuing from FIG. 121 (f), the reserve of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the chance button hold icon is displayed as button operation waiting display 3 Showing the status. An animation of moving between pending and changing icons with the pending icon b2 becoming a fluctuating icon a2 and a moving animation of a pending icon with a pending icon b3 and b4 moving to the left are displayed, and a variation display of a decorative symbol The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 121 (g) shows that the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal mode). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. In this example, after displaying the moving icon of the holding icon moving the holding icon to the left, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  In FIG. 121 (h) continuing from FIG. 121 (g), the player continues to display the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 121 (g), and the player performs the operation valid period of the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, a state is shown in which the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4. The button response display 4 in the present example corresponds to a hold icon (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “goods button hold icon”) of an image obtained by looking up the good chance button 139.

  121 (i) continuing from FIG. 121 (h) is a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 121 (i) shows a state in which the chance button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 121 (h).

  FIG. 121 (j) continuing from FIG. 121 (i) shows a state in which the stop display of the missing symbol form is displayed and the fluctuation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In FIG. 121 (j), the chance button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

  121 (k) continuing from FIG. 121 (j), the suspension of one special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and subsequently, the chance button suspension icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4 Showing the status. The move icon a3 moves to the left as the change icon a3 and the move animation between the hold and change icons and the move animation of the hold icon to the left move the hold icon b4 are displayed, and the change display of the decorative symbol and the opportunity button The operation valid period of 139 is started. FIG. 121 (k) shows a state where the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state, and the opportunity button lamp 141 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal mode). . The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case. As described above, in the present example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display that is performed when the pressing of the opportunity button 139 is awaited.

  In FIG. 121 (l) continuing from FIG. 121 (k), the player continues to display the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 121 (k), and the player performs the operation valid period of the chance button 139. The pressing of the chance button 139 indicates that the chance button hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 is changed to the white diamond shaped hold icon b4 as the button response display 5. In this example, the symbol variation display in which the suspension corresponding to the white diamond-shaped suspension icon is digested and started is larger than the symbol fluctuation display in which the suspension corresponding to the white circular suspension icon is digested and started. The symbol form is configured to be easily stopped and displayed. The big hit symbol aspect stops in the symbol variation display where the reserve corresponding to the white diamond shaped reserve icon is digested and started rather than the symbol variation display where the reserve corresponding to the black circular reserve icon is digested and started It is configured to be easy to be displayed. In addition, as the button response display 5, a white circular hold icon, a black circular hold icon, or a hold icon other than these may be displayed.

  121 (m) continuing from FIG. 121 (l) is a state where "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

  FIG. 121 (n) continuing from FIG. 121 (m) shows a state in which the stop display of the missing symbol form is displayed and the fluctuation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out.

  121 (o) continuing from FIG. 121 (n), the suspension of one special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, the variation display of the decoration symbol is started, and the black circular retention icon b4 The state of moving animation between the holding and changing icons moving to the left as a black circular changing icon a4 is shown.

  FIG. 121 (p) continuing from FIG. 121 (o) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by a predetermined advance animation is started from FIG. 121 (p) onward.

  FIG. 121 (q) continuing from FIG. 121 (p) shows a state in which temporary stop display of the missing symbol form is performed. "Decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right pattern display area 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 121 (r) continuing from FIG. 121 (q) shows a state in which the stop display of the missing symbol form is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to a hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player operates the chance button By operating the button 139, the icon is changed to a black circular holding icon which is displayed as the button response display 5 and which is a prefetching notice mode. As described above, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation waiting display 3 includes a display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136, and the button response display 4 includes a display performed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139.

  In this example, when the pending icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 in an increasing manner, after the pending icon moves to the left and the moving animation of the pending icon is displayed, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Although it comprises, there may be cases other than this. For example, the operation of the chance button 136 from the time required to start the symbol variation display started when the holding icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and displayed and the holding of the holding icon is digested and started The start timing of the effective period and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

  In this example, after displaying the moving icon of the holding icon moving as the holding icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 moves to the left, the operation valid period of the chance button 139 is started. There may be cases other than. For example, the time and time required for the player to start the symbol variation display started when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is additionally displayed and the hold of the hold icon is digested and started. From the timing of operating 136, the start timing of the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined.

  In this example, the hold icon is configured to be displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 when the hold icon is displayed in an increase, but when the hold icon is displayed with a decrease, the specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. It may be configured to change to the hold icon as display 3 or at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display, a specific hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3 It may be configured to change to.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation wait display 3, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button operation wait display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button response display 4. There may be.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button response display 5. There may be.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are configured by the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response The hold icon corresponding to the display 4 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the white circular hold icon in the default mode at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 is displayed, or a preview notice for prefetching other than white circle It may be changed to the hold icon which made the aspect.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 The hold icon corresponding to may be composed of different hold icons.
Example 6-3

  An effect example of the example 6-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 94 (b) and shows the effect state in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 shown in FIG. 94 (b) correspond to the hold icon.

  FIG. 122 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. A white circular holding icon b1 and a white circular holding icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right graphic display area 208a to 208c. FIG. 122 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 122 (b) continuing from FIG. 122 (a) shows a state in which one of the reservations in Special Figure 1 is digested and symbol variation display is started. The change icon of the decoration pattern is displayed when the moving animation between the holding and changing icons moves to the left with the holding icon b1 becoming a changing icon a1 and the moving animation of the holding icon moves to the left with the holding icon b2 It is started. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  122 (c) continuing from FIG. 122 (b) shows a default white circular reserved icon b3 based on the fact that one gaming ball is inserted in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 during execution of the symbol variation display. It shows a state of increasing display. A state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 122 (d) continuing from FIG. 122 (c) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 122 (c) is being executed.

  122 (e) continued from FIG. 122 (d), one game ball entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230 while executing the change display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 122 (d) In this state, the hold icon b4 is displayed on an increased basis. In this example, the chance button hold icon of the image obtained by turning over the chance button 136 corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3. In FIG. 122 (e), since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 122 (f) following FIG. 122 (e) shows a state in which the stop display of the missing symbol form is displayed and the fluctuation icon a1 is deleted. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In FIG. 122 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  122 (g) continuing from FIG. 122 (f), the reserve of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the chance button hold icon is displayed as button operation waiting display 3 Showing the status. An animation of moving between pending and changing icons with the pending icon b2 becoming a fluctuating icon a2 and a moving animation of a pending icon with a pending icon b3 and b4 moving to the left are displayed, and a variation display of a decorative symbol The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 122 (g) shows that the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal mode). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emitting light (or emitting in a manner different from the normal state) in a predetermined manner. There is a case. In this example, after displaying the moving icon of the holding icon moving the holding icon to the left, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  In FIG. 122 (h) continuing from FIG. 122 (g), the player continuously displays the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. By pressing the chance button 136, a state is shown in which the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4. The button response display 4 in the present example corresponds to the chance button hold icon of the image obtained by turning over the chance button 139.

  122 (i) continuing from FIG. 122 (h) is a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 122 (i) shows the state where the chance button hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 122 (h).

  FIG. 122 (j) continuing from FIG. 122 (i) shows a state in which the stop display of the missing symbol form is displayed and the fluctuation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. In FIG. 122 (j), the chance button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

  122 (k) continuing from FIG. 122 (j), the reserve of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and subsequently, the chance button hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4 Showing the status. The move icon a3 moves to the left as the change icon a3 and the move animation between the hold and change icons and the move animation of the hold icon to the left move the hold icon b4 are displayed, and the change display of the decorative symbol and the opportunity button The operation valid period of 139 is started. FIG. 122 (k) shows that the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state, and the opportunity button lamp 141 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal mode). . The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case. As described above, in the present example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display that is performed when the pressing of the opportunity button 139 is awaited.

  In FIG. 122 (l) continuing from FIG. 122 (k), the player continues to display the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 122 (k), and the player performs the operation valid period of the chance button 139. An animation representing a state in which the machine button hold icon b4 is changing in the area where the machine button hold icon b4 is displayed by pressing the machine button 139 (hereinafter referred to as “animation during change of hold icon”) Is shown in a state where it is displayed.

  122 (m) continuing from FIG. 122 (l), “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, The icon for holding the image of the machine button 139 in a state in which the machine button hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 is projected when the display of the on-hold icon changing animation is ended is ended. It may be referred to as an icon.) B5 is shown in the changed state. In FIG. 122 (m), although the opportunity button 139 protrudes in relation to the display of the button response display 5, since it is not the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the state where the opportunity button 139 is not emitting light Or it remains in the normal light emission state. In this example, the symbol variation display started with the reserve corresponding to the opportunity button protrusion retention icon is digested and started rather than the symbol variation display started with the retention corresponding to the white circular reserve icon being digested and started The symbol aspect is configured to be easily displayed stop, and the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protrusion hold icon is digested and started rather than the symbol variation display which is started when the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is digested and started The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect can be easily stopped and displayed, and the suspension corresponding to the white diamond shaped suspension icon is digested and started from the symbol variation display, the suspension corresponding to the chance button protrusion suspension icon The symbol variation display which is started by being digested is configured such that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily displayed.

  FIG. 122 (n) continuing from FIG. 122 (m) shows a state in which the disappointing symbol form is finalized and the fluctuation icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out.

  122 (o) continuing from FIG. 122 (n) is an opportunity button in a state in which one reserve of special view 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the opportunity button protrusion retention icon b4 is protruded A variation animation of an image with a look at 139 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "a good chance button protrusion variation icon") a4 and a movement animation between the holding and variation icons moving to the left are displayed, and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed The display and opportunity button 139 operation effective period is started. FIG. 122 (o) shows a state in which the projected opportunity button 139 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode.

  In FIG. 122 (p) continuing from FIG. 122 (o), the player continuously displays the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. A state in which "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" of the big hit design pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right design display area 208a to 208c by pressing the protruded opportunity button 139 is displayed. When the player does not press the chance button 139 in the state where the player protrudes during the valid period of the chance button 139, the middle left-right symbol display area 208a to 208c is largely hit at the end of the valid period of the chance button 139 operation. The symbol form "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 122 (r) continuing from FIG. 122 (q) shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol form is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to a hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player operates the chance button By operating 139, it is changed to the machine button protrusion suspension icon which becomes the pre-reading notice mode displayed as the button response display 5, and then, the player operates the machine button 139 in a state of being protruded from the normal state. The temporary stop display of the decoration pattern is performed. As described above, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation waiting display 3 includes the display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136, and the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 include the displays performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 139 Ru.

  In this example, when the pending icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 in an increasing manner, after the pending icon moves to the left and the moving animation of the pending icon is displayed, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Although it comprises, there may be cases other than this. For example, the operation of the chance button 136 from the time required to start the symbol variation display started when the holding icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and displayed and the holding of the holding icon is digested and started The start timing of the effective period and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

  In this example, after displaying the moving icon of the holding icon moving as the holding icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 moves to the left, the operation valid period of the chance button 139 is started. There may be cases other than. For example, the time and time required for the player to start the symbol variation display started when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is additionally displayed and the hold of the hold icon is digested and started. From the timing of operating 136, the start timing of the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined.

  In this example, the hold icon is configured to be displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 when the hold icon is displayed in an increase, but when the hold icon is displayed with a decrease, the specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. It may be configured to change to the hold icon as display 3 or at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display, a specific hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3 It may be configured to change to.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation wait display 3, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button operation wait display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button response display 4. There may be.

  In this example, one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but two or more hold icons among the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button response display 5. There may be.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are configured by the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response The hold icon corresponding to the display 4 may be composed of different hold icons.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 The hold icon corresponding to may be composed of different hold icons.

  As described above, in the example 6-1 to 6-3, the effect example in which the hold icon corresponds to the operation waiting display and the operation response display displayed in the effect pattern 2 and the effect pattern 3 illustrated in FIG. However, there may be a case where the hold icon corresponds to the operation waiting display and the operation response display displayed in the effect pattern 1, the effect pattern 4 or the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG.

Next, characteristic features of the game console according to the fourth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 94 to 122. FIG.
(I1)

  Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214);

  Image display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 209);

  First operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at a position where the player can operate;

Second operation means (e.g. opportunity button 139) provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game console equipped with

  The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 94 (b)),

  The operation waiting display of the third type is a display performed when waiting for the operation of the first operation means (for example, FIGS. 103 (c) to (d) and FIGS. 107 (c) to (d) See etc.),

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display (for example, button response display 3 shown in FIG. 94 (b)),

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display (for example, button response display 4 shown in FIG. 94 (b)),

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display (for example, a button response display 5 shown in FIG. 94 (c)),

  The third type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 94 (b) and 103 (c) to (f)). ),

  The third type of operation response display does not include a part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means (for example, a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap) Configured display (see, for example, FIGS. 94 (b) and 103 (c) to (f));

  The fourth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 94 (c) and 107 (c) to 107 (f)). ),

  The fourth type of operation response display is a display including the part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means (for example, FIG. 94 (c), FIG. 107, and FIG. 107). (F)),

  The fifth type operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 94 (d) and 107 (g)).

The method of the symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without the fifth type of operation response display being performed But, it is easy to be displayed a big hit design,
A game stand characterized by

According to the game stand having the configuration, the symbol variation in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed which is displayed by causing the player to operate the first operation means and the second operation means stepwise The display is more than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed, which is displayed by causing the player to operate only the first operation means without the fifth type of operation response display being performed. Since the jackpot symbol is easy to confirm and displayed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be gradually increased, and in some cases, the interest of the game can be improved.
(I2)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (I1),

  The third type of operation response display and the fourth type of operation in response to the operation of the first operation means while the third operation waiting display (for example, the chance button emission image) is displayed Which type of response display is to be displayed is determined before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means,

The third operation waiting display is one operation waiting display of the third type of operation waiting display (see, for example, FIGS. 103 (c) and 107 (c)).
A game stand characterized by
(I3)

  The gaming machine according to (I1) or (I2) above,

  The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 94C);

  The fourth type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 94 (c) and 114 (c) to (d)).

  The fourth type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the fourth type operation waiting display is being displayed. (For example, refer to FIG. 94 (c), FIG. 114 (d) to (f)),

The pattern variation display in which the fourth type operation waiting display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type operation waiting display is performed without the fourth type operation waiting display being performed But, it is easy to be displayed a big hit design,
A game stand characterized by
(I4)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (I3),

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation waiting display (for example, the operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 94 (a)),

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation response display (for example, the operation response display 1 shown in FIG. 94 (a)),

  The first type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 94 (a) and 95 (d)).

  The first type of operation response display is a display configured without including the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means (for example, FIGS. 94 (a) and 95 (e)). reference),

  The first type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the first type operation waiting display is being displayed. (For example, refer to FIG. 94 (a) and FIG. 95 (d) to (e)),

  The first operation response display (for example, the character string image of "chance !!") is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated while the first operation waiting display is displayed. (See, for example, FIGS. 96 (c) to (d)),

  The fourth operation response display (for example, the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image) is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated while the fourth operation waiting display is displayed. (See, for example, FIGS. 107 (c) to (f))

  The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even when the first operation means is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display (for example, as shown in FIG. (F)),

  The first operation waiting display is one operation waiting display of the first type of operation waiting display,

  The first operation response display is one operation response display of the first type operation response display,

  The fourth operation waiting display is one operation waiting display of the fourth type of operation waiting display,

The fourth operation response display is one of the operation response display of the fourth type operation response display.
A game stand characterized by
(I5)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (I4),

The method of the symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed without the fifth type of operation response display being performed But, it is easy to be displayed a big hit design,
A game stand characterized by
(I6)

  The gaming machine according to (I4) or (I5) above,

The method of the symbol variation display in which the first type operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type operation response display is performed without the first type operation response display being performed But, it is easy to be displayed a big hit design,
A game stand characterized by
(I7)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above,

  The fourth type operation response display is the first type when the time from the display of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means is the first time. Display (for example, button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 107 (d) to 107 (f)) (for example, refer to FIGS. 107 (c) to (f));

  The fourth type operation response display when the time until the first operation means is operated after the display of the third type operation waiting display is the second time is the second Display (for example, button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 110 (e) to (f)) (for example, refer to FIGS. 110 (c) to (f));

  The second time is a time longer than the first time,

  The display of the opening of the first display and the display of the opening of the second display are the same (see, for example, FIGS. 107 (d) and 110 (e)).

  The display at the end of the first display and the display at the end of the second display are the same (see, for example, FIGS. 107 (f) and 110 (f)).

The display of at least a part of the middle of the first display (for example, the display of the middle of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 107 (e)) is not displayed in the second display (for example, FIG. (F)),
A game stand characterized by
(I8)

  The gaming machine according to (I7) above,

  When the first operation means is operated between the display of the operation waiting display of the third type and the end of the operation effective period set before the start of the operation waiting display of the third type The display according to the operation of the first operation means is configured to be performed (see, for example, FIGS. 107 (d) to (f)),

  The first time is the time from the start of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means at the shortest timing (for example, FIG. 107 (c ) To (d)),

The second time refers to the time when the first operation means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period after the start of the operation waiting display of the third type. For example, see FIGS. 110 (c) to (d)),
A game stand characterized by
(I9)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above,

  The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 2),

  The second type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means (see, for example, FIG. 94 (d)).

  The second type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the second operation means is operated while the second type operation waiting display is being displayed. (See, for example, FIG. 94 (d)),

The method of the symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the second type of operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type of operation response display But, it is easy to be displayed a big hit design,
A game stand characterized by
(I10)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I9) above,

The display of the character displayed in the fourth type of operation response display (for example, a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles shown in FIG. 114 (f) overlap) is waiting for the fourth type of operation It is configured to be displayed also on the display (see, for example, FIG. 114 (c)).
A game stand characterized by
(I11)

  The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I10) above,

The display of the character displayed on the fourth type of operation response display (for example, a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles shown in FIG. 107 (f) overlap) is waiting for the third type of operation It is configured to be displayed also on the display (see, for example, FIG. 107 (c)).
A game stand characterized by
(I12)

  The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I11) above,

The second operation means is configured to be determined to be operated when pressed by a player.
A game stand characterized by
(I13)

  The gaming machine according to any one of the above (I1) to (I12), wherein

The first operation means is configured to be determined to be operated when being rotated by the player.
A game stand characterized by
Fifth Embodiment

Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIGS. 123 to 130. FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. The same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the component same as the pachinko machine 100 by the said 2nd Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
Example 1

  A pachinko machine 100 according to a first example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 shows an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 123 (a) shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 65, and from FIG. 123 (b) onwards the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body from the game board 1000. 1002 is extracted and shown.

  FIG. 123 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss ing. In the state shown in FIG. 123 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. In FIG. 123, the display of the hold icon in the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 123 (b) continuing from FIG. 123 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change game is started based on the fact that the suspension of the special figure 1 at the earliest stage is taken. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

  FIG. 123 (c) continuing from FIG. 123 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 123 (d) continuing from FIG. 123 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The normal reach effect is started from FIG. 123 (d) onward.

  FIG. 123 (e) continued from FIG. 123 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position in the operation range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image becomes invisible from the player. A symbol variation display in which at least a part of a decorative symbol or a notice image (for example, an image of the sun, clouds, a balloon, a reserved icon, a variation icon, etc.) may overlap with the movable body and become invisible to the player. Is a prefetching notice that the visible part of the notice image may be different before and after movement of the movable body, as compared with the symbol variation display in which at least a part of the decoration pattern or the notice image does not overlap with the movable body. When is performed, the big hit symbol mode is finalized in the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading than when pre-reading pre-notice that there is no case where the visible part of the notice image is different before and after movement of the movable body is executed. It may be configured to be easy to do.

  FIG. 123 (f) continuing from FIG. 123 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position of the movement range of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 123 (g) continued from FIG. 123 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, a swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoment 2-decorate 3-decorate 2" which is an out-of-pattern pattern is swung left and right. During the normal reach effect in the present embodiment, the wipe effect display described later is not executed.

  FIG. 123 (h) continuing from FIG. 123 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle-right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and it is reported that the result of the special view 1 variation display is out.

  FIG. 123 (i) continuing from FIG. 123 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change game is started based on the fact that the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

  Fig. 123 (j) continuing from Fig. 123 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 123 (k) continuing from FIG. 123 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 123 (k) onward. In the present example, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed more clearly than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 123 (l) continuing from FIG. 123 (k) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed along with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In the present embodiment, the background image of the sky is displayed during execution of normal rendering, during execution of normal reach rendering, or the like, and the background image of mountain road is displayed during execution of super reach rendering.

  FIG. 123 (m) continuing from FIG. 123 (l) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sea background image including a yacht image and a cloud image to a partial image of a mountain road background displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208. The image of the part which the sub display 1030 overlaps and hides on the decorative symbol display 208 is displayed on the sub display 1030.

  FIG. 123 (n) continued from FIG. 123 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 provided with the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper right from the initial position shown in FIG. 123 (m). The image of the part which the sub display 1030 overlaps and hides on the decorative symbol display 208 is displayed on the sub display 1030. In the present embodiment, the movable body 1002 may be called a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter referred to as a display screen front plane) by a drive system (not shown) ) Can be moved in two dimensions. The drive system of the movable body 1002 can have various configurations. For example, one end of two rotatably connected connecting rods is rotatably fixed at a predetermined position of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 outside the decorative symbol display device 208, and two-dimensionally in the front plane of the display screen Construct a link mechanism that can be moved. The movable body 1002 is rotatably fixed in the above plane to the other end of the two connected connecting rods. A motor for driving the connecting rod is disposed at one end of the two connected connecting rods and at the connecting node. Thereby, the movable body 1002 can be moved two-dimensionally in the front plane of the display screen. A motor for rotating the effect movable body may be disposed at the other end of the two connecting rods, and the effect movable body 1002 may be configured to be rotatable in the front plane of the display screen.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode.

  123 (o) continued from FIG. 123 (n) is a state in which the character string image of "sorry" is displayed as a display suggesting a shift at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (center of the effect display area 208d). Is shown. The sub display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping a part of the character image of "Make" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lower half of the character of "Make" is displayed on the sub display device 1030. It is displayed.

  FIG. 123 (p) continued from FIG. 123 (o) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, a swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoment 2-decorate 3-decorate 2" which is an out-of-pattern pattern is swung up and down.

  FIG. 123 (q) continuing from FIG. 123 (p) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started after the "decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2" indicating the out-of-order during super reach rendering is displayed . The wipe effect display is an effect in which the image is erased so as to wipe out the image from the end of the display screen of the display device. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with two display devices, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a sub display device 1030. In the present embodiment, the wipe effect display is started at the decorative symbol display device 208 first and then the sub The display 1030 is started. Hereinafter, the wipe effect display performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe effect display, and the wipe display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe display. The wipe effect display to be performed is referred to as a second wipe effect display, and the wipe display displayed on the sub display device 208 is referred to as a second wipe display.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (q), the wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Do. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foremost side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 123, the patterns are indicated by hatching in the upper right direction.

  The effect movable body 1002 is moving toward the initial position, and the sub display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping a part of the character string image of "Sorry" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the display device 1030, the lower half of the word "just in advance" is displayed.

  FIG. 123 (r) continuing from FIG. 123 (q) shows a state in which the wipe displays w1a and w1b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. Wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually expand from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen .

  FIG. 123 (s) continuing from FIG. 123 (r) shows a state in which the second wipe effect display is started on the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 (effect movable body 1002) is moving. The wipe display w2a starts appearing from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display 1030, and the wipe display w2b starts appearing from the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. The appearance of the wipe display w2a and the appearance of the wipe display w2b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the second wipe display, and the start of the second wipe effect display with the appearance of the second wipe display. The wipe displays w2a and w2b are displayed in the foreground on the sub display device 1030, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the background image and the like displayed before the start of the second wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w2a and w2b are the same, and in FIG. 123, the patterns are indicated by white dots on a black background.

  The design of the first wipe display and the design of the second wipe display are different. The first wipe display emerges from the upper left and lower right corners of the screen, and the second wipe display emerges from the upper right and lower left corners of the screen.

  In the present embodiment, the second wipe effect display is started during execution of the effect operation in which the sub display device 1030 moves to the initial position, but after the sub display device 1030 is stopped at the initial position, the second wipe effect The display may be started, or the sub display device 1030 may start moving to the initial position after the second wipe effect display ends, or the timing at which the sub display device 1030 starts moving to the initial position, and The start timing of the second wipe effect display may be the same.

  FIG. 123 (t) continuing from FIG. 123 (s) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is stopped at the initial position. The first wipe display and the second wipe display are appearing. Wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually expand from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen . The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to gradually expand from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen .

  FIG. 123 (u) continuing from FIG. 123 (t) shows a state in which the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w2a is in contact with the end of the wipe display w2b, and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b. When the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b, the wipe displays w2a and w2b are in the standby display state in which the move display is not performed. Occurrence of Second Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The first wipe display is appearing and the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed from the lower right corner of the display screen It is displayed to spread gradually to the center.

  FIG. 123 (v) continuing from FIG. 123 (u) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a is in contact with the end of the wipe display w1b, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b, the wipe displays w1a and w1b do not move and are displayed in a standby state. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 123 (w) continuing from FIG. 123 (v) shows a state in which withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The second wipe display is in standby display.

  FIG. 123 (x) continuing from FIG. 123 (w) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is started. The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 123 (y) continuing from FIG. 123 (x) shows a state during withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, a part of the decorative symbol during temporary stop is displayed.

  FIG. 123 (z) continuing from FIG. 123 (y) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is completed. The wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, the display When the wipe display w2b is erased from the screen, withdrawal of the second wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the second wipe display is completed, the second wipe effect display ends. The first wipe effect display is being withdrawn.

  Although the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the sub display 1030 before the second wipe effect display start as shown in FIG. 123 (r), the second wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 123 (z) After the end, the background image of the sea is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Thus, the background image displayed on the sub display 1030 changes before and after the second wipe effect display.

  In this embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the second wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w2a starts appearing from the upper right corner of the display screen, withdrawal is completed at the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts appearing from the lower left corner of the display screen, and is lower than the lower left corner Complete withdrawal. Note that the appearance start position of the second wipe display and the withdrawal completion position may be different. For example, the wipe display w2a starts appearing from the upper right corner of the display screen, and withdrawal is completed at the lower right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts appearing from the lower left corner of the display screen, and moves to the upper left corner of the display screen You may complete the withdrawal.

  FIG. 123 (i) continuing from FIG. 123 (z) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is erased from the display screen, withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display is ended. The background image of the sky is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a symbol aspect of out of alignment, swings in a display aspect swaying left and right. The variable display is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (p), the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the start of the first wipe effect display, but as shown in FIG. 123 (i), the first After the end of the wipe effect display, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a display mode of a normal size. Thus, the display mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display. In the present embodiment, the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

  Although the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the first wipe effect display start as shown in FIG. 123 (p), the first wipe effect is shown as shown in FIG. After the end of the display, the background image of the sky is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

  In this embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the first wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen, withdraw completion is completed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b begins to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen, and moves to the lower right corner of the display screen Complete withdrawal. Note that the appearance start position of the first wipe display and the withdrawal completion position may be different. For example, the wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen, withdraw completion is completed at the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen, and moves to the upper right corner of the display screen You may complete the withdrawal.

  123 (b) continued from FIG. 123 (b) is a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" swings to the left and right in the left middle right design display area 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 Indicates a state where is displayed.

  FIG. 123 (C) continuing from FIG. 123 (B) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the determination of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out. ing.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with effect display means capable of executing effect display. The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means, and one image display means of the plurality of image display means is the decorative symbol display device 208, and of the plurality of image display means One image display means is a sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can perform the first wipe effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the display indicating the shift is performed in the super reach effect, and the shift in the super reach effect It is possible to perform a second wipe effect display on the sub display 208 after the display indicating that A scene change of effect in which a background image or the like is changed is performed by the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to renew the player's mood by making the scene change of the effect gorgeous.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 (s) to (t), a part of the second wipe effect display is performed on the sub display device 1030 performing the movement operation. The entire second wipe effect display may be performed while the sub display device 1030 is moving. The decorative symbol display device 208 can execute the moving operation, and at least a part of the first wipe effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 performing the moving operation.
(Example 2)

  A pachinko machine 100 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 shows an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 124, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 65, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 124 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. On the decorative symbol display device 208, three holding icons indicating the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The display modes of the three suspension icons are all black circles.

  FIG. 124 (b) continuing from FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change game has been started based on the fact that the suspension of the special figure 1 at the earliest stage is taken. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is executed, the leftmost holding icon corresponding to the digested holding is erased, and the holding icon moving animation in which the two holding icons are moved to the left is executed. Be done.

  FIG. 124 (c) continuing from FIG. 124 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 124 (c) onward. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed more clearly than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 124 (d) continuing from FIG. 124 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed along with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In the present embodiment, the background image of the sky is displayed during execution of normal rendering, during execution of normal reach rendering, or the like, and the background image of mountain road is displayed during execution of super reach rendering. The hold icons are all erased as the background image changes. The timing at which the hold icon is erased may be simultaneous with the change of the background image, may be earlier than the change, or may be later than the change.

  FIG. 124 (e) continuing from FIG. 124 (d) shows a state where the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode.

  In this example, it is assumed that one gaming ball is won in the special figure 1 start opening 230 after the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the special view 1 start information is acquired, and the main control unit 300 executes a special view look-ahead process of predetermining the stop symbol prior to the acceptance determination process by prefetching the newly acquired start information. After executing the special view prefetching process, main control unit 300 transmits a prefetch result information command including the preliminary determination result to first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice based on the preliminary determination result. In this example, it is determined that the prefetch notice is not executed.

  FIG. 124 (f) continuing from FIG. 124 (e) shows a state in which the display indicating the detachment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A character string image of "sorry" is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display indicating a shift, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display region 208b, and the left middle right symbol display region 208a. The swing fluctuation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is an out-of-pattern pattern aspect, swings up and down in ̃208 c.

  FIG. 124 (g) continuing from FIG. 124 (f) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started after the display indicating the removal during the super reach effect is displayed. The wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foremost side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 124, the patterns are indicated by hatching in the upper right direction.

  FIG. 124 (h) continuing from FIG. 124 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display has been completed. The end of the wipe display w1a is in contact with the end of the wipe display w1b, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 124 (i) continuing from FIG. 124 (h) shows a state in which withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, the decorative symbol and the hold icon are gradually re-displayed.

  In the withdrawal display of the first wipe display, after at least a part of the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the young hold position is displayed, the hold icon that has increased last is displayed so that the hold icon corresponding to the hold after it is displayed The player completes the withdrawal display of the wipe display while expecting whether or not the display mode of the hold icon newly displayed in response to the hold increased during the reach production is the pre-read notice mode or not. You may be able to wait.

  FIG. 124 (j) following FIG. 124 (i) shows a state during withdrawal display of the first wipe display. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, the decorative symbol and the hold icon are gradually re-displayed. At the time point shown in FIG. 124 (j), a part of the left symbol, and the middle symbol, the right symbol, and all the reserved icons are displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 124 (c), the number of pending icons before deletion is two, but the number of pending in Special Figure 1 increases by one while the pending icon is being deleted. As shown in 124 (j), the number of pending icons after redisplay is three. The display modes of the three suspension icons are all black circles.

  FIG. 124 (k) continuing from FIG. 124 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is erased from the display screen, withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display is ended. The background image of the sky is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a symbol aspect of out of alignment, swings in a display aspect swaying left and right. The variable display is displayed.

  FIG. 124 (l) continuing from FIG. 124 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the determination of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of drawing whether or not to execute pre-reading advance notice using the wipe effect display, when the hold of the special view increases before the wipe effect display is executed. In this example, since it was decided not to execute the pre-reading notice using the wipe effect indication, the pre-reading notice is not executed.
(Example 3)

  A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 shows an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 125, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 65, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 125 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. On the decorative symbol display device 208, three holding icons indicating the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The display modes of the three suspension icons are all black circles.

  FIG. 125 (b) continuing from FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change game is started based on the fact that the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is executed, the leftmost holding icon corresponding to the digested holding is erased, and the holding icon moving animation in which the two holding icons are moved to the left is executed. Be done.

  FIG. 125 (c) continued from FIG. 125 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 125 (c) onward. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed more clearly than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 125 (d) continuing from FIG. 125 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed along with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In the present embodiment, the background image of the sky is displayed during execution of normal rendering, during execution of normal reach rendering, or the like, and the background image of mountain road is displayed during execution of super reach rendering. The hold icons are all erased as the background image changes.

  FIG. 125 (e) continued from FIG. 125 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode.

  In this example, it is assumed that one gaming ball is won in the special figure 1 start opening 230 after the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the special view 1 start information is acquired, and the main control unit 300 executes a special view look-ahead process of predetermining the stop symbol prior to the acceptance determination process by prefetching the newly acquired start information. After executing the special view prefetching process, main control unit 300 transmits a prefetch result information command including the preliminary determination result to first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice based on the preliminary determination result. In this example, it is determined that the prefetch notice is to be executed, and the prefetch notice is executed by the first wipe effect display and the display of the hold icon.

  FIG. 125 (f) continuing from FIG. 125 (e) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display has been started after the display indicating the detachment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foremost side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 125, the patterns are plain black.

  In the present embodiment, the black plain wipe indications w1a and w1b are displayed as the first wipe effect indication as the preview advance notice. When the first wipe effect display is displayed as the advance notice, the start timing of the first wipe effect display is the first wipe effect display when the first wipe effect display other than the advance notice is displayed. It is earlier than the start timing of. When the pre-reading notice is executed, the first wipe effect display is started immediately after the display indicating the deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 125 (f), and the pre-reading notice is If it is not executed, as shown in FIG. 124 (f), a display suggesting a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, the first wipe effect display is shown as shown in FIG. 124 (g). It has been started.

  The appearance positions of the wipe indications w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect indication which is the advance notice is displayed are the wipe positions w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect indication which is not the advance notice is displayed. It is different from the appearance position. In the case of the first wipe effect display which is the advance notice, as shown in FIG. 125 (f), the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is the upper right corner of the display screen, and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is the lower left corner of the display screen is there. On the other hand, in the case of the first wipe effect display which is not the advance notice, as shown in FIG. 124 (g), the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is the upper left corner of the display screen, and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is the right of the display screen It is a lower corner.

  The speed of appearance display of the wipe display w1a, w1b when the first wipe effect display which is the advance notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display which is not the advance notice, is displayed, It is faster than the appearance display speed of w1b.

  Thus, when the first wipe effect display is executed as the advance notice, the first wipe effect display in which the pattern of the first wipe display, the appearance position, and the appearance display speed are not the advance notice is executed. It is different from the case. When the first wipe effect display is executed as the advance notice, the first wipe effect display in which at least one of the first wipe indication pattern, the appearance position, or the appearance display speed is not the advance notice is executed. Different from the case of

  In this example, the prefetch process is performed during the reach effect execution, and the prefetch notice based on the result of the prefetch process is executed while the reach effect is being executed. In this case, the mode of the wipe effect display as the pre-reading advance notice is different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display which is not the pre-reading advance notice. In addition, when a prefetch notice is executed based on the result of the prefetch process prior to the prefetch process before the reach effect start and the special view fluctuation game in which the reach effect is executed, or the hold icon of the prefetch notice mode is displayed In this case, the mode of the wipe effect display may be different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display.

  FIG. 125 (g) following FIG. 125 (f) shows a state in which the wipe displays w1a and w1b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually expand from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen .

  FIG. 125 (h) continuing from FIG. 125 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a is in contact with the end of the wipe display w1b, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 125 (i) continuing from FIG. 125 (h) shows a state in which withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, the decorative symbol and the hold icon are gradually re-displayed. The speed of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display that is the advance notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display that is not the advance notice is displayed, It may be faster than, the same as, or slower than the speed of withdrawal display of w1b.

  In the withdrawal display of the first wipe display, after at least a part of the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the young hold position is displayed, the hold icon that has increased last is displayed so that the hold icon corresponding to the hold after it is displayed The player completes the withdrawal display of the wipe display while expecting whether or not the display mode of the hold icon newly displayed in response to the hold increased during the reach production is the pre-read notice mode or not. You may be able to wait.

  FIG. 125 (j) continuing from FIG. 125 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is erased from the display screen, withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display is ended. The background image of the sky is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a symbol aspect of out of alignment, swings in a display aspect swaying left and right. The variable display is displayed. The hold icon is also displayed again, and the third hold icon from the left is displayed in a white square display manner. The hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the advance notice.

  FIG. 125 (k) continuing from FIG. 125 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is ended. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the determination of the special view 1 fluctuation game is out. ing.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the advance notice by the first wipe effect display. When the first wipe effect display is executed as the advance notice, the big hit may be won without fail until all the special figure changing games on hold are digested.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the advance notice by the second wipe effect display. Similar to the first wipe effect indication, the second wipe effect indication as the advance notice is the second wipe in which at least one of the second wipe indication pattern, the appearance position, or the appearance indication speed is not the advance notice. It may be different from the case where the effect display is performed.
(Example 4)

  A pachinko machine 100 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 shows an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 126, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are shown extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG.

  FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 126 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 126, illustration of the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state is the power support state. At the time point shown in FIG. 126 (a), the number of remaining special map fluctuation games in the power support state is nine. On the sub display device 1030, a character string image of "nine times" indicating the number of remaining special map fluctuation games in the power support state is displayed.

  FIG. 126 (b) continuing from FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 change game is started based on that the suspension of the first special figure 2 is digested. On the sub display device 1030, a character string image of "eight times" indicating the number of remaining special map fluctuation games in the power support state is displayed.

  FIG. 126 (c) continuing from FIG. 126 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 126 (c) onward. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed more clearly than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 126 (d) continuing from FIG. 126 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character It shows a state in which an effect in which a moving image of a scene to be confronted is displayed is started. When the success or failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The image of the main character (hereinafter referred to as the "protagonist") is displayed on the left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as the "enemy" on the right of the display screen. Is displayed, and the upper left of the display screen is displaying a character string image of "due". On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as a left symbol is displayed, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 126 (e) continuing from FIG. 126 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 126 (e), the lower plate 128 is filled with winning balls, and a lower plate error occurs. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a bottom plate full-time error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a ball" is displayed in white with a white outline in the black rectangular image. There is. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed overlapping the effect display. In (d) of FIG. 126, the lower counter full error notification image is displayed overlapping with the character string image of “Debut”. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower tray full error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 126 (f) continuing from FIG. 126 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating removal during super-reach presentation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display that suggests detachment. The lower tray full error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 126 (g) continuing from FIG. 126 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, a swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoment 2-decorate 3-decorate 2" which is an out-of-pattern pattern is swung up and down. The lower-side full-color error notification image is changed to a display mode in which the character color is black.

  FIG. 126 (h) continuing from FIG. 126 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display have been started. The wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen, and wipes display from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030 The w2a starts to appear, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined as the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and with the appearance of the first wipe display as the start of the first wipe effect display, of the wipe display w2a The appearance and the appearance of the wipe display w2b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the second wipe display, and the appearance of the second wipe display is the start of the second wipe presentation display.

  The first wipe display appears to wipe off the display other than the error notification image. In the present embodiment, the lower tray full error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower tray full error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w1a. A display mode in which a character string image of “draw a ball” is displayed in white on the image of the black rectangular rectangle before the start of the wipe effect as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 126 (h), after the start of the wipe effect, it is displayed in a display mode in which a character string image of "draw a ball" is displayed in black. In the present embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is immediately before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 126 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display And may be after the start of the wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display is also displayed overlapping the tutorial display. In the present embodiment, the tutorial display which is one of the message displays is erased by the first wipe display, and the error display which is one of the message displays is displayed overlapping the first wipe display. In the present embodiment, the lower display full error notification image is taken as an example of the error display, but the same applies to other error displays, for example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error, and an abnormal winning Also, an error notification image notifying an incorrect winning, an error notification image notifying a magnetic detection, etc. are displayed overlapping with the first wipe display.

  FIG. 126 (i) continuing from FIG. 126 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display and the appearance display of the second wipe display are completed. The completion of the appearance display of the first wipe display may be simultaneous with the completion of the appearance display of the second wipe display, or the completion of any appearance display may come first. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started, and when the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The design of the second wipe display is plain black. The first wipe display erases the display other than the error notification image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect, and all the displays displayed on the sub display device 1030 during the super reach effect are displayed. It is erased.

  The pattern of the first wipe display displayed in the special-pattern changing game in which the main character and the enemy are presented with a confrontation effect is a pattern including an image of the main character's face. As shown in FIG. 126 (i), the pattern of wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the face of the main character, and the pattern of wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the faces of the main characters included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the faces of the main characters who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 126 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to forgetting from the player the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 126 (j) following FIG. 126 (i) shows a state in which withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. A decorative symbol or the like is gradually re-displayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The start of the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be simultaneous with the start of the withdrawal display of the second wipe display, or the start of any withdrawal display may be first.

  FIG. 126 (k) continuing from FIG. 126 (j) shows a state in which withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display is ended. The background image of the sky is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a symbol aspect of out of alignment, swings in a display aspect swaying left and right. The variable display is displayed. The lower-side full-color error notification image is displayed in a display mode in which a character string image of "draw a ball" is displayed in white in the image of the black horizontal rectangle. In the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen.

  FIG. 126 (l) continuing from FIG. 126 (k) shows a state in which the special view 2 change game is finished. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 variation game is out. ing.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the wipe effect when the special game variation game determination result is out of order. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect suggesting the detachment.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the display of a plurality of characters on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the super reach effect. One of the displays of the plurality of characters is a display of the main character, and one of the displays of the plurality of characters is a display of the enemy characters. The display of the main character and the enemy character is erased by the display of the first wipe effect display. In the super reach effect, the display of the main character or enemy character may be displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the display of the main character or enemy character is erased by the second wipe effect display being displayed. May be
(Example 5)

  A pachinko machine 100 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 shows an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 127, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are shown extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG.

  FIG. 127 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is the power support state. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 127 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 127, the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not shown. In addition, the remaining number of times of the special figure change game executed in the power support state may not be displayed on any of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030, or may be displayed.

  FIG. 127 (b) continuing from FIG. 127 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 change game is started based on the fact that the suspension of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 127 (c) continuing from FIG. 127 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 127 (c) onward. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed more clearly than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 127 (d) continued from FIG. 127 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character are displayed. It shows a state in which an effect in which a moving image of a scene to be confronted is displayed is started. When the success or failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a character string image of "due" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as a left symbol is displayed, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 127 (e) continuing from FIG. 127 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character image of the "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode.

  FIG. 127 (f) continuing from FIG. 127 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character beats the enemy is displayed as a display indicating a big hit.

  FIG. 127 (g) continued from FIG. 127 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right design display area 208a to 208c, a swing fluctuation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2", which is a big hit design, swings up and down.

  FIG. 127 (h) continuing from FIG. 127 (g) shows a state in which the super reach effect is finished. A display mode in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208d becomes a normal size at the center of the display screen and the "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2" which is a big hit design aspect swings left and right with the end of the super reach effect. The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 127 (i) continuing from FIG. 127 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is ended. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the judgment result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not display the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display when the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit. In addition, even when the result of the special view fluctuation game is a big hit, the first wipe effect display may be displayed and the second wipe effect display may not be displayed, or the first wipe effect display is not displayed. The second wipe effect display may be displayed on the screen, or the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display may be displayed.
(Example 6)

  A pachinko machine 100 according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 shows an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 128, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 65, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is the power support state. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 4, for example.

  FIG. 128 (b) continuing from FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 change game is started based on the fact that the suspension of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 128 (c) continuing from FIG. 128 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 128 (c) onward. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed more clearly than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 128 (d) continuing from FIG. 128 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 20 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the moving image of the scene where the main character and the enemy character confront each other It shows a state where an effect of displaying an image is started. When the success or failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "due" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Under the display screen, a character string image of "Confrontation start!" Is displayed. On the front side of the character string image of "the duel", "decoration 2" as a left symbol is displayed, and a part of the character string image is not visible. The character string image of "Confrontation start!" Is one of message display, and is a tutorial display for explaining effects and the like. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the super reach effect, a tutorial display for explaining the effect of the super reach effect is displayed.

  FIG. 128 (e) continuing from FIG. 128 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode. Below the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of "If the jackpot wins, a big hit", and it is explained that in the case of a big hit, an effect in which the main character as the big hit is won is executed.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 128 (e), the lower plate 128 is filled with winning balls, and a lower plate error occurs. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a bottom plate full-time error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a ball" is displayed in white with a white outline in the black rectangular image. There is. The lower tray full error notification image is one of the message displays, and is displayed overlapping with the effect display. In (d) of FIG. 128, the lower counter full error notification image is displayed overlapping with the character string image of “the duel”. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower tray full error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 128 (f) continuing from FIG. 128 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating removal during super-reach presentation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display that suggests detachment. Below the display screen, a tutorial display of a string image of “Sorry! The sword master wins!” Is displayed, and it is explained that the enemy character who is the sword master has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests removal. The lower tray full error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 128 (g) continuing from FIG. 128 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, a swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoment 2-decorate 3-decorate 2" which is an out-of-pattern pattern is swung up and down. Below the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "if hall is standing up ..." is displayed, and it is described that the resurrection effect is executed when the leading character which is hall is standing up. The lower-side full-color error notification image is changed to a display mode in which the character color is black.

  FIG. 128 (h) continuing from FIG. 128 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display has been started. The wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display.

  The first wipe display appears to wipe off the display other than the error notification image. In the present embodiment, the lower tray full error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower tray full error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w1a. A display mode in which a character string image of “draw a ball” is displayed in white on the image of the black rectangular rectangle before the start of the wipe effect as shown in FIG. 128 (f), as shown in FIG. 128 (f). As shown in FIG. 128 (h), after the start of the wipe effect, a character string image of "draw a ball" in black is displayed in a display mode in which the character string image is displayed. In the present embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is immediately before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 128 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display And may be after the start of the wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display is also displayed overlapping the tutorial display. In the present embodiment, the tutorial display which is one of the message displays is erased by the first wipe display, and the error display which is one of the message displays is displayed overlapping the first wipe display. In the present embodiment, the lower display full error notification image is taken as an example of the error display, but the same applies to other error displays, for example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error, and an abnormal winning Also, an error notification image notifying an incorrect winning, an error notification image notifying a magnetic detection, etc. are displayed overlapping with the first wipe display.

  FIG. 128 (i) continuing from FIG. 128 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started. By the first wipe display, the display other than the error notification image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect is erased.

  The pattern of the first wipe display displayed in the special-pattern changing game in which the main character and the enemy are presented with a confrontation effect is a pattern including an image of the main character's face. As shown in FIG. 128 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the face of the main character, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the main characters included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main characters lost in the battle with the enemy shown in FIG. 128 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to forgetting from the player the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 128 (j) continuing from FIG. 128 (i) shows a state in which withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decoration pattern and the tutorial display are gradually re-displayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In FIG. 128 (j), a character string image of "STEEL ST", which is a part of the tutorial display, is displayed.

  FIG. 128 (k) continuing from FIG. 128 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display is ended. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and in the display mode in which "decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2", which is a pattern aspect of the outside, is swayed in the left and right pattern display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. The lower-side full-color error notification image is displayed in a display mode in which a character string image of "draw a ball" is displayed in white in the image of the black horizontal rectangle. Below the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image of "empty stage is likely to be latent" is displayed. The super reach effect ends at the point shown in FIG. 128 (i), and after the end of the super reach effect, for example, a tutorial display for explaining stage effect is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scroll display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

  FIG. 128 (l) continuing from FIG. 128 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is ended. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 variation game is out. ing. A lower bowl full error notification image is displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a tutorial display of a character string image of "possibility of the sea stage is ..." is displayed below the display screen. Is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scroll display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

In this embodiment, the tutorial display which is one of the message displays is erased by the wipe effect display, and the error display which is one of the message displays is not erased by the wipe effect display but continues even while the wipe effect display is displayed. Is displayed. The tutorial display of the super reach effect that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display is not displayed after the end of the wipe effect display, and the tutorial display that was not displayed before the start of the wipe effect display (e.g. The tutorial display is displayed in the scroll display mode after the wipe effect display is finished. The tutorial display of the super reach effect displayed before the start of the wipe effect display may also be displayed in the scroll display mode. The tutorial display displayed before the start of the wipe effect display may be displayed after the end of the wipe effect display. Note that at least one of the error display and the tutorial display may be displayed on the sub display device 1030.
(Example 7)

  A pachinko machine 100 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 shows an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 129, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 65, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is the power support state. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 129, the illustration of the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 129 (b) continuing from FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 change game is started based on the fact that the suspension of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 129 (c) continuing from FIG. 129 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 129 (c) onward. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed more clearly than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 129 (d) continuing from FIG. 129 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the moving image of the scene where the main character and the enemy character confront each other It shows a state where an effect of displaying an image is started. When the success or failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a character string image of "due" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as a left symbol is displayed, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 129 (e) continued from FIG. 129 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character image of the "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode.

  FIG. 129 (f) continuing from FIG. 129 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating removal during super-reach presentation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display that suggests detachment. Below the display screen, a tutorial display of a string image of “Sorry! The sword master wins!” Is displayed, and it is explained that the enemy character who is the sword master has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests removal.

  FIG. 129 (g) continued from FIG. 129 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, a swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoment 2-decorate 3-decorate 2" which is an out-of-pattern pattern is swung up and down.

  FIG. 129 (h) continuing from FIG. 129 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display has been started. The wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display.

  FIG. 129 (i) continuing from FIG. 129 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 129 (i), the lower plate 128 is filled with winning balls, and a lower plate error occurs. At the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower tray full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a sphere" in black character color is displayed. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pattern of the first wipe display displayed in the special-pattern changing game in which the main character and the enemy are presented with a confrontation effect is a pattern including an image of the main character's face. As shown in FIG. 129 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the face of the main character, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the main characters included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main characters lost in the battle with the enemy shown in FIG. 129 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to forgetting from the player the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 129 (j) continuing from FIG. 129 (i) shows a state in which withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. A decorative symbol is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower tray full error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 129 (k) continuing from FIG. 129 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display is ended. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and a display pattern in which "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2", which is a symbol form of a big hit, is swayed in the left and right pattern display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. At this time, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged. Therefore, the lower plate full error is eliminated, and the lower plate full error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 129 (l) continuing from FIG. 129 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is ended. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the judgment result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit ing.

In the present embodiment, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a pattern aspect that suggests a shift before the start of the wipe effect display, is displayed, and after the end of the wipe effect display, it is a symbol aspect that suggests a big hit. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed. The wipe effect display is executed after the symbol aspect indicating the distraction is displayed even when the jackpot is won, and the wipe effect display is performed by providing the effect pattern in which the symbol aspect indicating the big hit is displayed after the wipe effect display. In some cases, it may be possible to help the player to forget the effect that suggests the departure before the display is performed.
(Example 8)

  A pachinko machine 100 according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 shows an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 130, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 65, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is the power support state. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 130 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 130, the illustration of the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 130 (b) continuing from FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 change game is started based on the fact that the suspension of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 130 (c) continuing from FIG. 130 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 130 (c) onward. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed more clearly than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 130 (d) continuing from FIG. 130 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the moving image of the scene where the main character and the enemy character confront each other It shows a state where an effect of displaying an image is started. When the success or failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a character string image of "due" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as a left symbol is displayed, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 130 (e) continuing from FIG. 130 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character image of the "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode.

  FIG. 130 (f) continuing from FIG. 130 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating removal during super-reach presentation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display that suggests detachment. Below the display screen, a tutorial display of a string image of “Sorry! The sword master wins!” Is displayed, and it is explained that the enemy character who is the sword master has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests removal.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 130 (f), the lower plate 128 is filled with winning balls, and a lower plate error occurs. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a bottom plate full-time error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a ball" is displayed in white with a white outline in the black rectangular image. There is. The lower tray full error notification image is one of the message displays, and is displayed overlapping with the effect display. In (f) of FIG. 130, the lower counter full error notification image is displayed so as to overlap with the character string image of “the duel”. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower tray full error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 130 (g) continued from FIG. 130 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, a swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoment 2-decorate 3-decorate 2" which is an out-of-pattern pattern is swung up and down. At this time, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged. Therefore, the lower plate full error is eliminated, and the lower plate full error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 130 (h) following FIG. 130 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display has been started. The wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display.

  FIG. 130 (i) continuing from FIG. 130 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 130 (i), the lower plate 128 is filled with winning balls, and a lower plate error occurs. At the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower tray full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a sphere" in black character color is displayed. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pattern of the first wipe display displayed in the special-pattern changing game in which the main character and the enemy are presented with a confrontation effect is a pattern including an image of the main character's face. As shown in FIG. 130 (i), the pattern of wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the face of the main character, and the pattern of wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the main characters included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main characters lost in the battle with the enemy shown in FIG. 130 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to help the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 130 (j) following FIG. 130 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. A decorative symbol is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this time, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged. Therefore, the lower plate full error is eliminated, and the lower plate full error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 130 (k) continuing from FIG. 130 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display is ended. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and in the display mode in which "decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2", which is a pattern aspect of the outside, is swayed in the left and right pattern display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  FIG. 130 (l) continuing from FIG. 130 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started again. The wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display.

  FIG. 130 (m) following FIG. 130 (l) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 130 (m), the lower plate 128 is filled with prize balls, and a lower plate error occurs. At the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower tray full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a sphere" in black character color is displayed. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  FIG. 130 (n) continuing from FIG. 130 (m) shows a state in which withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. A decorative symbol is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is resumed. At this time, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged. Therefore, the lower plate full error is eliminated, and the lower plate full error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 130 (o) following FIG. 130 (n) shows a state in which the display of a moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started. At the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "due" is displayed.

  FIG. 130 (p) continuing from FIG. 130 (o) shows a state in which a display indicating a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character beats the enemy is displayed as a display indicating a big hit. In the display mode, "decorative 2" is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2", which is a big hit design, swings up and down in the left middle right design display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 130 (q) following FIG. 130 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect is finished. A display mode in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208d becomes a normal size at the center of the display screen and the "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2" which is a big hit design aspect swings left and right with the end of the super reach effect. The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 130 (r) continuing from FIG. 130 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is ended. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the judgment result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit ing.

  In the present embodiment, the first wipe effect display is performed twice during the execution of one special figure change game. In this embodiment, the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the second first wipe effect display are the same as the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the first first wipe effect display, although they are different. Good. In addition, the second wipe effect display may be performed twice during the execution of one special figure change game.

The first wipe effect display may be displayed before and after the background image changes as shown in FIGS. 130 (c) to (d). At this time, a wipe display for scene change may be displayed. The wipe display for a scene change may cover the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 or may cover only a part of the display screen. In FIGS. 130 (l) to 130 (n), a wipe display for scene change may be displayed. The same applies to the second wipe effect display.
(Example 9)

  A pachinko machine 100 according to a ninth example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 shows an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 131, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 65, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is the power support state. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 131 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 131, the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not shown.

  FIG. 131 (b) continuing from FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 change game is started based on the fact that the suspension of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 131 (c) continuing from FIG. 131 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 131 (c) onward. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the big hit design of the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is more easily displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 131 (d) continuing from FIG. 131 (c) is a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other with the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changing with the start of the super reach effect. It shows a state where an effect of displaying an image is started. When the success or failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a character string image of "due" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as a left symbol is displayed, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 131 (e) continuing from FIG. 131 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character image of the "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode.

  FIG. 131 (f) continuing from FIG. 131 (e) shows a state in which the display indicating the removal during the super reach effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display that suggests detachment. Below the display screen, a tutorial display of a string image of “Sorry! The sword master wins!” Is displayed, and it is explained that the enemy character who is the sword master has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests removal.

  FIG. 131 (g) continued from FIG. 131 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, a swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoment 2-decorate 3-decorate 2" which is an out-of-pattern pattern is swung up and down.

  FIG. 131 (h) continuing from FIG. 131 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display has been started. The wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display.

  FIG. 131 (i) continuing from FIG. 131 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 131 (i), the lower plate 128 is filled with winning balls, and a lower plate error occurs. At the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower tray full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a sphere" in black character color is displayed. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pattern of the first wipe display is a pattern including the image of the face of the main character. As shown in FIG. 131 (i), the pattern of wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the face of the main character, and the pattern of wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the main characters included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main characters lost in the battle with the enemy shown in FIG. 131 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to forgetting from the player the effect of losing the duel.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the opportunity button 139, and can perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 131 (i ') continuing from FIG. 131 (i) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 131 (i '). At the time point shown in FIG. 131 (i ′), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. The start timing of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be simultaneous or one of them may be earlier.

  In FIG. 131 (i '), during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode. There is. A plurality of lines illustrated above the chance button 136 is in a state where the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode Represents The player knows that the operation period of the chance button 136 has been started by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined manner or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state. There are times when you can. In addition, the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It may be stopped and displayed outside the effective period.

  In FIG. 131 (j) continuing from FIG. 131 (i '), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 Show the situation. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 131 (j). The button operation waiting display 1 is erased based on the pressing of the chance button 136. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. A decorative symbol is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower tray full error notification image is continuously displayed.

  In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, a button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) of the first wipe display The withdrawal display is displayed. In addition, when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, and the chance button 136 may be displayed. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be configured to be displayed even if the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation of. For example, when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 131 (k) continuing from FIG. 131 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display is ended. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and a display pattern in which "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2", which is a symbol form of a big hit, is swayed in the left and right pattern display areas 208a to 208c. It is done. At this time, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged. Therefore, the lower plate full error is eliminated, and the lower plate full error notification image is erased.

  As shown in FIGS. 131 (h) and (i), when the effect image is wiped out by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display is performed preferentially to the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is operated. In response to the display, the wipe effect display is ended and a display for making the player expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the fluctuation variation display of the jackpot symbol aspect ("decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is a display that makes the player expect a jackpot. The display expected to the player may be a jackpot notice display or the like. As in this example, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is performed prior to the wipe effect display is the final rather than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed prior to the wipe effect display. It may be configured so that the big hit symbol is easily decided and displayed, or the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is performed prior to the wipe effect display may be determined as a big hit, or more than the wipe effect display Also, it may be configured such that the symbol variation display on which the button operation waiting display has been preferentially performed may be deviated. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed prior to the wipe effect display may be determined as a lost decision. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display may be a first wipe effect display or a second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 131 (l) continuing from FIG. 131 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is ended. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the judgment result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit ing.

In the present embodiment, "decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2", which is a pattern aspect that suggests a shift before the start of the wipe effect display, is displayed, and a button operation waiting display is displayed during the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is displayed. The wipe effect display is ended according to the operation of. After the end of the wipe effect display, “decorated 2-decorated 2-decorated 2” which is a pattern aspect indicating a big hit is displayed. Even if the jackpot is won, a pattern effect is displayed that suggests a departure, and then a wipe effect display or a button operation wait display is executed, and after the wipe effect display, a symbol pattern that suggests a big hit is displayed In some cases, it may be possible to help the player to forget the effect suggesting the departure before the wipe effect display is performed.
(Example 10)

  A pachinko machine 100 according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 shows an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 132, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 65, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is the power support state. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 132 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 132, the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not shown.

  FIG. 132 (b) continuing from FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 change game is started based on the fact that the suspension of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 132 (c) continuing from FIG. 132 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 132 (c) onward. The pachinko machine 100 is configured such that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily displayed in the symbol change display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol change display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 132 (d) continuing from FIG. 132 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the moving image of the scene where the main character and the enemy character confront each other It shows a state where an effect of displaying an image is started. When the success or failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a character string image of "due" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as a left symbol is displayed, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 132 (e) continued from FIG. 132 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character image of the "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode.

  FIG. 132 (f) continuing from FIG. 132 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating removal during super-reach presentation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display that suggests detachment. Below the display screen, a tutorial display of a string image of “Sorry! The sword master wins!” Is displayed, and it is explained that the enemy character who is the sword master has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests removal.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 132 (f), the lower plate 128 is filled with winning balls, and a lower plate error occurs. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a bottom plate full-time error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a ball" is displayed in white with a white outline in the black rectangular image. There is. The lower tray full error notification image is one of the message displays, and is displayed overlapping with the effect display. In (f) of FIG. 132, the lower counter full error notification image is displayed overlapping with the character string image of “Dead fight”. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower tray full error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 132 (g) continued from FIG. 132 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, a swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoment 2-decorate 3-decorate 2" which is an out-of-pattern pattern is swung up and down. At this time, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged. Therefore, the lower plate full error is eliminated, and the lower plate full error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 132 (h) continuing from FIG. 132 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display has been started. The wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display.

  FIG. 132 (i) continuing from FIG. 132 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 132 (i), the lower plate 128 is filled with winning balls, and a lower plate error occurs. At the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower tray full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a sphere" in black character color is displayed. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pattern of the first wipe display displayed in the special-pattern changing game in which the main character and the enemy are presented with a confrontation effect is a pattern including an image of the main character's face. As shown in FIG. 132 (i), the pattern of wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the face of the main character, and the pattern of wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the main characters included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main characters lost in the battle with the enemy shown in FIG. 132 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to help the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 132 (j) following FIG. 132 (i) shows a state in which withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. A decorative symbol is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this time, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged. Therefore, the lower plate full error is eliminated, and the lower plate full error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 132 (k) continuing from FIG. 132 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display is ended. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and in the display mode in which "decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2", which is a pattern aspect of the outside, is swayed in the left and right pattern display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  FIG. 132 (l) continuing from FIG. 132 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started again. The wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display.

  FIG. 132 (m) continuing from FIG. 132 (l) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 132 (m), the lower plate 128 is filled with winning balls, and a lower plate error occurs. At the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower tray full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a sphere" in black character color is displayed. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the opportunity button 139, and can perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 132 (m ′) continuing from FIG. 132 (m) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 132 (m '). At the time point shown in FIG. 132 (m ′), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. The start timing of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be simultaneous or one of them may be earlier.

  In FIG. 132 (m ′), the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode during the effective operation period of the chance button 136. There is. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 132 (m '). A plurality of lines illustrated above the chance button 136 is in a state where the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in a predetermined mode Represents The player knows that the operation period of the chance button 136 has been started by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined manner or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state. There are times when you can. In addition, the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving mode (for example, a motion that repeats the moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It may be stopped and displayed outside the effective period.

  In FIG. 132 (n) continuing from FIG. 132 (m '), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 Show the situation. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 132 (n). The button operation waiting display 1 is erased based on the pressing of the chance button 136. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. A decorative symbol is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is resumed. At this time, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged. Therefore, the lower plate full error is eliminated, and the lower plate full error notification image is erased.

  In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, a button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) of the first wipe display The withdrawal display is displayed. In addition, when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, and the chance button 136 may be displayed. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be configured to be displayed even if the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation of. For example, when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation valid period ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 132 (l) to (m '), when the effect image is wiped out by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display is performed preferentially to the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is operated. While the wipe effect display is ended in response to the play, the display allowing the player to expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a big hit notice display, is a display that makes the player expect a big hit. As in this example, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is performed prior to the wipe effect display is the final rather than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed prior to the wipe effect display. It may be configured so that the big hit symbol is easily decided and displayed, or the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is performed prior to the wipe effect display may be determined as a big hit, or more than the wipe effect display Also, it may be configured such that the symbol variation display on which the button operation waiting display has been preferentially performed may be deviated. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed prior to the wipe effect display may be determined as a lost decision. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display may be a first wipe effect display or a second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 132 (o) continuing from FIG. 132 (n) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display is ended.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 132 (o), after the end of the first wipe effect display, the display of a moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started. At the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "due" is displayed.

  FIG. 132 (p) continuing from FIG. 132 (o) shows a state in which a display indicating a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character beats the enemy is displayed as a display indicating a big hit. In the display mode, "decorative 2" is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2", which is a big hit design, swings up and down in the left middle right design display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 132 (q) following FIG. 132 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect has ended. A display mode in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208d becomes a normal size at the center of the display screen and the "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2" which is a big hit design aspect swings left and right with the end of the super reach effect. The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 132 (r) continuing from FIG. 132 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is ended. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the judgment result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit ing.

In the present embodiment, the first wipe effect display is executed twice during the execution of one special figure change game, and the button operation waiting display is displayed in the second wipe effect display. Note that the button operation waiting display may be displayed in the first wipe effect display, or the button operation waiting display may be displayed in the first and second wipe effect displays. The effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 94 may be performed while the wipe effect display is being performed.
(Example 11)

  A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 shows an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 133, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 65, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is the power support state. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 133 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 133, the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not shown.

  FIG. 133 (b) continuing from FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 change game is started based on the fact that the suspension of the special figure 2 is taken first.

  FIG. 133 (c) continuing from FIG. 133 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 133 (c) onward. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is easily displayed more clearly than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 133 (d) continuing from FIG. 133 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the moving image of the scene where the main character and the enemy character confront each other It shows a state where an effect of displaying an image is started. When the success or failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a character string image of "due" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as a left symbol is displayed, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 133 (e) continuing from FIG. 133 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character image of the "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode.

  FIG. 133 (f) continuing from FIG. 133 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating removal during super-reach presentation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display that suggests detachment. Below the display screen, a tutorial display of a string image of “Sorry! The sword master wins!” Is displayed, and it is explained that the enemy character who is the sword master has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests removal.

  FIG. 133 (g) continued from FIG. 133 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, a swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoment 2-decorate 3-decorate 2" which is an out-of-pattern pattern is swung up and down.

  FIG. 133 (h) continuing from FIG. 133 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display has been started. The wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display.

  FIG. 133 (i) continuing from FIG. 133 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  The pattern of the first wipe display displayed in the special-pattern changing game in which the main character and the enemy are presented with a confrontation effect is a pattern including an image of the main character's face. As shown in FIG. 133 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the face of the main character, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the main characters included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main characters lost in the battle with the enemy shown in FIG. 133 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to forgetting from the player the effect of losing the duel.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 133 (i), the lower plate 128 is filled with winning balls, and a lower plate error occurs. At the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower tray full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a sphere" in black character color is displayed. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the opportunity button 139, and can perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  Fig. 133 (i ') continued from Fig. 133 (i) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIGS. 133 (i ′) to 133 (j). In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles and a chance button emission image, which is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and which overlooks the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light The button pressing instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. The button operation waiting display 3 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In FIG. 133 (i '), the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3 Represents the state of When the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state), the player can know that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. There are times when you can know.

  133 (i ′) continued from FIG. 133 (i ′) is a button response in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 while displaying the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 133 (i ′). The beginning of display 4 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) shows a state in which the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The character string image of "corresponds. The button response display 4 is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In the present example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 133 (i ′ ′ ′) continued from FIG. 133 (i ′ ′) shows a state in which the middle part of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of this example, after displaying the character string image of “More chance !!”, the machine button image with the machine button 139 turned over is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the state displayed on.

  Fig. 133 (i "") continued from Fig. 133 (i '") shows a state in which the end of the button response display 4 is displayed. In Fig. 133 (i" "), the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Stop the machine button image displayed at the center of the display area so as to frame in from the right end of the area, delete the "More chance!" Image, and press the button for pressing three inverted triangles. A state in which an image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed, thereby notifying that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. The opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. The stop display of the chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the chance button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 133 (i ""), the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. Represents the The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the fact that the opportunity button lamp 141 incorporated in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) There is a case. Note that the machine button image and the button pressing instruction image move (for example, repeat movement display in the vertical and horizontal directions) during the operation valid period of the machine button 139 are displayed, and the operation valid period of the machine button 139 It may be stopped and displayed outside.

  In FIG. 133 (j) continuing from FIG. 133 (i ""), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the player pressing the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the chance button 139. It shows the condition that has been The opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are deleted based on the fact that the opportunity button 139 is pressed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. A decorative symbol is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is resumed. At this time, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged. Therefore, the lower plate full error is eliminated, and the lower plate full error notification image is erased.

  In this example, when the player presses the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the button response display 5 (display performed in response to the depression of the opportunity button 139) is displayed on the first wipe display. The withdrawal display is displayed. In addition, when the operation of the opportunity button 139 is not performed during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, or the opportunity button 139 may be displayed. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be configured to be displayed even when the operation of the opportunity button 139 is not performed during the operation valid period of. For example, when the operation of the opportunity button 139 is not performed during the operation valid period of the chance button 139, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the end of the operation valid period.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (h) to (i ""), when the effect image is wiped out by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display or the button response display is performed preferentially to the wipe effect display, and the chance is displayed. In response to the button 136 being operated, the wipe effect display is ended, and a display for making the player expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a big hit notice display, is a display that makes the player expect a big hit. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display and the button response display are given priority over the wipe effect display as in this example is the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not given prior to the wipe effect display Rather, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed in a definite manner, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is performed prior to the wipe effect display is given as a big hit confirmation Alternatively, it may be configured such that the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is performed may be given priority over the wipe effect display. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is not performed prior to the wipe effect display may be determined as a lost decision. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display and the button response display may be a first wipe effect display or a second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 133 (k) continuing from FIG. 133 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display is ended.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 133 (k), after the end of the first wipe effect display, the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started. At the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of "due" is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (l) continuing from FIG. 133 (k) shows a state in which a display indicating a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character beats the enemy is displayed as a display indicating a big hit. In the display mode, "decorative 2" is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2", which is a big hit design, swings up and down in the left middle right design display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (m) continuing from FIG. 133 (l) shows a state in which the super reach effect is finished. A display mode in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208d becomes a normal size at the center of the display screen and the "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2" which is a big hit design aspect swings left and right with the end of the super reach effect. The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (n) continuing from FIG. 133 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variation game is ended. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the judgment result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit ing.

In this embodiment, as described above, the effects of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 107 may be performed while the wipe effect display is being performed. Of course, the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 94 may be executed while the wipe effect display is being performed. During the execution of the wipe effect display, effects associated with the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 shown in FIGS. 94 to 122 may be performed. At this time, a button operation waiting display and a button response display are displayed overlapping with the first wipe display and the second wipe display. The symbol variation display in which the first wipe display and the second wipe display overlap and the button operation waiting display and the button response display are displayed is overlapped with the button operation waiting display and the button response display. It may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the first wipe display or the second wipe display is displayed rather than the symbol variation display on which the effect display is executed. A symbol variation display in which a button operation waiting display or a button response display is performed overlapping with the wipe display of the second wipe display or the second wipe display may be determined as a big hit. In addition, even if it is configured to overlap with the button operation waiting display or the button response display, the symbol variation display on which the effect display in which the first wipe display or the second wipe display can be displayed may be deviated. It is good, and it is good also as release decision. In addition, the effects of the wipe effect display and the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 94 can be executed even in the power support state and the non-power support state.
(Example 12)

  A pachinko machine 100 according to a twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 shows an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 134, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 65, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is the power support state. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is out. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 134 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, for example, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 134, the illustration of the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 134 (b) continuing from FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 change game is started based on the fact that the suspension of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 134 (c) continuing from FIG. 134 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Super reach presentation is started from FIG. 134 (c) onward. The symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured such that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol change display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 134 (d) continuing from FIG. 134 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the moving image of the scene where the main character and the enemy character confront each other It shows a state where an effect of displaying an image is started. When the success or failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a character string image of "due" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. On the front side of the character string image, "decoration 2" as a left symbol is displayed, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 134 (e) continuing from FIG. 134 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character image of the "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduction display mode.

  FIG. 134 (f) continuing from FIG. 134 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating removal during super-reach presentation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display that suggests detachment. Below the display screen, a tutorial display of a string image of “Sorry! The sword master wins!” Is displayed, and it is explained that the enemy character who is the sword master has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests removal.

  FIG. 134 (g) continuing from FIG. 134 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, a swing variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoment 2-decorate 3-decorate 2" which is an out-of-pattern pattern is swung up and down.

  FIG. 134 (h) continuing from FIG. 134 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display has been started. The wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to be the start of the appearance display of the first wipe display, and to be the start of the first wipe effect display with the appearance of the first wipe display.

  FIG. 134 (i) continuing from FIG. 134 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. Appearance of the First Wipe Display When the display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 134 (i), the lower plate 128 is filled with winning balls, and a lower plate error occurs. At the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower tray full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of "draw a sphere" in black character color is displayed. The lower tray full error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pattern of the first wipe display displayed in the special-pattern changing game in which the main character and the enemy are presented with a confrontation effect is a pattern including an image of the main character's face. As shown in FIG. 134 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the face of the main character, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the main characters included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main characters lost in the battle with the enemy shown in FIG. 134 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to forgetting from the player the effect of losing the duel.

  FIG. 134 (j) following FIG. 134 (i) shows a state in which the island simultaneous rendering has been started. In the island simultaneous rendering, the same type of pachinko machine 100 performs the same rendering at the same timing. At the start of island simultaneous rendering, a character string image of “island simultaneous rendering start!” Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the island simultaneous rendering of this example, a rendering in which a character image of a princess is displayed is executed. When island simultaneous rendering is started, wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the error display such as the lower plate full error notification image is displayed overlapping the character image of the princess displayed in the island simultaneous rendering, and is displayed in preference to the image displayed in the island simultaneous rendering .

  FIG. 134 (k) continuing from FIG. 134 (i) shows a state in which withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started during execution of the island simultaneous rendering. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right. A decorative symbol is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. During the execution of the island simultaneous rendering, a character string image of "in island simultaneous rendering" is displayed. The lower tray full error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 134 (l) continuing from FIG. 134 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation game is ended after the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. "Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 variation game is out. ing.

  In the present embodiment, simultaneous production of islands is started during execution of the wipe effect display. While the island simultaneous rendering is being performed, the effect display displayed before the island simultaneous rendering is started, such as the wipe effect display, the reach effect display, the display of the decorative symbol, etc., is reduced to the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is displayed. The error display such as the lower bowl full error notification image or the like is displayed while maintaining the display position, display size, and display mode from before the start of the island simultaneous rendering even while the island simultaneous rendering is being performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute island simultaneous rendering. The pachinko machine 100 includes a light emitting means (for example, various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 40, a game board lamp 532 and a game stand frame lamp 542), a transmission area (for example, a transparent plate member 118), and a display means (for example, When the player is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208) and is allowed to receive a brightness setting operation (hereinafter referred to as "first brightness setting operation") by the player, and the first effect is performed. The brightness corresponding to the first brightness setting operation (for example, the brightness of “medium (duty ratio 70%) set by the brightness setting operation by the player. In addition, the brightness is set by the brightness setting operation by the player. If not, the light emitting means can emit light with "brightness (duty ratio 100%)" initially set in the game table, and the second effect is being performed, Ichiteru The light emitting means emits light at a luminance not corresponding to the setting operation (for example, "brightness (duty ratio 100%)" initially set in the game console), and the first effect is that all the island effects are produced. Not the reach effect, the second effect means the island simultaneous effect, the light emitting means is a means provided above the transparent area, and the game console is The island simultaneous rendering can be performed independently, and the display regarding the luminance of the light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as "luminance setting display") is displayed on the display means even if the second effect is performed. It can be displayed, and the luminance setting display is a display showing the luminance according to the first luminance setting operation, and according to the first luminance setting operation even if the second effect is performed. The brightness setting display is displayed. When the second effect is not performed, the light emitting means can emit light at a brightness corresponding to the first brightness setting operation. The “brightness not in response to the first brightness setting operation” described above refers to the maximum value of the brightness that can be set by the first brightness setting operation, and the “first brightness in the above description” The luminance not corresponding to the setting operation is the luminance that is initially set. When the second effect is finished, the light emitting means may be able to emit light at a brightness corresponding to the first brightness setting operation. The reach effect is an effect that may be performed when the simultaneous island effect is not being performed. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to provide sharpening of the effect during execution of the island simultaneous rendering and during non-execution of the island simultaneous rendering.

Next, characteristic features of the game console according to the fifth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 134 again.
(I1)

Effect display means capable of executing effect display (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 1030)
A game console equipped with

  The effect display means is a display means capable of executing symbol fluctuation display (for example, fluctuation display of a decorative symbol),

  The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects (for example, normal reach effect and super reach effect),

  The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means,

  One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  One of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030),

  One reach effect of the plurality of types of reach effects is the first reach effect (for example, normal reach effect),

  One of the multiple reach effects is a second reach effect (for example, a super reach effect),

  The symbol variation display in which the second reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily determined display than the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect is performed,

  It is possible to perform the first wipe effect display (for example, the wipe display w1a, the wipe display w1b) in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is performed in the second reach effect. Yes,

It is possible to perform a second wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w2a, wipe display w2b) on the second image display means after the display indicating the shift is performed in the second reach effect. is there,
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display may be able to refresh the mood of the player who has shifted in the symbol variation display.
(I2)

  It is the gaming machine described in the above (I1),

  The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe off the image in the first image display means,

The second wipe effect display is configured to wipe off the image in the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by
(I3)

  The gaming machine according to (I1) or (I2) above,

The prefetch notice is configured to be performed by at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display (for example, see FIG. 125).
A game stand characterized by
(I4)

  The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I3) above,

The image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) constituting the first image display means and the image display means (for example the sub display device 1030) constituting the second image display means are different,
A game stand characterized by
(I5)

  It is a game console according to any one of the above (I1) to (I4),

  It is possible to change and display a plurality of kinds of symbols in the second reach effect,

  At least one pattern of the plurality of types of patterns is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is displayed. It is configured to be redisplayed by the end of the display.

  The one symbol is configured to change from a first display mode (for example, a reduction display mode) to a second display mode (for example, a normal display mode),

  The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed,

The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(I6)

  It is a game console according to any one of the above (I1) to (I5),

  The second reach effect is configured to be executable to display a plurality of characters,

  One of the display of the plurality of characters is a display of the first character (for example, a display of a character of Yoshimune),

The display of the first character is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display. .
(I7)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above,

Background display (for example, see FIG. 123) changes before and / or after at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by
(I8)

  The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I7) above,

  It is equipped with a ball storage means (for example, lower plate 128) capable of storing game balls,

  The first image display means can display a display (for example, a bottom plate full error notification image) (hereinafter referred to as "ball out display") notifying that the game ball should be removed from the ball storage means.

  The ball removal display is a display displayed overlapping with the first wipe effect display,

  The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player even while the first wipe effect display is displayed,

The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player even while the second wipe effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(I9)

  The gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above,

  The first wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the first wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 123 (q) to (v)),

  The first wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the first wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 123 (w) to (i)),

  The second wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the second wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 123 (s) to (u)),

The second wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the second wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 123 (x) to (z)).
A game stand characterized by
(I10)

  The gaming machine according to (I9) above,

The first wipe display pattern (for example, the wipe display w1a or w1b shown in FIG. 126) and the second wipe display pattern (for example the wipe display w2a or w2b shown in FIG. 126) are different.
A game stand characterized by
(I11)

  The gaming machine according to (I9) or (I10) above,

The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different (see, for example, FIGS. 123 (q) and (s)).
A game stand characterized by
(I12)

  The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I11) above,

  The second image display means is a means capable of performing a moving operation,

In the second image display means performing the movement operation, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 123 (s) and (t)).
A game stand characterized by
(I13)

  The gaming machine according to any one of the above (I1) to (I12), wherein

  The first image display means is means capable of performing a moving operation,

At least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed in the first image display means performing the movement operation.
A game stand characterized by
(I14)

  14. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein

The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

  Here, what has been referred to as a lamp or illumination is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp may be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere to circulate in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The dispensing of the ball may be performed by an electronic display.

  It is possible to combine the matters described in the above detailed description, in particular, the matters described in the embodiments and modifications shown in the second to fifth embodiments.

  Although a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 135 corresponding to “a plurality of reels 2002 which are provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 2004 for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery winning combination) for determining whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of types of winnings are made by lottery. Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of In addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 2008) for performing the game medium payout process for paying out the game medium to be played, the effect means 2010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launcher 2014 for launching a ball in the game area 2012, a winning opening 2016 configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a detection unit 2018 for detecting a sphere entering the winning opening 2016; When the detecting means 2018 detects a ball, a payout means 2020 for paying out the ball, a variable display device 2022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 2024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 2022 And the movable body 2026 which operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 2022 is a symbol when a game ball enters the winning opening and wins And in is stopped and displayed after the change, it is also suitable to the slot machine 2000 ", which is the effect device 2010, such as to produce a game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 136 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 3002, executes lottery based on the bet 3004 and the start 3006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 3008. At the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 3009 is selected, the casino machine 3000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 3010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing a home-use video game console 6000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 4000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 5000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 6000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 7000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 7000 to a home video game console 6000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Supplementary Note 1)

  A game console comprising display means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of displays.

  At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,

  At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,

  The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first display mode,

  The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a third display mode,

  The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a second display mode,

  The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a fourth display mode,

  The first display mode is a display mode different from the third display mode,

  The second display mode is a display mode different from the fourth display mode.

  The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode,

The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,

  At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display,

  The display means can display at least the third display in a fifth display mode,

  The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode,

The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary Note 3)

  It is a game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,

  The change amount from the first display mode to the third display mode is a first change amount,

  The change amount from the second display mode to the fourth display mode is a second change amount,

The first change amount is the same change amount as the second change amount.
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary Note 4)

  It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 3,

  At least a part of the first display displayed in the first display mode is such that the visibility is at least lowered when the display means is in the first state,

The first state is a state in which at least the second display is displayed on the display means in the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary Note 5)

  In the game console according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,

  The first display is a display including at least a first animation display,

  The second display is a display including at least a second animation display,

  The first animation display is at least a different animation display from the second animation display,

  The display means is a display means capable of continuing and displaying at least the first animation display even when the display mode of the first display is switched from the first display mode to the third display mode. Yes,

The display means is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the second animation display even when switching the display mode of the second display from the second display mode to the fourth display mode. is there,
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary Note 6)

  In the game console according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,

  The display means is a display means which does not display the second display in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode,

The display unit is a display unit that does not display the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a1)

  It is a game console provided with image display means,

  The image display means may rotate and display the first image.

When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix a1,

When the rotational display is performed, the second image may not rotate.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a3)
The game console described in Appendix a2,

When the rotation display is performed, the second image is not rotated,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a4)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices a1 to a3.

When the rotation display is performed, an image which has been missed in the image display unit before the rotation display is performed may be displayed on the image display unit by the rotation display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a5)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices a1 to a4,

When the rotation display is performed, the image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display is performed may be overlooked on the image display unit by the rotation display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a6)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a5, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a7)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a5, wherein

The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b1)
A movable body for presentation,
An image display means,
A game console equipped with

  When the movable body for effect is operated in front of the image display means, there may be a first state in which the first image is displayed at the first position,

  The first position is a position behind the effect movable body in the image display means,

  The first image is an effect image,

  When moving the effect movable body in front of the image display means, there may be a second state in which the first image is displayed at a second position,

The second position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note b1,

  In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,

The third position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b3)

  The gaming machine according to the supplementary note b1 or b2,

  The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,

  The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,

The third size is smaller than the first size,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b4)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,

  In the first state, a second image may be displayed in a first orientation,

  In the second state, the second image may be displayed in a second orientation,

  The first image is an image different from the second image,

The second direction is a direction different from the first direction.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b5)
It is a game console described in Appendix b4,

  The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,

  The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,

The fourth size is smaller than the second size,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b6)

The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b5, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b7)

  The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b5, wherein

The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c1)

  An image display unit capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game;

Driving means for driving the image display unit;
A game console equipped with

  The image display unit may move by the drive of the drive means,

  While the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter referred to as "first period"), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.

The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c2)
The game console described in the appendix c1,

The game console characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the first image.
(Appendix c3)

  The gaming machine according to the appendix c1 or c2, wherein

  During the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction,

  During the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation,

The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c4)
The game console described in appendix c3,

  During the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at a first speed,

  During the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed,

The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c5)

  The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c4, wherein

The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c6)
The game console described in Appendix c5,

During the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c7)

  It is a game console as described in appendix c5 or c6,

A game console characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
(Appendix c8)

  It is a game console as described in appendix c3 or c4,

  The phrase "moves by the drive of the drive means" described in the appendix c1 means "rotates by the drive of the drive means",

  “The first image moves in the first direction” described in the appendix c1 means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.

The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c9)
The game console described in appendix c8,

The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c10)

  The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c7, wherein

  The phrase "moves by the drive of the drive means" described in appendix c1 means "moves linearly by the drive of the drive means",

The phrase “the first image moves in the first direction” described in the appendix c1 means “the first image moves linearly in the first direction”.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d1)

  A game console provided with a first movable body capable of executing a rendering operation for rendering a game,

  The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  The first movable body is configured to move from the second position to the first position when the power is turned off;

  The first movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position when the power is turned on;

  The second position and the first position are different positions,

The rendering operation is configured to start at the second position and end at the second position.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d1,

The first movable body is configured to move to the first position even when the power is turned off with the first movable body positioned at a position different from the second position. Yes,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d3)

  The gaming machine according to the supplementary note d1 or d2, wherein

  The rendering operation includes an operation of moving to a third position,

  The third position and the first position are different positions,

The third position and the second position are different positions,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d3,
Equipped with image display means,

  The first movable body is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means,

The third position is a position on the front side of the image display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d5)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d4,
It is possible to perform a big hit action,

  The first movable body is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means,

  When the first movable body is positioned at the third position, the first movable body may overlap with at least a part of the preview image displayed on the image display unit.

The notice image is a notice image of the big hit.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d6)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d5, wherein

  The first movable body can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,

The phrase “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in Appendix d1 means “the first movable body starts the initial operation from the first position. And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d7)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d5, wherein

  The first movable body can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,

The phrase “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in Appendix d1 means “the first movable body is from the first position to the second position” The game machine is characterized by starting the initial operation after moving to and moving to the second position again at the end of the initial operation.
(Appendix d8)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d7, wherein

  "When the power is turned off" described in Appendix d1 means "when the main power of the game console is turned off",

"When the power is turned on" described in Appendix d1 means "when the main power of the game console is turned on",
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d9)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,

The first movable body is a movable body capable of changing its posture.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d10)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d9, wherein

  It has a second movable body capable of executing a rendering operation for producing a game,

The second movable body is a movable body which starts operation from a position at the time of the power being turned off when the power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d11)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d10, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d12)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d10, wherein

The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e1)

  An image display unit capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game;

Driving means for driving the image display unit;
A game console equipped with

  The image display unit may move by the drive of the drive means,

  While the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter referred to as "first period"), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.

The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix e1,

The game console characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the first image.
(Appendix e3)

  The gaming machine according to the supplementary note e1 or e2,

  During the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction,

  During the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation,

The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e4)
It is a game console described in Appendix e3,

  During the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at a first speed,

  During the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed,

The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e5)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e4, wherein

The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e6)
The game stand described in the appendix e5,

During the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e7)

  The gaming machine according to the supplementary note e5 or e6,

A game console characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
(Appendix e8)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e7, wherein

  The phrase "moves by the drive of the drive means" described in the appendix e1 means "rotates by the drive of the drive means",

  The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in appendix e1 means "the first image rotates in the first direction",

The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e9)

  The gaming machine according to the supplementary note e3 or e4,

The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix e10)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e7, wherein

  The phrase “moves by the drive of the drive means” described in the appendix e1 means “moves linearly by the drive of the drive means”,

The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in appendix e1 means "the first image moves linearly in the first direction",
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix f1)

An effect movable body capable of executing a movable operation for producing a game
A decorative body provided with a window,
A game console equipped with

Behind the decorative body, the effect movable body may perform an action,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix f2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f1,

  The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,

It is possible to make the player visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window portion,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix f3)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f2,

The operation of the effect movable body may change the image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window portion,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix f4)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f3, wherein
The decoration is operable,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix f5)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,

Equipped with symbol display means capable of executing variable display of symbols,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix f6)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f5,

  In the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means, when the player can visually recognize a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window of the ornament by the operation of the ornament. The jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized as a final result of the variable display of the symbol than when the player does not make a part of the image on the effect movable body visible through the window of the decoration. Is configured to be

The part of the image on the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the preview image,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix f7)

  The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f5 or f6,

When it becomes possible for a player to visually recognize a part of the image of the holding icon in the prefetch mode in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body, The hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested and started rather than the case where the player can not visually recognize a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode in the effect movable body through the window. As a final result of the variable display of the symbols, the jackpot symbol aspect is configured to be easily displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix f8)

It is a game console according to any one of appendices f1 to f7, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix g1)

  It is a game console provided with image display means,

  The image display means is capable of performing a rotation operation,

  The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a first image.

When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix g2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g1,

  The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image,

When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix g3)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g2,

When the rotation operation is performed, the second image is not rotated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix g4)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g3,

When the rotation operation is performed, an image which has been missed in the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed may be displayed on the image display unit by the rotation operation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix g5)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g4,

When the rotation operation is performed, an image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed may be missed in the image display unit by the rotation operation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix g6)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix g7)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5, wherein

The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h1)

Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
An image display means capable of displaying an image;

  First operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;

Second operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation waiting display;

  The third type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for the operation of the first operation means,

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display,

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display,

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display,

  The third type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means,

  The third type of operation response display is a display configured without including a part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means,

  The fourth type operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means,

  The fourth type operation response display is a display configured to include the part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means,

  The fifth type operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means,

The method of the symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without the fifth type of operation response display being performed But, it is easy to be displayed a big hit design,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h2)
It is a game stand described in appendix h1,

  Any one of the third type of operation response display and the fourth type of operation response display in response to the operation of the first operation means during the display of the third operation waiting display It is decided before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means whether the display of the second display is displayed,

The third operation waiting display is one operation waiting display of the third type of operation waiting display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h3)

  The gaming machine according to the supplementary note h1 or h2,

  The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display,

  The fourth type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for the operation of the first operation means,

  The fourth type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the fourth type operation waiting display is being displayed. ,

The pattern variation display in which the fourth type operation waiting display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type operation waiting display is performed without the fourth type operation waiting display being performed But, it is easy to be displayed a big hit design,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h4)
It is a game console described in Appendix h3,

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation waiting display,

  The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation response display,

  The first type of operation waiting display is a display that is performed when waiting for the operation of the first operation means,

  The first type of operation response display is a display configured without including the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means,

  The first type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the first type operation waiting display is being displayed. ,

  The first operation response display is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated while the first operation waiting display is displayed,

  The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated while the fourth operation waiting display is displayed,

  The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even when the first operation means is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display,

  The first operation waiting display is one operation waiting display of the first type of operation waiting display,

  The first operation response display is one operation response display of the first type operation response display,

  The fourth operation waiting display is one operation waiting display of the fourth type of operation waiting display,

The fourth operation response display is one of the operation response display of the fourth type operation response display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h5)
It is a game console described in appendix h4,

The method of the symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed without the fifth type of operation response display being performed But, it is easy to be displayed a big hit design,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h6)

  It is a game console described in the remarks h4 or h5,

The method of the symbol variation display in which the first type operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type operation response display is performed without the first type operation response display being performed But, it is easy to be displayed a big hit design,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h7)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h6,

  The fourth type operation response display is the first type when the time from the display of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means is the first time. Is a display,

  The fourth type operation response display when the time until the first operation means is operated after the display of the third type operation waiting display is the second time is the second Is a display,

  The second time is a time longer than the first time,

  The indication of the opening of the first indication and the indication of the opening of the second indication are identical,

  The last display of the first display and the last display of the second display are the same,

At least a portion of the display in the middle of the first display is not displayed in the second display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h8)
It is a game console described in appendix h7,

  When the first operation means is operated between the display of the operation waiting display of the third type and the end of the operation effective period set before the start of the operation waiting display of the third type A display corresponding to the operation of the first operation means is configured to be performed;

  The first time is the time from when the third type of operation waiting display is started to when the first operation means is operated at the shortest timing,

The second time is a time when the first operation means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period since the start of the operation waiting display of the third type. A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h9)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h8,

  The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display,

  The second type of operation waiting display is a display that is performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means,

  The second type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the second operation means is operated while the second type operation waiting display is being displayed. ,

The method of the symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the second type of operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type of operation response display But, it is easy to be displayed a big hit design,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h10)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h9,

The display of the character displayed on the fourth type operation response display is configured to be displayed also on the fourth type operation waiting display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h11)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h10,

The display of the character displayed on the fourth type operation response display is configured to be displayed also on the third type operation waiting display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h12)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h11,

The second operation means is configured to be determined to be operated when pressed by a player.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix h13)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h12,

The first operation means is configured to be determined to be operated when being rotated by the player.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i1)
It is a game console provided with effect display means capable of executing effect display,

  The effect display means is a display means capable of executing symbol variation display,

  The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects,

  The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means,

  One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,

  One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,

  One of the multiple reach effects is a first reach effect,

  One of the multiple reach effects is a second reach effect,

  The symbol variation display in which the second reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is more easily determined display than the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect is performed,

  After the display indicating the deviation is performed in the second reach effect, it is possible to perform the first wipe effect display in the first image display means,

It is possible to perform the second wipe effect display in the second image display means after the display indicating the shift is performed in the second reach effect,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i2)
It is a game stand described in appendix i1,

  The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe off the image in the first image display means,

The second wipe effect display is configured to wipe off the image in the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i3)

  The gaming machine according to the supplementary note i1 or i2, wherein

The preview notice is configured to be performed by at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i4)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices i1 to i3,

The image display means constituting the first image display means and the image display means constituting the second image display means are different,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i5)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices i1 to i4,

  It is possible to change and display a plurality of kinds of symbols in the second reach effect,

  At least one pattern of the plurality of types of patterns is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is displayed. It is configured to be redisplayed by the end of the display.

  The one symbol is configured to change from the first display mode to the second display mode,

  The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed,

The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i6)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices i1 to i5,

  The second reach effect is configured to be executable to display a plurality of characters,

  One of the display of the plurality of characters is the display of the first character,

The display of the first character is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display. .
(Appendix i7)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices i1 to i6,

The background display changes before and after at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i8)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices i1 to i7, wherein

  Equipped with ball storage means capable of storing gaming balls,

  The first image display means can display a display (hereinafter referred to as "ball out display") notifying that the game ball should be removed from the ball storage means,

  The ball removal display is a display displayed overlapping with the first wipe effect display,

  The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player even while the first wipe effect display is displayed,

The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player even while the second wipe effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i9)

  It is a game console according to any one of appendices i1 to i8,

  The first wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the first wipe display,

  The first wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the first wipe display,

  The second wipe effect indication includes an appearance indication of the second wipe indication,

The second wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the second wipe display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i10)
It is a game console described in appendix i9,

The pattern of the first wipe display and the pattern of the second wipe display are different,
A game stand characterized by
(Supplementary note i11)

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note i9 or i10,

The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i12)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices i1 to i11, wherein

  The second image display means is a means capable of performing a moving operation,

In the second image display means performing the movement operation, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i13)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices i1 to i12, wherein

  The first image display means is means capable of performing a moving operation,

At least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed in the first image display means performing the movement operation.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix i14)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices i1 to i13, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

  Further, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and The stop button for stopping the rotation of the reels individually corresponding to the reels, the lottery means for judging whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is made by lottery, and the reels based on the lottery results of the lottery means The symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the internally winning combination Payout control for performing game medium payout processing for paying out a game medium corresponding to a predetermined prize mode when the determination means for determining whether or not the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode Stage and also suitable for such as a slot machine with.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed type game machine" is used to circulate and use the game balls enclosed in the game machine. That is, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine in which a sphere is enclosed and the enclosed sphere is circulated in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The payout of the ball may be made by credit. In the case of such an enclosed type game machine, the position of the launch device 110 is on the upper left side of the game board 200 (see FIG. 3).

  Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured in one chip, or even if the main control unit and the first sub-control unit allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bi-directional communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, the scope of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to the other configuration.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine typified by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed type game machine or a medalless slot machine. it can.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 120 Speaker 156 Main control board 160 1st secondary control board 170 Discharge control board 182 Power supply board 208 Decorative symbol display device 212 1st special view display device 214 2nd special view display device 230 1st Special figure starting port 232 Second special figure starting port 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
600 payout control unit 708 RAM

Claims (11)

A launcher capable of launching a game ball;
A game area where game balls can roll,
A game board provided with the game area;
Display means,
Production means provided with a buttock,
With the decoration body,
A game console equipped with
The game ball fired from the firing means is configured to enter the game area from the entry section,
The effect means is a means provided on the game board,
The effect means is a means provided with a base plate,
The base plate is fixed to the surface of the game board,
The bedplate is provided with a first structure,
It is comprised so that a game ball can not approach into the interior space enclosed by the side wall of the said 1st structure,
When the launch strength of the launch means is the first launch strength, the game ball entering from the entry section is configured to contact the side wall before contacting the buttocks,
The decorative body is a separate body from the first structure,
At least a part of the decorative body (hereinafter, referred to as "first portion") is configured to be located in the internal space,
At least a part of the decorative body is configured to be viewed by the player through at least a part of the first structure;
The display means can execute a big hit notice display,
At least a portion of the jackpot notice may be displayed behind the first structure,
The game ball entering from the entry section is configured to be able to contact the side wall after contacting another structure.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
At least some aspects of the decorative body, towards the symbol variation display became visible from the player shows through at least a portion of said first structure, at least some aspects of the decorative body, It is configured that final confirmation display of the jackpot symbol aspect is more easily performed than the symbol variation display which is not visible to the player through at least a part of the first structure .
A game stand characterized by It is a game board according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The decorative body is a first effect body provided in the effect means .
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein
A notice may be given depending on the display mode of the first effect body ,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to claim 3 or claim 4, wherein
An error display may be performed depending on the display mode of the first effect body,
A game stand characterized by A game machine according to any one of claims 3 to 5,
The first effect body is provided with a light emitter,
A game stand characterized by A game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The gaming board is provided with a second structure,
It is comprised so that a game ball can not enter into the interior space enclosed by the side wall of said 2nd structure,
The second structure is in a position where the gaming ball coming in from the entry portion comes in contact with the first structure before the firing strength of the launching means is the second firing strength. Provided
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 7 , and
A portion of the first structure is permeable,
A portion of the second structure is permeable,
A game stand characterized by A game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
When the launch strength of the launch means is a first launch strength, the game ball entering from the entry section is configured to contact another structure before contacting the first structure. Yes,
A game stand characterized by A game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The first structure is configured to include a lateral wall.
A game stand characterized by It is a game board according to any one of claims 1 to 9 ,
The first structure is configured to include a lateral wall,
The inner surface of the side wall of the first structure is a surface not provided with a protrusion protruding from the inner surface toward the inner space except for the lateral wall.
A game stand characterized by